WO2025103267A1 - Display module control method, display module control device and near-eye display device - Google Patents

Display module control method, display module control device and near-eye display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025103267A1
WO2025103267A1 PCT/CN2024/131310 CN2024131310W WO2025103267A1 WO 2025103267 A1 WO2025103267 A1 WO 2025103267A1 CN 2024131310 W CN2024131310 W CN 2024131310W WO 2025103267 A1 WO2025103267 A1 WO 2025103267A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
display module
lens
preset
target
logical function
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2024/131310
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
郑雄雄
邱实文
贾捷阳
邓旭东
陈小莎
翟英男
陈延志
肖业卫
叶灿
吕正
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Gyges Labs Pte Ltd
Original Assignee
Gyges Labs Pte Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202311548069.3A external-priority patent/CN120294978A/en
Priority claimed from CN202311580966.2A external-priority patent/CN120065519A/en
Priority claimed from CN202311733535.5A external-priority patent/CN120196200A/en
Priority claimed from CN202311867956.7A external-priority patent/CN120276154A/en
Priority claimed from CN202311868066.8A external-priority patent/CN120276155A/en
Priority claimed from CN202420119731.7U external-priority patent/CN222232785U/en
Priority claimed from CN202410544067.5A external-priority patent/CN120908999A/en
Application filed by Gyges Labs Pte Ltd filed Critical Gyges Labs Pte Ltd
Publication of WO2025103267A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025103267A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/01Head-up displays

Definitions

  • the present application belongs to the field of near-eye display technology, and more specifically, to a display module control method, a display module control device, and a near-eye display device.
  • Near-eye display refers to imaging at a shorter imaging distance from the eyes for sensory perception.
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • near-eye display is a relative concept, relative to traditional televisions, monitors, etc.
  • the imaging distance from the display panel of televisions, monitors and other devices to the eyes is usually much greater than the imaging distance of near-eye display devices such as VR glasses or AR glasses.
  • near-eye display can generally be divided into VR, AR, mixed reality (MR) and extended reality (XR).
  • VR mixed reality
  • MR mixed reality
  • XR extended reality
  • VR also known as computer-simulated reality
  • VR is an experience created through human-computer interaction and computer-generated three-dimensional simulation. We can interact in the environment by using virtual reality equipment, such as headphones and controllers.
  • VR is a computer simulation system that can create and experience a virtual world. It uses computers to generate a simulated environment and immerse us in it.
  • AR is a real-time, direct or indirect observation of the physical environment of the real world. It combines what we see in the real environment with digital content generated by computer software to enhance the real environment we are in in some way.
  • the AR system transmits virtual information to headphones or smart glasses or mobile devices in real time through the camera, allowing us to clearly view 3D images.
  • MR is the fusion of the real world and the virtual world to produce new environments and visualizations, in which physical objects and digital objects coexist and interact in real time. This means that if a new image is placed in the real space, to a certain extent, this new image will interact with the real objects in our real environment.
  • XR refers to the combination of all real and virtual environments and human-computer interactions generated by computer technology and wearable devices. XR integrates the world by digitally enhancing our senses. In addition, it provides a large number of different levels of virtual sensor input for immersive virtual experience. XR includes the three emerging technologies mentioned above, namely VR, AR and MR.
  • the purpose of the embodiments of the present application is to provide a control method for a display module, an electronic device, a near-eye display device, a medium, a chip, and a computer program product, so as to independently or semi-independently solve the technical problem that users cannot quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology to a certain extent.
  • the independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can work independently without the cooperation of software, so as to achieve the effect that users can quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology.
  • the semi-independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can achieve the effect that users can quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology when working in conjunction with near-eye display, such as software for users to interact with virtual information.
  • a first aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a method for controlling a display module, wherein the display module is used to be connected to an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content, the method comprising:
  • the display module When the target motion state is detected, the display module is controlled to form a graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.
  • a second aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a control device for a display module, wherein the display module is used to be connected to a lens of glasses and to form an image on the connected lens, and the device comprises:
  • a first monitoring module used for monitoring the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected
  • the first execution module is used to control the display module to image a graphical interface of a target logic function on the lens when a target motion state is detected; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.
  • a third aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a near-eye display device, the near-eye display device comprising: a processor and a memory, the memory storing a program or instruction that can be run on the processor, the program or instruction being executed by the processor to implement a method for controlling a display module, the method comprising:
  • the display module When the target motion state is detected, the display module is controlled to form a graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.
  • the display module used for augmented reality display imaging on the lens of the glasses can make some movements on the lens to which it is connected, instead of fixing the display module on the lens, and the motion states of some movements that the display module can make are preset as triggering conditions for triggering some logical functions.
  • the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of the triggered logical function on the lens to which it is connected.
  • the user can control the display module to make a movement on the lens to which it is connected that can trigger the logical function to be triggered, thereby triggering the logical function to be triggered to start running, and then controlling the display module to image a graphical interface of the triggered logical function on the lens to which it is connected, so that the user can quickly interact with the virtual information presented by the display module.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a connection between a display module and a lens provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • 2-3 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a connection relationship between a display module and a smart terminal provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a display module imaging main interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 7-14 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG15 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG16 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG17 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG18 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device for a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG19 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG20 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a near-eye display device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 22-23 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG24 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 25-30 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG31 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 32-33 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 34-39 are schematic diagrams of the step flow of each control method of the display module provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG40 is a schematic diagram of a display module imaging main interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG41 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 42-48 are schematic diagrams of different application scenarios of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG49 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the glasses of the present application.
  • FIG50 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of a near-eye display module of the present application.
  • FIG51 is an exploded view of FIG50
  • FIG52 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of an assembled state of the first connecting portion and the mounting seat in FIG50;
  • FIG53 is a top view of FIG50
  • Fig. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Fig. 53;
  • FIG55 is a schematic structural diagram of a first cover body in an example of the present application.
  • FIG56 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the second cover body in an example of the present application.
  • FIG57 is a schematic structural diagram of another example of a near-eye display module of the present application.
  • FIG58 is a partial exploded view of FIG57
  • FIG60 is a schematic structural diagram of an optical module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG61 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG62 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the profiles of various relevant surfaces of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG63 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an optical module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG64 is a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional structure of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG65 is a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional structure of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG66 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG67 is a schematic structural diagram of an optical module with an optical path according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG68 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG69 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module with an optical path provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG70 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG71 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG72 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG73 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an optical module provided by an embodiment of the present application in an application scenario of an eyeball;
  • FIG74 is a schematic diagram of a process flow of an optical module processing method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG75 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a near-eye display device of the present application.
  • FIG76 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a near-eye display device of the present application without temples;
  • FIG77 is a schematic diagram of the embodiment of FIG75 from another viewing angle
  • FIG78 is a schematic diagram showing the overall structure of a plurality of display modules and a plurality of first coils
  • FIG79 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a structure of an embodiment of a display module provided with a coil support
  • FIG80 is a schematic diagram showing that the display module is provided with a second battery in the embodiment of FIG79;
  • FIG81 is a schematic diagram of the structural disassembly of the display module in the embodiment of FIG79;
  • FIG82 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the structure of another embodiment of a display module.
  • FIG83 is a schematic diagram showing that the display module is provided with a second battery in the embodiment of FIG82;
  • FIG84 is a schematic diagram of the structural disassembly of the display module in the embodiment of FIG83;
  • FIG85 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a charging box of the present application.
  • FIG86 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a near-eye display device provided by the present application.
  • FIG87 is a schematic diagram of the configuration structure of the moving area of a lens according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG88 is a schematic diagram of the configuration structure of the moving area of another embodiment of the lens provided by the present application.
  • FIG89 is a schematic diagram of the configuration structure of the moving area of another embodiment of the lens provided by the present application.
  • FIG90 is a schematic diagram of display contents when a display component according to an embodiment of the present application is located in different moving areas;
  • FIG91 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of an embodiment of a display assembly provided by the present application.
  • FIG92 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of an output unit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG93 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of a sensing unit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG94 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of an embodiment of a display assembly provided by the present application.
  • FIG95 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG96 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a method for controlling a near-eye display device provided by the present application.
  • Figure 97 is a structural schematic diagram of an embodiment of a near-eye display system provided in the present application.
  • first and second are used only for descriptive purposes and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated.
  • the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features.
  • the meaning of “multiple” is two or more, unless otherwise clearly and specifically defined.
  • the term “and/or” is used to describe the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist; for example, A and/or B may represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B may be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or” relationship.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a control method, device, equipment, near-eye display device, storage medium, chip and computer program product of a display module, which can effectively solve the technical problem that users cannot quickly interact with virtual information in AR or near-eye display technology.
  • the following is an explanation with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • the technical terms that may be involved in the embodiments of the present application are first defined and explained below. Unless otherwise specified in the following text, the semantics of the corresponding technical terms follow the definitions here:
  • Computer or computing device refers to all electronic devices based on Turing computability theory, von Neumann structure or Harvard structure.
  • Turing computability theory for example, mobile phones, smart watches, single-chip computer systems, etc. are all computers, not just limited to the narrow sense of computers such as personal computers (PC) in daily life.
  • PC personal computers
  • Logical functions refers to various functions provided by various electronic devices such as near-eye display devices (with independent computing capabilities), computers or computing devices. These functions can be user-oriented functions or system (or device)-oriented functions.
  • user-oriented logical functions can be: graphical user interface (GUI) output function, audio output function, main interface or desktop, program/application, sub-functions in program/application, etc. Among them, the main interface or desktop, application, etc. can provide GUI to users for users to interact with.
  • System-oriented logical functions can be: defragmentation of fragmented files, system error diagnosis, etc.
  • Foreground operation and background operation are two relative concepts. Both are used to describe the operation mode of an application/program or process in an operating system (generally speaking, an operating system refers to the software in a computer that enables the application to communicate with the underlying hardware of the computer).
  • an operating system refers to the software in a computer that enables the application to communicate with the underlying hardware of the computer.
  • the following uses a traditional computer as an example to explain foreground operation and background operation.
  • AR technology foreground operation and background operation are two different concepts. The characteristics of running in the foreground and in the background are similar to those of running in a traditional computer.
  • the GUI of the application is usually displayed on the display screen, and the user can see the GUI or window of the application.
  • the user can directly interact or communicate with the application based on the GUI.
  • the application usually occupies the input device (such as the mouse and keyboard); the application running in the foreground usually blocks the user interface, and the user needs to wait for the application running in the foreground to complete execution or interact according to the needs of the application running in the foreground; it is suitable for tasks that require real-time user feedback or user input.
  • the GUI is usually not output on the display screen, that is, it is invisible to the user, and the user usually cannot directly interact or communicate with the application;
  • the application when the application is running in the background, the user can continue to use the computer to perform other tasks, and the application runs silently in a state invisible to the user, such as processing files, executing system services, etc.;
  • the application running in the background usually does not occupy the input device, and does not require the user to directly participate in the execution of the task; allowing the user to continue other tasks while the application is executing, improving the multitasking capability of the system.
  • Display module refers to a display component, display device or display equipment based on optical imaging technology. Therefore, the display module is a physical hardware module.
  • the display module can be connected to the lens and powered on for imaging through the display module.
  • the lens can be, for example, common sunglasses in daily life, glasses for vision correction, goggles or masks with lenses, etc., or lenses of smart glasses with audio, sensing, etc.
  • the display module can be connected to the lens by means of magnetism, clips, etc., so that the display module can move freely on the lens to which it is connected or move in a specified setting area. For example, the display module can move in a straight line or curve, rotate on an axis, etc. on the placed lens.
  • the purpose of the embodiments of the present application is to provide a control method, an electronic device, a near-eye display device, a medium, a chip, and a computer program product of a display module, so as to independently or semi-independently solve the technical problem that users cannot quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology to a certain extent.
  • the independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can work independently without the cooperation of software, so as to achieve the effect that users can quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology.
  • the semi-independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can achieve the effect that users can quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology when working in conjunction with near-eye display, such as software for users to interact with virtual information in AR technology.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a connection between a display module and a lens provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • a lens of glasses is used as an example for explanation of an embodiment, but the present application is not limited to glasses, and may also be lenses on head-mounted devices such as helmets, eye protection, vision correction, sports, etc., wherein the glasses 1 may be ordinary glasses, or may be AR glasses, smart glasses, etc.
  • the glasses 1 include a frame 11, a lens 12 embedded in the frame 11, and temples 13 movably connected to the frame 11.
  • the lens 12 includes an environment side 24 and a glasses side 22. The user's eyes can see the physical environment of the environment side through the lens 12 from the eye side.
  • the display module 2 is provided with a first magnetic member at one end of the lens 12 facing the environment side 24, and the display module 2 is provided with a second magnetic member at the side 22 of the lens 12 facing the eye side 22.
  • first magnetic member and the second magnetic member can be magnets that attract each other, of course, one of them can be a magnet and the other can be a metal that can be attracted by a magnet, etc., so that the display module 2 is adsorbed on the lens 12 as a whole, and the display module 2 can also slide freely on the lens 12 or rotate on the axis without detaching from the lens 12.
  • other solutions such as adsorption and movement are also feasible here.
  • FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application, and FIG. 3 may be a front view of the glasses 1 observed from the direction where the temples 13 of the glasses 1 are located (i.e., the glasses side).
  • FIG. 1, FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 in combination.
  • the direction indicated by the straight arrow a in FIG. 1 is the direction in which the eye observes the virtual image imaged by the display module 2 on the lens 12.
  • the user observes the end face of the display module 2 from the direction indicated by the arrow a he or she can see the virtual image or graphic interface formed on the lens 12 based on the AR technology.
  • the end face of the display module 2 seen when observing the display module 2 from the direction of the arrow a shown in FIG. 1 is the display area 21 of the display module 2.
  • the display area 21 may be in a "lit" state, that is, it can
  • the image content can be formed, for example, it may include text, interactive interface, video, image and other related display content.
  • the area on the lens 12 not occupied by the display module still maintains the properties of the lens 12 itself, for example, the user can see the environment side through the lens 12 through the eye side, such as eye protection, vision correction, etc., which exists as the properties of the lens itself.
  • the center position of the lens 12 is a calibration position, which is a reference position of the display module 2.
  • a main interface or an interface of a preset logical function is imaged on the lens 12.
  • the center position of the lens 12 is determined as the calibration position because the display module 2 can move in more directions and distances in the circumferential direction at the center position, so as to facilitate the user to operate the display module 2 and customize the preset imaging area.
  • the user can press (or pinch) the touch portion of the display module 2 to drag the display module 2 to move on the lens 12 or rotate the display module 2 to make the display module 2 rotate on the axis.
  • the display module 2 can be located on the environment side, and the light of the display area 21 can pass through the lens to the user's eyes on the eye side to form an image.
  • the touch portion can be located on the environment side, so the user can interact better; in other embodiments, the display module 2 can be located on the glasses side, and at this time, the light of the display area 21 can directly enter the user's eyes to form an image.
  • the touch portion can be located on the eye side, so the user can interact better and more covertly.
  • FIG22 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the touch portion of the display module 2 is located on the environment side 24 , and the user can press (or pinch) the touch portion of the display module 2 to drag the display module 2 to move on the lens 12 or rotate the display module 2 to make the display module 2 rotate on the axis.
  • the virtual image or graphic interface formed by the display area 21 of the display module 2 on the lens 12 may come from the display module 2 itself, or the glasses 1 that are connected to the display module 2 in communication. Of course, in other embodiments, it may also come from other electronic devices that are relatively independent of the glasses 1 and the display module 2, such as smart terminals such as mobile phones and tablet computers, or computers. If the glasses 1 are ordinary glasses, the virtual image or graphic interface formed by the display module 2 on the lens 12 may come from other electronic devices that are relatively independent of the glasses 1 and the display module 2, such as smart terminals such as mobile phones and tablet computers, or computers.
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a connection relationship between a display module and a smart terminal provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display module 2 is (physically) connected to a near-eye display device 10, and the near-eye display device 10 may be the aforementioned glasses 1, and the smart terminal 4 may be a PC, a laptop, a smart phone, a tablet computer, a smart speaker, a server, etc., and a wired or wireless communication connection is established between the display module 2 and the smart terminal 4.
  • the display module 2 and the smart terminal 4 communicate based on the Wifi protocol or the BlueTooth protocol; or, the display module 2 and the smart terminal 4 communicate based on the USB transmission protocol with the aid of a USB cable, and the display module 2 also obtains power from the smart terminal 4 with the aid of a USB cable.
  • the display module 2 and the smart terminal 4 can also establish a wired or wireless communication connection based on other communication protocols, such as an NFC communication protocol, a P2P (point-to-point) network, and the like.
  • the display module 2 and the near-eye display device 10 together constitute the “display device” of the smart terminal 4 , and the GUI output by the smart terminal 4 is imaged on the near-eye display device 10 through the display module 2 .
  • a touch sensor or a pressure or capacitance sensor may be provided on the touch portion of the display module 2 to detect whether the touch portion of the display module 2 is touched.
  • a micro camera is also provided on the touch portion of the display module 2 to collect image/video data from the environment.
  • a micro microphone is also provided on the touch portion of the display module 2 to collect ambient sound from the environment.
  • a micro camera is also provided on one side of the display area 21 of the display module 2 to collect eye images of the user wearing the glasses 1 to track the user's eyeballs.
  • Trigger condition refers to the condition preset in advance for triggering the operation or execution of a logic function.
  • certain motion states of the display module are preset as trigger conditions for certain logic functions.
  • the display module is preset to be stationary at a certain set position on the lens to which it is connected as a trigger output main interface function. Then, when the display module is subsequently monitored to be stationary at the set position, the display module will display the imaging main interface on the lens to which it is connected, and the user can observe the display area of the display module to thereby The main interface imaged on the lens can be observed.
  • the set position can be the center of the lens, or the four corners of the frame, etc., which are easier to remember and identify.
  • Preset imaging area refers to an imaging area pre-set for the display module on the lens to which the display module is connected.
  • the preset imaging area may be a regular area on the lens to which the display module is connected, such as a rectangular area, a circular area, or an elliptical area.
  • the preset imaging area may also be an irregular area on the lens to which the display module is connected.
  • the preset imaging area may also be the entire lens area of the lens to which the display module is connected.
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a display module imaging main interface provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the user observes from the side of the temple 13 (please refer to FIG1 and FIG2 ) toward the lens 12 (i.e., the glasses side), and the user can observe the display area 21 of the display module 2, thereby observing the main interface imaged by the display module 2 on the lens 12.
  • the preset imaging area 121 is the entire lens area of the lens 12, and the preset imaging area 121 is divided into a plurality of sub-areas (e.g., 6 sub-areas shown in FIG.
  • an icon (thumbnail) of an application or file mapped in the sub-area is imaged in each sub-area, for example, an icon of application F is imaged in sub-area 1211, and an icon of application E is imaged in sub-area 1212.
  • the icons of applications A-I are imaged in six sub-areas.
  • at least one of the icons A-I may be a file icon (thumbnail) such as a video, picture, audio, or text.
  • the display module 2 when the display module 2 is first connected to the lens 12 and the display module 2 is turned on, the display module 2 images the main interface on the lens 12 by default.
  • the grid lines i.e., the dotted grids on the lens 12
  • the grid lines should not be understood as the main interface imaged by the display module 2 provided in the embodiment of the present application must have grid lines. Obviously, the grid lines are not necessary, that is, there may be no grid lines in the imaged main interface, that is, after the display module 2 is placed on the lens 12, the grid lines cannot be seen on the body of the lens 12, and the lens 12 still maintains the properties of the lens itself.
  • the lens itself adopts a holographic lens such as an optical waveguide, it can be combined with each other for simple prompts, etc.
  • a setting option for the user to choose whether to image the grid lines when imaging the main interface. If the user sets the grid lines to be imaged when imaging the main interface, the display module will image the grid lines while imaging the main interface. If the user sets the grid lines not to be imaged when imaging the main interface, the display module will not image the grid lines when imaging the main interface.
  • the grid lines may also correspond to a graphical interface on a smart terminal (such as a mobile phone app), so that the user can use the graphical interface of the terminal to divide or customize the grid lines of the preset imaging area 121.
  • the line type of the grid lines is not limited to the dotted lines shown in FIG. 5, but may also be solid lines, center lines, etc.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a method for controlling a display module, which is used to be connected to the lenses of glasses and to form an image on the connected lenses.
  • the method for controlling the display module may be performed by at least one of the glasses 1, display module 2, near-eye display device 10 or smart terminal in Figures 1 to 5, which can realize the specific information of the GUI imaged by the display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10) to which it is connected.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the method for controlling the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. Please refer to Figure 6, the method for controlling the display module includes:
  • the lens is the lens on the glasses to which the display module is currently connected, which may be as described in the above embodiment and will not be described again here.
  • an inertial sensor or an acceleration sensor is built into the display module, and such a sensor can be used to collect the instantaneous velocity and acceleration of the display module, thereby determining the motion state of the display module based on the collected instantaneous velocity and acceleration in combination with parameters such as time.
  • the target logical function may be at least one logical function determined from all (user-oriented and system-oriented) logical functions provided by the device or system.
  • the target logic function may be a function of outputting a main interface, a function of outputting a chat interface of a social application, a function of outputting a search interface of a browser, and the like.
  • the motion state of the display module on the lens can be roughly divided into the following two categories: 1.
  • the display module is relatively still on the lens; 2.
  • the display module is in relative motion on the lens.
  • the display module in relative motion on the lens can be roughly divided into two categories: the display module can move on the lens (movement means moving from one point on the lens to another point) or rotate (around its own central axis - in the example shown in Figure 1, it is the axis that coincides with arrow a).
  • the target motion state can be a motion state that can trigger the target logical function that is determined in advance from various possible motion states of the display module.
  • the motion can also include multi-segment motion, that is, a combination of multiple straight lines on the lens, or "pattern-like" motion, such as trajectory-like motion in the shape of broken line segments, L, Z letters, etc.
  • a target logic function whose trigger condition is the target motion state will be triggered. After the target logic function is triggered, it will start to run or execute (if the triggered target logic function is an application that is already running in the background, the target logic function will be switched to the foreground to run). When the target logic function is executed or running, it will correspondingly control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens.
  • the target motion state may be that the display module 2 moves linearly on the lens 12, the display module 2 is stationary at a set position on the lens 12 (the set position is a pre-selected fixed position), or the display module 2 moves along the diagonal line of the lens 12 (assuming that the lens has four corners, the line connecting any two non-adjacent corners is the diagonal line), etc.
  • the display module 2 moves linearly on the lens 12 is preset as a trigger condition for outputting the chat interface of the social application, the display module 2 is stationary at a set position on the lens 12 is preset as a trigger condition for outputting the main interface function, and the display module 2 moves along the diagonal line of the lens 12 on the lens 12 is preset as a trigger condition for outputting the search interface of the browser.
  • the display module 2 when it is detected that the display module 2 makes a linear motion on the lens 12, the display module 2 is controlled to image a chat interface of a social application on the lens 12; when it is detected that the display module 2 is stationary at a set position on the lens 12, the set position may be a well-recognized position such as the center of the lens, or a position defined by the user according to his or her preferences, the display module 2 is controlled to image a main interface on the lens 12 at the set position (please refer to FIG. 5 and related implementation descriptions); when it is detected that the display module 2 moves diagonally on the lens 12, the display module 2 is controlled to image a search interface of a browser on the lens 12.
  • the display module used for augmented reality display imaging on the lens of the glasses can make some movements on the lens to which it is connected, instead of fixing the display module on the lens, and the motion states of some movements that the display module can make are preset as triggering conditions for triggering some logical functions.
  • the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of the triggered logical function on the lens to which it is connected.
  • the user can control the display module to make a movement on the lens to which it is connected that can trigger the logical function to be triggered, thereby triggering the logical function to be triggered to start running, and then controlling the display module to image a graphical interface of the triggered logical function on the lens to which it is connected, so that the user can quickly interact with the virtual information presented by the display module.
  • the target motion state includes: the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition;
  • the target logical function includes: a first logical function; the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the first logical function; step S12, comprising:
  • the display module When it is detected that the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition, the display module is controlled to image a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens.
  • the movement of the display module may be detected by detecting a process in which the instantaneous speed of the display module changes from 0 to a value other than 0 and then changes to 0 again (referred to as the first process, and the first process described hereinafter refers to the process in which the instantaneous speed of the display module changes from 0 to a value other than 0 and then changes to 0 again). If the detected sudden change process of the instantaneous speed satisfies the first preset condition, the display module is controlled to image the first graphical interface of the first logic function on the lens.
  • the first logical function may generally refer to at least one logical function determined from all (user-oriented and system-oriented) logical functions provided by a device or a system.
  • the first logical function may be outputting a main interface, phone dialing, a smart assistant, a music player, a video player, a camera, a photo album, a social application, and the like.
  • the first preset condition may be any one or a combination of the following six conditions 1 to 6:
  • displacement refers to the movement of an object from an initial position to a final position within a period of time
  • directed line segment from the initial position to the final position is the displacement.
  • the length of the directed line segment is the displacement distance
  • the direction of the directed line segment is the displacement direction.
  • the display module when it is detected that ⁇ S ⁇ S_1 of the display module in the first process, the display module is controlled to image a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens.
  • the first logic function is a telephone dialing function.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 7 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and ⁇ S ⁇ S_1 of the display module 2 in the first process, the telephone dialing function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image a dialing interface of the telephone dialing function on the lens 12.
  • the display module when it is detected that ⁇ S ⁇ S_1 of the display module in the first process, and If the directions are the same, the display module is controlled to form a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens.
  • the first logic function is an intelligent assistant function.
  • ⁇ S of the display module 2 ⁇ S_1 and the display module 2 If the directions are the same, the smart assistant function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the (voice or text) command acquisition interface of the smart assistant function on the lens 12.
  • Condition 3 the displacement distance ⁇ S of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length S_1, and the starting point (SP) of the movement is a preset first position (P1), and the first position (P1) is a fixed position selected on the lens;
  • the display module when it is monitored that ⁇ S ⁇ S_1 of the display module in the first process, and at time point t when it is monitored that the instantaneous speed of the display module suddenly changes from 0 to not 0 in the first process, the display module is at position P1, that is, the starting point SP of the movement of the display module in the first process is the position P1 pre-selected on the lens, then the display module is controlled to image the first graphical interface of the first logical function on the lens.
  • the first logic function is a music player function.
  • the music player function is triggered and the display module 2 is controlled to image the music player function on the lens 12.
  • Song playing interface when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and the starting point SP of the movement of the display module 2 in the first process is a position P1 pre-selected on the lens 12 (for example, P1 is the center point on the lens 12), the music player function is triggered and the display module 2 is controlled to image the music player function on the lens 12. Song playing interface.
  • the display module when it is detected that ⁇ S ⁇ S_1 of the display module in the first process, and In the same direction, and in the first process, when it is monitored that the instantaneous speed of the display module changes suddenly from 0 to a time point t that is not 0, the display module is at the position P1, that is, the starting point SP of the movement of the display module in the first process is the position P1 pre-selected on the lens, then the display module is controlled to image the first graphical interface of the first logic function on the lens.
  • the first logic function is a video player function.
  • the music player function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the video playback interface of the video player function on the lens 12.
  • Condition 5 the end point (EP) of the movement is a preset second position (P2), and the second position (P2) is a fixed position selected on the lens;
  • the display module when the instantaneous speed of the display module is monitored to suddenly change from 0 to non-0 and then suddenly change to 0 at time point t in the first process, the display module is at position P2, that is, the end point EP of the movement of the display module in the first process is the position P2 pre-selected on the lens, then the display module is controlled to image the first graphical interface of the first logic function on the lens. That is, no matter how the display module moves on the lens, as long as the display module moves to a certain position P2 pre-selected on the lens, the first logic function will be triggered.
  • the first logic function is a camera function.
  • FIG8 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG8 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and the end point EP of the display module 2 in the first process is at the upper boundary of the lens 12 (or the preset imaging area), the camera function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image a camera function interface on the lens 12.
  • the first logic function is an album function.
  • FIG9 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG9 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and the end point EP of the display module 2 in the first process is at the lower boundary of the lens 12 (or the preset imaging area), the album function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the album function interface on the lens 12.
  • the first logic function is a social application function.
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG10 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and the end point EP of the display module 2 in the first process is at the left boundary of the lens 12 (or the preset imaging area), the social application function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the functional interface of the social application on the lens 12.
  • the first logic function is a navigation function.
  • FIG11 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG11 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12, and the end point EP of the display module 2 in the first process is at the right boundary of the lens 12 (or the preset imaging area), the navigation function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the navigation function interface on the lens 12.
  • the first logic function is the output main interface function.
  • the output main interface function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the output main interface on the lens 12.
  • the display module is controlled to image a first graphical interface of the first logical function on the lens.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12
  • the shape similarity Sim of the moving trajectory l and the preset trajectory l_1 detected in the first process is not less than a preset first threshold ⁇
  • the first logic function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the functional interface of the first logic function on the lens 12.
  • the shape similarity Sim between the trajectory l and the preset trajectory l_1 can be calculated by methods such as Euclidean distance, dynamic time warping, cosine similarity, Pearson correlation coefficient, Manhattan distance, dynamic kernel correlation, and mean absolute error.
  • different first preset conditions may correspond to the same first logical function, or may correspond to different first logical functions.
  • the movement of the display module 2 on the lens 12 that satisfies the above conditions 1 to 6 can be preset as trigger conditions of different logical functions one by one (as described in the above examples).
  • the movement of the display module 2 on the lens 12 that satisfies at least two of the above conditions 1 to 6 can also be preset as trigger conditions of the same logical function.
  • the first preset condition is not limited to the six items listed above. Those skilled in the art can flexibly set the first preset condition according to actual needs.
  • the first preset condition can also be that the display module moves along a preset trajectory on the lens.
  • the first preset condition can be that the aforementioned display module moves along the diagonal of the lens.
  • the target motion state includes: the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens, and the third position is a fixed position selected on the lens;
  • the target logical function includes: a second logical function;
  • the display module is stationary at the third position on the lens and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the second logical function;
  • step S12 includes:
  • the display module In a case where it is detected that the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens, the display module is controlled to image a second graphic interface of the second logical function on the lens.
  • the second logical function may generally refer to at least one logical function determined from all (user-oriented and system-oriented) logical functions provided by the device or system.
  • the second logical function may be different from or the same as the first logical function.
  • the second logical function may be outputting a main interface, phone dialing, a smart assistant, a music player, a video player, a camera, a photo album, a social application, and the like.
  • the third position may be the same as or different from the second position.
  • the third position is a center point on the lens, an upper boundary point of the lens (or a preset imaging area), a lower boundary point of the lens (or a preset imaging area), and the like.
  • the target motion state includes: the display module performs axis rotation; the target logical function includes: a third logical function, and the third logical function is a logical function currently running in the foreground; step S12 includes:
  • the display module When the display module is detected to be rotating, the display module is controlled to display the third image currently formed on the lens.
  • the target area in the graphical interface is updated;
  • the third graphical interface is the graphical interface of the third logical function, and the target area is the graphical area corresponding to the sub-function in the third logical function;
  • the axial rotation of the display module is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function in the third logical function.
  • the third logical function may generally refer to at least one logical function running in the foreground from among all (user-oriented and system-oriented) logical functions provided by the device or system.
  • the third logical function may be outputting a main interface, phone dialing, a smart assistant, a music player, a video player, a camera, a photo album, a social application, and the like.
  • the sub-function in the third logic function may be a page turning function, a scrolling (forward/backward) operation, etc. in the logic function currently running in the foreground.
  • FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display module 2 can be preset to rotate along the counterclockwise axis shown in FIG. 13 as a trigger condition for triggering the main interface to turn up (or down) pages, and the display module 2 can be preset to rotate along the clockwise axis shown in FIG. 14 as a trigger condition for triggering the main interface to turn down (or up) pages.
  • the counterclockwise rotation of the display module 2 as shown in FIG13 can be preset as a trigger condition for triggering a song switch to the previous song (or the next song)
  • the clockwise rotation of the display module 2 as shown in FIG14 can be preset as a trigger condition for triggering a song switch to the next song (or the previous song).
  • controlling the display module to update a target area in a third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens includes:
  • the display module is controlled to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens.
  • the first threshold angle ⁇ can be flexibly set by those skilled in the art or users according to actual needs, for example, it can be 15°, 20°, 25° or 30°.
  • the display module 2 when it is detected that the rotation angle of the display module 2 along the clockwise axis is not less than the first threshold angle ⁇ , the display module 2 is controlled to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens 12. This can avoid the display module 2 being slightly driven to rotate the axis and triggering the sub-function of the third logic function, causing the display module 2 to start updating the third interface imaged on the lens 12. Therefore, the sub-function of the third logic function can be reduced to a certain extent.
  • the third logic function may also be a logic function running in the background.
  • the imaging module in the display module is in standby mode, but the music playback function is always running in the background.
  • the axis rotation of the display module can still be preset as a trigger condition for the song switching operation, so that the user can quickly switch songs, that is, it is convenient for the user to quickly interact with the device.
  • it is not necessary to control the display module to update the graphical interface because the logic function is running in the background and no graphical interface is output).
  • the present application provides a control method for a display module, wherein the display module is used to be connected to the lens of glasses and used to form an image on the connected lens.
  • the control method for the display module may be performed by at least one of the glasses 1, the display module 2, the near-eye display device 10 or the smart terminal in FIG. 1 to FIG. 5, which can realize the control of the display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or the near-eye display device 10) to which it is connected. 10) Specific information of the GUI imaged on the display module.
  • FIG15 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG15, the control method of the display module includes:
  • step S13 please refer to the above description of the display module 2 in the embodiments of FIGS. 1 to 3 , which will not be described in detail here.
  • step S14 the conditions for triggering the target logic function to control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens are increased, not only the motion state of the display module is detected to be the target motion state, but also the duration ⁇ T of the touch portion of the display module being touched is detected to be not less than the preset first threshold duration T_1. That is, not only the display module is detected to have motion on the lens, but also the display module is detected to be touched to trigger the target logic function to control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens.
  • T_1 the preset first threshold duration
  • the display module 2 may shake with the user's movement, which may be consistent with the target motion state, but if the user is not detected to touch the touch portion of the display module or the touch is detected but the touch duration ⁇ T is less than the preset first threshold duration T_1, the target logic function will not be triggered, nor will the display module be controlled to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens. Thus, false triggering can be effectively avoided.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a control method for a display module, which is used to be connected to the lenses of glasses and to form an image on the connected lenses.
  • the control method of the display module may be performed by at least one of the glasses 1, display module 2, near-eye display device 10 or smart terminal in Figures 1 to 5, which can realize the specific information of the GUI imaged by the display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10) to which it is connected.
  • Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. Please refer to Figure 16, the control method of the display module includes:
  • the anti-mistouch mode refers to a mode in which the display module is controlled to maintain imaging of a graphical interface of a logic function currently running in the foreground on the lens.
  • the anti-mistouch mode is started. That is, in the embodiment of the present application, the user is provided with a functional option of actively starting the anti-mistouch mode. The user only needs to touch the touch portion of the display module for at least T_2 time and do not move the display module during this process to enter the anti-mistouch mode, so that the user can switch the graphical interface presented by the display module on the lens to the interface required by the user before wearing glasses for exercise (please refer to Figure 2). For example, before the user rides, the graphical interface presented by the display module on the lens Switch to the navigation interface and activate the anti-mistouch mode so that users can use the navigation function while riding.
  • the anti-false touch mode is started. That is, in the embodiment of the present application, a function option of passively starting the anti-false touch mode is also provided.
  • T_3 duration a long time (i.e., T_3 duration)
  • the anti-false touch mode can be passively started, and the motion state of the display module can be stopped from being monitored. After the anti-false touch mode is released, the motion state of the display module can be continued to be monitored to save the power of the device.
  • the first threshold duration is less than the second threshold duration. Assuming that the first threshold duration is 1 second and the second threshold duration is 0.5 seconds, that is, the first threshold duration is greater than the second threshold duration, a situation will occur: the user has not figured out how to move the display module within the first 0.6 seconds of touching the display module, and the anti-mistouch mode has been activated at this time.
  • the display module Even if the user moves the display module in the last 0.4 seconds, and the movement of the display module is a target motion state, but because the device enters the anti-mistouch mode when touching the display module 0.5, it will not trigger the target logic function corresponding to the target motion state (that is, the trigger condition is the target logic function of the target motion state), and accordingly, the display module will not image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens. And it is difficult for the user to accurately perceive the touch duration, so this will cause inconvenience to the user. However, if the first threshold duration is less than the second threshold duration, the aforementioned possible "embarrassment" phenomenon can be avoided, thereby facilitating the user to interact with the display module.
  • a prompt is output to remind the user that the anti-accidental touch mode has been activated.
  • the prompt may be a prompt such as text, image, or video animation imaged by the display module on the lens, so that the user knows that the device has activated the anti-accidental touch mode.
  • the false touch prevention mode After the device enters the false touch prevention mode, if it is detected again that the touch portion of the display module is touched and the touch duration reaches the fourth threshold duration T_4, the false touch prevention mode is released, so that the user can interact with the display module again.
  • the fourth threshold duration is less than or equal to the first threshold duration.
  • the user After entering the false touch prevention mode, the user must first touch the display module for the fourth threshold duration to release the false touch prevention mode before interacting with the display module, which causes inconvenience to the user. If the fourth threshold duration is less than or equal to the first threshold duration, the user can quickly release the false touch prevention mode so that the user can interact with the display module again.
  • a prompt is output to prompt the user that the anti-accidental touch mode has been released.
  • the prompt may be a prompt such as text, image, or video animation imaged by the display module on the lens, so that the user knows that the device has released the anti-accidental touch mode.
  • the display module when it is monitored that the display module is stationary on the lens and the touch portion is detected to be touched, the display module is controlled to image moving prompt content around the display module on the lens.
  • Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display module 2 when it is detected that the display module 2 is stationary on the lens 12 and the touch portion of the display module 2 is touched, the display module 2 is controlled to form a motion prompting content shown in Figure 17 on the lens 12 around the display module 2 for prompting the user to move the display module 2 in multiple directions.
  • control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further provides some other methods for the user to interact with the glasses (or near-eye display device) or device connected to the display module on the basis of the aforementioned implementations, mainly to enable the user to interact with the glasses (or near-eye display device) or device connected to the display module when the display module is not in motion but in a stationary state.
  • Various ways to interact Specifically include the following steps:
  • the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens, or the display module is controlled to update the target area in a third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens;
  • the third graphical interface is a graphical interface of a third logical function, the third logical function is a logical function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is a graphical area corresponding to a sub-function in the third logical function;
  • the target touch pattern, the target instruction and the target eye movement pattern are preset as trigger conditions for triggering the target logical function or are preset as trigger conditions for a sub-function of the third logical function.
  • the multimedia data can be image/video data collected by the built-in micro camera on the display module or voice data collected by the micro microphone, and the eye tracking data is the user's eye image data collected by the built-in micro camera on the display module.
  • the target touch mode may be a single click, a double click, a triple click, etc.
  • the target instruction may be a preset target gesture, a target voice, etc.
  • the target eye movement mode may be an eye movement according to a preset rule.
  • the target touch mode, the target instruction and the target eye movement mode are similar to the aforementioned target motion state, and they may also be preset as trigger conditions for triggering the target logical function or as trigger conditions for sub-functions of the third logical function.
  • the triggering (preset) triggering condition is the target touch mode, the target instruction and the target eye movement mode.
  • the target logical function (or the sub-function of the third logical function), thereby controlling the display module to image the triggered graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens (or controlling the display module to update the target area in the third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens).
  • the principle is similar to the principle that the target motion state triggers the target logic function (or a sub-function of the third logic function) mentioned above, thereby controlling the display module to image the graphical interface of the triggered target logic function on the lens (or controlling the display module to update the target area in the third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens). It will not be repeated here, and those skilled in the art can understand it by referring to the above text.
  • a preset imaging area is pre-set on the lens to which the display module is connected, and the display module will only image in the preset imaging area, and will not image on the entire lens. Therefore, only when the target motion state is detected in the preset imaging area on the lens, the display module is controlled to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens; and when the display module is detected to move outside the preset imaging area, the low power consumption mode is activated. This saves the power of the device and extends the battery life and service life of the device.
  • connection method of the projection device provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by the control device of the display module.
  • the control device of the display module executing the control method of the display module is taken as an example to illustrate the control device of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG18 a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application is shown.
  • the control device 50 of the display module is used to be connected to the lens of the glasses and to form an image on the connected lens.
  • the control device 50 includes:
  • a first monitoring module 501 is used to monitor the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected;
  • the first control module 502 is used to control the display module to image a graphical interface of a target logic function on the lens when a target motion state is detected; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.
  • the target motion state includes: the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition;
  • the target logical function includes: a first logical function; the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies the first preset condition and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the first logical function;
  • the first control module 502 includes:
  • the first control submodule is configured to control the display module to image a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens when it is detected that the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition.
  • the first preset condition is one of the following:
  • the displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length
  • the displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, and the displacement direction of the movement is a preset first direction;
  • the displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, and the starting point of the movement is a preset first position, which is a fixed position selected on the lens;
  • the displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, the displacement direction of the movement is a preset first direction, and the starting point of the movement is the first position;
  • the end point of the movement is a preset second position, and the second position is a fixed position selected on the lens;
  • the shape similarity between the moving trajectory and the preset trajectory is not less than a preset first threshold.
  • the target motion state includes: the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens, and the third position is a fixed position selected on the lens;
  • the target logical function includes: a second logical function;
  • the display module is stationary at the third position on the lens and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the second logical function;
  • the first control module 502 includes:
  • the second control submodule is used for controlling the display module to image a second graphic interface of the second logic function on the lens when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens.
  • the target motion state includes: the display module performs axis rotation; the target logical function includes: a third logical function, the third logical function is the logical function currently running in the foreground; the first control module 502 includes:
  • the third control submodule is used to control the display module to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens when the axial rotation of the display module is detected;
  • the third graphic interface is the graphic interface of the third logical function, and the target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the third logical function;
  • the axial rotation of the display module is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function in the third logical function.
  • the third control submodule includes:
  • the first control unit is used to control the display module to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens when monitoring that the rotation angle of the display module is not less than a preset first threshold angle.
  • control device 50 further includes:
  • a first detection module used to detect contact of a touch portion of the display module
  • the first control module 502 includes:
  • the fourth control submodule is used to control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens when it is detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a preset first threshold duration and the target motion state is monitored.
  • control device 50 further includes:
  • the first startup module is used to start the anti-mistaken touch mode when it is detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a preset second threshold duration and it is monitored that the display module is always stationary on the lens, or when it is not detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a third threshold duration;
  • the anti-mistaken touch mode refers to a mode in which the display module is controlled to maintain imaging of a graphical interface of a logical function currently running in the foreground on the lens.
  • the first threshold duration is shorter than the second threshold duration.
  • control device 50 further includes:
  • the first release module is configured to release the false touch prevention mode when it is detected again in the false touch prevention mode that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a fourth threshold duration.
  • the fourth threshold duration is less than or equal to the first threshold duration.
  • control device 50 further includes:
  • a first prompt module configured to output a prompt for prompting a user that the accidental touch prevention mode has been started while starting the accidental touch prevention mode
  • the second prompt module is used to output a prompt for prompting the user that the accidental touch prevention mode has been canceled when the accidental touch prevention mode is canceled.
  • control device 50 further includes:
  • the second control module is used for controlling the display module to image moving prompt content around the display module on the lens when it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and the touch portion is touched.
  • control device 50 further includes:
  • a third control module is used to control the display module to image the graphic interface of the target logical function on the lens, or control the display module to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens, when it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the target touch mode;
  • the third graphic interface is the graphic interface of the third logical function, the third logical function is the logical function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the third logical function;
  • the target touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logical function or is preset as a trigger condition for a sub-function of the third logical function.
  • control device 50 further includes:
  • a first acquisition module used to acquire multimedia data
  • the third control module is used to control the display module to image the graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens, or control the display module to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens when it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and a target instruction is identified from the multimedia data;
  • the third graphic interface is a graphic interface of a third logic function, the third logic function is a logic function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is a graphic area corresponding to a sub-function in the third logic function;
  • the target instruction is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function or is preset as a trigger condition for a sub-function of the third logic function.
  • control device 50 further includes:
  • a second acquisition module is used to acquire eye tracking data
  • a fourth control module is used to control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens, or to control the display module to update the target area in the third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens, when it is monitored that the display module is stationary on the lens and a target eye movement pattern is identified from the eye tracking data;
  • the third graphical interface is a graphical interface of a third logical function, the third logical function is a logical function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is a graphical area corresponding to a sub-function in the third logical function;
  • the target eye movement pattern is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logical function or is preset as a trigger condition for a sub-function of the third logical function.
  • control device 50 includes:
  • a second monitoring module is used to control the display module to image a graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens when a target motion state is detected in a preset imaging area on the lens;
  • the second starting module is used to start the low power consumption mode when it is detected that the display module moves out of the preset imaging area.
  • the control device 50 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application can be an electronic device or a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or a chip.
  • the electronic device can be a terminal or other devices other than a terminal.
  • the electronic device can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a PDA, a vehicle-mounted electronic device, a mobile Internet device (Mobile Internet Device, MID), an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, a robot, a wearable device, an ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), a netbook or a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), etc.
  • NAS Network Attached Storage
  • PC personal computer
  • TV television
  • teller machine a self-service machine
  • the control device 50 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application may be a device having an operating system.
  • the operating system may be an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or other possible operating systems, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • control device 50 of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can implement each process implemented in the embodiments of Figures 1 to 17, and will not be described again here to avoid repetition.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device 130, including a processor 131 and a memory 132, wherein the memory 132 stores programs or instructions that can be executed on the processor 131, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not described here.
  • the electronic devices in the embodiments of the present application include the mobile electronic devices and non-mobile electronic devices mentioned above.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device implementing an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 140 includes, but is not limited to, components such as a radio frequency unit 141, a network module 142, an audio output unit 143, an input unit 144, a sensor 145, a display unit 146, a user input unit 147, an interface unit 148, a memory 149, and a processor 1410.
  • the electronic device 140 may also include a power source (such as a battery) for supplying power to each component, and the power source may be logically connected to the processor 1410 through a power management system, so that the power management system can realize functions such as managing charging, discharging, and power consumption management.
  • the electronic device structure shown in FIG. 14 does not constitute a limitation on the electronic device, and the electronic device may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or arrange components differently, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor 1410 is configured to:
  • the display module When the target motion state is detected, the display module is controlled to form a graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.
  • the input unit 144 may include a graphics processor (GPU) 1441 and a microphone 1442, and the graphics processor 1441 processes the image data of a static picture or video obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode.
  • the display unit 146 may include a display panel 1461, and the display panel 1461 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, an organic light emitting diode, etc.
  • the user input unit 147 includes a touch panel 1471 and at least one of the other input devices 1472.
  • the touch panel 1471 is also called a touch screen.
  • the touch panel 1471 may include a touch detection device and a touch controller
  • Other input devices 1472 may include, but are not limited to, a physical keyboard, function keys (such as a volume control key, a switch key, etc.), a trackball, a mouse, and a joystick, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the memory 149 can be used to store software programs and various data.
  • the memory 149 may mainly include a first storage area for storing programs or instructions and a second storage area for storing data, wherein the first storage area may store an operating system, an application program or instructions required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc.
  • the memory 149 may include a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or the memory 149 may include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), a static random access memory (SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (DRAM), a synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), a double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDRSDRAM), an enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (ESDRAM), a synchronous link dynamic random access memory (SLDRAM) and a direct memory bus random access memory (DRRAM).
  • the memory 149 in the embodiment of the present application includes but is not limited to these and any other suitable types of memory.
  • the processor 1410 may include one or more processing units; optionally, the processor 1410 integrates an application processor and a modem processor, wherein the application processor mainly processes operations related to an operating system, a user interface, and application programs, and the modem processor mainly processes wireless communication signals, such as a baseband processor. It is understandable that the modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 1410.
  • the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by an AR glasses.
  • the control method of the display module executed by a near-eye display device is taken as an example to illustrate the electronic system provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides an AR glasses 150, including a processor 151 and a memory 152, wherein the memory 152 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 151, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated here.
  • the size of the lens of some glasses may be much larger than the field of view of the human eye, so that the user wearing the glasses cannot see or see clearly some areas on the lens, that is, there may be some areas (i.e., blind spots) on the lens of the glasses that are outside the field of view of the user wearing the glasses; if the display module connected to the lens of the glasses is imaged in the blind spot on the lens, the user wearing the glasses will not be able to see or see clearly.
  • the purpose of the embodiments of the present application is to provide a control method, device, electronic device, near-eye display device, medium, chip and computer program product of a display module, so as to independently or semi-independently solve the technical problem that if the display module connected to the lens of the glasses is imaged in the blind spot on the lens, the user wearing the glasses will not be able to see or see clearly.
  • the independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can work independently without the cooperation of software, so as to achieve the effect that the display module connected to the lens of the glasses in the near-eye display technology will not be imaged in the blind spot on the lens.
  • the semi-independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme, which, when working in conjunction with near-eye display software, such as software in AR technology that allows users to interact with virtual information, can achieve the effect that the display module connected to the lens of the glasses in the near-eye display technology will not form an image in the blind spot on the lens.
  • near-eye display software such as software in AR technology that allows users to interact with virtual information
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application, and a front view of a pair of goggles is schematically shown in the exemplary scenario.
  • manufacturers usually make the lenses larger so that they can more comprehensively cover the eye area for protection without affecting the wearer's vision.
  • FIG. 7 after the user wears the exemplary goggles 5, the edge area of the lens 52 closer to the frame 51 is less likely to be The user can see clearly or even cannot see clearly, that is, some edge areas on the lens 52 are blind areas of the user's field of vision.
  • the area of the lens 52 that can be clearly seen is shown as the area 521 surrounded by the dotted line in the figure (this area is called the visible area of user A) (obviously, in practice, there is usually no dotted line ring on the goggles, and the dotted line ring is used to schematically illustrate the virtual boundary of the boundary between the blind area and the visible area), and the other areas on the lens 52 except the area 521 are the blind areas of user A; then the display module 2 is only located in the area 521 and the image is formed in the area 521 , user A can clearly see the display module 2 (the display area 21 thereof), and the user can also clearly see the image formed by the display module 2 in the area 521 through the display area 21 of the display module 2; if the display module 2 is in the blind spot on the lens 52 (for example, the position shown in FIG. 7 ), user A cannot even see the display module 2 clearly, and of course cannot clearly see the display area 21 of the display module
  • some glasses may have lenses that are much larger than the field of view of the human eye for reasons of protection or styling, so that the user wearing the glasses cannot see or see clearly some areas on the lenses, that is, there may be some areas (i.e., blind spots) on the lenses of the glasses that are outside the field of view of the user wearing the glasses; if the display module connected to the lenses of the glasses forms an image within the blind spots on the lenses, the user wearing the glasses will not be able to see or see clearly.
  • some areas i.e., blind spots
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a control method, device, electronic device, near-eye display device, medium, chip and computer program product for a display module, which can independently or semi-independently solve to a certain extent the technical problem that if the display module connected to the lens of the glasses is imaged in the blind spot on the lens, it will cause the user wearing the glasses to be unable to see or see clearly.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a control method of a display module, the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content.
  • the display module can be the display module 2 shown in Figures 1 to 5 and Figure 22, and the display module 2 can output image content on the lens 12 or the lens 52.
  • the control method of the display module can be performed by at least one of the glasses 1 in Figures 1 to 5, the display module 2 in Figures 1 to 5, the near-eye display device 10 in Figure 4, or the smart terminal 4, which can realize the specific information of the GUI imaged by the control display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10 or goggles 5) to which it is connected.
  • Figure 24 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the step flow shown in Figure 24 will be described below by taking the goggles 5 illustrated in Figure 23 as an example.
  • the control method of the display module includes:
  • the lens is the lens on the glasses to which the display module is currently connected. For example, it can be described in the above embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the display module for augmented reality display imaging on the lens of the glasses can make some movements on the lens to which it is connected, instead of fixing the display module on the lens.
  • an inertial sensor or an acceleration sensor (or a gyroscope) is built into the display module, and the instantaneous speed and acceleration of the display module can be collected by such a sensor, so as to determine the motion trajectory of the display module according to the collected instantaneous speed and acceleration and in combination with parameters such as time.
  • a fixed reference point is selected as the origin in advance on the lens connected to the display module, and the display module moves from the origin and the motion trajectory of the display module is always monitored.
  • the position of any point on the motion trajectory relative to the origin can be expressed as the relative position of the display module relative to the connected lens.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • point P0 on the lens 52 is a pre-selected origin
  • the display module 2 moves from the origin along path l1 to point P1, then moves along path l2 to point P2, then moves along l3 to point P3, and finally moves along l4 to point P4.
  • the motion trajectory l of the display module 2 at any time t in the motion process can be determined by monitoring the motion parameters (such as speed, acceleration, etc.) of the display module 2.
  • the positional relationship of the end point of the motion trajectory at time t relative to the origin P0 can represent the relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 52.
  • the display module 2 moves to point P1.
  • the positional relationship of point P1 relative to the origin P0 that is, the relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 52, can be determined, which is exemplarily represented as Indicates that point P1 is located at the vector At the end point, the vector The starting point is P0.
  • a straight line trajectory (path) is used as an example to describe the path and movement trajectory of the display module 2.
  • the display module 2 can be moved arbitrarily and is not limited to the form of the straight line trajectory in the above examples, such as a curved trajectory.
  • the first relative position is marked as a first fitting point.
  • the first relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens.
  • the first touch pattern is a touch pattern used to indicate that the user confirms that the display area of the display module can be clearly seen.
  • the imaging area setting mode is a logical function provided for the user to set a preset imaging area on the lens connected to the display module.
  • the imaging area setting mode is automatically entered when the display module is connected to the lens for the first time and turned on.
  • an APP for controlling the display module is provided on the smart terminal connected to the display module, and the user can start the imaging area setting mode through the imaging area setting function option in the APP. After entering this mode, the display module will enter the preset imaging area setting process.
  • the near-eye display device 10 shown in FIG. 23 is the goggles 5 shown in FIG. 25 , which automatically enters the imaging area setting mode when the display module 2 is first connected to the lens 52 and turned on.
  • the user can also start the imaging area setting mode of the display module 2 through the imaging area setting function option in the APP that controls the display module on the smart terminal 4.
  • the first touch mode may be a preset touch mode, such as a single click, double click, or triple click on the touch portion of the display module.
  • a preset touch mode such as a single click, double click, or triple click on the touch portion of the display module.
  • the closed area is set as a preset imaging area for the display module to form an image on the lens currently connected.
  • Fitting means enclosing a plurality of points into a closed area, and the line between any two points does not intersect the line between any other two points.
  • at least three first fitting points can be fitted into a closed area of a preset shape.
  • the preset shape can be an ellipse (a circle is a special ellipse), a rectangle, a triangle, etc.
  • any two first fitting points with the shortest straight-line distance can be connected by a curve or a straight line.
  • a smooth curve is preferably used.
  • FIG26 and FIG27 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the four first fitting points Fitting into an elliptical area the elliptical area is set as the preset imaging area 522 of the display module 2 on the lens 52.
  • the four first fitting points P1, P2, P3 and P4 are fitted into a quadrilateral area, the quadrilateral area is set as the preset imaging area 522 of the display module 2 on the lens 52.
  • the above steps S101-S104 can be assisted by a smart terminal (see FIG. 4 ) that is communicatively connected to the display module, which is exemplarily described below.
  • Figures 28 to 29 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display module 2 maintains a communication connection with the smart terminal 6, and the smart terminal 6 pre-acquires the virtual contour model of the goggles 5.
  • the virtual contour model can be obtained by scanning the goggles 5 with a 3D scanner, or it can be obtained from the manufacturer of the goggles 5.
  • the display module 2 After the display module 2 is connected (placed) on the lens 52, when the display module 2 starts the imaging area setting mode, the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 is output on the screen of the smart terminal 6 accordingly, and the relative position of the display module 2 on the goggles 5 is traced on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5.
  • the display module 2 can be moved to different positions on the connected lens 52 for positioning, and each positioning point (i.e., fitting point) is subject to the user wearing the glasses 5 confirming that it can be seen clearly. That is, the user places the display module 2 at different positions on the lens 52 to perform “aiming point” positioning, displays these positioning points on the smart terminal 6, and then fits all the positioning points into a preset imaging area.
  • the initial position P0 of the display module 2 is shown on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 on the screen of the smart terminal 6.
  • the position P1 is shown on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 on the screen of the smart terminal 6. If the user confirms that the display module 2 can be seen clearly at the point P1, the position of P1 relative to the origin P0 is recorded.
  • FIG29 After completing the "aim point” positioning, all the positioning points found are shown on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 on the screen of the smart terminal 6, such as P1, P2, P3 and P4 in the example of FIG29.
  • the fitted elliptical closed area is shown on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 on the screen of the smart terminal 6, and the closed area is set as the preset imaging area 522 for the display module 2 to be imaged on the lens 52.
  • the extreme position points on the lens close to the frame are preferentially selected, such as the position points on the lens close to the edge area of the frame. If the user confirms that the display module cannot be seen clearly at these position points, the user is prompted to gradually move the display module closer to the center position point of the lens, so that the final fitted preset imaging area is as large as possible to increase the area of the preset imaging area. Obviously, the more data of the calibrated first fitting points, the closer the fitted preset imaging area can be to the user's visual area. Therefore, the number of first fitting points for fitting the preset imaging area can be flexibly set.
  • the imaging area setting mode by detecting the relative position of the display module on the lens currently connected and the contact of the touch portion of the display module, at least three first fitting points that are confirmed by the user and can be clearly seen are found on the lens currently connected to the display module, and then the at least three fitting points found are fitted into a closed area. Since the boundary points on the closed area (obviously these boundary points include the first fitting points) can be clearly seen by the user, the user can naturally also see the closed area, and the closed area is set as the display module.
  • the display module will form an image in the preset imaging area on the lens, and will not form an image in the blind area on the lens, thereby effectively solving the technical problem that the display module connected to the lens of the glasses forms an image in the blind area on the lens, which will cause the user wearing the glasses to be unable to see or clearly see the virtual information in the blind area.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a control method of a display module, the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content.
  • the display module may be the display module 2 shown in Figures 1 to 5, and the display module 2 may output image content on the lens 12 or the lens 52.
  • the control method of the display module may be performed by at least one of the glasses 1 in Figures 1 to 5, the display module 2 in Figures 1 to 5, the near-eye display device 10 in Figure 4, or the smart terminal 4, which can realize the specific information of the GUI imaged by the control display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10 or goggles 5) to which it is connected.
  • Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the step flow shown in Figure 25 will be described below by taking the goggles 5 illustrated in Figure 23 and the scene shown in Figure 32 as an example.
  • the control method of the display module includes:
  • a second virtual contour model of the eye of user A wearing goggles 5 can also be obtained by a 3D scanner, and the smart terminal 6 obtains the second virtual contour model from the 3D scanner.
  • the smart terminal 6 presents the second virtual contour model overlapping with the first virtual contour model 5', and scans a contour area 522' that is the same or similar to the second virtual contour model on the first virtual contour model 5', and sets the contour area 522' as the preset imaging area 522 of the display module 2 on the lens 52.
  • this method of setting the preset imaging area is faster in setting process, but the difficulty lies in that for each pair of glasses, each user wearing the glasses needs to obtain the virtual contour of the glasses lens and the virtual contour of the user's eye at the same time. Therefore, in practice, the user can flexibly select the setting method of the preset imaging area according to the actual situation.
  • the display module can form an image in the preset imaging area on the connected lens when it is located in the preset imaging area on the connected lens. However, the display module will not form an image on the connected lens when it is located outside the preset imaging area on the connected lens. Therefore, in some optional implementations, when it is detected that the display module is outside the preset imaging area, the low power consumption mode is started.
  • the display module 2 after completing the setting of the preset imaging area, when the display module 2 moves outside the area 522 on the lens 52, the display module 2 starts the low power consumption mode. Thereby saving the electric energy of the device and extending the battery life and service life of the device.
  • the display module 2 may be in a completely non-operating state or a standby state or a state where some modules are working, and when the display module 2 moves back into the area 522, the display module 2 turns off the low power consumption mode and resumes working.
  • the user can also set the specific state corresponding to the low power consumption mode of different time periods in the non-preset imaging area (i.e., in the example in FIG27, the area outside the area 522 on the lens 52), for example, setting the low power consumption mode from 11 pm to 7 am the next day to a completely non-operating state, setting the low power consumption mode from 7 am to 9 am, from 12 pm to 2 pm, and from 5 pm to 8 pm to a standby state, and setting the remaining time periods to a state where some modules are working (e.g., the hardware for monitoring the motion state of the display module is working).
  • some modules e.g., the hardware for monitoring the motion state of the display module is working.
  • control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
  • the display module When a mapping instruction for imaging a first graphic interface in a first sub-imaging area is received, the display module is controlled to image the first graphic interface in the first sub-imaging area; the first sub-imaging area is any one of the at least two sub-imaging areas.
  • the user can divide the preset imaging area into multiple sub-imaging areas and present different images in different sub-imaging areas, and the image presented in each sub-area can also be set by the user.
  • the display module receives the partition instruction input by the user, the display module responds to the number of areas in the partition instruction and divides the preset imaging area into sub-imaging areas of the number of areas (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the preset imaging area 522 is divided into 6 sub-imaging areas).
  • the display module receives a mapping instruction for a sub-imaging area
  • the display module images a graphical interface corresponding to the data mapped in the mapping instruction in the sub-imaging area according to the data mapped in the mapping instruction.
  • FIG33 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the user sets a preset imaging area 522 for the display module 2 on the lens 52, and the preset imaging area 522 is divided into 6 sub-imaging areas, and a graphical interface of the data mapped in each sub-imaging area is imaged in each sub-imaging area.
  • the icons A-I shown in FIG33 can be icons (thumbnails) of applications or files, or other content, such as a video being played, etc.
  • the user in order to fully enable such traditional glasses to have an augmented reality display function and to achieve efficient interaction thereon, the user can customize the layout of specific preset imaging areas as needed.
  • the lenses of the glasses are generally round or square or other shapes, and have a lens area that is larger than the field of view of the human eye.
  • the user can take a position with a better field of view as the preset imaging area.
  • the preset imaging area can be divided into multiple sub-imaging areas, each of which can be configured to output a corresponding graphical interface, and multiple sub-areas can realize multi-channel output of multiple graphical interfaces.
  • the setting method of the preset imaging area provided in the aforementioned embodiment needs to vary from person to person and from glasses to glasses.
  • the preset imaging area A set when user A wears glasses A may not be suitable for user B wearing glasses A.
  • User B may not be able to see some areas within the preset imaging area A when wearing glasses A.
  • User B may need to reset the preset imaging area B when wearing glasses A.
  • the identity information of the user who sets the preset imaging area can be associated with the preset imaging area set by the user, so that when different users wear glasses subsequently, the display module performs imaging based on the preset imaging area associated with the user. Therefore, in some optional embodiments, on the basis of the aforementioned embodiments, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application also includes:
  • a mapping rule is established between the identity information and the preset imaging area and saved.
  • the user here is the user who sets the preset imaging area on the lens currently connected to the display module, and may be the user who touches the touch portion of the display module according to the first touch mode in the aforementioned step S102, or the user corresponding to the second virtual contour model in the aforementioned step S21.
  • the user's identity information can be the user's account/password, voiceprint, fingerprint, iris, etc.
  • mapping rule When a user completes the setting of a preset imaging area while wearing a pair of glasses, a mapping rule can be established between the user's identity information and the preset imaging area set by the user, and the mapping rule can be saved. The next time the user uses the glasses, the preset imaging area set by the user on the glasses can be directly obtained according to the mapping rule.
  • the preset imaging area A1 set by user A on the goggles 5 is mapped with the user A's identity information ID-A and the preset imaging area A1, and the preset imaging area A2 set by the user on the glasses 1 is mapped with the user A's identity information ID-A and the preset imaging area A2.
  • the preset imaging area B1 set by user B on the goggles 5 is mapped with the user B's identity information ID-B and the preset imaging area B1.
  • FIG34 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a control method of the display module, which, based on the above-mentioned embodiment, further includes:
  • the user may feel that the preset imaging area is not ideal and want to partially update or completely reset the preset imaging area. Therefore, after setting the preset imaging area, the user can re-enter the imaging area setting mode to update or reset the preset imaging area.
  • the lens when the user re-enters the imaging area setting mode, the lens can be "aimed" again, and some positioning points different from the first fitting points (i.e., second fitting points) can be found, and the second fitting points can be added to the first fitting points to re-fit the preset imaging area (i.e., step S106) to update the preset imaging area, or at least three second fitting points can be found and a new preset imaging area can be re-fitted based on the at least three second fitting points (i.e., step S107) to reset the preset imaging area.
  • some positioning points different from the first fitting points i.e., second fitting points
  • the second fitting points can be added to the first fitting points to re-fit the preset imaging area (i.e., step S106) to update the preset imaging area, or at least three second fitting points can be found and a new preset imaging area can be re-fitted based on the at least three second fitting points (i.e., step S107) to reset the prese
  • FIG35 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a control method of the display module, which, based on the above-mentioned embodiment, further includes:
  • mapping rule in the mapping set is a pre-set mapping relationship between a user identity and a preset imaging area, and each mapping rule in the mapping set is different.
  • the first user may be any user.
  • the user's login account/password and fingerprint information can be obtained through a smart terminal that is communicatively connected to the display module to identify the first identity of the first user wearing the first glasses, or the first user's iris information can be collected through a camera on the display module to identify the identity information of the first user.
  • the display module can be connected to any glasses, so the mapping set is associated with each pair of glasses.
  • mapping set A can be configured for glasses A, and at least one mapping rule of the preset imaging area set when each user wears glasses A is recorded in mapping set A.
  • mapping set B can be configured for glasses B, and at least one mapping rule of the preset imaging area set when each user wears glasses B is recorded in mapping set B.
  • a mapping rule matching the first identity may be searched from the mapping set of the first glasses.
  • the preset imaging area in the searched mapping rule is set as the imaging area of the display module on the lens.
  • FIG36 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application is based on the embodiment shown in FIG35, and further includes:
  • mapping rules in the case where at least two mapping rules are searched from the mapping set, detecting a selection instruction for each of the preset imaging areas in the at least two mapping rules, and setting the preset imaging area selected by the selection instruction as the imaging area for the display module to image on the lens, or setting the first preset imaging area in the at least two mapping rules as the imaging area for the display module to image on the lens.
  • Imaging area, the first preset imaging area is the preset imaging area selected last time in the historical selection record of the first user selecting the preset imaging area.
  • mapping set of the first glasses If at least two mapping rules are searched from the mapping set of the first glasses, it means that the first user has set multiple preset imaging areas on the first glasses, and these preset imaging areas can be displayed on the smart terminal connected to the display module for selection by the first user, and the preset imaging area selected by the selection instruction input by the user is set as the imaging area formed by the display module on the glasses.
  • the preset imaging area selected last in the historical selection record of the first user selecting the preset imaging area can be set as the imaging area formed by the display module on the glasses.
  • FIG37 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application is based on the embodiment shown in FIG36, and further includes:
  • no mapping rule is searched from the mapping set, it means that the first user has not set the preset imaging area on the first glasses, so the imaging area setting mode is started so that the first user can set the preset imaging area for the display module on the first glasses.
  • the specific process of the first user finding the third fitting point on the first lens and fitting the found third fitting point into the third preset imaging area can refer to the description of setting the preset imaging area in the previous text, which will not be repeated here.
  • control method of the display module further includes: establishing a third mapping rule between the first identity and the third preset imaging area, and incorporating the third mapping rule into the mapping set.
  • a third mapping rule is established between the first identity of the first user and the third preset imaging area, and is included in the mapping set of the first glasses, so that the first user can quickly determine the preset imaging area corresponding to the first glasses when using the first glasses next time.
  • FIG38 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a control method of the display module, which, based on the aforementioned embodiment, further includes:
  • the user may have forgotten that he or she has ever set a preset imaging area for the glasses currently worn.
  • the display module detects that the preset imaging area setting mode is entered again, and the repetition rate of the relative positions of the detected fourth fitting point and the first fitting point on the lens reaches a preset threshold (for example, 90%), the setting of the preset imaging area is abandoned, and the preset imaging area fitted according to the first fitting point is directly configured as the current imaging area of the display module on the lens.
  • a preset threshold for example, 90%
  • control method of the display module also includes: when it is determined that the repetition rate is less than a preset threshold, fitting the at least three fourth fitting points into a fourth closed area, and setting the fourth closed area as the current imaging area of the display module on the lens.
  • the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by a control device of the display module.
  • the control device of the display module executing the control method of the display module is taken as an example to illustrate the control device of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG39 a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application is shown.
  • the control device 7 of the display module the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content, and the control device 7 includes:
  • a first detection module 71 is used to detect the relative position of the display module on the currently connected lens and the contact of the touch portion of the display module;
  • a first marking module 72 is configured to mark the first relative position as a first fitting point when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a first relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to a first touch pattern in an imaging area setting mode;
  • the first relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens, and the first touch pattern is a touch pattern used to indicate that the user confirms that the display area of the display module can be clearly seen in the imaging area setting mode;
  • a first fitting module 73 configured to fit the at least three first fitting points into a closed area when at least three first fitting points are marked;
  • the first setting module 74 is used to set the closed area as a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • a first division module configured to divide the preset imaging area into at least two sub-imaging areas when receiving a partition instruction
  • the first imaging module is used to control the display module to image the first graphic interface in the first sub-imaging area when receiving a mapping instruction to image the first graphic interface in the first sub-imaging area; the first sub-imaging area is any one of the at least two sub-imaging areas.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • a second marking module for, when the imaging area setting mode is started again after the imaging area setting mode is exited, and when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a second relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, marking the second relative position as a second fitting point; the second relative position is an arbitrary position on the lens different from the first relative position;
  • a second fitting module is used to fit the at least three first fitting points and the at least one second fitting point into a first new closed area when at least one second fitting point is marked, and update the first new closed area to be the preset imaging area of the display module on the lens; or to fit the at least three second fitting points into a second new closed area when at least three second fitting points are marked, and update the second new closed area to be the preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • a first identification module configured to identify a first identity of a first user wearing a first pair of glasses, wherein the first pair of glasses includes the lenses;
  • a first search module configured to search a mapping rule matching the first identity in a preset mapping set
  • the second setting module is used to set the preset imaging area in the searched mapping rule as the imaging area of the display module on the lens when there is only one mapping rule searched from the mapping set; each mapping rule in the mapping set is a pre-set mapping relationship between a user identity and a preset imaging area, and each mapping rule in the mapping set is different.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • a third setting module is used to detect, when at least two mapping rules are searched from the mapping set, a selection instruction for each preset imaging area in the at least two mapping rules, and set the preset imaging area selected by the selection instruction as the imaging area for the display module to image on the lens, or set the first preset imaging area in the at least two mapping rules as the imaging area for the display module to image on the lens, wherein the first preset imaging area is the preset imaging area selected last time in the historical selection record of the first user selecting the preset imaging area.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • a first starting module configured to start the imaging area setting mode when no mapping rule is found from the mapping set
  • a third marking module configured to mark the third relative position as a third fitting point when it is detected in the imaging area setting mode that the display module is stationary at a third relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode; the third relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens;
  • a third fitting module configured to fit the at least three third fitting points into a third closed area when at least three third fitting points are marked
  • the fourth setting module is used to set the third closed area as a third preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • the first establishing module is used to establish a third mapping rule between the first identity and the third preset imaging area, and classify the third mapping rule into the mapping set.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • a fourth marking module for, when the imaging area setting mode is started again after the imaging area setting mode is exited, and when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a fourth relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, marking the fourth relative position as a fourth fitting point; the fourth relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens;
  • a fourth fitting module configured to determine, when at least three fourth fitting points are marked, a repetition rate between the at least three fourth fitting points and the at least three first fitting points
  • the fifth setting module is used to set the preset imaging area as the current imaging area of the display module on the lens when it is determined that the repetition rate is not less than a preset threshold.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • the sixth setting module is used to fit the at least three fourth fitting points into a fourth closed area when it is determined that the repetition rate is less than a preset threshold, and set the fourth closed area as the current imaging area of the display module on the lens.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • a first acquisition module used for acquiring a first virtual contour model of the lens and a second virtual contour model of the user's eye
  • the seventh setting module is used to scan a contour area that is the same as or similar to the second virtual contour model on the first virtual contour model, and set the contour area as a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.
  • control device 7 further includes:
  • a second acquisition module used to acquire the identity information of the user
  • the second establishing module is used to establish and save a mapping rule between the identity information and the preset imaging area.
  • the control device 7 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application can be an electronic device or a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or a chip.
  • the electronic device can be a terminal or other devices other than a terminal.
  • the electronic device can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a PDA, a vehicle-mounted electronic device, a mobile Internet device (Mobile Internet Device, MID), an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, a robot, a wearable device, an ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), a netbook or a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), etc.
  • NAS Network Attached Storage
  • PC personal computer
  • TV television
  • teller machine a self-service machine
  • the control device 7 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application may be a device having an operating system.
  • the operating system may be an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or other possible operating systems, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • control device 7 of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can implement the various processes implemented in the embodiments of Figures 1 to 5 and Figures 22 to 38. To avoid repetition, they will not be repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides an electronic device 130.
  • the electronic device 130 may include a processor 131 and a memory 132.
  • the memory 132 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 131.
  • the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides an electronic device, the hardware structure of which is a schematic diagram as shown in Figure 20, and components with the same functions are not repeated here, wherein the processor 1410 is used to: detect the relative position of the display module on the currently connected lens and the contact of the touch portion of the display module; in the imaging area setting mode, when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a first relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to a first touch pattern, mark the first relative position as a first fitting point; the first relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens, and in the imaging area setting mode, the first touch pattern is a touch pattern used to indicate that the user confirms that the display area of the display module can be clearly seen; when at least three first fitting points are marked, fit the at least three first fitting points into a closed area; and set the closed area as a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a near-eye display device 150.
  • the near-eye display device 150 can be as shown in Figure 21 above.
  • the display device 150 may include a processor 151 and a memory 152.
  • the memory 152 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 151.
  • the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, it will not be repeated here.
  • thumbnails [A] and [B] are simultaneously imaged in the central area of the preset imaging area, and three thumbnails [D1], [D2] and [D3] are simultaneously imaged in the area near the edge of the frame 11. It is necessary to provide corresponding interactive means so that the user can select the thumbnail to be selected from these (icon) thumbnails, thereby realizing the interaction between the user and the display module. At the same time, it is necessary to ensure that the user can select the thumbnail to be selected relatively quickly and accurately without making a wrong selection or confusion.
  • a display module may simultaneously image multiple thumbnails of applications or files (icons) in a certain area on a near-eye display device. How to enable users to accurately interact with these thumbnails without confusion or errors is a technical problem that needs to be solved urgently.
  • the purpose of the embodiments of the present application is to provide a control method, device, electronic device, near-eye display device, medium, chip and computer program product of a display module, so as to independently or semi-independently solve the problem of a display module connected to a near-eye display device being in a state of ...
  • the independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can work independently without the cooperation of software, so that the display module connected to the near-eye display device in the near-eye display technology can simultaneously image multiple thumbnails of applications or files (icons) in a certain area of the near-eye display device, and the user can accurately interact with these thumbnails without easily causing confusion or errors.
  • the semi-independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can achieve the effect that the display module connected to the near-eye display device in the near-eye display technology simultaneously images multiple thumbnails of applications or files (icons) in a certain area of the near-eye display device when working in conjunction with near-eye display software, such as software for users to interact with virtual information in AR technology, and can accurately interact with these thumbnails without easily causing confusion or errors.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a control method, device, electronic device, near-eye display device, medium, chip and computer program product for a display module, which can independently or semi-independently solve to a certain extent the technical problem that if a display module connected to the near-eye display device simultaneously images thumbnails of multiple applications or files (icons) in a certain area of the near-eye display device, it is easy for confusion or errors to occur when a user interacts with these thumbnails.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a control method for a display module, wherein the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content.
  • the display module may be the display module 2 shown in Figures 1 to 48, and the display module 2 may output image content on the lens 12.
  • the control method for the display module may be executed by at least one of the glasses 1, the display module 2, the near-eye display device 10 or the smart terminal 4 in Figures 1 to 48, which can realize the control of the specific information of the GUI imaged by the display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10) to which it is connected.
  • Figure 41 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method for the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the control method for the display module includes:
  • S112 When it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail, run an application associated with the thumbnail, and enlarge and display the thumbnail on the display module.
  • the lens is the lens on the glasses to which the display module is currently connected. For example, it can be described in the above embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the display module for augmented reality display imaging on the lens of the glasses can make some movements on the lens to which it is connected, instead of fixing the display module on the lens.
  • an inertial sensor or an acceleration sensor (or a gyroscope) is built into the display module, and the instantaneous speed and acceleration of the display module can be collected by such a sensor, so as to determine the motion trajectory of the display module according to the collected instantaneous speed and acceleration and in combination with parameters such as time.
  • the operating system usually provides a desktop or main interface function for the user, and the user can customize some files and application or program icons (thumbnails) on the desktop or main interface.
  • the display module 2 images the main interface function provided by the display module 2 for the user on the lens 12, and the user can define some files and application or program icons (thumbnails) in the main interface.
  • a fixed reference point is selected as the origin in advance on the lens connected to the display module, and the display module moves from the origin and the motion trajectory of the display module is always monitored.
  • the position of any point on the motion trajectory relative to the origin can be expressed as the relative position of the display module relative to the connected lens.
  • the relative positions of the thumbnails on the lens on the main interface are determined when the display module is imaged and output, that is, the relative positions of the thumbnails on the lens are known.
  • FIG42 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • point P0 on the lens 12 is a pre-selected origin, and the display module 2 moves from the origin along the path l1 to point P1, and then moves along the path l2 to point P2.
  • the motion parameters (such as speed, acceleration, etc.) of the display module 2 can be monitored to determine the display module 2 in the application scenario.
  • the motion trajectory l of the motion process at any time t, and the position relationship of the end point of the motion trajectory at any time t relative to the origin P0 can represent the relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 12.
  • the display module 2 moves to point P1, and the position relationship of point P1 relative to the origin P0 can be determined according to the determined path l1, that is, the relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 12, which is exemplarily represented as Indicates that point P1 is located at the vector At the end point, the vector The starting point is P0.
  • a straight line trajectory (path) is used as an example to describe the path and movement trajectory of the display module 2.
  • the display module 2 can be moved arbitrarily and is not limited to the form of the straight line trajectory in the above examples, such as a curved trajectory.
  • the relative positions of the thumbnails on the main interface on the lens 12 are known. Based on the known relative positions of the thumbnails on the lens 12 and the monitored relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 12, the relative position relationship between the display module 2 and the thumbnails on the main interface can be determined.
  • the thumbnail is enlarged and displayed on the display module.
  • the user moves the display module 2 onto the thumbnail [A], and the thumbnail [A] is displayed in an enlarged manner in the display area 21 of the display module 2 .
  • the display module when the display module images the main interface on the connected lens, the relative position between the display module and each thumbnail on the main interface is detected, and when it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail, the thumbnail is enlarged, so that the user can confirm whether to select the thumbnail. In this way, the user can interact with these thumbnails accurately to a certain extent without confusion or error.
  • control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application also includes: when it is detected that the display module is placed on at least one thumbnail, enlarging and displaying the thumbnail of the at least one thumbnail closest to the display module on the display module.
  • the display module 2 is moved and placed above the thumbnails [D1], [D2], and [D3].
  • the distance between the center point of the thumbnail and the center point of the display area of the display module 2 is used as a basis.
  • the thumbnail [D1] is closer to the display module 2, so the thumbnail [D1] is enlarged and displayed in the display area 21 of the display module 2.
  • control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
  • the display module When it is detected that the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of an application associated with the enlarged thumbnail in a preset imaging area on the lens; the first touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for the application associated with the enlarged thumbnail
  • the first touch mode may be a single tap, a double tap, a triple tap, and the like.
  • thumbnail [A] is magnified and displayed
  • the application associated with the thumbnail [A] is run in the foreground
  • the display module 2 is controlled to image the graphical interface of the application associated with the magnified thumbnail [A] in the preset imaging area 121 on the lens.
  • the display module 2 is controlled to image the graphical interface of the application associated with the magnified thumbnail [D1] in the preset imaging area 121 on the lens.
  • the display module when the display module images the main interface on the connected lens, the relative position between the display module and each thumbnail on the main interface is detected, and when it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail, the thumbnail is enlarged. So that the user can confirm whether the thumbnail needs to be selected.
  • the user touches the touch portion of the display module according to the first touch mode again it is determined that the user wants to start (or enter) the application associated with the enlarged thumbnail, and enter the application and image its graphical interface. It is achieved to assist the user in selecting the thumbnail in the main interface, so as to enter the application associated with the thumbnail and use the related functions, so as to enable the user to interact with these thumbnails accurately to a certain extent without confusion or errors.
  • control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
  • the display module images the main interface in the preset imaging area on the lens, monitoring the movement state of the display module, detecting the contact of the touch part on the display module and acquiring multimedia data;
  • the display module When the display module is monitored to be rotating along its axis, or when it is detected that the touch portion is touched in accordance with a second touch mode, or when a page turning instruction is recognized in the multimedia data, the display module is controlled to switch the current page of the main interface imaged in a preset imaging area on the lens to the previous page or next page of the main interface imaged; the display module is rotating along its axis, the second touch mode and the page turning instruction are preset as trigger conditions for triggering a page turning function.
  • the display module can obtain multimedia data through its own camera, microphone, etc., or it can obtain multimedia data from the network or a smart terminal or near-eye display device that is connected to it for communication.
  • FIG. 44 and FIG. 45 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display module 2 can be preset to rotate along the counterclockwise axis shown in FIG. 47 as a trigger condition for triggering the main interface to turn up (or down) pages, and the display module 2 can be preset to rotate along the clockwise axis shown in FIG. 45 as a trigger condition for triggering the main interface to turn down (or up) pages.
  • the display module 2 is detected to rotate counterclockwise (or clockwise)
  • the display module 2 is controlled to update the main interface currently imaged on the lens 12, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to image the previous page (or next page) of the main interface on the lens 12.
  • the second touch mode may include two different touch modes, such as single click and double click, or double click and triple click.
  • one of the two different touch modes is a trigger condition for turning the page up
  • the other touch mode is a trigger condition for turning the page down.
  • the main interface turns up, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to image the previous page of the main interface on the lens 12;
  • the main interface turns down, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to image the next page of the main interface on the lens 12.
  • first touch mode and the second touch mode should be two completely different touch modes to ensure that the application can be started from the main interface and the page turning function of the main interface can be carried out in an orderly manner without any error.
  • the multimedia data is voice data or gesture data
  • the main interface turns a page, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to image the previous page (or next page) of the main interface on the lens 12 .
  • the detection of the display module being placed on the thumbnail and rotating the axis is preset as a trigger bar for the main interface zoom function. Preset the display module clockwise (or counterclockwise) axis rotation as the trigger condition for enlarging the thumbnail under the display module; preset the display module counterclockwise (or clockwise) axis rotation as the trigger condition for zooming the main interface.
  • FIG. 46 in the scene shown in FIG. 45 , when the display module 2 rotates clockwise, the thumbnail is enlarged [J]; as shown in FIG. 46 , in the scene shown in FIG. 45 , when the display module 2 rotates counterclockwise, the current page of the main interface is scaled.
  • control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
  • the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a graphical interface of an application, monitoring the movement state of the display module, detecting the contact of a touch portion on the display module, and acquiring multimedia data;
  • the display module When it is detected that the motion state is an axial rotation of the display module, or when it is detected that the touch portion is touched according to a target touch pattern, or when a target instruction is recognized in the multimedia data, the display module is controlled to update a first target area of the graphical interface of the application imaged in a preset imaging area on the lens; the first target area is a graphic area corresponding to a sub-function in the application, and the axial rotation of the display module, the target touch pattern and the target instruction are preset as trigger conditions for triggering the sub-function of the application.
  • the counterclockwise rotation of the display module 2 can be preset as a trigger condition for triggering a song switch to the previous song (or the next song), and the clockwise rotation of the display module 2 can be preset as a trigger condition for triggering a song switch to the next song (or the previous song).
  • the counterclockwise (or clockwise) rotation of the display module 2 is detected, the song currently being played is switched, and the display module 2 is controlled to update the music player interface currently imaged on the lens 12, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to update the song information in the music player interface imaged on the lens 12 to the information of the previous song (or the next song).
  • the multimedia data can be image/video data collected by the built-in micro camera on the display module or voice data collected by the micro microphone, and the eye tracking data is the user's eye image data collected by the built-in micro camera on the display module.
  • the target touch mode may be a single click, a double click, a triple click, and the like.
  • the target instruction may be a preset target gesture, a target voice, and the like.
  • the target eye movement pattern may be an eye movement according to a preset rule.
  • the target touch mode and the target instruction are similar to the aforementioned display module axis rotation, and they may also be preset as trigger conditions for the sub-functions of the application.
  • the trigger (preset) trigger condition is the target touch mode, the target instruction, and the sub-function of the application of the display module axis rotation, thereby controlling the display module to update the area in the graphical interface currently imaged on the lens.
  • the principle is similar to the principle that the aforementioned display module axis rotation triggers the sub-function of the application, thereby controlling the display module to update the area in the graphical interface currently imaged on the lens, and will not be repeated here.
  • control method of the display module further includes:
  • the display module is controlled to update the graphic interface imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens.
  • the first threshold angle ⁇ can be flexibly set by those skilled in the art or users according to actual needs, for example, it can be 15°, 20°, 25° or 30°.
  • connection method of the projection device provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by the control device of the display module.
  • the control device of the display module executing the control method of the display module is taken as an example to illustrate the control device of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG48 a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application is shown.
  • the control device 500 of the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content, and the control device 500 includes:
  • a first detection module 510 is used to detect the relative position between the display module and each thumbnail on the main interface when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is the main interface;
  • the first magnifying module 520 is configured to magnify and display a thumbnail on the display module when it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail.
  • the device 500 further includes:
  • the second magnifying module is used for magnifying and displaying the thumbnail of the at least one thumbnail closest to the display module on the display module when it is detected that the display module is placed on the at least one thumbnail.
  • the device 500 further includes:
  • a second detection module is used to detect contact of a touch portion on the display module when the thumbnail is enlarged;
  • the first control module is used to control the display module to image a graphical interface of an application associated with the enlarged thumbnail in a preset imaging area on the lens when detecting that the touch portion is touched according to a first touch mode; the first touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for the application associated with the enlarged thumbnail.
  • the device 5 further comprises:
  • a first monitoring module configured to monitor the motion state of the display module when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a main interface
  • the second control module is used to control the display module to switch the current page of the main interface imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens to the previous page or next page of the main interface imaged when the display module is detected to be rotating along its axis; the rotation of the display module along its axis is preset as a trigger condition for triggering a page turning function.
  • the device 5 further comprises:
  • a third detection module is used to detect contact of a touch portion on the display module when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a main interface;
  • the third control module is used to control the display module to switch the current page of the main interface imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens to the previous page or next page of the main interface when it is detected that the touch portion is touched according to the second touch mode; the second touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for triggering a page turning function.
  • the device 500 further includes:
  • a first acquisition module configured to acquire multimedia data when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a main interface
  • the fourth control module is used to control the display module to switch the current page of the main interface imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens to the previous page or next page of the main interface when a page turning instruction is recognized in the multimedia data; the page turning instruction is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the page turning function.
  • the device 500 further includes:
  • a second monitoring module is used to monitor the movement state of the display module when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a graphical interface of an application;
  • the fifth control module is used to control the display module to update the first target area of the graphical interface of the application imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens when it is detected that the movement state is the axial rotation of the display module; the first target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the application, and the axial rotation of the display module is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function of the application.
  • the device 500 further includes:
  • a fourth control module configured to detect contact of a touch portion on the display module when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a graphical interface of an application
  • the sixth control module is used to control the display module to update the first target area of the graphical interface of the application imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens when detecting that the touch portion is touched according to the target touch mode; the first target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the application, and the target touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function of the application.
  • the device 500 further includes:
  • a second acquisition module configured to acquire multimedia data when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a graphical interface of an application
  • the seventh control module is used to control the display module to update the first target area of the graphical interface of the application imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens when a target instruction is recognized in the multimedia data;
  • the first target area is a graphic area corresponding to a sub-function in the application, and the target instruction is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function of the application.
  • the control device 5 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application can be an electronic device or a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or a chip.
  • the electronic device can be a terminal or other devices other than a terminal.
  • the electronic device can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a PDA, a vehicle-mounted electronic device, a mobile Internet device (Mobile Internet Device, MID), an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, a robot, a wearable device, an ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), a netbook or a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), etc.
  • NAS Network Attached Storage
  • PC personal computer
  • TV television
  • teller machine a self-service machine
  • control device 500 of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can implement each process implemented in the embodiments of Figures 1 to 46, and will not be described again here to avoid repetition.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device 130, including a processor 131 and a memory 132, wherein the memory 132 stores programs or instructions that can be executed on the processor 131, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not described here.
  • the electronic devices in the embodiments of the present application include the mobile electronic devices and non-mobile electronic devices mentioned above.
  • the processor 1410 is configured to:
  • an application associated with the thumbnail is run, and the display module is controlled to image a graphic interface of the application in a preset imaging area on the lens.
  • the memory 149 can be used to store software programs and various data.
  • the memory 149 may mainly include a first storage area for storing programs or instructions and a second storage area for storing data, wherein the first storage area may store an operating system, an application program or instructions required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc.
  • the memory 149 may include a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or the memory 149 may include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), a static random access memory (SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (DRAM), a synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), a double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDRSDRAM), an enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (ESDRAM), a synchronous link dynamic random access memory (SLDRAM) and a direct memory bus random access memory (DRRAM).
  • the memory 149 in the embodiment of the present application includes but is not limited to these and any other suitable types of memory.
  • the processor 1410 may include one or more processing units; optionally, the processor 1410 integrates an application processor and a modem processor, wherein the application processor mainly processes operations related to an operating system, a user interface, and application programs, and the modem processor mainly processes wireless communication signals, such as a baseband processor. It is understandable that the modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 1410.
  • the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by a near-eye display device.
  • the near-eye display device executing the control method of the display module is taken as an example to illustrate the near-eye display device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a near-eye display device 150, including a processor 151 and a memory 152, wherein the memory 152 stores programs or instructions that can be executed on the processor 151, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated here.
  • any of the above-mentioned product embodiments can implement the various processes of the above-mentioned display module control method embodiment through its own processor operation, and can achieve the same technical effect. In order to avoid repetition, they will not be described one by one.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a readable storage medium, on which a program or instruction is stored.
  • a program or instruction is stored.
  • the processor is the processor in the electronic device or electronic system described in the above embodiment.
  • the readable storage medium includes a computer-readable storage medium, such as a computer read-only memory ROM, a random access memory RAM, a disk or an optical disk, etc.
  • the chip mentioned in the embodiments of the present application can also be called a system-level chip, a system chip, a chip system or a system-on-chip chip, etc.
  • each functional unit in each implementation of the embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each implementation method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.
  • Near-eye display devices are also called head-mounted displays or wearable displays, and are applied to optical lenses.
  • augmented reality AR Augmented Reality
  • virtual reality VR Virtual Reality
  • mixed reality MR Mated Reality
  • extended reality XR Extended Reality
  • the optical lenses in the examples of this application can be goggles, smart glasses, myopia glasses, hyperopia glasses, sports glasses or other near-eye or head-mounted optical lenses, etc.
  • the user's optical lenses can be facing the human eye.
  • the near-eye display device has an optical machine, which may include a micro display, such as Micro-LED (Micro Light-Emitting Diode), uLED (micro light-emitting diode), Micro-oled (Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode), LCoS (Liquid Crystal On Silicon), LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), DMD (Digital Micromirror Device)/DLP (Digital Light Processing) or LBS (Laser Beam Scanning), etc., or any combination of these technologies.
  • the optical machine may also include micro-optics Modules, etc., the micro-optical module is arranged in front of the micro-display, and the light of the display is emitted after passing through the micro-optical module.
  • the description of the micro-display in other embodiments of the present application can refer to this related description.
  • the near-eye display device may also include a circuit board, a battery for supplying power to the optical engine and the circuit board, and an electrical component for realizing electrical connection between each component and the battery.
  • the circuit board and electrical components such as batteries are installed on the temples of the AR glasses, the optical engine is installed on the optical lens, and a channel for wiring is provided on the outside of the optical engine to facilitate power supply to the optical engine.
  • the temples of AR glasses have the need to rotate relative to the frame, the connection between the optical engine and electrical components such as batteries is affected by the relative movement of the temples, resulting in relative misalignment and short circuit in the wiring of the optical engine and electrical components such as batteries; with the relative movement of the temples, the wiring parts of the optical engine and electrical components such as batteries are also prone to water ingress and other problems, affecting the use of AR glasses.
  • the near-eye display device is usually a head-mounted display or other wearable display, which is set in front of the human eye's vision.
  • the structure is relatively complex, which increases the difficulty of fixing the product and affects the production efficiency of the product.
  • the present application proposes a near-eye display module for optical lenses, which can be directly installed on a frame or an optical lens.
  • the near-eye display module includes a first connecting portion for connecting the optical lens and a mounting seat for installing an optical machine; a first electrical compartment for installing electrical components is provided on the first connecting portion, and a mounting seat is formed with a mounting groove for installing the optical machine, and the mounting seat is located on one side of the first connecting portion along the first direction, and the first direction is arranged at an angle with the axial direction of the mounting groove.
  • a first electrical compartment is arranged in the first connecting portion, which can facilitate the installation of electrical components such as batteries on the first connecting portion, reduce the need for a wiring structure for connecting batteries and optical machines to be separately arranged outside the optical lens, and further reduce the problem of water ingress and other problems caused by the relative movement of the temples to the frame; since the axial direction of the mounting groove is arranged at an angle with the first direction, the mounting seat and the first electrical compartment are arranged along the first direction, which can facilitate the reduction of the thickness of the near-eye display device, and after being installed on the optical lens, the visual pressure on the human eye can be reduced, and the comfort of the product can be improved.
  • the glasses may include a frame 11, an optical lens 12 and a temple 13.
  • the optical lens 12 may be mounted on the frame 11, and the temple is connected to the frame 11.
  • the near-eye display module 2 may be mounted on the frame 11 and/or the optical lens 12, which may reduce the need for overly large power supply modules such as batteries on the temples, or reduce the need for wiring parts between the temples and the optical lens 12 for connecting power supply modules such as batteries and the near-eye display module 2.
  • the problems of water ingress, disconnection, short circuit, etc. in the wiring parts caused by the relative movement of the temples and the lenses may be reduced.
  • the display component 1 may be combined with existing ordinary glasses such as myopia, hyperopia, eye protection, sports glasses, etc. to realize the function of enhanced display, so that ordinary glasses have the function of augmented reality of smart glasses.
  • the near-eye display module 2 includes a first connecting portion 101 and a mounting seat 105.
  • the first connecting portion 101 is used to connect to the optical lens 12 and/or the frame.
  • the first connecting portion 101 is provided with a first electrical compartment 1110 for installing electrical components.
  • the mounting seat 105 is connected to one side of the first connecting portion 101 along the first direction 2a.
  • the mounting seat 105 is formed with a mounting groove 1401 for installing the optical machine 400.
  • the first direction 2a is set at an angle to the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401.
  • the first connecting portion 101 can be used as the main structure of the near-eye display module 2, and is used to connect to the optical lens 12.
  • a fixing surface 1203 can be set on the first connecting portion 101, and the fixing surface 1203 can be made of plastic or other materials.
  • the fixing surface 1203 is used to connect to the optical lens 12, or to connect to the frame.
  • the first connecting portion 101 in this example can be directly connected to the optical lens 12, or it can be connected to the optical lens 12 through other intermediate connecting parts such as magnetic attraction and hanging buckles.
  • the first connecting portion 101 in this example can be fixedly connected to the optical lens 12, for example, the first connecting portion 101 can be bonded to the optical lens 12 so that the first connecting portion 101 maintains a relatively fixed position on the optical lens 12.
  • the first connecting portion 101 in this example can be movably mounted on the optical lens 12, for example, the first connecting portion 101 can be relatively slidably connected to the optical lens 12 or relatively rotatably connected.
  • the first connecting portion 101 in this example can also be detachably mounted on the optical lens 12.
  • the first connecting portion 101 can be snapped or adsorbed on the optical lens 12.
  • the fixing surface 1203 may also be provided with a buffer layer to reduce the wear on the optical lens 12.
  • the first connection part 101 is at least partially a hollow structure, and the first electrical compartment 1110 is a hollow cavity opened in the first connection part 101.
  • the first electrical compartment 1110 is used to install electrical components.
  • the electrical components in the example of this application include but are not limited to batteries 8, circuit boards, etc.
  • the following description is based on the assumption that the first electrical compartment 1110 is installed with batteries 8.
  • the mounting seat 105 is used to mount the optical machine 400 .
  • a mounting groove 1401 is formed on the mounting seat 105 .
  • the mounting groove 1401 may be a through groove penetrating the mounting seat 105 or a recessed groove formed on the mounting seat 105 .
  • the mounting groove 1401 has an axial direction
  • the optical machine 400 has a light emitting surface and an optical axis perpendicular to the light emitting surface.
  • the light emitting surface of the optical machine 400 is located on one side of the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401.
  • the light emitting surface of the optical machine 400 in this example can be perpendicular to the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401, and the corresponding optical axis of the optical machine 400 can be parallel to the axis of the mounting groove 1401; or, the light emitting surface of the optical machine 400 is not perpendicular to the axis of the mounting groove 1401, and the optical axis of the optical machine 400 is set at an angle to the first direction, and the optical axis of the optical machine 400 can be neither parallel nor coincident with the first direction.
  • the 2b direction can be the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401, and the optical axis of the optical machine 400 can be set along the 2b direction.
  • the mounting seat 105 in this example can be separately set with the first connecting portion 101 and connected to each other, and the mounting seat 105 can also be set integrally with the first connecting portion 101.
  • the mounting seat 105 is connected to one side of the first connection part 101 along the first direction 2a, so that the mounting seat 105 and the first connection part 101 are arranged along the first direction 2a.
  • the first direction 2a is set at an angle with the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401, which means that the first direction 2a is not parallel to the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401 and does not overlap.
  • the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401 can be perpendicular to the first direction 2a.
  • the mounting seat 105 is provided with the mounting groove 1401.
  • the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 and the mounting groove 1401 can be arranged substantially along the first direction 2a, so that the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 and the mounting groove 1401 can be staggered with each other along the first direction 2a. It is understandable that the axial direction of the installation groove 1401 may not be perpendicular to the first direction 2a. When the installation groove 1401 and the first electrical compartment 1110 are arranged along the first direction 2a, the thickness of the near-eye display module 2 in the axial direction of the installation groove 1401 can also be reduced to a certain extent.
  • the axial side of the installation groove 1401 can be used as the light output side of the optical engine 400.
  • the near-eye display module 2 is installed on the outer side of the optical lens 12 and the light passes through the optical lens 12 to enter the human eye, the overall thickness of the near-eye display module 2 on the optical lens 12 is relatively small, and the optical engine 400 can be powered without increasing the overall thickness of the AR device; when the near-eye display module 2 is installed on the inner side of the optical lens 12, the light does not pass through the lens, and the light can directly enter the human eye.
  • the first electrical compartment 1110 and the mounting groove 1401 are arranged along the first direction 2a, so that the electrical structures such as the battery 8 in the first electrical compartment 1110 and the optical machine 400 in the mounting groove 1401 can maintain relative balance on the near-eye display module 2 to balance the weight of the near-eye display module 2, which helps to improve the stability of the near-eye display module 2 on the optical lens 12.
  • the additional electrical components for connecting the optical machine 400 and the battery 8 at the connection between the temple 13 and the frame 11 of the AR device can be reduced.
  • the problem of water ingress or wear of the electrical components caused by the relative movement of the temple and the frame 11 can be reduced; on the other hand, the complexity of the connection between the temple and the frame 11 can be reduced, and the structure of the AR device can be simplified.
  • the near-eye display module 2 can work independently (for example, displaying image content, etc.) without being connected to the electrical components of the temple, which greatly improves the portability and mobility of the display component 1, and is compatible with other traditional head-mounted devices such as myopia and hyperopia, eye protection, and helmets, and the application scenarios are more diverse.
  • the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 may be a groove opened on the first cover body 102 .
  • the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 may have an opening, and the battery 8 may be placed in the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 through the opening.
  • the opening of the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 can be opened on one side of the first cover body 102 along the first direction 2a, and the opening of the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 can be set away from the mounting seat, and the second cover body 103 can cover the first connecting part 101 along the first direction 2a.
  • the second cover 103 is covered on the first cover 102 along the second direction 2b described in the above examples, the first wiring groove 113 can have an opening toward the second cover 103, and the second cover 103 can be covered on the opening of the first wiring groove 113, so that one end of the first wiring groove 113 is connected to the mounting groove 1401, and the other end is connected to the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • a first wire passing hole 15 is opened on the first cover body 102, one end of the first wire passing hole 15 is connected to the first wiring groove 113, and the other end is connected to the installation groove 1401.
  • the first wire passing hole 15 is used to accommodate the conductive module of the optical machine 400.
  • the conductive module of the optical machine 400 passes through the first wire passing hole 15 and is connected to the electrical device via the first wiring groove 113.
  • the first cover body 102 is provided with a first recess 112 for accommodating the electrode.
  • the first recess 112 is connected to the first wiring groove 113 and the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • the electrode can be used to connect the conductive module and the electrical device.
  • the electrode can be used to connect the corresponding electrode of the battery 8.
  • the first sink 112 is connected to the first wiring groove 113 and the first electrical compartment 1110, which means that the first sink 112 has at least an opening that is connected to the first wiring groove 113 and the first electrical compartment 1110, so that the pole piece in the first sink 112 can be used to connect the electrical device and the conductive module in the first wiring groove 113.
  • the pole piece described in this example can be a metal sheet or other structure that can be used for conduction.
  • the first sink 112 in this example can be used as an intermediate connector between the electrical device and the conductive module to facilitate the connection between the conductive module and the electrical device.
  • the pole piece since the pole piece can be installed in the first wiring groove 113, the pole piece does not occupy the space of the first electrical compartment 1110, which can reduce the interference of the pole piece with the battery 8, improve the convenience of installing the battery 8, and also help to improve the stability of the battery 8.
  • the first electrical compartment 1110 has an opening facing the second cover 103 and a bottom wall arranged opposite to the opening, and the first sink 112 is opened on the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110 is used for the battery 8 to enter the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110 is arranged opposite to the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110 is located at the deepest installation position of the battery 8 in the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • the first sink 112 is opened on the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110, so that after the electrode is installed in the first sink 112, the electrode does not occupy the internal space of the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110 may be located on a side of the first cover 102 away from the mounting seat 105 along the first direction 2a
  • the second cover 103 may cover the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110 along the first direction 2a
  • the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110 may be located on a side of the first electrical compartment 1110 close to the mounting seat 105 along the first direction 2a
  • the first wiring groove 113 may connect the mounting groove 1401 and the first sink 112 nearby.
  • the second cover 103 covers the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110 along the second direction 2b
  • the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110 may be located on an end surface of the first electrical compartment 1110 along the second direction 2b
  • the first wiring groove 113 may be partially located on the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110, partially located on the side wall of the first electrical compartment 1110, and connected to the mounting groove 1401.
  • the first cover 102 is further provided with a second wiring groove 116 connecting the mounting groove 1401 and the first electrical compartment 1110, and the second wiring groove 116 is used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through and connect to the electrical device.
  • the second wiring groove 116 in this example cooperates with the first wiring groove 113 so that the conductive module of the optical machine 400 can be connected to the positive and negative electrodes of the battery 8 respectively.
  • the second wiring groove 116 is used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through and connect to the negative electrode of the battery 8.
  • the electrical device in this example is also a combination of a battery 8 and a circuit board, and the second wiring groove 116 can be used for the conductive module of the optical machine to pass through and connect the circuit board and the optical machine 400.
  • the first wiring groove 113 can be connected to the second wiring groove 116, and the first wiring groove 113 can also be set independently of the second wiring groove 116.
  • the first wire hole 15 described in any of the above examples is opened at one end of the first cover body 102 close to the installation groove 1401 , and the first wiring groove 113 and the second wiring groove 116 can be connected to the first wire hole 15 respectively.
  • the second cover 103 is provided with a second sink 1201 on one side facing the first cover 102.
  • the second sink 1201 is used to accommodate at least one of the battery 8, the circuit board, the magnet 53, and the counterweight.
  • the first cover 102 can close the second sink 1201 of the second cover 103 so that the battery 8, the circuit board, the magnet 53, or the counterweight in the second sink 1201 will not be exposed outside the first connecting portion 101.
  • the second sink 1201 it is convenient to add structures such as the battery 8 inside the first connecting portion 101 to extend the battery life of the near-eye display module 2.
  • the circuit board structure of the near-eye display module 2 can be installed in the second sink 1201. While the counterweight of the near-eye display module 2 is balanced by the circuit board, the circuit board and other structures are stored inside the first connecting portion 101, reducing the laying of the circuit board outside the near-eye display module 2, which helps to simplify the structure of the near-eye display module 2 and improve its assembly performance.
  • the second sink 1201 can also be used to install magnets 53 and/or counterweights.
  • the near-eye display module 2 can be adsorbed to a preset position on the optical lens 12 by the magnet 53, so that the position of the near-eye display module 2 on the optical lens 12 can be adjusted as needed to accommodate users with different pupil distances.
  • the second sink 1201 in this example can also be used to install other functional modules.
  • the depth of the second sink groove 1201 in this example can be determined according to the number, shape and volume of the batteries 8 and/or circuit boards and/or magnets 53 and/or counterweights to be installed.
  • the second sink groove 1201 and the first sink groove 112 are arranged relative to each other to save space inside the first connecting part 101.
  • the second sink groove 1201 in this example can provide sufficient space inside the near-eye display module 2 to facilitate the expansion of functional components of the near-eye display module 2 when necessary.
  • the adsorption force of a single magnetic suction on the battery may not be sufficient to support the near-eye display module 2 on the optical lens 12.
  • a metal block or magnet can be added to the second sink groove 1201 to achieve a more stable magnetic clamping between the first connecting part 101 and the external magnet.
  • the battery 8 When the battery 8 is installed in the first electrical compartment 1110, the battery 8 can be embedded in the first electrical compartment 1110 through the through hole 114, and the through hole 114 is closed by the sealed compartment cover.
  • the sealed compartment cover in this example may be consistent with the shape and size of the through hole 114, so that the sealed compartment cover can completely close the through hole 114; the sealed compartment cover in this example may also cover the outer surface of the first connecting portion 101 to cover the through hole 114 from the outer surface of the first connecting portion 101; the sealed compartment cover in this example may also be partially embedded in the through hole 114 and partially covered on the outer surface of the first connecting portion 101, so as to facilitate the fixing of the sealed compartment cover.
  • the first connecting portion 101 includes the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 described in any of the above examples, and the through hole 114 can be provided on the first cover 102 or the second cover 103.
  • the following description is made by taking the through hole 114 provided on the first cover 102 as an example.
  • the first sinking groove 112 described in any of the above examples is provided on the first cover 102, and the first sinking groove 112 is used to install the pole piece, and the first sinking groove 112 and the through hole 114 can be staggered.
  • the near-eye display module 2 also includes an annular fixing portion 1151 connected to the sealing chamber cover 115.
  • the annular fixing portion 1151 is used to be sleeved on the periphery of the electrical device, and the through hole 114 is also used for the annular fixing portion 1151 to move toward the outside of the first connecting portion 101.
  • the annular fixing portion 1151 in this example is used to be sleeved on the periphery of the electrical device.
  • the annular fixing portion 1151 in this example can be integrally provided with the sealing chamber cover 115, or the annular fixing portion 1151 can be separately provided with the sealing chamber cover 115 and connected to each other.
  • the annular fixing portion 1151 in this example can be a complete annular structure or a partially disconnected annular structure.
  • the through hole 114 is provided at one end of the first connection portion 101 away from the mounting seat 105, and the through hole 114 is used to allow the power device to move along the first direction 2a.
  • the mounting seat 105 is provided on one side of the first connection portion 101 along the first direction 2a, by allowing the electrical device to move along the first direction 2a via the through hole 114, the interference of the mounting seat 105 on the electrical device during assembly and disassembly of the electrical device can be reduced.
  • the first connection part 101 includes a first cover 102 and a second cover 103.
  • the first cover 102 is connected to the mounting seat 105.
  • the first cover 102 is provided with a first electrical compartment 1110.
  • the first cover 102 has an opening connected to the first electrical compartment 1110 on one side away from the mounting seat 105.
  • the second cover 103 covers the first cover 102.
  • the second cover 103 covers the opening of the first cover 102 along the first direction 2a.
  • the second cover 103 covers the side of the first cover 102 away from the mounting seat 105 to close the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • the opening is used for electrical components such as the battery 8 to enter the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • a second sink 1201 can be opened at a position corresponding to the first electrical compartment 1110 on the second cover 103, and when the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 cover each other to form the first connecting portion 101, the electrical device can be partially located in the second sink 1201.
  • the second sink 1201 can also be used to install other functional modules such as circuit boards and magnets.
  • the first wiring groove 113 described in any of the above examples is opened on the first cover 102 to facilitate the connection between the conductive module of the optical machine 400 and the electrical device; the first wiring groove 113 can be located on the side of the first cover 102 away from the second cover 103.
  • the first sinking groove 112 described in any of the above examples may also be provided on the first cover body 102 , and the first sinking groove 112 may be connected to the first wiring groove 113 .
  • a protrusion 104 is provided on one side of the first connection portion 101 close to the mounting seat 105.
  • the mounting seat 105 is connected to the two protrusions 104, respectively.
  • the two protrusions 104 and the mounting seat 105 enclose a mounting groove 1401.
  • the two protrusions 104 are arranged at intervals so that the optical machine 400 can be partially located between the two protrusions 104.
  • the mounting seat 105 is connected to the two protrusions 104, respectively, and encloses the two protrusions 104 to form the mounting groove 1401.
  • a groove is provided on one side of the mounting seat 105 facing the first connection portion 101, and the groove of the mounting seat 105 and the gap between the two protrusions 104 enclose the mounting groove 1401.
  • the protrusion 104 in this example can be used as a connection part between the first connection part 101 and the mounting seat 105 to improve the firmness of the connection part between the first connection part 101 and the mounting seat 105.
  • a first wire hole 15 connecting the mounting groove 1401 and the first electrical compartment 1110 is opened on the first connection part 101, and the first wire hole 15 is used to accommodate the conductive module of the optical machine 400; the end of the first wire hole 15 away from the first electrical compartment 1110 is located between the two protrusions 104.
  • the first wire hole 15 can be hidden between the two protrusions 104 to reduce the exposure of the conductive module of the optical machine 400 component, thereby reducing the problem of water ingress into the near-eye display module 2.
  • one of the mounting seat 105 and the protrusion 104 is provided with a clamping member 1402, and the other is provided with a slot 1301, and the clamping member 1402 is clamped in the slot 1301.
  • the clamping member 1402 and the slot 1301 in this example are adapted to each other so that the mounting seat 105 is mounted on the protrusion 104.
  • the slot 1301 in this example can be a straight slot, a T-slot, or a slot structure of other shapes.
  • the clamping member 1402 in this example can be provided integrally with the mounting seat 105, or can be provided separately from the mounting seat 105 and connected to the mounting seat 105.
  • the first connection portion 101 includes the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 described in any of the above examples, and the second cover 103 covers the first cover 102 along the first direction 2a.
  • the protrusion 104 is provided on one side of the first cover 102 away from the second cover 103.
  • the first connection portion 101 includes the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 described in any of the above examples, and the second cover 103 covers the first cover 102 along the second direction 2b.
  • the protrusion 104 is provided at one end of the first cover 102 or the second cover 103 close to the mounting seat 105.
  • the first connection portion 101 includes the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 described in any of the above examples, and the second cover 103 covers the first cover 102 along the second direction 2b.
  • the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 are respectively provided with the above-mentioned protrusions 104 at one end close to the mounting seat 105, and the clamping member 1402 on the mounting seat 105 is clamped on the protrusions 104 of the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 at the same time.
  • the clamping member 1402 can be in a T-shaped structure, and the protrusions 104 on the first cover body 102 and the second cover body 103 are respectively provided with clamping grooves 1301.
  • the clamping grooves 1301 on the first cover body 102 and the second cover body 103 are enclosed to form a T-shaped groove, and the clamping member 1402 is clamped in the T-shaped groove to block the movement of the mounting seat relative to the first connecting portion 101 along the first direction 2a.
  • the near-eye display module 2 also includes a fixed base 600, which is installed in the installation groove 1401.
  • the fixed base 600 is provided with a fixed groove 610 for installing the optical machine 400;
  • the fixed base 600 is provided with a second wire hole 620, and the second wire hole 620 is used to accommodate the conductive module of the optical machine 400; one end of the second wire hole 620 is connected to the fixed groove 610, and the other end passes through the outer wall of the fixed base 600.
  • the fixing seat 600 is used to install the optical machine 400 on the mounting seat 105, and the fixing seat 600 can also protect the optical machine 400.
  • the fixing groove 610 can be a through groove or a sunken groove opened on the fixing seat 600.
  • the fixing seat 600 in this example can be fixedly connected to the mounting seat 105, and the fixing seat 600 can also be movably installed on the mounting seat 105.
  • the second wire hole 620 serves as a channel for accommodating the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to facilitate the wiring of the optical machine 400.
  • the first connection portion 101 is provided with a first wire passing hole 15 as described in any of the above examples, and the second wire passing hole 620 can be connected to the first wire passing hole 15 .
  • the axial direction of the second wire-passing hole 620 is set at an angle to the axial direction of the fixing groove 610.
  • the second wire-passing hole 620 in this example is used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through, so as to facilitate the connection of the conductive module of the optical machine 400 with the electrical components in the first electrical compartment 1110.
  • the shape of the fixing groove 610 in this example can be adapted to the shape of the optical machine 400, and the fixing groove 610 has an opening.
  • the opening of the fixing groove 610 can be set on the same side as the light-emitting side of the optical machine 400, and the axial direction of the fixing groove 610 is set at an angle to the first direction 2a.
  • the axial direction of the fixing groove 610 can be perpendicular to the plane where the opening of the fixing groove 610 is located.
  • the axial direction of the second wire-passing hole 620 is set at an angle to the axial direction of the fixing groove 610, which means that the axial direction of the second wire-passing hole 620 is not parallel to nor coincident with the axial direction of the fixing groove 610.
  • the conductive module of the optical engine 400 can be led out from the side of the fixing seat 600 to shorten the distance between the conductive module of the optical engine 400 and the first electrical compartment 1110. Since the conductive module can be led out from the side of the fixing seat 600, the fixing groove 610 can be set as a sink structure in this example to facilitate sealing between the optical engine 400 and the inner wall surface of the fixing groove 610.
  • the fixing base 600 is provided with a second electrical compartment 630, and the second wire hole 620 is connected to the fixing groove 610 through the second electrical compartment 630.
  • the second electrical compartment 630 in this example can be used to accommodate structures such as an optical machine and a circuit board, so that the circuit module of the optical machine 400 can be built into the fixing base 600, thereby simplifying the structure of the near-eye display module 2, improving the compactness of the product, facilitating the packaging of the product, and facilitating the functional expansion of the near-eye display module 2.
  • the second electrical compartment 630 in this example is connected to the second wire hole 620, which can facilitate the conductive module and circuit board of the optical machine 400 to be led out through the second wire hole 620 for easy wiring.
  • one of the outer wall surface of the fixing seat 600 and the inner wall surface of the mounting groove 1401 is a convex arc.
  • the mounting groove 1401 is used to allow the fixed seat 600 to rotate inside to adjust the light output angle of the optical machine 400.
  • the convex curved surface and the concave curved surface in this example are adapted to each other, which means that the convex curved surface can fit the concave curved surface so that the fixed seat 600 can rotate relatively in the mounting groove 1401.
  • the optical machine 400 on the fixed seat 600 can also rotate synchronously, so that the light output angle of the optical machine 400 can change synchronously.
  • the outer surface of the fixing seat 600 in this example may be at least partially spherical, and the inner wall surface of the mounting groove 1401 may be a concave arc surface, so that the fixing seat 600 can rotate relative to the mounting seat 105 in the mounting groove 1401.
  • the outer surface of the fixing seat 600 in this example may also be a concave arc surface, and the inner wall surface of the mounting groove 1401 may be a convex arc surface, so that the fixing seat 600 can rotate relative to the mounting seat 105 in the mounting groove 1401.
  • the first connecting portion 101 of the near-eye display module 2 is connected to the first side of the optical lens 12; the near-eye display device also includes a second connecting portion 500, which is arranged opposite to the first connecting portion 101 and is used to connect to the second side of the optical lens 12, and the first side and the second side of the optical lens 12 are two sides arranged oppositely; the first connecting portion 101 and the second connecting portion 500 are used to clamp the lenses to each other and allow the mounting seat 105 to move on the lens to adjust the position of the optical machine 400 relative to the lens.
  • the second connecting part 500 is at least partially made of magnetic material.
  • the second connecting part 500 in this example can be made of magnetic material as a whole or partially.
  • the second connecting part 500 includes a sleeve 510 and a magnet 53 embedded in the sleeve 510. Since structures such as the battery 8 can be adsorbed by the magnet 53, when the first connecting part 101 and the second connecting part 500 are respectively arranged on both sides of the optical lens 12, the second connecting part 500 can adsorb the first connecting part 101 to a preset position on the optical lens 12.
  • a protective member 520 is provided on the second connection portion 500, and the protective member 520 may be a protective film or a protective cover, and the protective member 520 is used to block between the magnet 53 and the optical lens 12 to reduce the wear on the optical lens 12.
  • the first connection part 101 has a fixing surface 1203, and the fixing surface 1203 is arranged opposite to the second connection part 500; the fixing surface 1203 is arranged on the same side as the light-emitting side of the optical machine 400; the fixing surface 1203 in this example can be a surface on the first connection part 101.
  • the fixing surface 1203 is arranged on the same side as the light-emitting side of the optical machine 400.
  • the difference from the previous example is that the fixing surface 1203 is arranged away from the light-emitting side of the optical engine 400.
  • the fixing surface 1203 in this example can be a surface on the first connecting portion 101.
  • the fixing surface 1203 is arranged on the opposite side of the light-emitting side of the optical engine 400.
  • the present application also proposes an example of a wearable device, which may be glasses for myopia or hyperopia, sports, eye protection, or a helmet or smart glasses, etc., including a near-eye display module or device as in any of the above-mentioned examples.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an optical module 100', which can be applied to various related embodiments, and the following are detailed descriptions.
  • the optical module 100' can be applied to a near-eye display device 200', for example, it can be applied to augmented reality AR (Augmented Reality), virtual reality VR (Virtual Reality), mixed reality MR (Mixed Reality) and extended reality XR (Extended Reality), goggles, smart glasses, myopia glasses, hyperopia glasses, sports glasses, contact lenses, helmets or other related near-eye display devices.
  • augmented reality AR Augmented Reality
  • VR Virtual Reality
  • mixed reality MR Mated Reality
  • extended reality XR Extended Reality
  • goggles smart glasses, myopia glasses, hyperopia glasses, sports glasses, contact lenses, helmets or other related near-eye display devices.
  • the optical module 100' includes a substrate 10', including a first end 12' and a second end 14' opposite to each other, wherein the substrate 10' can be solid, for example, the material used can be a transparent or light-transmitting hard cuttable material, for example, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate), PC (polycarbonate) plastic, resin, glass, etc.; for example, it can be a regular shape such as a cylindrical, prism or truncated cone, and of course, it can also be an irregular shape.
  • the substrate 10' may also have a hollow structure. For example, it may be formed by at least two groups of thin walls bonded together with optical glue. The center may be hollow, and the first reflection surface 20', the second reflection surface 30, the incident surface 40, the exit surface 50, etc. may be formed on the thin walls.
  • a first reflective surface 20' disposed at the first end 12' of the base 10', and configured to allow reflection of light
  • the second reflective surface 30 is disposed at the second end 14' of the substrate 10' and is configured to receive the light reflected from the first reflective surface 20' and reflect it again; it can be understood that the first end 12' and the second end 14' can be opposite ends.
  • the first reflective surface 20' and the second reflective surface 30 can be provided with a reflective material, which can be a reflective material such as a metal or a metal alloy, such as aluminum, silver, or a mixture of aluminum and silver.
  • An incident surface 40 is disposed at the second end 14' of the substrate 10' and is surrounded by the second reflecting surface 30;
  • An exit surface 50 is disposed at the first end 12' of the base 10' and surrounds the first reflection surface 20'; the size of the exit surface 50 may be the same as the size of the second reflection window 1312, and in other embodiments, the size of the exit surface 50 may be different from the size of the second reflection window 1312;
  • the annular side surface 60 has one end connected to the second reflection surface 30 and the other end connected to the emission surface 50 .
  • the incident surface 40 and the exit surface 50 are aspherical surfaces, spherical surfaces, free-form surfaces, or a combination thereof.
  • the incident surface 40 is configured to receive light L from the image of the microdisplay 80.
  • the light enters the substrate 10' through the non-planar (but non-spherical, spherical, free-form surfaces, or a combination thereof) incident surface 40, is reflected by the first reflection surface 20', then reflected by the second reflection surface 3, and leaves the substrate 10' through the non-planar exit surface 50.
  • the microdisplay 80 for example, can be the technology or combination described in the above-mentioned related embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the optical module can be combined with existing ordinary glasses such as myopia, hyperopia, eye protection, sports glasses, etc. to achieve the function of enhanced display, so that It is understood that the black or shaded areas of the reflective surfaces (such as the first reflective surface 20', the second reflective surface 30) in the relevant drawings (such as 1-2, 8-11, etc.) of the present application only illustrate that they have a reflective layer, and do not represent the actual thickness design.
  • existing ordinary glasses such as myopia, hyperopia, eye protection, sports glasses, etc.
  • the incident surface 40 is generally a plane, and the integrity of the entire module is ensured during subsequent packaging (for example, an overall regular cylinder, etc.), and the exit surface 50 is also often designed to be a plane.
  • the research of the present application found that based on the size requirements in product design, such as miniaturization, lightweight, and combination with existing glasses, the sizes of the incident surface, the first and second reflecting surfaces, and the exit surface cannot be increased arbitrarily.
  • the optical module is limited to a small size within a fixed range, such as less than 5mm*5mm*5mm or even smaller.
  • the present application changes the original incident surface and the exit surface from a plane to a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, a free-form surface, or a combination thereof, and fully redesigns the shape structure of each surface, so that the image light L of the microdisplay 80 enters from the non-planar incident surface 40, wherein the incident surface 40 is a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, a free-form surface, or a combination thereof, and then enters the substrate. 10' to the first reflection surface 20', then reflected to the second reflection surface 30, and finally leave the substrate 10' through the non-planar exit surface 50.
  • the exit surface 50 can be one or a combination of a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, and a free-form surface.
  • the light L ( Figure 67) from the edge of the microdisplay 80 or near the edge position is more likely to move toward the optical axis, while the light L from the edge of the microdisplay 80 or near the edge position of the existing planar incident surface and exit surface cannot move toward the direction close to the optical axis, thereby effectively improving the utilization rate of the light from the edge of the microdisplay 80 or near the edge position, effectively reducing light loss, and effectively improving the light effect.
  • the light in the prior art is not easy to move toward the optical axis, resulting in a small field of view angle, while the present application makes full use of the light L at the center and the edge, so that the field of view angle is effectively improved.
  • the folded optical path effectively reduces the size of the entire optical system, making the entire module more portable, and the shorter reflection path reduces light loss and effectively improves the light effect, and the overall imaging quality is better.
  • the lateral dimension of the annular side surface 60 tends to decrease along the line direction from the second reflective surface 30 to the exit surface 50, that is, the maximum outer contour dimension of the exit surface 50 can be smaller than the maximum outer contour dimension of the second reflective surface 30, thereby ensuring that the light L entering from the edge of the incident surface 40 from the micro display 80 is effectively contracted to the position of the central optical axis Z, further effectively improving the field of view angle and improving the image quality.
  • the first reflection surface 20 ′ and the second reflection surface 30 are one or a combination of total internal reflection surfaces of aspherical, spherical, and free-form surfaces. It can be understood that such reflection can effectively reduce optical loss and improve light efficiency and imaging quality.
  • the incident surface 40 includes a first section and a second section from the center to the periphery, the first section is bent toward the first direction of the optical axis Z, the first direction can be the positive direction of the optical axis Z (light emitting direction), the second section is bent toward the second direction of the optical axis Z opposite to the first direction, the second direction can be the negative direction of the optical axis Z (away from the light emitting direction), the first reflection surface 20 ′, the second reflection surface 30, and the exit surface 50 are bent toward the first direction of the optical axis Z, that is, bent toward the positive direction of the optical axis Z.
  • the first section of the incident surface 40 corresponds to an area of the microdisplay 80 that is the center or close to the center of the microdisplay 80
  • the second section corresponds to an area of the microdisplay 80 that is the edge or close to the edge (relatively far from the center) of the microdisplay 80. Therefore, the light at the edge or close to the edge of the microdisplay 80 can be reflected as much as possible to the edge or close to the edge of the first reflecting surface 20', and then further reflected by the first reflecting surface 20' to the edge or close to the edge of the second reflecting surface 30.
  • the non-planar exit surface 50 makes the light move closer to the center of the optical axis Z, thereby effectively improving the utilization rate of the light at the edge or close to the edge of the microdisplay 80, and improving the lighting effect and imaging quality.
  • the first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30, the exit surface 50 and the incident surface 40 may all adopt a non-planar design, for example, they may be a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, a free-form surface or a combination thereof, but their bending directions may be different, wherein the first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30 and the exit surface 50 may be the same, as described in Table 1 below, the sagittal values of the first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30 and the exit surface 50 are positive values, the sagittal value of the incident surface 40 is positive in the range of 0-0.6mm, and is negative in the range of 0.65-0.85mm, it can be seen that the incident surface 40 is first bent toward the positive direction of the optical axi
  • the second reflecting surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflecting surface 20' have a projected contour shape on the plane where the vertical optical axis Z is located.
  • the contour shape can be a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, a rounded rectangle, a trapezoid, or other geometric figures.
  • the plane where the vertical optical axis Z is located can be, for example, a cross section, or it can be a plane viewed from the first end 12' or the second end 14' or a corresponding top view or bottom view.
  • the contour shapes of the incident surface 40 and the first reflecting surface 20' can be similar to each other, and the contour shapes of the second reflecting surface 30 and the exit surface 50 can be similar to each other.
  • the contour shape of the incident surface 40 can also be similar to the contour shape of the second reflecting surface 30; the contour shape of the exit surface 50 can also be similar to the contour shape of the first reflecting surface 20', for example, both are regular polygons, etc. It can be understood that the geometric shape of the outer contour of the relevant surface can be flexibly designed according to the outer contour of the microdisplay 80 or the whole to meet the assembly requirements of different sizes and shapes and fully obtain the light from the microdisplay 80.
  • the second reflection surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflection surface 20' can all be the same, for example, they are all one of the circular, elliptical or regular polygonal contours, so that the light of the microdisplay 80 can be fully reflected and utilized, achieving better imaging quality and light extraction efficiency.
  • the first reflecting surface 20' includes a first vertex O2
  • the second reflecting surface 30 includes a second vertex O3
  • the incident surface 40 includes a third vertex O4
  • the exit surface 50 includes a fourth vertex O5;
  • the first vertex O2, the second vertex O3, the third vertex O4 and the fourth vertex O5 are located on the optical axis Z
  • the incident surface 40, the first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30 and the exit surface 50 are symmetrically designed relative to the cross-section where the optical axis is located to ensure that the optical module 100' is not eccentric, that is, the optical path area on one side will not be too large or too small than the optical path area on the other side.
  • the second vertex Q3 can be the point formed by the final intersection of the curved surface of the second reflecting surface 30 extended relative to the center of the incident surface 40.
  • the dotted line in Figure 62(b) indicates that the extension toward the center intersects to form the second vertex Q3.
  • the fourth vertex Q5 can be the point formed by the final intersection of the curved surface of the exit surface 50 extended relative to the center of the first reflecting surface 20'.
  • the dotted line in Figure 62(d) indicates that the extension toward the center intersects to form the fourth vertex Q5.
  • the vertices of the second reflection surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflection surface 20' are all located on the same optical axis Z, which can ensure the symmetry of the overall light path.
  • the second reflection surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflection surface 20' can be designed symmetrically relative to the optical axis Z, or the above-mentioned surfaces can be designed symmetrically relative to the plane passing through the optical axis Z.
  • the second reflection surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflection surface 20' are coaxially designed, which can ensure that the entire light path is not eccentric (deviating from the optical axis Z, etc.), ensuring clearer imaging and higher imaging quality.
  • the incident surface 40 and the second reflective surface 30 intersect at a first intersection line 122', and the exit surface 50 and the first reflective surface 20' intersect at a second intersection line 124'.
  • the first intersection line 122' and the second intersection line 124' here can be understood as the intersection of different surfaces.
  • the figure uses dotted lines to indicate the shape of the intersection line.
  • the shape of the intersection line can be determined by the outer contour shape of the incident surface 40 and the first reflective surface 20', or the shape of the intersection line can be determined by the inner contour shape of the second reflective surface 30 or the inner contour shape of the exit surface 50.
  • the intersection lines 122' and 124' can be circles, ellipses, polygons, etc.
  • the shapes of the incident surface 40 and the first reflective surface 20' can be circles, ellipses, polygons, etc.
  • the distance between the first vertex O2 and the third vertex O4 is not greater than 2.8 mm, that is, the central thickness of the optical module 100', for example, the central thickness along the optical axis Z is not greater than 2.8 mm, for example, it can be 2.8 mm, 2.5 mm, 2 mm, 1.8 mm, 1.6 mm, etc.
  • this thickness can also be understood as the average thickness between the exit surface 50 and the incident surface 40, or the average thickness of the entire substrate 10', etc.; the first intersection line 122' is relative to the second vertex
  • the distance between O3 and the line connecting the third vertex O4 is not greater than 1.35 mm, that is, the radius of the incident surface 40 is not greater than 1.35 mm, for example, it can be 1.35 mm, 1.2 mm, 1 mm, 0.8 mm, 0.6 mm, etc.
  • the distance between the second intersection line 124' and the line connecting the first vertex O2 and the fourth vertex O5 is not greater than 1.5 mm, that is, the radius of the first reflecting surface 20' is not greater than 1.5 mm, for example, it can be 1.5 mm, 1.3 mm, 1 mm, 0.85 mm, 0.75 mm, etc.
  • the radius (vertical distance from the outer contour to the vertex) corresponding to the annular side surface 60, the light emitting surface 50, and the second reflecting surface 30 may be no greater than 3 mm, that is, the radius of the annular side surface 60 is no greater than 3 mm, the radius of the light emitting surface 50 is no greater than 3 mm, and the radius of the second reflecting surface 30 is no greater than 3 mm, for example, it can be 3 mm, 2.8 mm, 2.5 mm, 2 mm, etc.; the distance from the second intersection line 124' to the edge of the emission surface 50 can have the same value in a circumferential direction, for example, the width value of the emission surface 50 is consistent along the circumference of the first reflecting surface 20'; wherein, the distance from the second intersection line 124' to the edge of the emission surface 50 The distance is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1.6mm, for example, it can be 1mm, 1.5mm, 0.8, 0.7mm, etc.
  • the above radius can be the radius parameter of the projection shape of each face on a plane that is a circle, etc.
  • the above radius can also be described as the maximum radius it has. For example, taking an ellipse as an example, its long side can be understood as the radius described above.
  • the size design of the embodiment of the present application can make the entire optical module have a smaller volume and weight, and does not affect the light path transmission efficiency, which is conducive to mutual adaptation with the frame or lens of the existing near-eye display device (such as near and far vision, eye protection, sports, smart glasses, helmets), and there is no need to significantly change the structural design of the existing display device, etc., which can achieve the compatibility of enhanced display and traditional display devices, improve the portability of the optical module and enrich the application scenarios.
  • the existing near-eye display device such as near and far vision, eye protection, sports, smart glasses, helmets
  • light from the microdisplay passes through the optical module from the pupil of the eyeball 300 to the retina to form an image 310.
  • the positional structural relationship of the relevant components (e.g., the eyeball 300, the image 310, etc.) in FIG. 73 is only an exemplary description diagram for convenience of calculation and understanding.
  • the following calculation process can be performed in one dimension, and some approximations such as small angles are performed to illustrate various principles, wherein the small angle approximation is: ⁇ sin ⁇ tan ⁇ .
  • the above calculation can be directly extended to two dimensions, and more accurate calculations can be performed.
  • the field of view FOV Field Of View
  • FOV Field Of View
  • the lower limit of the field of view FOV can be obtained according to the derivation of the above formula ⁇ 1 ⁇ : in,
  • S2 is the diameter of the first reflective surface 20' (i.e., twice the distance of the second intersection line 124' relative to the line connecting the first vertex O2 and the fourth vertex O5)
  • Lm is the thickness of the substrate 10', and can also be the center thickness of the optical axis or the average thickness of the substrate 10', or the average thickness from the micro display to the first reflective surface 20', etc.
  • the upper limit of the field of view angle is often more determined by the optical module parameters, and in actual design, the size of the optical module is generally restricted more strictly (or fixed), such as having a small size and being compatible with traditional head-mounted devices. Therefore, the lower limit of the field of view angle that can be met is often more important and can be designed according to actual needs.
  • the first term is the double integral of the angle over the image size, which exists as an implicit expression in the design of the optical module as a whole, and the incident surface 40 and the exit surface 50 are designed as non-planar surfaces, wherein the non-planar surface can be one or a combination of a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, and a free-form surface.
  • the non-planar surface can increase the double integral value, thereby increasing the lower limit (i.e., the minimum value) of the field of view angle of the optical module. It can be seen that when the existing size and related parameters such as the eyeball are limited, the field of view angle is difficult to change within the limited size.
  • the present application changes the original planar design to a non-planar design by changing the shapes of the incident surface 40 and the exit surface 50, so that the light from the relative edge of the micro display can enter the first reflection surface 20' and be projected to the outside of the substrate 10' through the exit surface 50.
  • the light from the edge of the micro display is more fully utilized, and a projection light with a larger angle relative to the optical axis Z can be formed, thereby forming a larger field of view angle, better lighting effect, and better imaging quality.
  • the aspherical surface, spherical surface, and free-form surface of the incident surface 40, the first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30, and the exit surface 50 can be described by a polynomial vector height equation, for example, calculated using Zernike polynomials, and the polynomial vector height equation can be:
  • Z is the surface height, that is, the distance from the vertex (such as s2' in Figure 62c), h is the radial distance (the distance from the curved surface to the optical axis, such as h2' in 3c), c is the curvature of the curved surface, k is the coefficient, and A, B, C, and D are the corresponding multi-order coefficients respectively; among them, when k, A, B, C, and D are zero, it can be the calculation formula of the height of the sphere; as a free-form surface, multiple reference points can be taken as analytical expressions to obtain;
  • Figure 62 shows the contour schematic diagrams of each related surface, among which Figure 62(a) is the contour schematic diagram of the incident surface 40, Figure 62(b) is the contour schematic diagram of the second reflecting surface 30, Figure 62(c) is the contour schematic diagram of the first reflecting surface 20', and Figure 62(d) is the contour schematic diagram of the exit surface 50.
  • Table 1 exemplarily describes the relevant parameters of some surfaces (part of them are selected for example), where h4-Z4 correspond to the parameters of the incident surface 40, h2-Z2 correspond to the parameters of the first reflecting surface 20', h3-Z3 correspond to the parameters of the second reflecting surface 30, and h5-Z5 correspond to the parameters of the exit surface 50.
  • the optical module also includes an outer edge 70, which is arranged on the annular side surface 60.
  • the height of the outer edge 70 can be higher than the annular side surface 60, wherein the circumference of the outer edge 70 can be a full circle, or can be spaced, etc.
  • the extension of the outer edge 70 in the optical axis Z direction may not exceed the annular side surface 60, that is, the thickness of the outer edge 70 may not exceed the height of the annular side surface 69, so the outer edge 70 can be a relatively thin protrusion, or the outer edge 70 can also be a thread or other clip-on structure, etc.
  • the outer edge 70 can be located at one end close to the exit surface 50, and the outer edge 70 is configured to be assembled with an external mechanism.
  • the external mechanism can be, for example, a clamp, a jig, etc., so that the optical module can be easily clamped or transported to avoid damage to the substrate 10' or other surfaces, or the external mechanism can also be a related shell to which the optical module needs to be assembled.
  • the corresponding assembly shell is provided with a fixing groove, etc., and the entire optical module can be positioned or fixed by the outer edge 70.
  • the outer edge 70 is also provided with at least one straight edge 72.
  • the straight edge 72 may be tangent to the outer edge 70.
  • the outer edge 70 may also be provided with two straight edges 72 that are parallel to each other, or more straight edges, etc.
  • the straight edge itself can be a polygon
  • the straight edge of the polygon can be a straight edge 72
  • the straight edge 72 is configured to cooperate with an external mechanism to position the base 10' for rotation adjustment.
  • the external mechanism can be, for example, a clamp, a jig, etc., and the parallel straight edges can better position or clamp the base 10'.
  • the optical module may further include a shielding layer 66, which covers the annular side surface 60 and is configured to block the light of the micro display 80 from being transmitted from the annular side surface 60 to the outside of the substrate 10 '.
  • the shielding layer 66 may be a coating or material such as black epoxy resin, black silicone rubber, carbon black, nickel black, black chrome or Vanta black, and may also be a light-proof sealing sleeve, etc. The shielding layer 66 can ensure that the light is emitted from the exit surface 50 and leaves the substrate 10 ', but not from the annular side surface 60, thereby effectively improving the optical efficiency.
  • the annular side surface 60 further includes a first annular surface 62 and a second annular surface 64.
  • the circumferential dimension of the first annular surface 62 is smaller than that of the second annular surface 64.
  • the first end of the first annular surface 62 is connected to the first reflection surface 20 ′, the second end of the first annular surface 62 is connected to the first end of the exit surface 50, the second end of the exit surface 50 is connected to the first end of the second annular surface 64, and the second end of the second annular surface 64 is connected to the second reflection surface 30.
  • the first end and the second end of the first annular surface 62 are opposite ends, and the first end and the second end of the second annular surface 64 are opposite ends.
  • the exit surface 50 is located between the first annular surface 62 and the second annular surface 64 of different sizes.
  • the first annular surface 62 and the second annular surface 64 may have a tendency to gradually shrink along the positive direction of the optical axis Z, so as to effectively collect light. It can be understood that since the first annular surface 62 and the second annular surface 64 have a large difference in transverse dimensions to form a stepped structure, the overall size and weight can be further reduced.
  • the shielding layer 66 located on the second annular surface 64 extends from the edge of the exit surface 50 along the direction of the principle exit surface 50, and the end surface of the shielding layer 66 located on the second annular surface 64 is not higher than the end surface of the first reflection surface 20'.
  • the shielding layer 66 located on the second annular surface 64 is long enough to block the light from entering the outside from the edge of the exit surface 50 too early, and can also reduce the formation of stray light.
  • the optical module further includes a matte wall 90, which may be made of a light-impermeable material (e.g., the same material as the shielding layer 66 described above) or a material capable of blocking specific wavelengths, etc.
  • the substrate 10', the first reflection surface 20', the second reflection surface 30, and the exit surface 50 each include at least two groups, and the matte wall 90 is connected between two adjacent substrates 10', for example, between the annular side surfaces 60 of two adjacent optical modules, and the matte wall 90 is configured to block the light of one substrate 10' from entering the other adjacent substrate 10'.
  • each optical module is provided with a corresponding microdisplay 80, that is, a microdisplay is provided for a single incident surface, and in other embodiments, a microdisplay may correspond to multiple incident surfaces 40, wherein the height of the matte wall 90 may be greater than or equal to the distance from the second reflection surface 30 to the exit surface 50, that is, to ensure the relative Light from two adjacent substrates 10 ′ will not interfere with each other, thus effectively reducing the generation of stray light.
  • the present application also provides a near-eye display device 200', referring to Figures 67 and 69, which includes:
  • microdisplay 80 and
  • the micro display 80 is installed on the incident surface 40 .
  • the above units or structures can be implemented as independent entities, or can be arbitrarily combined and implemented as the same or several entities.
  • the specific implementation of the above units or structures can refer to the previous embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the near-eye display device 200' can also include, for example, a frame, a lens, a circuit board, a power supply, an infrared sensor, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, etc., and the above components for installing or driving its work will not be described in detail here.
  • the present application further provides a method for processing an optical module, wherein the optical module is the optical module described in the above embodiment, and the processing method comprises the following steps:
  • An incident surface 40 and a second reflecting surface 30 surrounding the incident surface 40 are formed on the second end 14' of the substrate; the incident surface 40 and the second reflecting film 30 are one or a combination of spherical surfaces, aspherical surfaces and free-form surfaces; the first end and the second end can be opposite ends; it can be understood that the formation of the corresponding spherical surface, aspherical surface and free-form surface can also be achieved by, for example, cutting, injection molding or compression molding, etc.
  • the coating film can be formed by, for example, evaporation, sputtering, etc., wherein the incident surface 40 is configured to receive light from the image of the micro display 80, the light enters the substrate 10' through the aspherical incident surface 40, is reflected by the first reflective surface 20', then is reflected by the second reflective surface 30, and leaves the substrate 10' through the aspherical exit surface 50.
  • the incident surface 40 is configured to receive light from the image of the micro display 80, the light enters the substrate 10' through the aspherical incident surface 40, is reflected by the first reflective surface 20', then is reflected by the second reflective surface 30, and leaves the substrate 10' through the aspherical exit surface 50.
  • Near-eye display devices generally adopt optical solutions such as optical waveguides or prisms.
  • the light source (or image source) or part of the optics of such solutions are mostly set on the wearer's temples.
  • optical solutions such as optical waveguides have special requirements for lenses.
  • the size and weight of such devices are relatively large, and the user experience is not good for a long time.
  • the display area of the display module of such devices is fixed in position. If the display device needs to move freely or to a specific position in the display state, there will often be problems with power supply, because the wired electrical connection will often interfere with the movement of the display module due to the physical existence of the wires.
  • Figure 75 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a near-eye display device of the present application.
  • the electronic device (near-eye display device) in the present application can be a smart glasses structure and form including AR, VR, XR, MR, etc.
  • the near-eye display device 100 includes a frame 110, temples 120 and lenses 130, the temples 120 are connected to the frame 110, and the frame 110 is used to fix the lenses 130.
  • the lenses can be used for myopia glasses, hyperopia glasses, goggles, sunglasses, smart glasses and helmets, etc. The features of this part are within the understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be repeated here.
  • Figure 76 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of the near-eye display device of the present application without temples
  • Figure 77 is a schematic diagram of another viewing angle of the embodiment of Figure 75
  • Figure 78 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of a display module and a first coil having multiple
  • Figure 79 is a schematic diagram of a cross-sectional structure of an embodiment of a display module provided with a coil bracket
  • the near-eye display device 100 includes a lens 130 and a display module 1400
  • the lens 130 includes an eye side 1320 and an environment side 1310
  • the display module 1400 is configured to generate light and project it onto the eye side 1320
  • the first battery 123 and the display module 1400 are arranged at intervals
  • a first coil 1500 is arranged around the lens 130, the first coil 1500 surrounds the lens 130 and is electrically connected to the first battery 123, the first coil 1500 forms at least one loop, and this loop is used for mutual electromagnetic induction with the second coil 14
  • the display module 1400 is provided with a second coil 1401'; the second coil 1401' can be mutually induced with the first coil 1500.
  • the first coil 1500 is used as a transmitting end to convert an electric field into a magnetic field
  • the second coil 1401' is used as a receiving end to convert a magnetic field into an electric field.
  • the loop size formed by the second coil 1401' is smaller than the loop size formed by the first coil 1500. It can be understood that the above-mentioned induction is configured as wireless induction of the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401' to realize the display module 1 400 supplies power to the display module 1400 through the first battery 123 during the movement of the lens 130 or when the display module 1400 is at any fixed position in the preset area of the lens 130.
  • the display module can move freely on the surface of the lens 130, and when the user moves to a viewing position suitable for himself, it can be kept at a fixed position. Whether in the movement process or the fixed position, the display module 1400 can be powered by wireless induction between the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401'.
  • the preset area can be an inner ring area surrounded by the first coil 1500 on the lens 130. In other embodiments, the preset area can also be an outer ring area surrounded by the first coil 1500 on the lens 130.
  • the user can freely move and select the position of the preset area as needed, wherein the any fixed position can be a certain or any fixed position where the user stays after moving the display module, and this position can depend on the user's operation needs or visual field viewing needs. For example, aligning the lens with the center of the eye's field of view is often the best position.
  • the display module 1400 can be moved to a position deviating from the center of the field of view. The user can even move the display module 1400 to the position of the lens 130 corresponding to the blind spot of the eye's field of view.
  • the display module 1400 can be located on the first coil 1500 or on the outer circle of the first coil 1500, etc.
  • the display module 1400 can be placed on the lens 130 by clamping, adsorption, etc., and the display module 1400 can move relative to the lens 130.
  • the display module 1400 can be fixed on the lens 130 by other methods. As long as the display module 1400 can be installed, fixed, detachable and movable at any position of the lens 130, it is an embodiment included in the present application and is not specifically limited here.
  • the first coil 1500 surrounds the lens 130; in some embodiments, optionally, the first coil 1500 can be embedded in the outer edge of the lens 130, optionally, the first coil 1500 can be wound around the outer edge of the lens 130, optionally, the first coil 1500 can be provided in the frame 110 and surround the lens 130, in other embodiments, the first coil 1500 can surround the lens 130 in other ways; optionally, the first coil 1500 can be located on the side facing the environment side 1310, for example, located in a groove or a groove on the side of the frame 110 facing the environment.
  • the first coil 1500 can be located on the side facing the eye side 1320, for example, located in a groove or surface of the frame 110 facing the eye side 1320, etc.; the accompanying drawings only give some examples. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art can adjust the position of the first coil 1500 as needed. As long as the induced current of the first coil 1500 surrounds the lens 130 to form a loop, and then mutually induces the second coil 1401', and ensures that the display module 1400 can be electrically operated at any position on the surface of the lens 130, they are all embodiments included in the present application and are not specifically limited here.
  • the near-eye display device 100 is also provided with a first electrical input interface 122. At least one of the first coil 1500 and the first battery 123 is electrically connected to the first electrical input interface 122.
  • the first electrical input interface 122 can directly supply power to the first coil 1500 and the first battery 123.
  • the first coil 1500 is electrically connected to the first electrical input interface 122.
  • the first battery 123 is electrically connected to the first electrical input interface 122.
  • the first coil 1500 and the first battery 123 are both electrically connected to the first electrical input interface 122; optionally, the first electrical input interface 122 can be a micro-USB interface.
  • the first electrical input interface 122 can be a lightning interface.
  • the first electrical input interface 122 can be a type-c interface.
  • Figure 80 is a schematic diagram of the display module in the embodiment of Figure 79 provided with a second battery
  • Figure 81 is a schematic diagram of the structural disassembly of the display module in the embodiment of Figure 79;
  • the display module 1400 also includes a housing 1403, an optical component 1406 and a display unit 1407, the optical component 1406 is located at the light-emitting end of the display unit 1407, and the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the display unit 1407;
  • the housing 1403 is formed with a receiving cavity 1405, and the optical component 1406, the display unit 1407 and the second coil 1401' are arranged in the receiving cavity inside cavity 1405.
  • the shape of the display module 1400 may be columnar, such as a cylinder or a prism. In other embodiments, the shape of the display module 1400 may be other irregular shapes, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the accompanying drawings only provide an example of a cylindrical display module. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art may make adjustments as needed, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the cross-sectional dimensions of the display module 1400 are much smaller than the dimensions of the surface of the lens 130.
  • the maximum cross-sectional dimensions of the housing 1403 do not exceed 12 mm
  • the maximum cross-sectional dimensions of the second coil 1401' do not exceed 11 mm.
  • the maximum cross-sectional dimensions of the display module 1400 do not exceed 12 mm.
  • the cross-sectional dimensions can be 10 mm, 9 mm, 8 mm, 6 mm, 5 mm, or 3 mm.
  • the specific meaning of the cross-sectional dimensions is related to the shape of the cross-sectional dimensions.
  • the cross-sectional dimensions refer to the diameter of the cross-sectional dimensions.
  • the cross-sectional dimensions refer to the side length of the square.
  • the cross-sectional dimensions refer to the length of the long side.
  • the cross-sectional dimensions of the display module 1400 are much smaller than the dimensions of the surface of the lens 130, so that the display module 1400 occupies a small proportion of the surface of the lens 130, does not obstruct the user's line of sight, hinders the user's viewing, and improves the user experience.
  • the display module 1400 is provided with a second coil 1401', and the second coil 1401' may be around the circumference of the display module 1400.
  • the first coil 1500 is a power transmitting end
  • the second coil 1401' is a power receiving end
  • the second coil 1401' may be mutually inductive with the first coil 1500, so as to realize power supply to the display module 1400 through wireless induction between the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401'
  • the display module 1400 has electricity to work at any position on the surface of the lens 130.
  • the temple 120 may also be provided with a control circuit electrically connected to the first battery 123, the control circuit converts the direct current of the first battery 123 into alternating current and transmits it to the first coil 1500 to generate magnetic induction, and the second coil 1401' generates alternating current after receiving the magnetic induction.
  • the display module 1400 may also include a rectifier circuit, which converts alternating current into direct current.
  • the display module 1400 may also include a conversion circuit, which converts direct current into a suitable voltage or current for the display module 1400 to operate. The features of this part are within the understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be elaborated here.
  • Figure 82 is a schematic diagram of a structural cross-section of another embodiment of a display module
  • Figure 83 is a schematic diagram of a display module provided with a second battery in the embodiment of Figure 82
  • Figure 84 is a schematic diagram of a structural disassembly of the display module in the embodiment of Figure 83
  • the display unit 1407 includes a display panel 1473 and a circuit board 1474, and the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474 are electrically connected.
  • the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474 are connected in a plug-in manner, optionally, the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474 are connected in an electrical wire manner, optionally, the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474 are connected in a contact manner, and optionally, the circuit board 1474 may be an independent circuit board or a peripheral circuit board integrated around the display unit 1407, such as the circuit board 14 74 may include a plug board, a drive board, a power board, etc. Only some embodiments are listed here.
  • the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the circuit board 1474;
  • the display board 1473 is provided with a display 14711 for generating light, and optionally, the display 14711 may be located in the middle of the display board 1473;
  • the optical assembly 1406 includes an optical module 1463 and a bracket 1462, the bracket 1462 is used to support and fix the optical module 1463, the optical module 1463 is located at the light emitting end of the display 14711, the bracket 1462 and the optical module 1463 are located on the side of the display board 1473 away from the circuit board 1474, and the bracket 1462 ensures that the light emitting ends of the optical module 1463 and the display 14711 correspond.
  • the first battery 123 may be a rechargeable battery, optionally, interface charging, wireless charging, etc. may be adopted; optionally, in other embodiments, the first battery 123 may be a disposable replaceable battery, etc.; optionally, the first battery 123 may be of a size adapted to the shape of the frame 110 or the temple 120, optionally, the first battery 123 may include a single-core, multi-core, lithium battery, etc.; those skilled in the art may make selections and adjustments according to needs, and no specific limitations are made here.
  • the number of display modules 1400 can be one.
  • the display module 1400 can be installed in any one lens 130.
  • the first coil 1500 can only surround the lens 130 where the display module 1400 is located.
  • the multiple display modules 1400 are configured to move within the first coil (150) of the lens 130, and the multiple display modules 1400 are detachably installed on at least one lens 130.
  • the multiple display modules 1400 can work independently. "Multiple" means at least two, such as two, three, four, etc.
  • the multiple display modules 1400 can all be installed in any one lens 130.
  • the multiple display modules 1400 can be installed in two lenses 130 respectively.
  • the accompanying drawings only give some examples of display modules on the surface of the lens. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art can make selections and adjustments according to needs, and no specific limitations are made here.
  • the number of turns of the second coils 1401' of the multiple display modules 1400 may be the same.
  • the number of turns of the second coils 1401' of the multiple display modules 1400 may be different.
  • the number of turns of the second coil 1401' may be set according to the different power consumption of different display modules to adapt to different display modules.
  • the near-eye display device 100 may include two lenses 130, each lens 130 corresponds to an eye field of view, the first coil 1500 may surround the two lenses 130 at the same time, and the display module 1400 is configured to move in the inner circle of the first coil 1500; optionally, the lenses can be used for myopia glasses, hyperopia glasses, sunglasses, smart glasses, etc. The features of this part are within the understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be repeated here.
  • the near-eye display device 100 may include only one lens 130, the lens 130 spans the field of view of two eyes, the first coil 1500 surrounds the lens 130 and spans the field of view of two eyes, and the display module 1400 is configured to be able to move within the inner circle of the first coil 1500 or the outer circle of the first coil 1500; optionally, the lens can be used for goggles and helmets, etc.
  • the lens can be used for goggles and helmets, etc.
  • the first coil 1500 surrounds at least one lens 130 .
  • the first coil 1500 only surrounds one lens 130 equipped with the display module 1400 .
  • the first coil 1500 surrounds two lenses 130 .
  • the first coil 1500 surrounds at least one lens 130.
  • the first coil 1500 includes a first sub-coil 1510 and a second sub-coil 1520.
  • the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 respectively surround one of the lenses 130 to form a loop.
  • the number of turns of the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be the same or different; in some embodiments, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 are electrically isolated to avoid cross interference; in other embodiments, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be electrically connected, and the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be connected in series or in parallel.
  • the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 can be electrically connected to the first batteries 123 installed on the two temples 120, respectively; optionally, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 can be electrically connected to the two first batteries 123 installed on the frame 110, respectively; optionally, the first sub-coil 1510 is electrically connected to the first battery 123 installed on the temple 120, and the second sub-coil 1520 is electrically connected to the first battery 123 installed on the frame 110; optionally, the second sub-coil 1520 is electrically connected to the first battery 123 installed on the temple 120, and the first sub-coil 1510 is electrically connected to the first battery 123 installed on the frame 110; optionally, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 can also be electrically connected and electrically connected to the same first battery 123 installed on one temple 120 Optionally, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may also be electrically connected and electrically connected
  • the number of turns of the first coil 1500 can be one turn or multiple turns.
  • the number of turns of the second coil 1401' can be one turn or multiple turns.
  • the number of turns of the coil can be determined according to the power required by the display module 1400. The features of this part are within the scope of understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be elaborated here.
  • the number of turns of the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be the same, in which case the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 have the same power output; optionally, the number of turns of the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be different, in which case the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 have different power outputs.
  • the number of turns of the coil can be selected according to the power required by the display module 1400 and the number of display modules 1400. The features of this part are within the understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be elaborated here.
  • the display module 1400 further includes a coil support 1408; the housing 1403 is formed with a housing cavity 1405, and the optical component 1406, the display unit 1407, the coil support 1408 and the second coil 1401' are arranged in the housing cavity 1405; the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the display unit 1407; the second coil 1401' is arranged on the periphery of the coil support 1408, and the second coil 1401' surrounds in the height direction from the display unit 1407 to the optical component 1406.
  • the second coil 1401' can be arranged in the thickness direction of the display module 1400;
  • the height of the coil support 1408 at least partially overlaps with the sum of the heights of the support 1462, the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474.
  • the surrounding height of the second coil 1401' is greater than the display panel 1473, the circuit board 1474 and the distance between the two, so that the second coil 1401' has more turns and can provide more power.
  • the number of turns of the coil can be determined according to the power required by the display module 1400.
  • the number of turns of the coil determines the height of the second coil 1401' and the coil support 1408 in the thickness direction of the display module 1400: when the power required by the display module 1400 is large, that is, the number of turns of the second coil 1401' is large, the coil support 140 8 can completely surround the display unit 1407 and the optical component 1406.
  • the coil bracket 1408 completely surrounds the display unit 1407 and partially surrounds the optical component 1406, or only completely surrounds the display unit 1407.
  • the coil bracket 1408 only partially surrounds the display unit 1407.
  • the coil bracket 1408 can also partially surround the optical component 1406, or completely surround the optical component 1406, or completely surround the optical component 1406 and partially surround the display unit 1407.
  • the structure surrounded by the coil bracket 1408 and whether it completely surrounds or partially surrounds can be determined according to the number of turns of the second coil 1401'.
  • the number of turns of the second coil 1401' can be determined according to the power required by the display module 1400.
  • the features of this part are within the scope of understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be described here. Only some embodiments are listed here.
  • the accompanying drawings only show an example of the second coil partially surrounding the display unit 1407 and completely surrounding the optical component 1406. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art can make selections and adjustments according to needs, and no specific limitations are made here.
  • the coil bracket 1408 and the second coil 1401' are arranged around the display unit 1407 and/or the optical component 1406, making full use of the circumferential space so that the height of the display module 1400 in the thickness direction is relatively small; at the same time, the circumferential setting can adjust the number of coil turns according to the power required by the display module 1400, providing a variety of options for the power of the display module 1400.
  • the display module 1400 may further include a second battery 1402'; the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the second battery 1402', so as to realize charging of the second battery 1402', and then realize charging of the display module 1400, ensuring that the display module 1400 can be powered by the second battery 1402' without the coil power supply.
  • the second battery 1402' is disposed in the accommodating cavity 1405 and is located at one end of the display unit 1407 close to the housing 1403 in the thickness direction.
  • the display module 1400 further includes a housing 1403, an optical component 1406, a display unit 1407, and a cover plate 1409.
  • the housing 1403 and the cover plate 1409 together form a receiving cavity 1405.
  • the housing 1403 and the cover plate 1409 together form a receiving cavity 1405.
  • the cover plate 1409 can be an integrally formed part of the housing 1403 or two separate parts are finally connected to form a whole.
  • the cover plate can be located on the environment side 1310, and optionally, the cover plate can be located on the eye side 1320.
  • the second coil 1401' is flatly arranged on the side of the circuit board 1474 away from the display panel 1473, which reduces the height of the display module 1400 in the thickness direction, so that the display module 1400 can be made thinner; at the same time, the cross-sectional size of the display module 1400 is reduced, so that the proportion of the display module 1400 occupying the surface of the lens 130 is small, which will not block the user's line of sight and hinder the user's viewing, thereby improving the user experience.
  • the display module 1400 may also be provided with a second battery 1402'; the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the second battery 1402', so as to charge the second battery 1402', and then charge the display module 1400, ensuring that the display module 1400 can be powered by the second battery 1402' without the coil power supply; the second battery 1402' is arranged in the accommodating cavity 1405, for example, it can be located on one side of the display unit 1407, or on one side of the optical component 1406, or on one side of the optical component 1406 and the display unit 1407 at the same time, the height of the second battery 1402' in the thickness direction of the display module 1400 can at least partially overlap with the thickness of the display module 1400, and Figures 83-84 only give a simple example of the second battery 1402' part.
  • the basic components such as the electrical connection part and other related structures are within the scope that can be understood by those skilled in the art, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the shape such as the electrical connection part and other related structures are within
  • the second battery 1402' can be arranged on the side of the display unit 1407 and/or the optical component 1406, or the second battery 1402' can be arranged on one end of the display unit 1407 in the thickness direction close to the housing 1403.
  • the circumferential space can be fully utilized, so that the height of the display module 1400 in the thickness direction is relatively small.
  • Arranging on the end surface can reduce the circumferential width.
  • a rectifier circuit may be provided on the circuit board 1474 to convert alternating current into direct current.
  • a conversion circuit may also be provided on the circuit board 1474 to convert direct current into a suitable voltage or current for the display 14711 to operate.
  • the display 14711 can be including but not limited to Micro-LED (Micro Light-Emitting Diode), Micro OLED (Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode), LCOS (Liquid Crystal On Silicon), LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), DMD (Digital Micromirror Device)/DLP (Digital Light Processing) or LBS (Laser Beam Scanning), etc., or any combination of these.
  • Micro-LED Micro Light-Emitting Diode
  • Micro OLED Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode
  • LCOS Liquid Crystal On Silicon
  • LCD Liquid Crystal Display
  • DMD Digital Micromirror Device
  • DLP Digital Light Processing
  • LBS Laser Beam Scanning
  • the light output end of the shell 1403 can be made of light-transmitting material, and in other embodiments, the light output end of the shell 1403 can be dug with a hole for light transmission. Only some embodiments are listed here. In other embodiments, technical personnel in this field can make adjustments according to needs, and no specific limitations are made here.
  • the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401' is a transparent conductive material
  • the first coil 1500 is a transparent conductive material
  • the second coil 1401' is a transparent conductive material
  • the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401' are both transparent conductive materials.
  • the transparent conductive material can be an oxide transparent conductive material, specifically zinc oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide, etc.
  • Oxide transparent conductive material is the most widely used transparent conductive material at present, and has the characteristics of high transparency and conductivity;
  • the transparent conductive material can be a carbon nanotube transparent conductive material, specifically carbon nanotube, carbon nanotube transparent conductive material is a new type of material, with the characteristics of high conductivity, high transparency, high strength, excellent flexibility, etc.;
  • the transparent conductive material can be a conductive polymer material, and the conductive polymer is a material composed of conductive polymers, which has good conductivity and flexibility.
  • the coil uses a transparent conductive material, which not only meets the needs of the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401' to wirelessly sense and power the display module 1400, but also The coil can also be integrated with the transparent lens 130 , thereby improving the appearance of the near-eye display device 100 .
  • the display module can generate light and project it to the user's eye side, the display module can move freely on the lens, and at the same time, a first coil is provided in the circumference of the lens and a second coil is provided on the display module, the two are electromagnetically induced with each other, and the loop size formed by the second coil is smaller than the loop size formed by the first coil, thereby effectively reducing the influence of the coil on the field of view of the lens.
  • the display module is powered by the first battery during the movement of the display module on the lens or at a fixed position in a preset area of the lens, which can ensure that the display module can be powered to work whether it is dynamic or static on the lens, effectively avoiding the interference between the use of wired power supply and the free movement of the display module.
  • FIG 85 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a charging box of the present application.
  • the charging box 2000 provided in the embodiment of the present application is used to charge the first battery 123 of the near-eye display device 100 of any of the above-mentioned embodiments;
  • the charging box 2000 includes a box body 200 and the near-eye display device 100 of any of the above-mentioned embodiments, the box body 200 includes a third coil 210 and a second electrical input interface 230, the second electrical input interface 230 and the third coil 210 are electrically connected, optionally, the first coil 1500 can also be used as a power receiving end, and the third coil 210 as a power sending end, the first coil 1500 and the third coil 210 are configured to wirelessly induct each other to charge the first battery 123 through the second electrical input interface 230;
  • the second electrical input interface 230 can be a micro-USB interface, optionally, the second electrical input interface 230 can be a lightning interface, optionally, the second electrical input interface 230 can
  • the first coil acts as a power receiving end and wirelessly inducts with the third coil to charge the first battery, thereby improving the flexibility, convenience, and versatility of the charging box, thereby improving the user experience; at the same time, it avoids damage to the charging port of the near-eye display device caused by frequent plugging and unplugging of the charging cable, protects the interface of the near-eye display device, and extends the service life of the near-eye display device.
  • the near-eye display system 1000 may include a near-eye display device 10 and a terminal 6, and the near-eye display device 10 is communicatively connected to the terminal 6.
  • the terminal 6 is used to transmit display information to the near-eye display device 10.
  • the display information may include information such as video, image or text.
  • the terminal 6 may be a device such as a mobile phone, a watch or a computer.
  • the near-eye display device 10 is used to convert the display information into an optical output and project it to the user side for the user to watch. Among them, the optical output may be light.
  • the communication connection between the near-eye display device 10 and the terminal 6 may be a wired connection using a data cable, or a wireless connection without a data cable.
  • the wireless connection does not require the use of a data cable, the use of the near-eye display system 1000 is not restricted by the data cable, which can improve the convenience of use of the near-eye display system 1000.
  • the communication connection mode between the near-eye display device 10 and the terminal 6 is a WiFi connection.
  • the bandwidth of the WiFi connection is relatively large, and the data transmission speed is fast, which can make the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother.
  • the WiFi connection can ensure the data transmission speed, the WiFi connection between the near-eye display device 10 and the terminal 6 needs to be assisted by an external wireless network, and some usage scenarios of the near-eye display system 1000 may not have wireless network coverage, such as using the near-eye display system 1000 during outdoor sports.
  • the near-eye display device 10 may include a wearing component 1 and a display component 20.
  • the wearing component 1 can be worn by a user. If worn on the head, the wearing component 1 can be glasses or a helmet, for example.
  • the wearing component 1 includes a frame 11, on which a lens 12 is mounted.
  • the frame 11 can be a frame; when the wearing component 1 is a helmet, the frame 11 can be a helmet shell.
  • the lens 12 can be a lens for myopia, hyperopia, eye protection, sunglasses or fashion glasses, or a lens for a head-mounted device such as a helmet.
  • the user's eyes can observe the external environment from the eye side through the lens 12.
  • the display assembly 20 is configured to be movably arranged on the lens 12.
  • the display assembly 20 is rotatably connected to the frame 11 through a bracket (not shown in the figure), and the bracket can be a component such as a temple.
  • the display assembly 20 can be moved on the lens 12 by the user's finger 40 directly moving the display assembly 20; or, the display assembly 20 is magnetically connected to the lens 12, which can facilitate the movement of the display assembly 20 on the lens 12 and prevent the display assembly 20 from falling off the lens 12; in other embodiments, the display assembly 20 can be clamped on the lens 12 by clamping.
  • the display assembly 20 can move on the lens 12 along any direction shown by D1-D4.
  • the display assembly 20 can display an interface reminder with a moving direction such as D1-D4 to facilitate user operation.
  • the lens 12 includes a plurality of mobile areas 121, each of which corresponds to the display content of the external terminal 6 itself.
  • the plurality of mobile areas 121 are distributed along the lateral direction of the lens 12; or, as shown in Figure 88, the plurality of mobile areas 121 are distributed along the longitudinal direction of the lens 12; or, as shown in Figure 89, the plurality of mobile areas 121 are distributed along the lateral and longitudinal directions of the lens 12; in other embodiments, the mobile areas 121 may be arranged in a square or circular array or in a regular pattern.
  • the lens 12 includes a first mobile area 121A, a second mobile area 121B and a third mobile area 121C, wherein the first mobile area 121A, the second mobile area 121B and the third mobile area 121C correspond to the display content of the navigation, translation and video applications of the external terminal 6, respectively.
  • Each moving area 121 is set to correspond to the display content of the external terminal 6 itself, so that the moving area 121 corresponds to the display content of the external terminal 6 itself, so that the position of the display component 20 on the lens 12 can be changed by a moving operation, so that it is moved to the target moving area 121, so as to switch the display content of the display component 20 to the target display content of the external terminal 6, and the user does not need to operate at the external terminal 6 end, so that the switching operation of the display content is convenient and fast, which can improve the ease of use of the near-eye display device 10.
  • the lens 12 has a plurality of movable areas 121.
  • the display component 20 can display the corresponding image content when it is located in the movable area 121.
  • the display component 20 can display different functions or applications when it is located in different movable areas 121.
  • the displayed function or application can be the main interface 1114
  • the upper position can be the setting 1112
  • the left and right positions of the setting 1112 can be information 1111 and navigation 1113 respectively
  • the left and right positions of the main interface 1114 can be music 1119 and smart assistant 1115
  • the lower part of the main interface 1114 can be a picture 1117
  • the left and right sides of the picture 1117 can be translation 1118 and dialing 1116 respectively.
  • the user can reorder and customize the above-mentioned functional interfaces on the terminal as needed, for example, customize the arrangement according to the frequency of use or interests.
  • the storage unit 204 inside the display component 20 stores the first display information including the above-mentioned functions or applications, and the first display information includes the underlying image content of the above-mentioned functions or applications, such as the base map, background color, font color, etc. of the corresponding functional application.
  • the display component 20 can only display a single color, such as green, etc., and accordingly, the storage unit 204 stores font or base map information with a single color, etc.
  • the user's eyes can see the content on the environment side from the eye side through the moving area 121 of the lens 12, that is, the moving area 121 of the lens 12 does not contain content that interferes with the user's viewing, and Figure 90 is only for the convenience of display and understanding.
  • the display component 20 moves to different positions of the lens 12, the display component 20 itself can display the content to be displayed, instead of displaying the content on the moving area 121 of the lens 12.
  • the display component 20 can display the main interface 1114,
  • the main interface may include information such as time or weather, and of course the main interface may also be customized according to the user's settings.
  • the display component 20 When the display component 20 is located at the position of the mobile area 121 corresponding to the display main interface, the areas outside the mobile area 121, such as information 1111, settings 1112, navigation 1113, smart assistant 1115, dialing 1116, pictures 1117, and translation 1118, corresponding to the mobile area 121 are not displayed, and the user's eyes cannot see the corresponding static or dynamic content on the lens 12. That is, when the display component 20 does not move to the corresponding mobile area 121, the functions or application images of other mobile areas 121 will not be reflected on the lens 12; only when the user moves the display component 20 to the corresponding mobile area 121 position, can the image content of the function or application corresponding to the corresponding mobile area 121 be displayed on the display component 20.
  • the size of the display component 20 is smaller than the size of the lens 12.
  • the orthographic projection area of the display component 20 on the lens 12 is much smaller than the area of the lens 12, for example, the maximum orthographic projection area of the display component 20 on the lens 12 is not greater than 6 mm2, in some embodiments, the maximum outer diameter of the display component 20 may not exceed 15 mm, that is, the maximum outer diameter of the housing 211 described below does not exceed 15 mm, for example, it may be 15 mm, 12 mm, 10 mm, 8.5 mm, 5 mm, etc., thereby reducing the volume of the display component 20, which is convenient for the display component 20 to be adapted to the wearing component 1, and can reduce the influence of the display component 20 on the field of view of the lens 12.
  • the display assembly 20 includes a housing 211, and a processor 202, a communication unit 203, a storage unit 204, an output unit 205, and a sensor unit 206 disposed in the housing 211, and the communication unit 203, the storage unit 204, the output unit 205, and the sensor unit 206 are electrically connected to the processor 202, respectively.
  • the processor 202, the communication unit 203, and the storage unit 204 can be disposed on a circuit board module 220.
  • the circuit board module 220 can include a first circuit board 221 and a second circuit board 222, the processor 202 and the communication unit 203 can be located on the first circuit board 221, and the storage unit 204 can be located on the second circuit board 222.
  • the first circuit board 221 and the second circuit board 222 can be disposed in parallel with each other.
  • the housing 211 has an inner space for accommodating components, and the height of the housing 211 is not higher than 20 mm. As shown in FIG. 94 , the distance between the top of the housing 211 and the cover 212 may be no greater than 20 mm, such as 18 mm, 15 mm, 12 mm, 10 mm, etc., and the maximum outer diameter of the housing 211 may not exceed 15 mm.
  • the processor 202, the communication unit 203, the storage unit 204, the output unit 205, and the sensor unit 206 are at least partially arranged in the housing 211, so that the housing 211 can provide protection for each component and reduce the risk of damage to the components.
  • the display assembly 20 may also include a power supply unit 207, which is used to provide working power for the display assembly 20.
  • the power supply unit 207 may include a rechargeable battery, and the power supply unit 207 can be reused after being charged multiple times. Compared with a disposable power supply, the power supply unit 207 is more energy-saving and environmentally friendly.
  • Processor 202 may be an integrated circuit chip having signal processing capability. Processor 202 may be implemented by a plurality of integrated circuit chips. Exemplarily, processor 202 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, or discrete hardware components. Among them, the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor.
  • the communication unit 203 includes one or more of a Bluetooth communication module, a ZigBee communication module, and a 2.4g communication module.
  • the short-range wireless communication module does not require the use of an external wireless network, so that the near-eye display system 1000 can still be used normally in a scene without wireless network coverage, thereby improving the applicability of the near-eye display system 1000.
  • the storage unit 204 includes a readable storage medium.
  • the readable storage medium can be a medium that can store data, such as a hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, an optical disk, a mobile hard disk, or a USB flash drive.
  • the readable storage medium is built into the housing 211, so that the storage unit 204 and the housing 211 form a whole, which is convenient to carry, thereby improving the convenience of use of the near-eye display device 10.
  • the readable storage medium can be detachably arranged in the housing 211, so that the volume of the storage unit 204 is not limited by the housing 211, and the storage capacity of the storage unit 204 can be improved.
  • the output unit 205 includes a micro display 251 and an optical module 252.
  • the micro display 251 and the optical module 252 are fixed by a fixing bracket 208.
  • the fixing bracket 208 may include a first connecting portion (not shown in the figure). and a second connecting portion (not shown in the figure), the first connecting portion is provided with a first mounting portion, and the second connecting portion is provided with a second mounting portion.
  • the first mounting portion is a hole structure or a slot structure
  • the second mounting portion is a hole structure or a slot structure. Among them, the first mounting portion and the second mounting portion are interconnected.
  • the first mounting portion adopts a slot structure
  • the second mounting portion adopts a hole structure.
  • the microdisplay 251 is installed in the first mounting portion, and the optical module 252 is partially installed in the second mounting portion.
  • the microdisplay 251 and the processor 202 are electrically connected, and the optical module 252 is located on the light emitting side of the microdisplay 251.
  • the microdisplay 251 receives information from the processor 202 and converts it into optical output.
  • the optical module 252 receives the optical output and transmits it to the user side for the user to watch.
  • the micro display 251 may be, for example, Micro-LED (Micro Light-Emitting Diode), Micro-oled (Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode), LCoS (Liquid Crystal On Silicon), LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), DMD (Digital Micromirror Device)/DLP (Digital Light Processing) or LBS (Laser Beam Scanning), or any combination of these technologies.
  • the optical module 252 may be made of resin or glass.
  • the first circuit board 221, the second circuit board 222 and the micro display 251 may be parallel to each other.
  • the sensor unit 206 may be electrically connected to the circuit board module 220 and arranged around the periphery of the micro display 251 and the optical module 252.
  • the display component 20 may further include a sleeve 214, wherein the microdisplay 251 and the optical module 252 are located inside the sleeve 214.
  • the sleeve 214 may be made of opaque resin or metal or other materials to prevent external light from interfering with the optical signal emitted by the microdisplay 251, and to prevent light leakage of the optical signal emitted by the microdisplay 251.
  • the attracting member 213 can be a sheet structure, and the attracting member 213 can be fixed in the groove 2121 by means of bonding, etc.
  • the attracting member 213 is configured to be magnetically attracted to each other with an external attracting member, so as to assemble the display assembly 20 to the wearing assembly 1, wherein the material of the external attracting member can be the same as that of the attracting member 213, and the two can be magnetically attracted to each other, so as to be clamped and fixed on the wearing assembly 1, such as the lens 12 or the frame 11.
  • the power supply unit 207 includes a battery, which may be arc-shaped or annular, and the power supply unit 207 may be formed with a central accommodating cavity 271, the output unit 205 and the circuit board module 220 are located at the center of the central accommodating cavity 271, and the battery surrounds the periphery of the micro display 251 and the circuit board module 220, and the axis direction of the micro display 251 and the optical module 252 is substantially parallel to the height direction of the power supply unit 207, thereby achieving center alignment and facilitating assembly.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the outer contour of the central accommodating cavity 271 includes an arc or annular shape, and the cross-sectional shape of the power supply unit 207 is perpendicular to the height direction of the power supply unit 207.
  • the output unit 205 and the circuit board module 220 are sequentially arranged along the height direction of the power supply unit 207.
  • the power supply unit 207 may be a button battery, which may be arranged in parallel with the circuit board module 220, or in parallel with the attraction member 213.
  • the attracting member 213 may be eliminated, and the button battery can be directly used as the power supply unit 207 and an external magnet or other attracting member to attract each other.
  • the sensing unit 206 includes an inertial measurement module 261, which is electrically connected to the processor 202, and the inertial measurement module 261 may be located on the first circuit board 221.
  • the inertial measurement module 261 is configured to obtain the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12, and the processor 202 obtains the movement information from the inertial measurement module 261, and sends the movement information to the external terminal 6 through the communication unit 203.
  • the movement information may be one of the movement parameters such as the movement speed, acceleration, displacement, displacement component of the displacement in a preset direction, or rotation angle of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12, or a combination of some of the above movement parameters.
  • the external terminal 6 may determine the position of the moving area 121 of the display component 20 on the lens 12 through the movement information, so as to send the display content of the external terminal 6 corresponding to the moving area 121 to the near-eye display device 10. For example, in FIG. 88 , the external terminal 6 determines the second moving area of the display component 20 on the lens 12 through the movement information. 121B, the display content of the translation application of the external terminal 6 corresponding to the second moving area 121B is sent to the near-eye display device 10.
  • the position of the display component 20 on the lens 12 can be moved by manual operation, and the inertial measurement module 261 obtains the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12.
  • the external terminal 6 determines the position of the moving area 121 of the display component 20 on the lens 12 through the movement information to realize the display of different contents of the external terminal 6. In some usage scenarios, for example, the shaking of the user's head may cause the movement of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12.
  • the inertial measurement module 261 can still obtain the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12, which may cause the external terminal 6 to misjudge the position of the moving area 121 of the display component 20 on the lens 12 and switch the display content, causing inconvenience to the user.
  • the sensing unit 206 further includes a touch detection module 262, and the touch detection module 262 is electrically connected to the processor 202.
  • the touch detection module 262 is configured to obtain the user's touch operation information on the display component 20, and send the touch operation information to the processor 202. Specifically, when the user holds the display component 20 and manually moves the display component 20, the touch detection module 262 can be triggered, so that the touch detection module 262 detects the user's touch operation information on the display component 20.
  • the processor 202 When the preset conditions are met, for example, when the processor 202 confirms that the user manually moves the display component 20 through the received touch operation information, the processor 202 sends a detection instruction to the inertial measurement module 261, and the inertial measurement module 261 obtains the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12 in response to the detection instruction.
  • the inertial measurement module 261 detects the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12 only when it is detected that the user has manually moved the display component 20, thereby reducing the probability of misjudgment of the position movement of the display component 20 and ensuring that the switching operation of the display content is consistent with the user's expectations.
  • the touch detection module 262 includes one or both of a touch panel and a light sensor.
  • the touch panel can be installed on the housing 211, and at least a part of the area is located on the outer surface of the housing 211, so that the user can touch the touch panel when holding the display component 20 and manually operating the mobile display component 20, so that the touch panel detects the user's touch operation information on the display component 20.
  • the light sensor can be a sensor based on the photoelectric effect, which converts the change of the light signal into the change of the electrical signal, thereby realizing the detection of the touch operation information.
  • the light sensor can be a reflective photoelectric sensor, including a light source and a photoelectric element
  • the light source is installed in the housing 211, and a part of the area of the housing 211 is a light-transmitting area, which is set at a position that can be touched by the user when holding the display component 20 and manually operating the mobile display component 20, and the light emitted by the light source is irradiated on the light-transmitting area.
  • the photoelectric element detects the change of light intensity to realize the detection of touch operation information.
  • touch panels and optical sensors have the advantages of mature technology, good reliability and relatively low cost.
  • the storage unit 204 is configured to store the first display information
  • the communication unit 203 is configured to establish a first communication with the external terminal 6, the first communication includes the second display information from the external terminal 6,
  • the processor 202 is configured to merge the first display information and the second display information to obtain the third display information
  • the output unit 205 is configured to convert the third display information into an optical output and project it to the user side.
  • the first display information can be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the micro display 251 receives the third display information from the processor 202 and converts it into an optical output, wherein the optical output can be light
  • the optical module 252 receives the optical output and transmits it to the user side for viewing by the user.
  • the display component 20 includes a processor 202, a communication unit 203, a storage unit 204 and an output unit 205, the output unit 205 converts the third display information into an optical output and projects it to the user side, the third display information is obtained by the processor 202 by merging the first display information and the second display information, that is, the third display information is split into the first display information and the second display information, wherein the first display information can be pre-stored in the storage unit 204, and the second display information comes from the external terminal 6, so that when the near-eye display device 10 is displaying, only the second display information needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, thereby reducing the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6. Under the same bandwidth conditions, the communication unit 203 can receive data from the external terminal 6 faster, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.
  • the first display information includes data displayed first
  • the second display information includes data displayed later.
  • the first display information includes video data with an earlier playback time
  • the second display information includes video data with a later playback time.
  • the video data with an earlier playback time is pre-stored in the storage unit 204.
  • the first display information includes an image or text data that does not change with the display time
  • the second display information includes an image or text data that changes with the display time during the display process.
  • the first display information may include a navigation icon that does not change with the display time
  • the second display information includes the navigation content that changes with the display time during the display process
  • the first display information may include a common menu icon of the translation application that does not change with the display time
  • the second display information includes the specific content of the translation that changes with the display time during the display process.
  • the image or text data that does not change with the display time is pre-stored in the storage unit 204.
  • the image or text data that changes with the display time during the display process needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, which reduces the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.
  • the third display information includes an application graphical interface on the external terminal 6, the first display information includes static display information, and the second display information includes dynamic display information.
  • the third display information is set to include an application graphical interface on the external terminal 6, so that when the display component 20 changes between each mobile area 121, the output unit 205 can display the application graphical interface corresponding to the mobile area 121, so as to facilitate the user to quickly select the application to be displayed, thereby improving the usability of the near-eye display device 10.
  • the static display information can be data such as the base map and background color when the application is displayed, and correspondingly, the dynamic display information can be data such as changing text or color.
  • the static display information is pre-stored in the storage unit 204.
  • the near-eye display device 10 When the near-eye display device 10 is displayed, only the dynamic display information needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, which reduces the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.
  • the display information such as the graphical interface or menu icon of the application may change during the upgrade. If the first display information stored in the storage unit 204 does not match the second display information, it may cause the first display information and the second display information to be difficult to merge to obtain the third display information, and the near-eye display device 10 may display an error.
  • the communication unit 203 is configured to establish a second communication with the external terminal 6, and the second communication includes updated display information from the external terminal 6. The updated display information is used to replace at least part of the first display information, and the storage unit 204 is configured to store the updated display information.
  • the first display information stored in the storage unit 204 can be matched with the second display information. Even if the application is upgraded iteratively, the first display information can still be merged with the second display information to obtain the third display information, ensuring that the near-eye display device 10 can display correctly.
  • the second display information includes the display content of the external terminal 6 generated based on the movement of the display component 20 relative to the moving area 121.
  • the first moving area 121A, the second moving area 121B and the third moving area 121C correspond to the display content of the navigation, translation and video applications of the external terminal 6 respectively.
  • the display component 20 is located in the first moving area 121A.
  • the external terminal 6 sends the display content of the navigation application of the external terminal 6 corresponding to the first moving area 121A to the near-eye display device 10; when the display component 20 moves from the first moving area 121A to the second moving area 121B, the external terminal 6 sends the display content of the translation application of the external terminal 6 corresponding to the second moving area 121B to the near-eye display device 10, thereby switching the display content of the near-eye display device 10 from the navigation application to the translation application.
  • the display component 20 changes between each moving area 121, the display component 20 can display the external terminal corresponding to the moving area 121.
  • the user does not need to operate the display content of the external terminal 6 at one end, and can switch the display content of the external terminal 6 at one end of the near-eye display device 10, which can improve the convenience of use of the near-eye display device 10.
  • the second display information also includes display content generated based on the movement information and the change of the movement area 121.
  • the first movement area 121A, the second movement area 121B and the third movement area 121C correspond to the display content of the navigation, translation and video applications of the external terminal 6 respectively.
  • the external terminal 6 can send information that the navigation application is switched to the translation application to the near-eye display device 10.
  • the second display information may include text information "Switch from the navigation application to the translation application", or include icons of the navigation application and the translation application, so that the user can know in time that the movement operation will cause the display content of the near-eye display device 10 to switch from the navigation application to the translation application.
  • the display component 20 can display the movement operation process of the display component 20 on the lens 12, and the movement operation process is visualized, which is convenient for the user to obtain feedback on the operation in time, and the user experience can be improved.
  • the near-eye display system 1000 provided by the present application includes the near-eye display device 10 and the terminal 6 as described above, and the near-eye display device 10 is connected to the terminal 6 for communication, and the terminal 6 is configured to establish a first communication with the communication unit 203 of the near-eye display device 10, and the first communication includes the second display information from the terminal 6.
  • the near-eye display device 10 is configured to merge the first display information and the second display information stored in itself to obtain the third display information, and convert the third display information into an optical output and project it to the user side.
  • the near-eye display system 1000 provided in the present application includes a near-eye display device 10 and a terminal 6.
  • the near-eye display device 10 is communicatively connected to the terminal 6 to split the third display information into first display information and second display information, wherein the first display information can be pre-stored at one end of the near-eye display device 10, and the second display information comes from the terminal 6, so that when the near-eye display device 10 is displaying, only the second display information needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the terminal 6, thereby reducing the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the terminal 6. Under the same bandwidth conditions, the communication unit 203 can receive data from the terminal 6 faster, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.
  • the terminal 6 may include an RF circuit 91, a memory 92, an input unit 93, a display unit 94, a sensor 95, an audio circuit 96, a wireless communication module 97, a processor 98, and a power supply 99.
  • the RF circuit 91, the memory 92, the input unit 93, the display unit 94, the sensor 95, the audio circuit 96, and the wireless communication module 97 are respectively connected to the processor 98; the power supply 99 is used to provide power to the terminal 6.
  • the RF circuit 91 is used to receive and send signals; the memory 92 is used to store data instruction information; the input unit 93 is used to input information, which may specifically include a touch panel 931 and other input devices 932 such as operation buttons; the display unit 94 may include a display panel 941, etc.; the sensor 95 includes an infrared sensor, a laser sensor, etc., for detecting user proximity signals, distance signals, etc.; the speaker 961 and the microphone (or microphone) 962 are connected to the processor 98 through the audio circuit 96 for receiving and sending sound signals; the wireless communication module 97 is used to receive and transmit wireless communication signals, so that the terminal 6 can communicate with the near-eye display device 10; the processor 98 is used to process the data information of the terminal.
  • the above terminal is only one embodiment of the present application, and other terminals with wireless communication signal transmission are also within the protection scope of the present application, and the specific internal structure of the terminal is not repeated.
  • the present application provides a control method for a near-eye display device.
  • the control method 300 is used to control a near-eye display device 10, which includes a lens 12 and a display component 20, wherein the display component 20 is configured to be movably disposed on the lens 12, and the display component 20 includes a housing 211, and a processor 202, a communication unit 203, a storage unit 204, and an output unit 205 disposed in the housing 211, and the communication unit 203, the storage unit 204, and the output unit 205 are electrically connected to the processor 202, respectively.
  • the communication unit 203 is communicatively connected to an external terminal 6, wherein the communication connection mode between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6 may be one or more of Bluetooth, ZigBee, or 2.4g.
  • the control method 300 is executed by the processor 202. Referring to FIG. 96, the control method 300 may include steps S310-S340:
  • the first display information includes image or text data that does not change with display time, or the first display information includes static display information.
  • the control method 300 provided in the present application splits the third display information into the first display information and the second display information, wherein the first display information can be pre-stored in the storage unit 204, and the second display information is received through the communication unit 203, so that when the near-eye display device 10 is displaying, only the second display information needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, thereby reducing the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6. Under the same bandwidth conditions, the communication unit 203 can receive data from the terminal 6 faster, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a display module control method and control device and a near-eye display device. The display module control method comprises: monitoring the motion state of a display module on a lens to which the display module is currently connected; and when a target motion state is detected, controlling the display module to image a graphical interface of a target logic function on the lens, wherein the target motion state is preset to trigger a trigger condition for the target logic function. A user can control a display module to make a motion, capable of triggering a logic function to be triggered, on a lens to which the display module is connected, so as to trigger said logic function to start to operate, and then control the display module to image a graphical interface of the triggered logic function on the lens to which the display module is connected, so that the user can quickly interact with virtual information presented by the display module.

Description

显示模组的控制方法、显示模组控制装置及近眼显示装置Display module control method, display module control device and near-eye display device

本申请要求于2023年11月17日提交中国专利局、申请号为2023115480693、申请名称为“近眼显示模组及装置”的申请专利的优先权;于2023年11月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为2023115809662、申请名称为“光学模组、近眼显示装置及光学模组加工方法”的申请专利的优先权;于2023年12月15日提交中国专利局、申请号为2023117335355、申请名称为“显示模组的控制方法、近眼显示装置、电子设备和介质”的申请专利的优先权;于2023年12月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为2023118680668、申请名称为“显示模组的控制方法、近眼显示装置”的申请专利的优先权;于2023年12月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为2023118679567、申请名称为“显示模组的控制方法和近眼显示装置”的申请专利的优先权;于2024年01月17日提交中国专利局、申请号为2024201197317、申请名称为“近眼显示设备及充电盒”的申请专利的优先权;于2024年04月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为2024105440675、申请名称为“近眼显示装置及控制方法、近眼显示系统”的申请专利的优先权;以上全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the patent application filed with the China Patent Office on November 17, 2023, with application number 2023115480693 and application name “Near-eye display module and device”; the priority of the patent application filed with the China Patent Office on November 22, 2023, with application number 2023115809662 and application name “Optical module, near-eye display device and optical module processing method”; the priority of the patent application filed with the China Patent Office on December 15, 2023, with application number 2023117335355 and application name “Control method of display module, near-eye display device, electronic device and medium”; the priority of the patent application filed with the China Patent Office on December 29, 2023, with application number 2023118680668 , the priority right of the patent application with the application name “Control method of display module, near-eye display device”; the priority right of the patent application with application number 2023118679567, submitted to the China Patent Office on December 29, 2023, and the application name “Control method of display module and near-eye display device”; the priority right of the patent application with application number 2024201197317, submitted to the China Patent Office on January 17, 2024, and the application name “Near-eye display device and charging box”; the priority right of the patent application with application number 2024105440675, submitted to the China Patent Office on April 30, 2024, and the application name “Near-eye display device and control method, near-eye display system”; all of the above contents are incorporated by reference in this application.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请属于近眼显示技术领域,更具体地说,涉及显示模组的控制方法、显示模组控制装置及近眼显示装置。The present application belongs to the field of near-eye display technology, and more specifically, to a display module control method, a display module control device, and a near-eye display device.

背景技术Background Art

近眼显示是指在距离眼睛较短的成像距离上成像以供感官感知,例如虚拟现实(Virtual Reality,VR)眼镜和增强现实(Augmented Reality,AR)眼镜均是在距离眼睛较短的距离上成像。也就是说,近眼显示是一个相对的概念,是相对于传统的电视机、显示器等而言的。显然,通常电视机、显示器等设备的成像的显示面板到眼睛的成像距离远大于VR眼镜或AR眼镜等近眼显示设备的成像距离。Near-eye display refers to imaging at a shorter imaging distance from the eyes for sensory perception. For example, virtual reality (VR) glasses and augmented reality (AR) glasses both image at a shorter distance from the eyes. In other words, near-eye display is a relative concept, relative to traditional televisions, monitors, etc. Obviously, the imaging distance from the display panel of televisions, monitors and other devices to the eyes is usually much greater than the imaging distance of near-eye display devices such as VR glasses or AR glasses.

目前,近眼显示通常可以分为VR、AR、混合现实(Mixed Reality,MR)和扩展现实(Extended Reality,XR)。At present, near-eye display can generally be divided into VR, AR, mixed reality (MR) and extended reality (XR).

VR,又称为计算机模拟现实。它是一种通过人机交互和计算机生成的三维模拟所创造的体验。我们可以通过使用虚拟现实设备,例如,耳机、控制器,在环境中进行交互。也就是说,VR是一种可以创建和体验虚拟世界的计算机仿真系统,它利用计算机生成一种模拟环境,并使我们沉浸在这一环境中。VR, also known as computer-simulated reality, is an experience created through human-computer interaction and computer-generated three-dimensional simulation. We can interact in the environment by using virtual reality equipment, such as headphones and controllers. In other words, VR is a computer simulation system that can create and experience a virtual world. It uses computers to generate a simulated environment and immerse us in it.

AR,是一种实时的、直接或间接的对现实世界物理环境的观察。它将我们在真实环境中看到的内容与计算机软件生成的数字内容相融合,以某种方式增强我们所处的真实环境。AR系统将虚拟信息通过摄像头实时传送到耳机或智能眼镜,亦或是通过移动设备,让我们能够清楚查看3D图像。AR is a real-time, direct or indirect observation of the physical environment of the real world. It combines what we see in the real environment with digital content generated by computer software to enhance the real environment we are in in some way. The AR system transmits virtual information to headphones or smart glasses or mobile devices in real time through the camera, allowing us to clearly view 3D images.

MR,是现实世界与虚拟世界的融合,以产生新的环境和可视化。其中,物理对象和数字对象共存,并进行实时交互。这意味着,如果在现实空间中放置一个新图像,在一定程度上,这一新图像会与我们现实环境中的真实物体进行互动。MR is the fusion of the real world and the virtual world to produce new environments and visualizations, in which physical objects and digital objects coexist and interact in real time. This means that if a new image is placed in the real space, to a certain extent, this new image will interact with the real objects in our real environment.

XR,是指由计算机技术和可穿戴设备产生的所有真实及虚拟环境的结合以及人机交互。XR通过数字化增强我们的感官,以此来融合世界。除此之外,它为沉浸式虚拟体验提供了大量不同层级的虚拟传感器输入水平。XR包括上述三种新兴技术,即VR、AR和MR。 XR refers to the combination of all real and virtual environments and human-computer interactions generated by computer technology and wearable devices. XR integrates the world by digitally enhancing our senses. In addition, it provides a large number of different levels of virtual sensor input for immersive virtual experience. XR includes the three emerging technologies mentioned above, namely VR, AR and MR.

发明内容Summary of the invention

在相关技术中,用户存在与虚拟信息进行快捷交互的需求。本申请实施例的目的是提供一种显示模组的控制方法、电子设备、近眼显示装置、介质、芯片和计算机程序产品,以独立或半独立地在一定程度上解决近眼显示技术中用户不能快捷地与虚拟信息进行交互的技术问题。所述的独立解决是指提供一种硬件方面的构造方案,该方案可以独立地工作而不需要软件的配合,即可达成近眼显示技术中用户能快捷地与虚拟信息进行交互的效果。所述的半独立地解决是指提供一种硬件方面的构造方案,该硬件构造方案在与近眼显示,例如供用户与虚拟信息进行交互的软件配合工作时,能够达成近眼显示技术中用户能快捷地与虚拟信息进行交互的效果。In the related art, users have a need to interact quickly with virtual information. The purpose of the embodiments of the present application is to provide a control method for a display module, an electronic device, a near-eye display device, a medium, a chip, and a computer program product, so as to independently or semi-independently solve the technical problem that users cannot quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology to a certain extent. The independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can work independently without the cooperation of software, so as to achieve the effect that users can quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology. The semi-independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can achieve the effect that users can quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology when working in conjunction with near-eye display, such as software for users to interact with virtual information.

本申请实施例的第一方面提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,所述显示模组用于连接在光学镜片上,以及显示模组被配置成输出图像内容,所述方法包括:A first aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a method for controlling a display module, wherein the display module is used to be connected to an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content, the method comprising:

监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;Monitoring the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected;

在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面;所述目标运动状态被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件。When the target motion state is detected, the display module is controlled to form a graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.

本申请实施例的第二方面提供了一种显示模组的控制装置,所述显示模组用于连接在眼镜的镜片上,以及用于在所连接的镜片上成像,所述装置包括:A second aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a control device for a display module, wherein the display module is used to be connected to a lens of glasses and to form an image on the connected lens, and the device comprises:

第一监测模块,用于监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;A first monitoring module, used for monitoring the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected;

第一执行模块,用于在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面;所述目标运动状态被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件。The first execution module is used to control the display module to image a graphical interface of a target logic function on the lens when a target motion state is detected; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.

本申请实施例的第三方面提供了一种近眼显示装置,所述近眼显示装置:处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现一种显示模组的控制方法,所述方法包括:A third aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a near-eye display device, the near-eye display device comprising: a processor and a memory, the memory storing a program or instruction that can be run on the processor, the program or instruction being executed by the processor to implement a method for controlling a display module, the method comprising:

监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;Monitoring the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected;

在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面;所述目标运动状态被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件。When the target motion state is detected, the display module is controlled to form a graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.

在本申请实施例中,用于在眼镜的镜片上增强现实显示成像的显示模组可以在其所连接的镜片上做一些运动,而不是将显示模组固定在镜片上,并且将显示模组可以做的一些运动的运动状态预置为触发一些逻辑功能的触发条件,在监测到显示模组在其所连接的镜片上的运动状态满足某逻辑功能的触发条件的情况下,就控制显示模组在其所连接的镜片上成像出被触发的逻辑的功能的图形界面。相较于相关技术中将显示模组固定在镜片上的方案而言,用户可以控制显示模组在其所连接的镜片做出能够触发欲触发的逻辑功能的运动,从而触发欲触发的逻辑功能开始运行,进而控制显示模组在其所连接的镜片上成像出被触发的逻辑功能的图形界面,使得用户能快捷地与显示模组呈现的虚拟信息进行交互。In the embodiment of the present application, the display module used for augmented reality display imaging on the lens of the glasses can make some movements on the lens to which it is connected, instead of fixing the display module on the lens, and the motion states of some movements that the display module can make are preset as triggering conditions for triggering some logical functions. When it is detected that the motion state of the display module on the lens to which it is connected meets the triggering conditions of a certain logical function, the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of the triggered logical function on the lens to which it is connected. Compared with the solution of fixing the display module on the lens in the related art, the user can control the display module to make a movement on the lens to which it is connected that can trigger the logical function to be triggered, thereby triggering the logical function to be triggered to start running, and then controlling the display module to image a graphical interface of the triggered logical function on the lens to which it is connected, so that the user can quickly interact with the virtual information presented by the display module.

本申请更多相关有益的技术效果将在下面实施例中描述。More relevant beneficial technical effects of the present application will be described in the following embodiments.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施方式中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图是本申请一些实施方式,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the drawings required for use in the implementation will be briefly introduced below. Obviously, the drawings described below are some implementation methods of the present application. For ordinary technicians in this field, other drawings can be obtained based on these drawings without paying creative work.

图1是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组与镜片之间的连接示意图; FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a connection between a display module and a lens provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图2-3是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的各应用场景的示意图;2-3 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图4是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模与智能终端之间的连接关系的示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a connection relationship between a display module and a smart terminal provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图5是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组成像主界面的示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a display module imaging main interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图6是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图;FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图7-14是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的各应用场景的示意图;7-14 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图15是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图;FIG15 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图16是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图;FIG16 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图17是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图;FIG17 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图18是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制装置的结构示意图;FIG18 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device for a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图19是本申请实施例提供的电子设备的结构示意图;FIG19 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图20是本申请实施例提供的电子设备的结构示意图;FIG20 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图21是本申请实施例提供的近眼显示装置的结构示意图;FIG21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a near-eye display device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图22-23是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的各应用场景的示意图;22-23 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图24是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图;FIG24 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图25-30是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的各应用场景的示意图;25-30 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图31是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图;FIG31 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图32-33是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的各应用场景的示意图;32-33 are schematic diagrams of various application scenarios of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图34-39是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的各控制方法的步骤流程的示意图;34-39 are schematic diagrams of the step flow of each control method of the display module provided in the embodiments of the present application;

图40是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组成像主界面的示意图;FIG40 is a schematic diagram of a display module imaging main interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图41是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图;FIG41 is a schematic diagram of a step flow of a method for controlling a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图42-48是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的不同应用场景的示意图;42-48 are schematic diagrams of different application scenarios of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图49是本申请眼镜结构示意图;FIG49 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the glasses of the present application;

图50是本申请近眼显示模组一示例的结构示意图;FIG50 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of a near-eye display module of the present application;

图51是图50的爆炸图;FIG51 is an exploded view of FIG50;

图52是图50中第一连接部与安装座装配状态一示例的结构示意图;FIG52 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of an assembled state of the first connecting portion and the mounting seat in FIG50;

图53是图50的俯视图;FIG53 is a top view of FIG50;

图54是图53中A-A向的剖视图;Fig. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Fig. 53;

图55是本申请一示例中第一盖体的结构示意图;FIG55 is a schematic structural diagram of a first cover body in an example of the present application;

图56是本申请一示例中第二盖体的结构示意图;FIG56 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the second cover body in an example of the present application;

图57是本申请近眼显示模组另一示例的结构示意图;FIG57 is a schematic structural diagram of another example of a near-eye display module of the present application;

图58是图57的局部分解图;FIG58 is a partial exploded view of FIG57;

图59是本申请第二连接部一示例的结构示意图;FIG59 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of a second connecting portion of the present application;

图60为本申请实施例提供的光学模组一实施例的结构示意图;FIG60 is a schematic structural diagram of an optical module according to an embodiment of the present application;

图61为本申请实施例提供的光学模组另一实施例的结构示意图;FIG61 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图62为本申请实施例提供的光学模组各相关面的轮廓的一实施例示意图;FIG62 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the profiles of various relevant surfaces of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图63为本申请实施例提供的光学模组一实施例的立体结构示意图;FIG63 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of an optical module according to an embodiment of the present application;

图64为本申请实施例提供的光学模组又一实施例的立体结构示意图; FIG64 is a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional structure of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图65为本申请实施例提供的光学模组又一实施例的立体结构示意图;FIG65 is a schematic diagram of a three-dimensional structure of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图66为本申请实施例提供的光学模组又一实施例的立体结构示意图;FIG66 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图67为本申请实施例提供的光学模组带光路一实施例的结构示意图;FIG67 is a schematic structural diagram of an optical module with an optical path according to an embodiment of the present application;

图68为本申请实施例提供的光学模组又一实施例的结构示意图;FIG68 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图69为本申请实施例提供的光学模组带光路又一实施例的结构示意图;FIG69 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module with an optical path provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图70为本申请实施例提供的光学模组又一实施例的结构示意图;FIG70 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图71为本申请实施例提供的光学模组又一实施例的立体结构示意图;FIG71 is a schematic diagram of the three-dimensional structure of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图72为本申请实施例提供的光学模组另一实施例的结构示意图;FIG72 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an optical module provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图73为本申请实施例提供的光学模组在眼球的应用场景的结构示意图;FIG73 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an optical module provided by an embodiment of the present application in an application scenario of an eyeball;

图74为本申请实施例提供的光学模组加工方法一实施例的流程示意图;FIG74 is a schematic diagram of a process flow of an optical module processing method according to an embodiment of the present application;

图75是本申请近眼显示设备一实施例的整体结构示意图;FIG75 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a near-eye display device of the present application;

图76是本申请近眼显示设备一实施例不含镜腿的整体结构示意图;FIG76 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a near-eye display device of the present application without temples;

图77是图75实施例另一视角的示意图;FIG77 is a schematic diagram of the embodiment of FIG75 from another viewing angle;

图78是显示模组及第一线圈皆有多个的整体结构示意图;FIG78 is a schematic diagram showing the overall structure of a plurality of display modules and a plurality of first coils;

图79是显示模组设置有线圈支架一实施例的结构剖视示意图;FIG79 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a structure of an embodiment of a display module provided with a coil support;

图80是图79实施例中显示模组设置有第二电池的示意图;FIG80 is a schematic diagram showing that the display module is provided with a second battery in the embodiment of FIG79;

图81是图79实施例中显示模组的结构拆分示意图;FIG81 is a schematic diagram of the structural disassembly of the display module in the embodiment of FIG79;

图82是显示模组另一实施例的结构剖视示意图;FIG82 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the structure of another embodiment of a display module;

图83是图82实施例中显示模组设置有第二电池的示意图;FIG83 is a schematic diagram showing that the display module is provided with a second battery in the embodiment of FIG82;

图84是图83实施例中显示模组的结构拆分示意图;FIG84 is a schematic diagram of the structural disassembly of the display module in the embodiment of FIG83;

图85是本申请充电盒一实施例的整体结构示意图;FIG85 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a charging box of the present application;

图86是本申请提供的近眼显示装置一实施例的结构示意图;FIG86 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a near-eye display device provided by the present application;

图87是本申请提供的镜片一实施例移动区域的设置结构示意图;FIG87 is a schematic diagram of the configuration structure of the moving area of a lens according to an embodiment of the present application;

图88是本申请提供的镜片另一实施例移动区域的设置结构示意图;FIG88 is a schematic diagram of the configuration structure of the moving area of another embodiment of the lens provided by the present application;

图89是本申请提供的镜片再一实施例移动区域的设置结构示意图;FIG89 is a schematic diagram of the configuration structure of the moving area of another embodiment of the lens provided by the present application;

图90是本申请提供的显示组件一实施例位于不同移动区域时显示内容的示意图;FIG90 is a schematic diagram of display contents when a display component according to an embodiment of the present application is located in different moving areas;

图91是本申请提供的显示组件一实施例的结构组成框图示意图;FIG91 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of an embodiment of a display assembly provided by the present application;

图92是本申请提供的输出单元一实施例的结构组成框图示意图;FIG92 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of an output unit according to an embodiment of the present application;

图93是本申请提供的传感单元一实施例的结构组成框图示意图;FIG93 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of a sensing unit according to an embodiment of the present application;

图94是本申请提供的显示组件一实施例的分解结构示意图;FIG94 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of an embodiment of a display assembly provided by the present application;

图95是本申请提供的终端一实施例的结构组成框图示意图;FIG95 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present application;

图96是本申请提供的近眼显示装置控制方法的一实施例的流程示意图;FIG96 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a method for controlling a near-eye display device provided by the present application;

图97是本申请提供的近眼显示系统一实施例的结构示意图。Figure 97 is a structural schematic diagram of an embodiment of a near-eye display system provided in the present application.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

为了使本申请所要解决的技术问题、技术方案及有益效果更加清楚明白,以下结合附图及实施例,对本申请进行进一步详细说明。应当理解,此处所描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请,并不用于限 定本申请。In order to make the technical problems, technical solutions and beneficial effects to be solved by the present application more clearly understood, the present application is further described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings and embodiments. It should be understood that the specific embodiments described herein are only used to explain the present application and are not intended to limit the present application. Finalize the application.

需要说明的是,当元件被称为“固定于”或“设置于”另一个元件,它可以直接在另一个元件上或者间接在该另一个元件上。当一个元件被称为是“连接于”另一个元件,它可以是直接连接到另一个元件或间接连接至该另一个元件上。It should be noted that when an element is referred to as being "fixed to" or "disposed on" another element, it can be directly on the other element or indirectly on the other element. When an element is referred to as being "connected to" another element, it can be directly connected to the other element or indirectly connected to the other element.

需要理解的是,术语“长度”、“宽度”、“上”、“下”、“前”、“后”、“左”、“右”、“竖直”、“水平”、“顶”、“底”、“内”、“外”等指示的方位或位置关系为基于附图所示的方位或位置关系,仅是为了便于描述本申请和简化描述,而不是指示或暗示所指的装置或元件必须具有特定的方位、以特定的方位构造和操作,因此不能理解为对本申请的限制。It should be understood that the terms "length", "width", "up", "down", "front", "back", "left", "right", "vertical", "horizontal", "top", "bottom", "inside", "outside", etc., indicating the orientation or position relationship, are based on the orientation or position relationship shown in the drawings, and are only for the convenience of describing the present application and simplifying the description, and do not indicate or imply that the device or element referred to must have a specific orientation, be constructed and operated in a specific orientation, and therefore should not be understood as a limitation on the present application.

此外,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本申请的描述中,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上,除非另有明确具体的限定。术语“和/或”,用于描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系;例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A、B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。在本申请中描述的参考“一个实施例”或“一些实施例”等意味着在本申请的一个或多个实施例中包括结合该实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特点。由此,在本说明书中的不同之处出现的语句“一个实施例”、“一些实施例”、“另一个实施例”、“另外一些实施例”等不是必然都参考相同的实施例,而是意味着“一个或多个但不是所有的实施例”,除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。术语“包括”、“包含”、“具有”及它们的变形都意味着“包括但不限于”,除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。In addition, the terms "first" and "second" are used only for descriptive purposes and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated. Thus, the features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of the present application, the meaning of "multiple" is two or more, unless otherwise clearly and specifically defined. The term "and/or" is used to describe the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist; for example, A and/or B may represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B may be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. The reference to "one embodiment" or "some embodiments" described in the present application means that one or more embodiments of the present application include specific features, structures or characteristics described in combination with the embodiment. Thus, the statements "one embodiment", "some embodiments", "another embodiment", "some other embodiments", etc. that appear in different places in the present specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment, but mean "one or more but not all embodiments", unless otherwise specifically emphasized in other ways. The terms "include", "comprising", "having" and variations thereof mean "including but not limited to", unless specifically emphasized otherwise.

本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法、装置、设备、近眼显示装置、存储介质、芯片和计算机程序产品,能有效解决AR或近眼显示技术中用户不能快捷地与虚拟信息进行交互的技术问题。下面结合附图进行说明。为了便于(正确)理解本申请实施例,下面先对本申请实施例中可能涉及的技术名词进行定义和解释,在后文中若无特别说明的情况下,相应的技术名词的语义均遵循此处的定义:The embodiments of the present application provide a control method, device, equipment, near-eye display device, storage medium, chip and computer program product of a display module, which can effectively solve the technical problem that users cannot quickly interact with virtual information in AR or near-eye display technology. The following is an explanation with reference to the accompanying drawings. In order to facilitate (correct) understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the technical terms that may be involved in the embodiments of the present application are first defined and explained below. Unless otherwise specified in the following text, the semantics of the corresponding technical terms follow the definitions here:

计算机或计算设备:是指以图灵可计算理论、冯·诺依曼组成结构或哈佛组成结构为基础的所有电子设备。例如,手机、智能手表、单片机系统等都是计算机,而不仅仅限于日常生活中所说例如个人电脑(PC,Personal Computer)这样的狭义计算机。Computer or computing device: refers to all electronic devices based on Turing computability theory, von Neumann structure or Harvard structure. For example, mobile phones, smart watches, single-chip computer systems, etc. are all computers, not just limited to the narrow sense of computers such as personal computers (PC) in daily life.

应用:即计算机应用程序(Computer Program或Application Software),它以某些程序设计语言编写,运行于某种目标结构计算机体系上。计算机应用程序,是指为了得到某种结果而可以由计算机等具有信息处理能力的装置执行的代码化指令序列,或者可以被自动转换成代码化指令序列的符号化指令序列或者符号化语句序列。Application: Computer program or application software, which is written in some programming language and runs on a certain target structure computer system. Computer application refers to a coded instruction sequence that can be executed by a computer or other device with information processing capabilities in order to obtain a certain result, or a symbolic instruction sequence or symbolic statement sequence that can be automatically converted into a coded instruction sequence.

逻辑功能:是指(具有独立运算能力的)近眼显示装置、计算机或计算设备等各种电子设备提供的各种各样的功能。这些功能可以是面向用户的功能,也可以是面向系统(或设备)的功能。例如,面向用户的逻辑功能可以是:图形用户界面(Graphical User Interface,GUI)输出功能、音频输出功能、主界面或桌面、程序/应用、程序/应用中的子功能等等。其中,主界面或桌面、应用等都可以向用户提供GUI,以供用户与之进行交互。面向系统的逻辑功能可以是:碎片文件整理、系统错误诊断等等。Logical functions: refers to various functions provided by various electronic devices such as near-eye display devices (with independent computing capabilities), computers or computing devices. These functions can be user-oriented functions or system (or device)-oriented functions. For example, user-oriented logical functions can be: graphical user interface (GUI) output function, audio output function, main interface or desktop, program/application, sub-functions in program/application, etc. Among them, the main interface or desktop, application, etc. can provide GUI to users for users to interact with. System-oriented logical functions can be: defragmentation of fragmented files, system error diagnosis, etc.

前台运行、后台运行:前台运行和后台运行是两个相对的概念。这两者均是用来描述应用/程序或进程在操作系统(通俗而言操作系统就是指计算机中使得应用与计算机底层硬件进行通信的软件)中的运行方式。下面以传统的计算机为例对前台运行和后台运行进行说明,在AR技术中,前台运行和后台运 行与传统的计算机中的前台运行和后台运行的特征是相似的。在传统的计算机中,当应用在前台运行时,应用的GUI通常会显示在显示屏幕上,用户可以看到应用的GUI或窗口,用户可以基于GUI直接与应用进行交互或通信,此时应用通常会占用输入设备(例如鼠标和键盘);前台运行的应用通常会阻塞用户界面,用户需要等待前台运行的应用执行完成或按照前台运行的应用的需求进行交互;适用于需要用户实时反馈或需要用户输入的任务。在传统的计算机中,当应用在后台运行时,通常不会在显示屏幕上输出GUI,即对用户而言是不可见的,用户通常无法直接与应用进行交互或通信;应用在后台运行时,用户可以继续使用计算机执行其他任务,而应用在用户不可见的状态下默默运行,例如处理文件、执行系统服务等等;后台运行的应用通常不会占用输入设备,不需要用户直接参与任务的执行;允许用户在应用执行的同时继续进行其他任务,提高系统的多任务处理能力。Foreground operation and background operation: Foreground operation and background operation are two relative concepts. Both are used to describe the operation mode of an application/program or process in an operating system (generally speaking, an operating system refers to the software in a computer that enables the application to communicate with the underlying hardware of the computer). The following uses a traditional computer as an example to explain foreground operation and background operation. In AR technology, foreground operation and background operation are two different concepts. The characteristics of running in the foreground and in the background are similar to those of running in a traditional computer. In a traditional computer, when an application is running in the foreground, the GUI of the application is usually displayed on the display screen, and the user can see the GUI or window of the application. The user can directly interact or communicate with the application based on the GUI. At this time, the application usually occupies the input device (such as the mouse and keyboard); the application running in the foreground usually blocks the user interface, and the user needs to wait for the application running in the foreground to complete execution or interact according to the needs of the application running in the foreground; it is suitable for tasks that require real-time user feedback or user input. In a traditional computer, when an application is running in the background, the GUI is usually not output on the display screen, that is, it is invisible to the user, and the user usually cannot directly interact or communicate with the application; when the application is running in the background, the user can continue to use the computer to perform other tasks, and the application runs silently in a state invisible to the user, such as processing files, executing system services, etc.; the application running in the background usually does not occupy the input device, and does not require the user to directly participate in the execution of the task; allowing the user to continue other tasks while the application is executing, improving the multitasking capability of the system.

显示模组:是指基于光学技术成像的显示部件、显示装置或显示设备。因此,显示模组是一个物理硬件模块。在一些可选的实施方式中,显示模组可以连接在镜片上并通过显示模组进行上电成像。其中镜片可以是例如日常生活中常见的太阳镜、用于视力矫正的眼镜、护目镜或带有镜片的面罩等,也可以是具有音频,传感等的智能眼镜的镜片等等。显示模组可以通过磁力、夹子等吸附等的方式连接在镜片上,从而使得显示模组可以在其所连接的镜片上自由运动或者在制定的设置区域移动,例如显示模组可以在所放置的镜片上直线或曲线移动、轴旋转等。Display module: refers to a display component, display device or display equipment based on optical imaging technology. Therefore, the display module is a physical hardware module. In some optional embodiments, the display module can be connected to the lens and powered on for imaging through the display module. The lens can be, for example, common sunglasses in daily life, glasses for vision correction, goggles or masks with lenses, etc., or lenses of smart glasses with audio, sensing, etc. The display module can be connected to the lens by means of magnetism, clips, etc., so that the display module can move freely on the lens to which it is connected or move in a specified setting area. For example, the display module can move in a straight line or curve, rotate on an axis, etc. on the placed lens.

在相关技术中,用户存在与虚拟信息进行快捷交互的需求。本申请实施例的目的是提供一种显示模组的控制方法、电子设备、近眼显示装置、介质、芯片和计算机程序产品,以独立或半独立地在一定程度上解决近眼显示技术中用户不能快捷地与虚拟信息进行交互的技术问题。所述的独立解决是指提供一种硬件方面的构造方案,该方案可以独立地工作而不需要软件的配合,即可达成近眼显示技术中用户能快捷地与虚拟信息进行交互的效果。所述的半独立地解决是指提供一种硬件方面的构造方案,该硬件构造方案在与近眼显示,例如AR技术中供用户与虚拟信息进行交互的软件配合工作时,能够达成近眼显示技术中用户能快捷地与虚拟信息进行交互的效果。In the related art, users have a need to interact quickly with virtual information. The purpose of the embodiments of the present application is to provide a control method, an electronic device, a near-eye display device, a medium, a chip, and a computer program product of a display module, so as to independently or semi-independently solve the technical problem that users cannot quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology to a certain extent. The independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can work independently without the cooperation of software, so as to achieve the effect that users can quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology. The semi-independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can achieve the effect that users can quickly interact with virtual information in near-eye display technology when working in conjunction with near-eye display, such as software for users to interact with virtual information in AR technology.

示例性地,如图1所示,图1是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组与镜片之间的连接示意图。请参见图1,以眼镜的镜片作为一实施例的说明,但本申请不限制于眼镜,也可是例如头盔、护目、视力矫正、运动等头戴式设备上相关上的镜片,其中眼镜1可以是普通的眼镜,也可以是AR眼镜、智能眼镜等等。眼镜1包括镜框11、镶嵌在镜框11中的镜片12和活动连接在镜框11上的镜腿13。镜片12包括环境侧24和眼镜侧22,用户的眼睛可以由眼睛侧透过镜片12看到环境侧的物理环境,可选地,显示模组2在镜片12朝向环境侧24的一端设置有第一磁吸件,显示模组2在镜片12朝向眼睛侧22设置有第二磁吸件,,可以理解,在镜片12的两侧设置两个相互吸附的磁吸件,实现显示模组在镜片上预固定,其中第一磁吸件和第二磁吸件可以是相互吸引的磁铁,当然也可是其中一个是磁铁,另一个是可被磁铁吸引的金属等等,从而使得显示模组2整体吸附在镜片12上,此时显示模组2还可以在镜片12上自由滑动或轴旋转而不会从镜片12上脱离。当然其它例如吸附移动的方案在此也是可行的。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG1 , FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a connection between a display module and a lens provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG1 , a lens of glasses is used as an example for explanation of an embodiment, but the present application is not limited to glasses, and may also be lenses on head-mounted devices such as helmets, eye protection, vision correction, sports, etc., wherein the glasses 1 may be ordinary glasses, or may be AR glasses, smart glasses, etc. The glasses 1 include a frame 11, a lens 12 embedded in the frame 11, and temples 13 movably connected to the frame 11. The lens 12 includes an environment side 24 and a glasses side 22. The user's eyes can see the physical environment of the environment side through the lens 12 from the eye side. Optionally, the display module 2 is provided with a first magnetic member at one end of the lens 12 facing the environment side 24, and the display module 2 is provided with a second magnetic member at the side 22 of the lens 12 facing the eye side 22. It can be understood that two mutually adsorbed magnetic members are provided on both sides of the lens 12 to realize the pre-fixation of the display module on the lens, wherein the first magnetic member and the second magnetic member can be magnets that attract each other, of course, one of them can be a magnet and the other can be a metal that can be attracted by a magnet, etc., so that the display module 2 is adsorbed on the lens 12 as a whole, and the display module 2 can also slide freely on the lens 12 or rotate on the axis without detaching from the lens 12. Of course, other solutions such as adsorption and movement are also feasible here.

示例性地,如图2和图3所示,图2和图3均是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图,图3可以是从眼镜1的镜腿13所在的方向观察(即眼镜侧)眼镜1得到的主视图。请结合参见图1、图2和图3,图1中直线箭头a所示的方向即眼睛视线观察显示模组2在镜片12上成像出的虚拟图像的方向,用户从箭头a所示的方向观察显示模组2的端面,可以看到基于AR技术在镜片12所成的虚拟图像或图形界面。即从图1中所示的箭头a的方向观察显示模组2所看到的显示模组2的端面处就是显示模组2的显示区21,显示模组2在工作中时显示区21可以是处于“被点亮”的状态,即能 够形成图像内容,例如可包括文字、交互界面、视频、图像等等相关显示内容。而镜片12上非显示模组占据的区域则仍保持镜片12本身的属性,例如作为用户可以通过眼睛侧透过镜片12看到环境侧的,例如护目、视力矫正等即作为镜片本身的属性而存在。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application, and FIG. 3 may be a front view of the glasses 1 observed from the direction where the temples 13 of the glasses 1 are located (i.e., the glasses side). Please refer to FIG. 1, FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 in combination. The direction indicated by the straight arrow a in FIG. 1 is the direction in which the eye observes the virtual image imaged by the display module 2 on the lens 12. When the user observes the end face of the display module 2 from the direction indicated by the arrow a, he or she can see the virtual image or graphic interface formed on the lens 12 based on the AR technology. That is, the end face of the display module 2 seen when observing the display module 2 from the direction of the arrow a shown in FIG. 1 is the display area 21 of the display module 2. When the display module 2 is in operation, the display area 21 may be in a "lit" state, that is, it can The image content can be formed, for example, it may include text, interactive interface, video, image and other related display content. The area on the lens 12 not occupied by the display module still maintains the properties of the lens 12 itself, for example, the user can see the environment side through the lens 12 through the eye side, such as eye protection, vision correction, etc., which exists as the properties of the lens itself.

在一些可选的实施方式中,镜片12的中心位置是校准位置,该校准位置是显示模组2的参考位置,显示模组2静止于该校准位置处时在镜片12上成像出主界面或预设的逻辑功能的界面。之所以将镜片12的中心位置确定为校准位置,是因为显示模组2在中心位置处可以向周向更多的方向和距离上进行移动,以方便用户操作显示模组2和自定义预设成像区。In some optional embodiments, the center position of the lens 12 is a calibration position, which is a reference position of the display module 2. When the display module 2 is stationary at the calibration position, a main interface or an interface of a preset logical function is imaged on the lens 12. The center position of the lens 12 is determined as the calibration position because the display module 2 can move in more directions and distances in the circumferential direction at the center position, so as to facilitate the user to operate the display module 2 and customize the preset imaging area.

用户在佩戴了眼镜1后,可以用手按住(或捏住)显示模组2的触摸部以拖动显示模组2在镜片12上移动或旋转显示模组2使显示模组2进行轴旋转。在一些实施例中,显示模组2可位于环境侧,显示区21的光线可以透过镜片达到眼睛侧的用户眼睛中成像,此时触摸部可以位于环境侧,因此用户可以较好地进行交互;另一些实施例中,显示模组2可位于眼镜侧,此时,显示区21的光线可以直接进入用户的眼睛成像,此时触摸部可以位于眼睛侧,因此用户可以较好地进行较为隐蔽地交互。After wearing the glasses 1, the user can press (or pinch) the touch portion of the display module 2 to drag the display module 2 to move on the lens 12 or rotate the display module 2 to make the display module 2 rotate on the axis. In some embodiments, the display module 2 can be located on the environment side, and the light of the display area 21 can pass through the lens to the user's eyes on the eye side to form an image. At this time, the touch portion can be located on the environment side, so the user can interact better; in other embodiments, the display module 2 can be located on the glasses side, and at this time, the light of the display area 21 can directly enter the user's eyes to form an image. At this time, the touch portion can be located on the eye side, so the user can interact better and more covertly.

如图22所示,图22是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图22,显示模组2的触摸部位于环境侧24,用户可以按住(或捏住)显示模组2的触摸部以拖动显示模组2在镜片12上移动或旋转显示模组2使显示模组2进行轴旋转。As shown in FIG22 , FIG22 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG22 , the touch portion of the display module 2 is located on the environment side 24 , and the user can press (or pinch) the touch portion of the display module 2 to drag the display module 2 to move on the lens 12 or rotate the display module 2 to make the display module 2 rotate on the axis.

在一些可选的实施方式中,显示模组2的显示区21在镜片12上成像出的虚拟图像或图形界面可以来自于显示模组2本身,或者与显示模组2通信连接的眼镜1,当然其它实施例中也可以是来自于与眼镜1和显示模组2均保持相对独立的其他电子设备,如手机、平板电脑等智能终端或计算机。若眼镜1是普通的眼镜,则显示模组2在镜片12上成像出的虚拟图像或图形界面可以来自于与眼镜1和显示模组2均保持相对独立的其他电子设备,如手机、平板电脑等智能终端或计算机。In some optional embodiments, the virtual image or graphic interface formed by the display area 21 of the display module 2 on the lens 12 may come from the display module 2 itself, or the glasses 1 that are connected to the display module 2 in communication. Of course, in other embodiments, it may also come from other electronic devices that are relatively independent of the glasses 1 and the display module 2, such as smart terminals such as mobile phones and tablet computers, or computers. If the glasses 1 are ordinary glasses, the virtual image or graphic interface formed by the display module 2 on the lens 12 may come from other electronic devices that are relatively independent of the glasses 1 and the display module 2, such as smart terminals such as mobile phones and tablet computers, or computers.

示例性地,如图4所示,图4是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模与智能终端之间的连接关系的示意图。请参见图4,显示模组2(物理)连接在近眼显示装置10上,该近眼显示装置10可以是前述的眼镜1,智能终端4可以是PC、laptop、智能手机、平板电脑、智能音箱、服务器等等,显示模组2与智能终端4之间建立有线或无线的通信连接。例如,显示模组2和智能终端4基于Wifi协议或BlueTooth协议进行通信;或者,显示模组2和智能终端4借助USB线缆基于USB传输协议进行通信,且显示模组2也借助USB线缆从智能终端4获取电能。当然,并不局限于前述的示例,显示模组2和智能终端4还可以基于其他的通信协议建立有线或无线通信连接,例如NFC通信协议、P2P(点对点)网络等等。显示模组2和近眼显示装置10共同组成智能终端4的“显示设备”,智能终端4输出的GUI通过显示模组2成像在近眼显示装置10上。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG4 , FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a connection relationship between a display module and a smart terminal provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG4 , the display module 2 is (physically) connected to a near-eye display device 10, and the near-eye display device 10 may be the aforementioned glasses 1, and the smart terminal 4 may be a PC, a laptop, a smart phone, a tablet computer, a smart speaker, a server, etc., and a wired or wireless communication connection is established between the display module 2 and the smart terminal 4. For example, the display module 2 and the smart terminal 4 communicate based on the Wifi protocol or the BlueTooth protocol; or, the display module 2 and the smart terminal 4 communicate based on the USB transmission protocol with the aid of a USB cable, and the display module 2 also obtains power from the smart terminal 4 with the aid of a USB cable. Of course, it is not limited to the aforementioned example, and the display module 2 and the smart terminal 4 can also establish a wired or wireless communication connection based on other communication protocols, such as an NFC communication protocol, a P2P (point-to-point) network, and the like. The display module 2 and the near-eye display device 10 together constitute the “display device” of the smart terminal 4 , and the GUI output by the smart terminal 4 is imaged on the near-eye display device 10 through the display module 2 .

在一些可选的实施方式中,在显示模组2的触摸部上可设置有触摸传感器或压力、电容传感器等,以检测显示模组2的触摸部是否被触摸。在一些可选的实施方式中,在显示模组2的触摸部上还设置有微型摄像头,以从环境中采集图像/视频数据。在一些可选的实施方式中,在显示模组2的触摸部上还设置有微型麦克风,以从环境中采集环境音。在一些可选的实施方式中,与显示模组2的显示区21的一侧也设置有微型摄像头,以采集佩戴眼镜1的用户的眼部图像,以对用户的眼球进行追踪。In some optional embodiments, a touch sensor or a pressure or capacitance sensor may be provided on the touch portion of the display module 2 to detect whether the touch portion of the display module 2 is touched. In some optional embodiments, a micro camera is also provided on the touch portion of the display module 2 to collect image/video data from the environment. In some optional embodiments, a micro microphone is also provided on the touch portion of the display module 2 to collect ambient sound from the environment. In some optional embodiments, a micro camera is also provided on one side of the display area 21 of the display module 2 to collect eye images of the user wearing the glasses 1 to track the user's eyeballs.

触发条件:是指提前预置的触发逻辑功能运行或执行的条件。在本申请实施例的一些可选的实施方式中,将显示模组的某些运动状态预置为某些逻辑功能的触发条件。例如,将显示模组静止于其所连接的镜片上的某一设定的位置处预置为触发输出主界面功能,则在后续监测到显示模组静止于该设定的位置处的情况下,显示模组将在其所连接的镜片上的成像主界面,用户通过观察显示模组的显示区从而可 以观察到在镜片上成像出的主界面。可选地,在主界面中可以有至少一个应用(或文件)的图标(的缩略图)。其中某一设定的位置可以为镜片的中心位置,当然也可也是边框的四角等较容易记忆和识别的位置。Trigger condition: refers to the condition preset in advance for triggering the operation or execution of a logic function. In some optional implementations of the embodiments of the present application, certain motion states of the display module are preset as trigger conditions for certain logic functions. For example, the display module is preset to be stationary at a certain set position on the lens to which it is connected as a trigger output main interface function. Then, when the display module is subsequently monitored to be stationary at the set position, the display module will display the imaging main interface on the lens to which it is connected, and the user can observe the display area of the display module to thereby The main interface imaged on the lens can be observed. Optionally, there can be at least one icon (thumbnail) of an application (or file) in the main interface. The set position can be the center of the lens, or the four corners of the frame, etc., which are easier to remember and identify.

预设成像区:是指预先在显示模组所连接的镜片上为显示模组设定的成像区域。在一些可选的实施方式中,预设成像区可以是显示模组所连接的镜片上的一规则区域,例如是矩形区域、圆形区域或椭圆形区域。在一些可选的实施方式中,预设成像区也可以是显示模组所连接的镜片上的一不规则区域。在一些可选的实施方式中,预设成像区也可以是显示模组所连接的镜片的整个镜片区域。Preset imaging area: refers to an imaging area pre-set for the display module on the lens to which the display module is connected. In some optional embodiments, the preset imaging area may be a regular area on the lens to which the display module is connected, such as a rectangular area, a circular area, or an elliptical area. In some optional embodiments, the preset imaging area may also be an irregular area on the lens to which the display module is connected. In some optional embodiments, the preset imaging area may also be the entire lens area of the lens to which the display module is connected.

示例性地,如图5所示,图5是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组成像主界面的示意图。请参见图5,用户在佩戴上眼镜1后,从镜腿13(请结合图1和图2)一侧向镜片12观察(即眼镜侧),用户可以通过观察显示模组2的显示区21,从而观察到显示模组2在镜片12上成像出的主界面。即在图5的示例中,显示模组2静止于镜片12上的图示位置(该位置并不限于图5中所示位置,用户可以自行设定显示模组2静止于镜片12的任意位置处触发输出主界面的逻辑功能)时,触发输出主界面的逻辑功能。在图5的示例中,预设成像区121即镜片12的整个镜片区域,预设成像区121被划分成了多个子区域(例如图5中所示的6个子区域),在每个子区域中成像出该子区域映射的应用或文件的图标(的缩略图),例如在子区域1211中成像出应用F的图标,在子区域1212中成像出应用E的图标。在图5中,共示例出了在六个子区域中成像出应用A-I的图标。在其他一些可选的实施方式中,图标A-I中的至少之一可以是视频、图片、音频、文本等文件图标(的缩略图)。在一些可选的实施方式中,在将显示模组2首次连接在镜片12上并开启显示模组2时,显示模组2默认在镜片12上成像出主界面。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG5 , FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a display module imaging main interface provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG5 , after the user puts on the glasses 1, the user observes from the side of the temple 13 (please refer to FIG1 and FIG2 ) toward the lens 12 (i.e., the glasses side), and the user can observe the display area 21 of the display module 2, thereby observing the main interface imaged by the display module 2 on the lens 12. That is, in the example of FIG5 , when the display module 2 is stationary at the illustrated position on the lens 12 (the position is not limited to the position shown in FIG5 , and the user can set the display module 2 to be stationary at any position of the lens 12 to trigger the logic function of outputting the main interface), the logic function of outputting the main interface is triggered. In the example of FIG. 5 , the preset imaging area 121 is the entire lens area of the lens 12, and the preset imaging area 121 is divided into a plurality of sub-areas (e.g., 6 sub-areas shown in FIG. 5 ), and an icon (thumbnail) of an application or file mapped in the sub-area is imaged in each sub-area, for example, an icon of application F is imaged in sub-area 1211, and an icon of application E is imaged in sub-area 1212. In FIG. 5 , the icons of applications A-I are imaged in six sub-areas. In some other optional embodiments, at least one of the icons A-I may be a file icon (thumbnail) such as a video, picture, audio, or text. In some optional embodiments, when the display module 2 is first connected to the lens 12 and the display module 2 is turned on, the display module 2 images the main interface on the lens 12 by default.

需要补充说明的是,在图5中为了便于说明主界面中划分出了多个子区域,在图5中示意出了标示各个子区域的网格线(即镜片12上的虚线网格),不应当将该网格线理解为本申请实施例提供的显示模组2成像出的主界面中必须有网格线,显然该网格线并不是必须的,即在成像出的主界面中可以没有该网格线,即显示模组2放置在镜片12上后,作为镜片12的本体上是无法看到网格线,镜片12仍然保持镜片自身的属性。当然如果镜片自身是采用了例如光波导的全息类镜片,则可以相互结合以进行简单提示等等。当然,也可以为用户提供设置选项,供用户选择在成像主界面时是否也成像出该网格线。若用户设置成像主界面时也成像该网格线,则显示模组在成像主界面的同时会成像该网格线。若用户设置成像主界面时不成像该网格线,则显示模组在成像主界面的不会成像该网格线。当然网络线也可是对应在智能终端(例如手机app)上的图形界面,方便用户通过终端的图形界面去划分或自定义预设成像区121的网络线。此外,该网格线的线型又不局限于图5中所示的虚线,还可以是实线、中心线等等。It should be noted that in order to facilitate the description of the main interface in FIG. 5, multiple sub-areas are divided, and the grid lines (i.e., the dotted grids on the lens 12) indicating each sub-area are schematically shown in FIG. 5. The grid lines should not be understood as the main interface imaged by the display module 2 provided in the embodiment of the present application must have grid lines. Obviously, the grid lines are not necessary, that is, there may be no grid lines in the imaged main interface, that is, after the display module 2 is placed on the lens 12, the grid lines cannot be seen on the body of the lens 12, and the lens 12 still maintains the properties of the lens itself. Of course, if the lens itself adopts a holographic lens such as an optical waveguide, it can be combined with each other for simple prompts, etc. Of course, it is also possible to provide a setting option for the user to choose whether to image the grid lines when imaging the main interface. If the user sets the grid lines to be imaged when imaging the main interface, the display module will image the grid lines while imaging the main interface. If the user sets the grid lines not to be imaged when imaging the main interface, the display module will not image the grid lines when imaging the main interface. Of course, the grid lines may also correspond to a graphical interface on a smart terminal (such as a mobile phone app), so that the user can use the graphical interface of the terminal to divide or customize the grid lines of the preset imaging area 121. In addition, the line type of the grid lines is not limited to the dotted lines shown in FIG. 5, but may also be solid lines, center lines, etc.

本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,该显示模组用于连接在眼镜的镜片上,以及用于在所连接的镜片上成像。执行该显示模组的控制方法的可以是图1至图5中的眼镜1、显示模组2、近眼显示装置10或智能终端中至少之一,其能够实现控制显示模组2在其所连接的眼镜1(或近眼显示装置10)上所成像的GUI的具体信息。如图6所示,图6是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。请参见图6,该显示模组的控制方法,包括:An embodiment of the present application provides a method for controlling a display module, which is used to be connected to the lenses of glasses and to form an image on the connected lenses. The method for controlling the display module may be performed by at least one of the glasses 1, display module 2, near-eye display device 10 or smart terminal in Figures 1 to 5, which can realize the specific information of the GUI imaged by the display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10) to which it is connected. As shown in Figure 6, Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the method for controlling the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. Please refer to Figure 6, the method for controlling the display module includes:

S11,监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;S11, monitoring the movement state of the display module on the lens currently connected;

镜片是显示模组当前所连接的眼镜上的镜片,可以为上述实施例描述的,此处不再赘述。The lens is the lens on the glasses to which the display module is currently connected, which may be as described in the above embodiment and will not be described again here.

在一些可选的实施方式中,在显示模组中内置有惯性传感器或加速度传感器(或陀螺仪),通过此类传感器可以采集显示模组的瞬时速度和加速度,从而根据采集到的瞬时速度和加速度并结合时间等参数确定显示模组的运动状态。 In some optional embodiments, an inertial sensor or an acceleration sensor (or gyroscope) is built into the display module, and such a sensor can be used to collect the instantaneous velocity and acceleration of the display module, thereby determining the motion state of the display module based on the collected instantaneous velocity and acceleration in combination with parameters such as time.

S12,在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面;所述目标运动状态被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件。S12, when the target motion state is detected, controlling the display module to form an image of a graphical interface of a target logic function on the lens; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.

目标逻辑功能可以是从设备或系统提供的所有(面向用户和面向系统的)逻辑功能中确定出的至少一个逻辑功能。The target logical function may be at least one logical function determined from all (user-oriented and system-oriented) logical functions provided by the device or system.

示例性地,目标逻辑功能可以是输出主界面功能、输出社交应用的聊天界面的功能、输出浏览器的搜索界面等等。Exemplarily, the target logic function may be a function of outputting a main interface, a function of outputting a chat interface of a social application, a function of outputting a search interface of a browser, and the like.

在本申请实施例中,显示模组在镜片上的运动状态大体上可以分成以下两类:一、显示模组在镜片上处于相对静止中;二、显示模组在镜片上处于相对运动中。其中,显示模组在镜片上处于相对运动中又可以大体上分为两类:显示模组可以在镜片上移动(移动是指从镜片上的一点运动至另一点)或(绕其自身的中轴线——在图1所示的示例中为与箭头a相重合的轴线)轴旋转。目标运动状态可以是预先从显示模组各种可能的运动状态中确定出的可以触发目标逻辑功能的运动状态。在另一些实施例中,运动还可以包括多段式运动,即在镜片上进行多段直线式的组合,或类“图案式”的运动,例如折线段、L、Z字母等形状的轨迹类运动。In the embodiment of the present application, the motion state of the display module on the lens can be roughly divided into the following two categories: 1. The display module is relatively still on the lens; 2. The display module is in relative motion on the lens. Among them, the display module in relative motion on the lens can be roughly divided into two categories: the display module can move on the lens (movement means moving from one point on the lens to another point) or rotate (around its own central axis - in the example shown in Figure 1, it is the axis that coincides with arrow a). The target motion state can be a motion state that can trigger the target logical function that is determined in advance from various possible motion states of the display module. In other embodiments, the motion can also include multi-segment motion, that is, a combination of multiple straight lines on the lens, or "pattern-like" motion, such as trajectory-like motion in the shape of broken line segments, L, Z letters, etc.

在一些可选的实施方式中,在根据采集到的瞬时速度和加速度并结合时间等参数确定显示模组的运动状态是目标运动状态的情况下,会触发其自身的触发条件是目标运动状态的目标逻辑功能,目标逻辑功能被触发后会开始运行或执行(如果被触发的目标逻辑功能是已经在后台运行的应用,则将目标逻辑功能切换至前台运行),目标逻辑功能在执行或运行时,会相应的控制显示模组在镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面。In some optional embodiments, when the motion state of the display module is determined to be the target motion state based on the collected instantaneous velocity and acceleration in combination with parameters such as time, a target logic function whose trigger condition is the target motion state will be triggered. After the target logic function is triggered, it will start to run or execute (if the triggered target logic function is an application that is already running in the background, the target logic function will be switched to the foreground to run). When the target logic function is executed or running, it will correspondingly control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens.

示例性地,以图1至3所示的实施方式为例,目标运动状态可以是显示模组2在镜片12上做直线运动、显示模组2静止于镜片12上的一设定位置处(该设定位置是预先选定的一固定位置)或显示模组2在镜片12上沿着镜片12的对角线(假定镜片有四个角,任意两个不相邻的角之间连线即对角线)移动等等。同时,显示模组2在镜片12上做直线运动被预置为输出社交应用的聊天界面的功能的触发条件,显示模组2静止于镜片12上的一设定位置处被预置为输出主界面功能的触发条件,显示模组2在镜片12上沿着镜片12的对角线移动被预置为输出浏览器的搜索界面的触发条件。For example, taking the implementation shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 as an example, the target motion state may be that the display module 2 moves linearly on the lens 12, the display module 2 is stationary at a set position on the lens 12 (the set position is a pre-selected fixed position), or the display module 2 moves along the diagonal line of the lens 12 (assuming that the lens has four corners, the line connecting any two non-adjacent corners is the diagonal line), etc. At the same time, the display module 2 moves linearly on the lens 12 is preset as a trigger condition for outputting the chat interface of the social application, the display module 2 is stationary at a set position on the lens 12 is preset as a trigger condition for outputting the main interface function, and the display module 2 moves along the diagonal line of the lens 12 on the lens 12 is preset as a trigger condition for outputting the search interface of the browser.

示例性地,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上做直线运动,则控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像社交应用的聊天界面;在监测到显示模组2静止于镜片12上的一设定位置处,设定位置处可为镜片的中心等较好识别的位置,或者用户根据自己的喜好定义的位置,设定位置处则控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像主界面(请结合参见图5及相关实施方式说明);在监测到显示模组2镜片12上沿对角线移动,则控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像浏览器的搜索界面。Exemplarily, when it is detected that the display module 2 makes a linear motion on the lens 12, the display module 2 is controlled to image a chat interface of a social application on the lens 12; when it is detected that the display module 2 is stationary at a set position on the lens 12, the set position may be a well-recognized position such as the center of the lens, or a position defined by the user according to his or her preferences, the display module 2 is controlled to image a main interface on the lens 12 at the set position (please refer to FIG. 5 and related implementation descriptions); when it is detected that the display module 2 moves diagonally on the lens 12, the display module 2 is controlled to image a search interface of a browser on the lens 12.

在本申请实施例中,用于在眼镜的镜片上增强现实显示成像的显示模组可以在其所连接的镜片上做一些运动,而不是将显示模组固定在镜片上,并且将显示模组可以做的一些运动的运动状态预置为触发一些逻辑功能的触发条件,在监测到显示模组在其所连接的镜片上的运动状态满足某逻辑功能的触发条件的情况下,就控制显示模组在其所连接的镜片上成像出被触发的逻辑的功能的图形界面。相较于相关技术中将显示模组固定在镜片上的方案而言,用户可以控制显示模组在其所连接的镜片做出能够触发欲触发的逻辑功能的运动,从而触发欲触发的逻辑功能开始运行,进而控制显示模组在其所连接的镜片上成像出被触发的逻辑功能的图形界面,使得用户能快捷地与显示模组呈现的虚拟信息进行交互。In the embodiment of the present application, the display module used for augmented reality display imaging on the lens of the glasses can make some movements on the lens to which it is connected, instead of fixing the display module on the lens, and the motion states of some movements that the display module can make are preset as triggering conditions for triggering some logical functions. When it is detected that the motion state of the display module on the lens to which it is connected meets the triggering conditions of a certain logical function, the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of the triggered logical function on the lens to which it is connected. Compared with the solution of fixing the display module on the lens in the related art, the user can control the display module to make a movement on the lens to which it is connected that can trigger the logical function to be triggered, thereby triggering the logical function to be triggered to start running, and then controlling the display module to image a graphical interface of the triggered logical function on the lens to which it is connected, so that the user can quickly interact with the virtual information presented by the display module.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第一逻辑功能;所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件 被预置为触发所述第一逻辑功能的触发条件;步骤S12,包括:In some optional embodiments, the target motion state includes: the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition; the target logical function includes: a first logical function; the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the first logical function; step S12, comprising:

在监测到所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。When it is detected that the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition, the display module is controlled to image a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,监测到显示模组的产生了移动可以是监测到显示模组的瞬时速度从0突变为不为0到再次变为0的过程(记为第一过程,后文中所述的第一过程均是指监测到显示模组的瞬时速度从0突变为不为0到再次变为0的过程)。若监测到的该瞬时速度的突变过程满足第一预设条件,则控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。In some optional implementations, the movement of the display module may be detected by detecting a process in which the instantaneous speed of the display module changes from 0 to a value other than 0 and then changes to 0 again (referred to as the first process, and the first process described hereinafter refers to the process in which the instantaneous speed of the display module changes from 0 to a value other than 0 and then changes to 0 again). If the detected sudden change process of the instantaneous speed satisfies the first preset condition, the display module is controlled to image the first graphical interface of the first logic function on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,第一逻辑功能可以是泛指从设备或系统提供的所有(面向用户和面向系统的)逻辑功能中确定出的至少一个逻辑功能。In some optional implementations, the first logical function may generally refer to at least one logical function determined from all (user-oriented and system-oriented) logical functions provided by a device or a system.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能可以是输出主界面、电话拨号、智能助手、音乐播放器、视频播放器、照相机、相册、社交应用等等。Exemplarily, the first logical function may be outputting a main interface, phone dialing, a smart assistant, a music player, a video player, a camera, a photo album, a social application, and the like.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述第一预设条件可以是以下示例的①至⑥六条条件中的任意一条或组合:In some optional implementations, the first preset condition may be any one or a combination of the following six conditions ① to ⑥:

条件①、所述移动的位移距离ΔS不小于预设的第一阈值长度S_1;Condition ①: The displacement distance ΔS of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length S_1;

本申请实施例中所述的位移均服从物理学上的定义。即,位移是指物体在一段时间内从初位置移动到末位置,由初位置指向末位置的有向线段即位移。该有向线段的长度即位移距离,该有向线段的方向即位移方向。The displacements described in the embodiments of the present application all obey the definition in physics. That is, displacement refers to the movement of an object from an initial position to a final position within a period of time, and the directed line segment from the initial position to the final position is the displacement. The length of the directed line segment is the displacement distance, and the direction of the directed line segment is the displacement direction.

在一些可选的实施方式,在监测到第一过程中显示模组的ΔS≥S_1,则控制显示模组在镜片上成像第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。In some optional implementations, when it is detected that ΔS≥S_1 of the display module in the first process, the display module is controlled to image a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能是电话拨号功能。如图7所示,图7是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图7,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中显示模组2的ΔS≥S_1,则触发电话拨号功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出电话拨号功能的拨号界面。Exemplarily, the first logic function is a telephone dialing function. As shown in FIG. 7 , FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 7 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and ΔS ≥ S_1 of the display module 2 in the first process, the telephone dialing function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image a dialing interface of the telephone dialing function on the lens 12.

条件②、所述移动的位移距离ΔS不小于预设的第一阈值长度S_1,且所述移动的位移方向预设的第一方向 Condition ②: The displacement distance ΔS of the movement is not less than the preset first threshold length S_1, and the displacement direction of the movement Preset first direction

在一些可选的实施方式,在监测到第一过程中显示模组的ΔS≥S_1,且第一过程中显示模组的 方向相同,则控制显示模组在镜片上成像第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。In some optional implementations, when it is detected that ΔS ≥ S_1 of the display module in the first process, and If the directions are the same, the display module is controlled to form a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能是智能助手功能。请参见图7,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中显示模组2的ΔS≥S_1且显示模组2的方向相同,则触发智能助手功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出智能助手功能的(语音或文字)指令获取界面。Exemplarily, the first logic function is an intelligent assistant function. Referring to FIG. 7 , after monitoring that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 , and in the first process, ΔS of the display module 2 ≥ S_1 and the display module 2 If the directions are the same, the smart assistant function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the (voice or text) command acquisition interface of the smart assistant function on the lens 12.

条件③、所述移动的位移距离ΔS不小于预设的第一阈值长度S_1,且所述移动的起点(SP)是预设的第一位置(P1),所述第一位置(P1)是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;Condition ③: the displacement distance ΔS of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length S_1, and the starting point (SP) of the movement is a preset first position (P1), and the first position (P1) is a fixed position selected on the lens;

在一些可选的实施方式,在监测到第一过程中显示模组的ΔS≥S_1,且在第一过程中监测到显示模组的瞬时速度从0突变为不为0的时间点t时,显示模组在P1位置处,即第一过程中显示模组移动的起点SP是预先在镜片上选定的位置P1,则控制显示模组在镜片上成像第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。In some optional embodiments, when it is monitored that ΔS≥S_1 of the display module in the first process, and at time point t when it is monitored that the instantaneous speed of the display module suddenly changes from 0 to not 0 in the first process, the display module is at position P1, that is, the starting point SP of the movement of the display module in the first process is the position P1 pre-selected on the lens, then the display module is controlled to image the first graphical interface of the first logical function on the lens.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能是音乐播放器功能。请参见图7,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中显示模组2移动的起点SP是预先在镜片12上选定的位置P1(例如P1是镜片12上的中心点),则触发音乐播放器功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出音乐播放器功能的 歌曲播放界面。For example, the first logic function is a music player function. Referring to FIG. 7 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and the starting point SP of the movement of the display module 2 in the first process is a position P1 pre-selected on the lens 12 (for example, P1 is the center point on the lens 12), the music player function is triggered and the display module 2 is controlled to image the music player function on the lens 12. Song playing interface.

条件④、所述移动的位移距离ΔS不小于预设的第一阈值长度S1,且所述移动的位移方向预设的第一方向且所述移动的起点(SP)是所述第一位置;Condition ④: The displacement distance ΔS of the movement is not less than the preset first threshold length S1, and the displacement direction of the movement Preset first direction and the starting point (SP) of said movement is said first position;

在一些可选的实施方式,在监测到第一过程中显示模组的ΔS≥S_1,且第一过程中显示模组的 方向相同,且在第一过程中监测到显示模组的瞬时速度从0突变为不为0的时间点t时,显示模组在P1位置处,即第一过程中显示模组移动的起点SP是预先在镜片上选定的位置P1,则控制显示模组在镜片上成像第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。In some optional implementations, when it is detected that ΔS ≥ S_1 of the display module in the first process, and In the same direction, and in the first process, when it is monitored that the instantaneous speed of the display module changes suddenly from 0 to a time point t that is not 0, the display module is at the position P1, that is, the starting point SP of the movement of the display module in the first process is the position P1 pre-selected on the lens, then the display module is controlled to image the first graphical interface of the first logic function on the lens.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能是视频播放器功能。请参见图7,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中显示模组2的方向相同,且第一过程中显示模组2移动的起点SP是预先在镜片12上选定的位置P1(例如P1是镜片12上的中心点),则触发音乐播放器功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出视频播放器功能的视频播放界面。For example, the first logic function is a video player function. Referring to FIG. 7 , after detecting that the display module 2 on the lens 12 has a first process, and the display module 2 in the first process In the same direction, and the starting point SP of the movement of the display module 2 in the first process is a position P1 pre-selected on the lens 12 (for example, P1 is the center point on the lens 12), the music player function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the video playback interface of the video player function on the lens 12.

条件⑤、所述移动的终点(EP)是预设的第二位置(P2),所述第二位置(P2)是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;Condition ⑤: the end point (EP) of the movement is a preset second position (P2), and the second position (P2) is a fixed position selected on the lens;

在一些可选的实施方式,在第一过程中监测到显示模组的瞬时速度从0突变为不为0再突变为0的时间点t时,显示模组在P2位置处,即第一过程中显示模组移动的终点EP是预先在镜片上选定的位置P2,则控制显示模组在镜片上成像第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。即不论显示模组在镜片上怎样移动,只要显示模组移动至镜片上预先选定的某一个位置P2处,就会触发第一逻辑功能。In some optional implementations, when the instantaneous speed of the display module is monitored to suddenly change from 0 to non-0 and then suddenly change to 0 at time point t in the first process, the display module is at position P2, that is, the end point EP of the movement of the display module in the first process is the position P2 pre-selected on the lens, then the display module is controlled to image the first graphical interface of the first logic function on the lens. That is, no matter how the display module moves on the lens, as long as the display module moves to a certain position P2 pre-selected on the lens, the first logic function will be triggered.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能是照相机功能。如图8所示,图8是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图8,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中显示模组2的终点EP是镜片12(或预设成像区)的上边界处,则触发照相机功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出照相机的功能界面。Exemplarily, the first logic function is a camera function. As shown in FIG8 , FIG8 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG8 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and the end point EP of the display module 2 in the first process is at the upper boundary of the lens 12 (or the preset imaging area), the camera function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image a camera function interface on the lens 12.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能是相册功能。如图9所示,图9是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图9,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中显示模组2的终点EP是镜片12(或预设成像区)的下边界处,则触发相册功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出相册的功能界面。Exemplarily, the first logic function is an album function. As shown in FIG9 , FIG9 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG9 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and the end point EP of the display module 2 in the first process is at the lower boundary of the lens 12 (or the preset imaging area), the album function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the album function interface on the lens 12.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能是一社交应用功能。如图10所示,图10是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图10,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中显示模组2的终点EP是镜片12(或预设成像区)的左边界处,则触发该社交应用功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出该社交应用的功能界面。Exemplarily, the first logic function is a social application function. As shown in FIG10 , FIG10 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG10 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12 and the end point EP of the display module 2 in the first process is at the left boundary of the lens 12 (or the preset imaging area), the social application function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the functional interface of the social application on the lens 12.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能是一导航功能。如图11所示,图11是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图11,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中显示模组2的终点EP是镜片12(或预设成像区)的右边界处,则触发该导航功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出该导航的功能界面。Exemplarily, the first logic function is a navigation function. As shown in FIG11 , FIG11 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG11 , when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12, and the end point EP of the display module 2 in the first process is at the right boundary of the lens 12 (or the preset imaging area), the navigation function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the navigation function interface on the lens 12.

示例性地,第一逻辑功能是输出主界面功能。在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中显示模组2的终点EP是镜片12(或预设成像区)的中心点处,则触发输出主界面功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出输出主界面。Exemplarily, the first logic function is the output main interface function. When it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12, and the end point EP of the display module 2 in the first process is the center point of the lens 12 (or the preset imaging area), the output main interface function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the output main interface on the lens 12.

条件⑥、所述移动的轨迹l与预设轨迹l_1的形状相似度(Similarity,Sim)不小于预设的第一阈值α。 Condition ⑥: The shape similarity (Similarity, Sim) between the moving trajectory l and the preset trajectory l_1 is not less than a preset first threshold α.

在一些可选的实施方式,在第一过程中监测到移动的轨迹l与预设轨迹l_1的形状相似度Sim不小于预设的第一阈值α,则控制显示模组在镜片上成像第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。In some optional implementations, if it is monitored in the first process that the shape similarity Sim between the moving trajectory l and the preset trajectory l_1 is not less than a preset first threshold α, the display module is controlled to image a first graphical interface of the first logical function on the lens.

示例性地,如图12所示,图12是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图12,在监测到显示模组2在镜片12上的出现了第一过程,且第一过程中监测到移动的轨迹l与预设轨迹l_1的形状相似度Sim不小于预设的第一阈值α,则触发第一逻辑功能,并控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像出第一逻辑功能的功能界面。For example, as shown in Figure 12, Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figure 12, when it is detected that the display module 2 has a first process on the lens 12, and the shape similarity Sim of the moving trajectory l and the preset trajectory l_1 detected in the first process is not less than a preset first threshold α, the first logic function is triggered, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the functional interface of the first logic function on the lens 12.

其中,轨迹l与预设轨迹l_1的形状相似度Sim可以通过欧几里得距离、动态时间规整、余弦相似度、皮尔逊相关系数、曼哈顿距离、动态核相关、平均绝对误差等方法计算。Among them, the shape similarity Sim between the trajectory l and the preset trajectory l_1 can be calculated by methods such as Euclidean distance, dynamic time warping, cosine similarity, Pearson correlation coefficient, Manhattan distance, dynamic kernel correlation, and mean absolute error.

在一些可选的实施方式中,不同的第一预设条件可以分别对应相同的第一逻辑功能,也可以分别对应不同的第一逻辑功能。In some optional implementations, different first preset conditions may correspond to the same first logical function, or may correspond to different first logical functions.

示例性地,仍然以图1至图3所示的场景为例,可以将显示模组2在镜片12上的移动满足上述条件①至⑥一一分别预置为不同的逻辑功能的触发条件(如前述的示例说明)。也可以将显示模组2在镜片12上的移动满足上述条件①至⑥中的至少之二预置为相同的逻辑功能的触发条件。例如,可以将显示模组2在镜片12上的移动满足上述条件①预置为电话拨号功能的触发条件,将显示模组2在镜片12上的移动满足上述条件⑥预置为照相机功能的触发条件;可以将显示模组2在镜片12上的移动满足上述条件①预置为电话拨号功能的触发条件,也可以将显示模组2在镜片12上的移动满足上述条件⑥预置为电话拨号功能的触发条件。Exemplarily, still taking the scenes shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3 as an example, the movement of the display module 2 on the lens 12 that satisfies the above conditions ① to ⑥ can be preset as trigger conditions of different logical functions one by one (as described in the above examples). The movement of the display module 2 on the lens 12 that satisfies at least two of the above conditions ① to ⑥ can also be preset as trigger conditions of the same logical function. For example, the movement of the display module 2 on the lens 12 that satisfies the above condition ① can be preset as a trigger condition of the telephone dialing function, and the movement of the display module 2 on the lens 12 that satisfies the above condition ⑥ can be preset as a trigger condition of the camera function; the movement of the display module 2 on the lens 12 that satisfies the above condition ① can be preset as a trigger condition of the telephone dialing function, and the movement of the display module 2 on the lens 12 that satisfies the above condition ⑥ can be preset as a trigger condition of the telephone dialing function.

需要补充说明的是,在本申请实施例中第一预设条件并不局限于上述列举的六项,本领域技术人员可以根据实际需求灵活设置第一预设条件,例如第一预设条件还可以显示模组在镜片上沿着预先设定的轨迹移动,具体地,第一预设条件可以是前述的显示模组沿着镜片的对角线移动。It should be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, the first preset condition is not limited to the six items listed above. Those skilled in the art can flexibly set the first preset condition according to actual needs. For example, the first preset condition can also be that the display module moves along a preset trajectory on the lens. Specifically, the first preset condition can be that the aforementioned display module moves along the diagonal of the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处,所述第三位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第二逻辑功能;所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处被预置为触发所述第二逻辑功能的触发条件;步骤S12,包括:In some optional embodiments, the target motion state includes: the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens, and the third position is a fixed position selected on the lens; the target logical function includes: a second logical function; the display module is stationary at the third position on the lens and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the second logical function; step S12 includes:

在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述第二逻辑功能的第二图形界面。In a case where it is detected that the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens, the display module is controlled to image a second graphic interface of the second logical function on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,第二逻辑功能可以是泛指从设备或系统提供的所有(面向用户和面向系统的)逻辑功能中确定出的至少一个逻辑功能。第二逻辑功能与第一逻辑功能可以不同,也可以相同。In some optional implementations, the second logical function may generally refer to at least one logical function determined from all (user-oriented and system-oriented) logical functions provided by the device or system. The second logical function may be different from or the same as the first logical function.

示例性地,第二逻辑功能可以是输出主界面、电话拨号、智能助手、音乐播放器、视频播放器、照相机、相册、社交应用等等。Exemplarily, the second logical function may be outputting a main interface, phone dialing, a smart assistant, a music player, a video player, a camera, a photo album, a social application, and the like.

第三位置可以与第二位置相同,也可以不同。The third position may be the same as or different from the second position.

示例性地,第三位置是镜片上的中心点、镜片(或预设成像区)的上边界点、镜片(或预设成像区)的下边界点等等。Exemplarily, the third position is a center point on the lens, an upper boundary point of the lens (or a preset imaging area), a lower boundary point of the lens (or a preset imaging area), and the like.

示例性地,仍然以前述示例的图1至图12为例,在监测到显示模组2静止于镜片12上的中心点处的情况下,控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像主界面;在监测到显示模组2静止于镜片12上的上边界点处的情况下,控制显示模组2在镜片12上成像导航应用的功能界面。Exemplarily, still taking Figures 1 to 12 of the aforementioned example as an example, when it is monitored that the display module 2 is stationary at the center point on the lens 12, the display module 2 is controlled to image the main interface on the lens 12; when it is monitored that the display module 2 is stationary at the upper boundary point on the lens 12, the display module 2 is controlled to image the functional interface of the navigation application on the lens 12.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组进行轴旋转;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第三逻辑功能,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能;步骤S12,包括:In some optional implementations, the target motion state includes: the display module performs axis rotation; the target logical function includes: a third logical function, and the third logical function is a logical function currently running in the foreground; step S12 includes:

在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的情况下,控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三 图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是所述第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述显示模组进行轴旋转被预置为触发所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能的触发条件。When the display module is detected to be rotating, the display module is controlled to display the third image currently formed on the lens. The target area in the graphical interface is updated; the third graphical interface is the graphical interface of the third logical function, and the target area is the graphical area corresponding to the sub-function in the third logical function; the axial rotation of the display module is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function in the third logical function.

在一些可选的实施方式中,第三逻辑功能可以是泛指从设备或系统提供的所有(面向用户和面向系统的)逻辑功能中在前台运行的至少一个逻辑功能。In some optional implementations, the third logical function may generally refer to at least one logical function running in the foreground from among all (user-oriented and system-oriented) logical functions provided by the device or system.

示例性地,第三逻辑功能可以是输出主界面、电话拨号、智能助手、音乐播放器、视频播放器、照相机、相册、社交应用等等。Exemplarily, the third logical function may be outputting a main interface, phone dialing, a smart assistant, a music player, a video player, a camera, a photo album, a social application, and the like.

在一些可选的实施方式中,第三逻辑功能中的子功能可以是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能中的翻页功能、滚动(前进/后退)操作等等。In some optional implementations, the sub-function in the third logic function may be a page turning function, a scrolling (forward/backward) operation, etc. in the logic function currently running in the foreground.

示例性地,如图13和图14所示,图13和图14是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。例如第三逻辑功能是输出主界面功能,则可以将显示模组2沿图13所示的逆时针方向轴旋转预置为触发主界面向上(或向下)翻页的触发条件,以及将显示模组2沿图14所示的顺时针方向轴旋转预置为触发主界面向下(或向上)翻页的触发条件。在监测到显示模组2进行逆时针(或顺时针)轴旋转的情况下,控制显示模组2对当前在镜片12上成像出的主界面进行更新,即控制显示模组2在镜片12成像出主界面的上一页(或下一页)。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. For example, if the third logic function is to output the main interface function, the display module 2 can be preset to rotate along the counterclockwise axis shown in FIG. 13 as a trigger condition for triggering the main interface to turn up (or down) pages, and the display module 2 can be preset to rotate along the clockwise axis shown in FIG. 14 as a trigger condition for triggering the main interface to turn down (or up) pages. When it is detected that the display module 2 rotates counterclockwise (or clockwise), the display module 2 is controlled to update the main interface currently imaged on the lens 12, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to image the previous page (or next page) of the main interface on the lens 12.

又例如第三逻辑功能是音乐播放器功能,则可以将显示模组2沿图13所示的逆时针方向轴旋转预置为触发切歌至上一首(或下一首)的触发条件,以及将显示模组2沿图14所示的顺时针方向轴旋转预置为触发切歌至下一首(或上一首)的触发条件。在监测到显示模组2进行逆时针(或顺时针)轴旋转的情况下,对当前正在播放的歌曲进行切歌操作,并控制显示模组2对当前在镜片12上成像出的音乐播放器界面进行更新,即控制显示模组2对在镜片12成像出音乐播放器界面中的歌曲信息更新为上一首(或下一首)歌曲的信息。For another example, if the third logic function is a music player function, the counterclockwise rotation of the display module 2 as shown in FIG13 can be preset as a trigger condition for triggering a song switch to the previous song (or the next song), and the clockwise rotation of the display module 2 as shown in FIG14 can be preset as a trigger condition for triggering a song switch to the next song (or the previous song). When the counterclockwise (or clockwise) rotation of the display module 2 is detected, the song currently being played is switched, and the display module 2 is controlled to update the music player interface currently imaged on the lens 12, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to update the song information in the music player interface imaged on the lens 12 to the information of the previous song (or the next song).

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的情况下,控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新,包括:In some optional implementations, when the display module is detected to be rotating, controlling the display module to update a target area in a third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens includes:

在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的转动角度不小于预设的第一阈值角度β的情况下,控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新。When it is detected that the rotation angle of the display module is not less than a preset first threshold angle β, the display module is controlled to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens.

第一阈值角度β可以由本领域技术人员或用户根据实际需求灵活设置。例如,可以是15°、20°、25°或30°等。The first threshold angle β can be flexibly set by those skilled in the art or users according to actual needs, for example, it can be 15°, 20°, 25° or 30°.

示例性地,请参见图14,在监测到显示模组2沿顺时针方向轴旋转的转动角度不小于第一阈值角度β的情况下,控制显示模组2对当前在镜片12上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新。从而可以避免显示模组2被轻微带动进行了轴旋转时就触发第三逻辑功能的子功能,导致显示模组2开始更新在镜片12上成像出的第三界面。因此,可以在一定程度上减少误触发第三逻辑功能的子功能。For example, referring to FIG. 14 , when it is detected that the rotation angle of the display module 2 along the clockwise axis is not less than the first threshold angle β, the display module 2 is controlled to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens 12. This can avoid the display module 2 being slightly driven to rotate the axis and triggering the sub-function of the third logic function, causing the display module 2 to start updating the third interface imaged on the lens 12. Therefore, the sub-function of the third logic function can be reduced to a certain extent.

在其他一些可选的实施方式中,第三逻辑功能也可以是后台运行的逻辑功能。例如,显示模组中成像模块处于待机状态,但是音乐播放功能一直在后台运行,此时仍然也可以将显示模组进行轴旋转预置为切歌操作的触发条件,以便用户快速切歌,即方便用户与设备进行快捷交互。只是此时不需要控制显示模组更新图形界面(因为逻辑功能在后台运行,无图形界面输出)。In some other optional implementations, the third logic function may also be a logic function running in the background. For example, the imaging module in the display module is in standby mode, but the music playback function is always running in the background. At this time, the axis rotation of the display module can still be preset as a trigger condition for the song switching operation, so that the user can quickly switch songs, that is, it is convenient for the user to quickly interact with the device. However, at this time, it is not necessary to control the display module to update the graphical interface (because the logic function is running in the background and no graphical interface is output).

本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,该显示模组用于连接在眼镜的镜片上,以及用于在所连接的镜片上成像。执行该显示模组的控制方法的可以是图1至图5中的眼镜1、显示模组2、近眼显示装置10或智能终端中至少之一,其能够实现控制显示模组2在其所连接的眼镜1(或近眼显示装置 10)上所成像的GUI的具体信息。如图15所示,图15是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。请参见图15,该显示模组的控制方法,包括:The present application provides a control method for a display module, wherein the display module is used to be connected to the lens of glasses and used to form an image on the connected lens. The control method for the display module may be performed by at least one of the glasses 1, the display module 2, the near-eye display device 10 or the smart terminal in FIG. 1 to FIG. 5, which can realize the control of the display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or the near-eye display device 10) to which it is connected. 10) Specific information of the GUI imaged on the display module. As shown in FIG15, FIG15 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG15, the control method of the display module includes:

S11,监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;S11, monitoring the movement state of the display module on the lens currently connected;

请参见前文中对S11的说明,在此不再赘述。Please refer to the description of S11 in the previous article, which will not be repeated here.

S13,检测所述显示模组的触摸部的接触;S13, detecting contact of a touch portion of the display module;

有关步骤S13请参见前文中针对图1至图3的实施方式中有关显示模组2的说明,在此不再赘述。For step S13 , please refer to the above description of the display module 2 in the embodiments of FIGS. 1 to 3 , which will not be described in detail here.

需要补充说明的是,S11和S13之间并不顺序关系,即S11和S13可以是并行执行的。It should be noted that there is no sequential relationship between S11 and S13, that is, S11 and S13 can be executed in parallel.

S14,在检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长ΔT不小于预设的第一阈值时长T_1且监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面。S14, when it is detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration ΔT that is not less than a preset first threshold duration T_1 and a target motion state is detected, controlling the display module to image a graphic interface of the target logical function on the lens.

对比步骤S14和步骤S12,在步骤S14中,触发目标逻辑功能从而控制显示模组在镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面的条件增加了,不仅要有监测到显示模组的运动状态是目标运动状态,还要有检测到显示模组的触摸部被触摸的持续时长ΔT不小于预设的第一阈值时长T_1。即,不仅仅要监测到显示模组在镜片上产生了运动,还要检测到显示模组是被触摸了才会触发目标逻辑功能从而控制显示模组在镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面。从而可以在某些场景中避免出现误触发的可能。例如,图2中所示的用户是在运动中佩戴眼镜1,显示模组2可能随着用户的运动而产生抖动,该抖动可能与目标运动状态符合,但是如果未检测到用户触摸显示模组的触摸部或检测到触摸但触摸时长ΔT小于预设的第一阈值时长T_1,则不会触发目标逻辑功能,也不会控制显示模组在镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面。从而实现有效避免误触发。Comparing step S14 with step S12, in step S14, the conditions for triggering the target logic function to control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens are increased, not only the motion state of the display module is detected to be the target motion state, but also the duration ΔT of the touch portion of the display module being touched is detected to be not less than the preset first threshold duration T_1. That is, not only the display module is detected to have motion on the lens, but also the display module is detected to be touched to trigger the target logic function to control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens. Thus, the possibility of false triggering can be avoided in some scenarios. For example, the user shown in FIG. 2 is wearing glasses 1 during exercise, and the display module 2 may shake with the user's movement, which may be consistent with the target motion state, but if the user is not detected to touch the touch portion of the display module or the touch is detected but the touch duration ΔT is less than the preset first threshold duration T_1, the target logic function will not be triggered, nor will the display module be controlled to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens. Thus, false triggering can be effectively avoided.

本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,该显示模组用于连接在眼镜的镜片上,以及用于在所连接的镜片上成像。执行该显示模组的控制方法的可以是图1至图5中的眼镜1、显示模组2、近眼显示装置10或智能终端中至少之一,其能够实现控制显示模组2在其所连接的眼镜1(或近眼显示装置10)上所成像的GUI的具体信息。如图16所示,图16是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。请参见图16,该显示模组的控制方法,包括:An embodiment of the present application provides a control method for a display module, which is used to be connected to the lenses of glasses and to form an image on the connected lenses. The control method of the display module may be performed by at least one of the glasses 1, display module 2, near-eye display device 10 or smart terminal in Figures 1 to 5, which can realize the specific information of the GUI imaged by the display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10) to which it is connected. As shown in Figure 16, Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. Please refer to Figure 16, the control method of the display module includes:

S11,监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;S11, monitoring the movement state of the display module on the lens currently connected;

S13,检测所述显示模组的触摸部的接触;S13, detecting contact of a touch portion of the display module;

S14,在检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长ΔT不小于预设的第一阈值时长T_1且监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面;S14, when it is detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration ΔT that is not less than a preset first threshold duration T_1 and a target motion state is detected, controlling the display module to image a graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens;

步骤S11-S14请参见前文说明,在此不再赘述。Please refer to the above description for steps S11-S14, which will not be repeated here.

S15,在检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长ΔT不小于预设的第二阈值时长T_2且监测到所述显示模组始终静止于所述镜片上的情况下,或,在未检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于第三阈值时长T_3的情况下,启动防误触模式。S15, when it is detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration ΔT that is not less than a preset second threshold duration T_2 and it is monitored that the display module is always stationary on the lens, or when it is not detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration that is not less than a third threshold duration T_3, the anti-mistouch mode is started.

其中,所述防误触模式是指在该模式下控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上保持成像当前在前台运行的逻辑功能的图形界面。The anti-mistouch mode refers to a mode in which the display module is controlled to maintain imaging of a graphical interface of a logic function currently running in the foreground on the lens.

在检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长ΔT不小于预设的第二阈值时长T_2且监测到所述显示模组始终静止于所述镜片上的情况下,启动防误触模式。即在本申请实施例中为用户提供了主动启动防误触模式的功能选项,用户只需要触摸显示模组的触摸部保持持续至少T_2时长,且在此过程中不要移动显示模组,就可以进入防误触模式,以便用户在佩戴眼镜进行运动前(请结合图2)就将显示模组在镜片上呈现出的图形界面切换至用户需要的界面。例如,在用户骑行前将显示模组在镜片上呈现的图形界面 切换至导航界面,并启动防误触模式,以便用户在骑行的过程中使用导航功能。When it is detected that the duration ΔT of the touch portion being touched is not less than the preset second threshold duration T_2 and it is monitored that the display module is always stationary on the lens, the anti-mistouch mode is started. That is, in the embodiment of the present application, the user is provided with a functional option of actively starting the anti-mistouch mode. The user only needs to touch the touch portion of the display module for at least T_2 time and do not move the display module during this process to enter the anti-mistouch mode, so that the user can switch the graphical interface presented by the display module on the lens to the interface required by the user before wearing glasses for exercise (please refer to Figure 2). For example, before the user rides, the graphical interface presented by the display module on the lens Switch to the navigation interface and activate the anti-mistouch mode so that users can use the navigation function while riding.

在未检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于第三阈值时长T_3的情况下,启动防误触模式。即在本申请实施例中还提供了被动启动防误触模式的功能选项。用户在长时间(即T_3时长)不与显示模组进行交互,即未触摸显示模组,可以默认用户暂时不需要与设备进行交互,可以被动启动防误触模式,停止监测显示模组的运动状态,待解除防误触模式后再继续监测显示模组的运动状态,以节约设备的电能。In the case where the duration of the touch portion being touched is not less than the third threshold duration T_3, the anti-false touch mode is started. That is, in the embodiment of the present application, a function option of passively starting the anti-false touch mode is also provided. When the user does not interact with the display module for a long time (i.e., T_3 duration), that is, does not touch the display module, it can be assumed that the user does not need to interact with the device temporarily, and the anti-false touch mode can be passively started, and the motion state of the display module can be stopped from being monitored. After the anti-false touch mode is released, the motion state of the display module can be continued to be monitored to save the power of the device.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述第一阈值时长小于所述第二阈值时长。假定第一阈值时长是1秒,第二阈值时长是0.5秒,即第一阈值时长大于第二阈值时长则会出现一种情况:用户在触摸显示模组的前0.6秒内还没想好怎么移动显示模组,此时已经启动防误触模式,即使在后0.4秒用户移动显示模组,且使显示模组的移动是一种目标运动状态,但因为在触摸显示模组0.5的时候设备进入防误触模式而不会触发该目标运动状态对应的目标逻辑功能(即触发条件是该目标运动状态的目标逻辑功能),相应的,显示模组也不会在镜片上成像该目标逻辑功能的图形界面。且用户难以精确感知触摸时长,因此这会给用户造成使用上的不便。但是,若第一阈值时长小于所述第二阈值时长就可以前述的这种可能的“尴尬”现象,从而方便用户与显示模组进行交互。In some optional embodiments, the first threshold duration is less than the second threshold duration. Assuming that the first threshold duration is 1 second and the second threshold duration is 0.5 seconds, that is, the first threshold duration is greater than the second threshold duration, a situation will occur: the user has not figured out how to move the display module within the first 0.6 seconds of touching the display module, and the anti-mistouch mode has been activated at this time. Even if the user moves the display module in the last 0.4 seconds, and the movement of the display module is a target motion state, but because the device enters the anti-mistouch mode when touching the display module 0.5, it will not trigger the target logic function corresponding to the target motion state (that is, the trigger condition is the target logic function of the target motion state), and accordingly, the display module will not image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens. And it is difficult for the user to accurately perceive the touch duration, so this will cause inconvenience to the user. However, if the first threshold duration is less than the second threshold duration, the aforementioned possible "embarrassment" phenomenon can be avoided, thereby facilitating the user to interact with the display module.

在一些可选的实施方式中,在启动防误触模式的同时输出用于提示用户所述防误触模式已启动的提示。该提示可以是显示模组在镜片上成像出的文字、图像或视频动画等提示。以便用户知晓设备已经启动了防误触模式。In some optional implementations, when the anti-accidental touch mode is activated, a prompt is output to remind the user that the anti-accidental touch mode has been activated. The prompt may be a prompt such as text, image, or video animation imaged by the display module on the lens, so that the user knows that the device has activated the anti-accidental touch mode.

S16、在所述防误触模式下再次检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于第四阈值时长T_4的情况下,解除所述防误触模式。S16: when it is detected again in the false touch prevention mode that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a fourth threshold duration T_4, cancel the false touch prevention mode.

设备在进入防误触模式后,再次检测到显示模组的触摸部被触摸且触摸时长达到第四阈值时长T_4的情况下,解除所述防误触模式。以便用户再次与显示模组进行交互。After the device enters the false touch prevention mode, if it is detected again that the touch portion of the display module is touched and the touch duration reaches the fourth threshold duration T_4, the false touch prevention mode is released, so that the user can interact with the display module again.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述第四阈值时长小于或等于所述第一阈值时长。In some optional implementations, the fourth threshold duration is less than or equal to the first threshold duration.

若第一阈值时长小于第四阈值时长,在进入防误触模式后,必须先触摸显示模组第四阈值时长解除防误触模式后才能与显示模组进行交互,对用户的使用造成不便。而第四阈值时长小于或等于第一阈值时长的情况下,用户可以快速解除防误触模式,以便用户再次与显示模组进行交互。If the first threshold duration is less than the fourth threshold duration, after entering the false touch prevention mode, the user must first touch the display module for the fourth threshold duration to release the false touch prevention mode before interacting with the display module, which causes inconvenience to the user. If the fourth threshold duration is less than or equal to the first threshold duration, the user can quickly release the false touch prevention mode so that the user can interact with the display module again.

在一些可选的实施方式中,在解除防误触模式的同时输出用于提示用户所述防误触模式已解除的提示。该提示可以是显示模组在镜片上成像出的文字、图像或视频动画等提示。以便用户知晓设备已经解除了防误触模式。In some optional implementations, when the anti-accidental touch mode is released, a prompt is output to prompt the user that the anti-accidental touch mode has been released. The prompt may be a prompt such as text, image, or video animation imaged by the display module on the lens, so that the user knows that the device has released the anti-accidental touch mode.

在一些可选的实施方式中,在解除防误触模式的情况下,在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又检测到所述触摸部被触摸的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上于所述显示模组的周围成像移动提示内容。In some optional embodiments, when the anti-mistouch mode is released, when it is monitored that the display module is stationary on the lens and the touch portion is detected to be touched, the display module is controlled to image moving prompt content around the display module on the lens.

示例性地,如图17所示,图17是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图17,在监测到显示模组2静止于镜片12上的情况下又检测到显示模组2的触摸部被触摸的情况下,控制显示模组2在镜片12上于显示模组2的周围成像图17所示的用于提示用户向多个方向移动显示模组2的移动提示内容。For example, as shown in Figure 17, Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figure 17, when it is detected that the display module 2 is stationary on the lens 12 and the touch portion of the display module 2 is touched, the display module 2 is controlled to form a motion prompting content shown in Figure 17 on the lens 12 around the display module 2 for prompting the user to move the display module 2 in multiple directions.

在一些可选的实施方式中,本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法在前述的实施方式的基础上,还提供了一些其他的方式以便用户与连接显示模组的眼镜(或近眼显示装置)或设备进行交互,主要是不使显示模组在镜片运动而是处于静止状态时,用户与连接显示模组的眼镜(或近眼显示装置)或设备 进行交互的各种方式。具体包括以下步骤:In some optional implementations, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further provides some other methods for the user to interact with the glasses (or near-eye display device) or device connected to the display module on the basis of the aforementioned implementations, mainly to enable the user to interact with the glasses (or near-eye display device) or device connected to the display module when the display module is not in motion but in a stationary state. Various ways to interact. Specifically include the following steps:

获取多媒体数据和眼球追踪数据;Acquire multimedia data and eye tracking data;

在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又检测到所述触摸部被按照目标触摸模式触摸的情况下,或在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又从所述多媒体数据中识别到目标指令的情况下,或在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又从所述眼球追踪数据中识别到目标眼动模式的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,或控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述目标触摸模式、所述目标指令和所述目标眼动模式被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件或被预置为所述第三逻辑功能的子功能的触发条件。When it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the target touch pattern, or when it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and a target instruction is identified from the multimedia data, or when it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and a target eye movement pattern is identified from the eye tracking data, the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens, or the display module is controlled to update the target area in a third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens; the third graphical interface is a graphical interface of a third logical function, the third logical function is a logical function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is a graphical area corresponding to a sub-function in the third logical function; the target touch pattern, the target instruction and the target eye movement pattern are preset as trigger conditions for triggering the target logical function or are preset as trigger conditions for a sub-function of the third logical function.

其中,多媒体数据可以是显示模组上内置的微型摄像头采集的图像/视频数据或微型麦克风采集的语音数据,眼球追踪数据是显示模组上内置的微型摄像头采集的用户的眼部图像数据。Among them, the multimedia data can be image/video data collected by the built-in micro camera on the display module or voice data collected by the micro microphone, and the eye tracking data is the user's eye image data collected by the built-in micro camera on the display module.

目标触摸模式可以是单击、双击、三连击等等。目标指令可以是预设的目标手势、目标语音等。目标眼动模式可以是眼球按照预设的规律活动。类似地,所述目标触摸模式、所述目标指令和所述目标眼动模式和前述的目标运动状态相似,它们也可以被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件或被预置为所述第三逻辑功能的子功能的触发条件。在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又检测到所述触摸部被按照目标触摸模式触摸的情况下,或在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又从所述多媒体数据中识别到目标指令的情况下,或在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又从所述眼球追踪数据中识别到目标眼动模式的情况下,触发(预置的)触发条件是所述目标触摸模式、所述目标指令和所述目标眼动模式的目标逻辑功能(或第三逻辑功能的子功能),从而控制显示模组在镜片上成像被触发的目标逻辑功能的图形界面(或控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新)。其原理与前述的目标运动状态触发目标逻辑功能(或第三逻辑功能的子功能),从而控制显示模组在镜片上成像被触发的目标逻辑功能的图形界面(或控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新)的原理相似,在此不再赘述,本领域技术人员可以参照前文即可理解。The target touch mode may be a single click, a double click, a triple click, etc. The target instruction may be a preset target gesture, a target voice, etc. The target eye movement mode may be an eye movement according to a preset rule. Similarly, the target touch mode, the target instruction and the target eye movement mode are similar to the aforementioned target motion state, and they may also be preset as trigger conditions for triggering the target logical function or as trigger conditions for sub-functions of the third logical function. When the display module is detected to be stationary on the lens and the touch portion is detected to be touched according to the target touch mode, or when the display module is detected to be stationary on the lens and the target instruction is identified from the multimedia data, or when the display module is detected to be stationary on the lens and the target eye movement mode is identified from the eye tracking data, the triggering (preset) triggering condition is the target touch mode, the target instruction and the target eye movement mode The target logical function (or the sub-function of the third logical function), thereby controlling the display module to image the triggered graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens (or controlling the display module to update the target area in the third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens). The principle is similar to the principle that the target motion state triggers the target logic function (or a sub-function of the third logic function) mentioned above, thereby controlling the display module to image the graphical interface of the triggered target logic function on the lens (or controlling the display module to update the target area in the third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens). It will not be repeated here, and those skilled in the art can understand it by referring to the above text.

在一些可选的实施方式中,在显示模组所连接的镜片上预先设置有预设成像区,显示模组只会在该预设成像区内成像,而不会在整个镜片上成像。因此,只会在镜片上的预设成像区内监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面;而在在监测到所述显示模组移动至所述预设成像区外的情况下,启动低功耗模式。从而节约设备的电能,延长设备的续航时间和使用寿命。In some optional implementations, a preset imaging area is pre-set on the lens to which the display module is connected, and the display module will only image in the preset imaging area, and will not image on the entire lens. Therefore, only when the target motion state is detected in the preset imaging area on the lens, the display module is controlled to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens; and when the display module is detected to move outside the preset imaging area, the low power consumption mode is activated. This saves the power of the device and extends the battery life and service life of the device.

需要说明的是,虽然以上示例中均以单目(即只在眼镜的一个镜片上连接有本申请实施例所提供的显示模组)为例进行了说明,但是,很显然本申请所提供的所有实施方式也可以适用于双目(即在眼镜的两个镜片上均连接有本申请实施例所提供的显示模组)的场景。It should be noted that although the above examples are all described using monocular (i.e., the display module provided by the embodiment of the present application is connected to only one lens of the glasses) as an example, it is obvious that all the implementation methods provided in the present application can also be applied to binocular (i.e., the display modules provided by the embodiment of the present application are connected to both lenses of the glasses) scenarios.

本申请实施例提供的投影设备的连接方法,执行主体可以为显示模组的控制装置。本申请实施例中以显示模组的控制装置执行显示模组的控制方法为例,说明本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制装置。The connection method of the projection device provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by the control device of the display module. In the embodiment of the present application, the control device of the display module executing the control method of the display module is taken as an example to illustrate the control device of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.

如图18所示,示出了本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的控制装置的结构示意图。请参见图18,所述显示模组的控制装置50,所述显示模组用于连接在眼镜的镜片上,以及用于在所连接的镜片上成像,控制装置50包括: As shown in FIG18 , a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application is shown. Referring to FIG18 , the control device 50 of the display module is used to be connected to the lens of the glasses and to form an image on the connected lens. The control device 50 includes:

第一监测模块501,用于监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;A first monitoring module 501 is used to monitor the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected;

第一控制模块502,用于在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面;所述目标运动状态被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件。The first control module 502 is used to control the display module to image a graphical interface of a target logic function on the lens when a target motion state is detected; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第一逻辑功能;所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件被预置为触发所述第一逻辑功能的触发条件;所述第一控制模块502,包括:In some optional embodiments, the target motion state includes: the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition; the target logical function includes: a first logical function; the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies the first preset condition and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the first logical function; the first control module 502 includes:

第一控制子模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。The first control submodule is configured to control the display module to image a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens when it is detected that the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述第一预设条件是以下之一:In some optional implementations, the first preset condition is one of the following:

所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length;

所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度,且所述移动的位移方向是预设的第一方向;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, and the displacement direction of the movement is a preset first direction;

所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度,且所述移动的起点是预设的第一位置,所述第一位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, and the starting point of the movement is a preset first position, which is a fixed position selected on the lens;

所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度,且所述移动的位移方向是预设的第一方向,且所述移动的起点是所述第一位置;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, the displacement direction of the movement is a preset first direction, and the starting point of the movement is the first position;

所述移动的终点是预设的第二位置,所述第二位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;The end point of the movement is a preset second position, and the second position is a fixed position selected on the lens;

所述移动的轨迹与预设轨迹的形状相似度不小于预设的第一阈值。The shape similarity between the moving trajectory and the preset trajectory is not less than a preset first threshold.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处,所述第三位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第二逻辑功能;所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处被预置为触发所述第二逻辑功能的触发条件;所述第一控制模块502,包括:In some optional embodiments, the target motion state includes: the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens, and the third position is a fixed position selected on the lens; the target logical function includes: a second logical function; the display module is stationary at the third position on the lens and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the second logical function; the first control module 502 includes:

第二控制子模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述第二逻辑功能的第二图形界面。The second control submodule is used for controlling the display module to image a second graphic interface of the second logic function on the lens when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组进行轴旋转;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第三逻辑功能,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能;所述第一控制模块502,包括:In some optional implementations, the target motion state includes: the display module performs axis rotation; the target logical function includes: a third logical function, the third logical function is the logical function currently running in the foreground; the first control module 502 includes:

第三控制子模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的情况下,控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是所述第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述显示模组进行轴旋转被预置为触发所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能的触发条件。The third control submodule is used to control the display module to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens when the axial rotation of the display module is detected; the third graphic interface is the graphic interface of the third logical function, and the target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the third logical function; the axial rotation of the display module is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function in the third logical function.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述第三控制子模块,包括:In some optional implementations, the third control submodule includes:

第一控制单元,用于在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的转动角度不小于预设的第一阈值角度的情况下,控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新。The first control unit is used to control the display module to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens when monitoring that the rotation angle of the display module is not less than a preset first threshold angle.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置50还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 50 further includes:

第一检测模块,用于检测所述显示模组的触摸部的接触;A first detection module, used to detect contact of a touch portion of the display module;

所述第一控制模块502,包括:The first control module 502 includes:

第四控制子模块,用于在检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于预设的第一阈值时长且监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面。The fourth control submodule is used to control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens when it is detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a preset first threshold duration and the target motion state is monitored.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置50还包括: In some optional implementations, the control device 50 further includes:

第一启动模块,用于在检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于预设的第二阈值时长且监测到所述显示模组始终静止于所述镜片上的情况下,或,在未检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于第三阈值时长的情况下,启动防误触模式;所述防误触模式是指在该模式下控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上保持成像当前在前台运行的逻辑功能的图形界面。The first startup module is used to start the anti-mistaken touch mode when it is detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a preset second threshold duration and it is monitored that the display module is always stationary on the lens, or when it is not detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a third threshold duration; the anti-mistaken touch mode refers to a mode in which the display module is controlled to maintain imaging of a graphical interface of a logical function currently running in the foreground on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述第一阈值时长小于所述第二阈值时长。In some optional implementations, the first threshold duration is shorter than the second threshold duration.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置50还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 50 further includes:

第一解除模块,用于在所述防误触模式下再次检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于第四阈值时长的情况下,解除所述防误触模式。The first release module is configured to release the false touch prevention mode when it is detected again in the false touch prevention mode that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a fourth threshold duration.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述第四阈值时长小于或等于所述第一阈值时长。In some optional implementations, the fourth threshold duration is less than or equal to the first threshold duration.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置50还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 50 further includes:

第一提示模块,用于在启动防误触模式的同时输出用于提示用户所述防误触模式已启动的提示;A first prompt module, configured to output a prompt for prompting a user that the accidental touch prevention mode has been started while starting the accidental touch prevention mode;

第二提示模块,用于在解除防误触模式的同时输出用于提示用户所述防误触模式已解除的提示。The second prompt module is used to output a prompt for prompting the user that the accidental touch prevention mode has been canceled when the accidental touch prevention mode is canceled.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置50还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 50 further includes:

第二控制模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又检测到所述触摸部被触摸的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上于所述显示模组的周围成像移动提示内容。The second control module is used for controlling the display module to image moving prompt content around the display module on the lens when it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and the touch portion is touched.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置50还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 50 further includes:

第三控制模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又检测到所述触摸部被按照目标触摸模式触摸的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,或控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述目标触摸模式被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件或被预置为所述第三逻辑功能的子功能的触发条件。A third control module is used to control the display module to image the graphic interface of the target logical function on the lens, or control the display module to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens, when it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the target touch mode; the third graphic interface is the graphic interface of the third logical function, the third logical function is the logical function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the third logical function; the target touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logical function or is preset as a trigger condition for a sub-function of the third logical function.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置50还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 50 further includes:

第一获取模块,用于获取多媒体数据;A first acquisition module, used to acquire multimedia data;

第三控制模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又从所述多媒体数据中识别到目标指令的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,或控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述目标指令被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件或被预置为第三逻辑功能的子功能的触发条件。The third control module is used to control the display module to image the graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens, or control the display module to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens when it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and a target instruction is identified from the multimedia data; the third graphic interface is a graphic interface of a third logic function, the third logic function is a logic function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is a graphic area corresponding to a sub-function in the third logic function; the target instruction is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function or is preset as a trigger condition for a sub-function of the third logic function.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置50还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 50 further includes:

第二获取模块,用于获取眼球追踪数据;A second acquisition module is used to acquire eye tracking data;

第四控制模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又从所述眼球追踪数据中识别到目标眼动模式的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,或控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述目标眼动模式被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件或被预置为第三逻辑功能的子功能的触发条件。 A fourth control module is used to control the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens, or to control the display module to update the target area in the third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens, when it is monitored that the display module is stationary on the lens and a target eye movement pattern is identified from the eye tracking data; the third graphical interface is a graphical interface of a third logical function, the third logical function is a logical function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is a graphical area corresponding to a sub-function in the third logical function; the target eye movement pattern is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logical function or is preset as a trigger condition for a sub-function of the third logical function.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置50,包括:In some optional embodiments, the control device 50 includes:

第二监测模块,用于在所述镜片上的预设成像区内监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面;A second monitoring module is used to control the display module to image a graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens when a target motion state is detected in a preset imaging area on the lens;

第二启动模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组移动至所述预设成像区外的情况下,启动低功耗模式。The second starting module is used to start the low power consumption mode when it is detected that the display module moves out of the preset imaging area.

本申请实施例中的显示模组的控制装置50可以是电子设备,也可以是电子设备中的部件,例如集成电路或芯片。该电子设备可以是终端,也可以为除终端之外的其他设备。示例性的,电子设备可以为手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、车载电子设备、移动上网装置(Mobile Internet Device,MID)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、机器人、可穿戴设备、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本或者个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)等,还可以为服务器、网络附属存储器(Network Attached Storage,NAS)、个人计算机(personal computer,PC)、电视机(television,TV)、柜员机或者自助机等,本申请实施例不作具体限定。The control device 50 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application can be an electronic device or a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or a chip. The electronic device can be a terminal or other devices other than a terminal. Exemplarily, the electronic device can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a PDA, a vehicle-mounted electronic device, a mobile Internet device (Mobile Internet Device, MID), an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, a robot, a wearable device, an ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), a netbook or a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), etc. It can also be a server, a network attached storage (Network Attached Storage, NAS), a personal computer (personal computer, PC), a television (television, TV), a teller machine or a self-service machine, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not make specific limitations.

本申请实施例中的显示模组的控制装置50可以为具有操作系统的装置。该操作系统可以为安卓(Android)操作系统,可以为ios操作系统,还可以为其他可能的操作系统,本申请实施例不作具体限定。The control device 50 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application may be a device having an operating system. The operating system may be an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or other possible operating systems, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.

本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制装置50能够实现图1至图17的实施例实现的各个过程,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。The control device 50 of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can implement each process implemented in the embodiments of Figures 1 to 17, and will not be described again here to avoid repetition.

在一些可选的实施方式中,如图19所示,本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备130,包括处理器131和存储器132,存储器132上存储有可在所述处理器131上运行的程序或指令,该程序或指令被处理器131执行时实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。In some optional embodiments, as shown in FIG. 19 , the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device 130, including a processor 131 and a memory 132, wherein the memory 132 stores programs or instructions that can be executed on the processor 131, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not described here.

需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的电子设备包括上述所述的移动电子设备和非移动电子设备。It should be noted that the electronic devices in the embodiments of the present application include the mobile electronic devices and non-mobile electronic devices mentioned above.

图20为实现本申请实施例的一种电子设备的硬件结构示意图。FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device implementing an embodiment of the present application.

该电子设备140包括但不限于:射频单元141、网络模块142、音频输出单元143、输入单元144、传感器145、显示单元146、用户输入单元147、接口单元148、存储器149以及处理器1410等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解,电子设备140还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源(比如电池),电源可以通过电源管理系统与处理器1410逻辑相连,从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。图14中示出的电子设备结构并不构成对电子设备的限定,电子设备可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置,在此不再赘述。The electronic device 140 includes, but is not limited to, components such as a radio frequency unit 141, a network module 142, an audio output unit 143, an input unit 144, a sensor 145, a display unit 146, a user input unit 147, an interface unit 148, a memory 149, and a processor 1410. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the electronic device 140 may also include a power source (such as a battery) for supplying power to each component, and the power source may be logically connected to the processor 1410 through a power management system, so that the power management system can realize functions such as managing charging, discharging, and power consumption management. The electronic device structure shown in FIG. 14 does not constitute a limitation on the electronic device, and the electronic device may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or arrange components differently, which will not be described in detail here.

其中,处理器1410,用于:The processor 1410 is configured to:

监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;Monitoring the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected;

在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面;所述目标运动状态被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件。When the target motion state is detected, the display module is controlled to form a graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.

应理解的是,本申请实施例中,输入单元144可以包括图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU)1441和麦克风1442,图形处理器1441对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。显示单元146可包括显示面板1461,可以采用液晶显示器、有机发光二极管等形式来配置显示面板1461。用户输入单元147包括触控面板1471以及其他输入设备1472中的至少一种。触控面板1471,也称为触摸屏。触控面板1471可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器 两个部分。其他输入设备1472可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the input unit 144 may include a graphics processor (GPU) 1441 and a microphone 1442, and the graphics processor 1441 processes the image data of a static picture or video obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode. The display unit 146 may include a display panel 1461, and the display panel 1461 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, an organic light emitting diode, etc. The user input unit 147 includes a touch panel 1471 and at least one of the other input devices 1472. The touch panel 1471 is also called a touch screen. The touch panel 1471 may include a touch detection device and a touch controller Other input devices 1472 may include, but are not limited to, a physical keyboard, function keys (such as a volume control key, a switch key, etc.), a trackball, a mouse, and a joystick, which will not be described in detail here.

存储器149可用于存储软件程序以及各种数据。存储器149可主要包括存储程序或指令的第一存储区和存储数据的第二存储区,其中,第一存储区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序或指令(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等。此外,存储器149可以包括易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或者,存储器149可以包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDRSDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DRRAM)。本申请实施例中的存储器149包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。The memory 149 can be used to store software programs and various data. The memory 149 may mainly include a first storage area for storing programs or instructions and a second storage area for storing data, wherein the first storage area may store an operating system, an application program or instructions required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc. In addition, the memory 149 may include a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or the memory 149 may include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory. The volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), a static random access memory (SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (DRAM), a synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), a double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDRSDRAM), an enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (ESDRAM), a synchronous link dynamic random access memory (SLDRAM) and a direct memory bus random access memory (DRRAM). The memory 149 in the embodiment of the present application includes but is not limited to these and any other suitable types of memory.

处理器1410可包括一个或多个处理单元;可选的,处理器1410集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器,其中,应用处理器主要处理涉及操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等的操作,调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信信号,如基带处理器。可以理解的是,上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器1410中。The processor 1410 may include one or more processing units; optionally, the processor 1410 integrates an application processor and a modem processor, wherein the application processor mainly processes operations related to an operating system, a user interface, and application programs, and the modem processor mainly processes wireless communication signals, such as a baseband processor. It is understandable that the modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 1410.

本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法,执行主体可以为AR眼镜。本申请实施例中以近眼显示装置执行显示模组的控制方法为例,说明本申请实施例提供的电子系统。The control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by an AR glasses. In the embodiment of the present application, the control method of the display module executed by a near-eye display device is taken as an example to illustrate the electronic system provided in the embodiment of the present application.

在一些可选的实施方式中,如图21所示,本申请实施例还提供一种AR眼镜150,包括处理器151和存储器152,存储器152上存储有可在所述处理器151上运行的程序或指令,该程序或指令被处理器131执行时实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。In some optional embodiments, as shown in FIG. 21 , the embodiment of the present application further provides an AR glasses 150, including a processor 151 and a memory 152, wherein the memory 152 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 151, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated here.

在相关技术中,某些眼镜(例如护目镜)的镜片的尺寸可能比人眼的视场大很多,使得佩戴眼镜的用户无法看到或看清镜片上的一些区域,即眼镜的镜片上可能存在一些区域(即盲区)位于佩戴眼镜的用户的视野外;如果连接在眼镜的镜片上的显示模组在镜片上的盲区内成像,将导致佩戴眼镜的用户无法看到或看清。本申请实施例的目的是提供一种显示模组的控制方法、装置、电子设备、近眼显示装置、介质、芯片和计算机程序产品,以独立或半独立地在一定程度上解决如果连接在眼镜的镜片上的显示模组在镜片上的盲区内成像,将导致佩戴眼镜的用户无法看到或看清的技术问题。所述的独立解决是指提供一种硬件方面的构造方案,该方案可以独立地工作而不需要软件的配合,即可达成近眼显示技术中连接在眼镜的镜片上的显示模组不会在镜片上的盲区内成像的效果。所述的半独立地解决是指提供一种硬件方面的构造方案,该硬件构造方案在与近眼显示软件——例如AR技术中供用户与虚拟信息进行交互的软件——配合工作时,能够达成近眼显示技术中连接在眼镜的镜片上的显示模组不会在镜片上的盲区内成像的效果。In the related art, the size of the lens of some glasses (such as goggles) may be much larger than the field of view of the human eye, so that the user wearing the glasses cannot see or see clearly some areas on the lens, that is, there may be some areas (i.e., blind spots) on the lens of the glasses that are outside the field of view of the user wearing the glasses; if the display module connected to the lens of the glasses is imaged in the blind spot on the lens, the user wearing the glasses will not be able to see or see clearly. The purpose of the embodiments of the present application is to provide a control method, device, electronic device, near-eye display device, medium, chip and computer program product of a display module, so as to independently or semi-independently solve the technical problem that if the display module connected to the lens of the glasses is imaged in the blind spot on the lens, the user wearing the glasses will not be able to see or see clearly. The independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can work independently without the cooperation of software, so as to achieve the effect that the display module connected to the lens of the glasses in the near-eye display technology will not be imaged in the blind spot on the lens. The semi-independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme, which, when working in conjunction with near-eye display software, such as software in AR technology that allows users to interact with virtual information, can achieve the effect that the display module connected to the lens of the glasses in the near-eye display technology will not form an image in the blind spot on the lens.

如图23所示,图23是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图,在该示例性地场景中示意地示出了一种护目镜的主视图。为了使得护目镜能够尽可能地更好地保护佩戴者的眼睛,厂家通常会将镜片制作的较大,以便能够在不影响佩戴者的视线的情况下更加全面地包覆眼部区域进行防护。请参见图7,用户在佩戴该示例性的护目镜5后,镜片52上越靠近镜框51的边缘区域越不容易被 用户看清,甚至无法看清,即镜片52上的一些边缘区域是用户的视野盲区。As shown in FIG. 23 , FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application, and a front view of a pair of goggles is schematically shown in the exemplary scenario. In order to enable the goggles to protect the wearer's eyes as much as possible, manufacturers usually make the lenses larger so that they can more comprehensively cover the eye area for protection without affecting the wearer's vision. Please refer to FIG. 7 , after the user wears the exemplary goggles 5, the edge area of the lens 52 closer to the frame 51 is less likely to be The user can see clearly or even cannot see clearly, that is, some edge areas on the lens 52 are blind areas of the user's field of vision.

示例性地,假定用户A在佩戴该护目镜5后,能看清镜片52的区域如图中虚线包围的区域521(将该区域称为用户A的可视区)所示(显然,实际中护目镜上通常没有该虚线环,该虚线环是为了示意性地说明盲区和可视区的分界线的虚拟交界),而镜片52上除区域521之外的其他区域是用户A的盲区;那么显示模组2只有位于该区域521内且在该区域521内成像,用户A才能看清楚显示模组2(的显示区21),用户也才能通过显示模组2的显示区21看清显示模组2在该区域521内成的像;而如果显示模组2在镜片52上的盲区(例如图7中所示的位置处)内的情况下,用户A连显示模组2都看不清,当然也看不清显示模组2的显示区21,自然也不能通过观看显示模组2的显示区21而观看到显示模组2在镜片52上成的像。For example, it is assumed that after user A wears the goggles 5, the area of the lens 52 that can be clearly seen is shown as the area 521 surrounded by the dotted line in the figure (this area is called the visible area of user A) (obviously, in practice, there is usually no dotted line ring on the goggles, and the dotted line ring is used to schematically illustrate the virtual boundary of the boundary between the blind area and the visible area), and the other areas on the lens 52 except the area 521 are the blind areas of user A; then the display module 2 is only located in the area 521 and the image is formed in the area 521 , user A can clearly see the display module 2 (the display area 21 thereof), and the user can also clearly see the image formed by the display module 2 in the area 521 through the display area 21 of the display module 2; if the display module 2 is in the blind spot on the lens 52 (for example, the position shown in FIG. 7 ), user A cannot even see the display module 2 clearly, and of course cannot clearly see the display area 21 of the display module 2, and naturally cannot see the image formed by the display module 2 on the lens 52 by viewing the display area 21 of the display module 2.

因此,在相关技术中,某些眼镜(例如图23中所示的护目镜)处于防护或者造型的考虑,眼镜的镜片的尺寸可能比人眼的视场大很多,使得佩戴眼镜的用户无法看到或看清镜片上的一些区域,即眼镜的镜片上可能存在一些区域(即盲区)位于佩戴眼镜的用户的视野外;如果连接在眼镜的镜片上的显示模组在镜片上的盲区内成像,将导致佩戴眼镜的用户无法看到或看清。Therefore, in the related art, some glasses (such as the goggles shown in FIG. 23 ) may have lenses that are much larger than the field of view of the human eye for reasons of protection or styling, so that the user wearing the glasses cannot see or see clearly some areas on the lenses, that is, there may be some areas (i.e., blind spots) on the lenses of the glasses that are outside the field of view of the user wearing the glasses; if the display module connected to the lenses of the glasses forms an image within the blind spots on the lenses, the user wearing the glasses will not be able to see or see clearly.

本申请实施例提供一种显示模组的控制方法、装置、电子设备、近眼显示装置、介质、芯片和计算机程序产品,能够独立或半独立地在一定程度上解决如果连接在眼镜的镜片上的显示模组在镜片上的盲区内成像,将导致佩戴眼镜的用户无法看到或看清的技术问题。The embodiments of the present application provide a control method, device, electronic device, near-eye display device, medium, chip and computer program product for a display module, which can independently or semi-independently solve to a certain extent the technical problem that if the display module connected to the lens of the glasses is imaged in the blind spot on the lens, it will cause the user wearing the glasses to be unable to see or see clearly.

在此基础上,下面对本申请实施例作具体说明。On this basis, the embodiments of the present application are described in detail below.

本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,该显示模组被配置成放置在光学镜片上,以及显示模组被配置成输出图像内容。示例性地,如图1至图5、图22所示,该显示模组可以是图1至图5、图22中示出的显示模组2,该显示模组2可以在镜片12或镜片52上输出图像内容。执行该显示模组的控制方法的可以是图1至图5中的眼镜1、图1至图5中的显示模组2、图4中的近眼显示装置10或智能终端4中至少之一,其能够实现控制显示模组2在其所连接的眼镜1(或近眼显示装置10或护目镜5)上所成像的GUI的具体信息。如图24所示,图24是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。为了便于理解本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法,下面将以图23中示例的护目镜5为例,对图24所示的步骤流程进行说明。请参见图24,该显示模组的控制方法,包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a control method of a display module, the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content. Exemplarily, as shown in Figures 1 to 5 and Figure 22, the display module can be the display module 2 shown in Figures 1 to 5 and Figure 22, and the display module 2 can output image content on the lens 12 or the lens 52. The control method of the display module can be performed by at least one of the glasses 1 in Figures 1 to 5, the display module 2 in Figures 1 to 5, the near-eye display device 10 in Figure 4, or the smart terminal 4, which can realize the specific information of the GUI imaged by the control display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10 or goggles 5) to which it is connected. As shown in Figure 24, Figure 24 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application. In order to facilitate the understanding of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application, the step flow shown in Figure 24 will be described below by taking the goggles 5 illustrated in Figure 23 as an example. Referring to FIG. 24 , the control method of the display module includes:

S101,检测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的相对位置以及所述显示模组的触摸部的接触。S101, detecting the relative position of the display module on the currently connected lens and the contact of the touch portion of the display module.

镜片是显示模组当前所连接的眼镜上的镜片。示例性地,可以为上述实施例描述的,此处不再赘述。The lens is the lens on the glasses to which the display module is currently connected. For example, it can be described in the above embodiment, which will not be repeated here.

在本申请实施例中,用于在眼镜的镜片上增强现实显示成像的显示模组可以在其所连接的镜片上做一些运动,而不是将显示模组固定在镜片上。在一些可选的实施方式中,在显示模组中内置有惯性传感器或加速度传感器(或陀螺仪),通过此类传感器可以采集显示模组的瞬时速度和加速度,从而根据采集到的瞬时速度和加速度并结合时间等参数确定显示模组的运动轨迹。In the embodiment of the present application, the display module for augmented reality display imaging on the lens of the glasses can make some movements on the lens to which it is connected, instead of fixing the display module on the lens. In some optional embodiments, an inertial sensor or an acceleration sensor (or a gyroscope) is built into the display module, and the instantaneous speed and acceleration of the display module can be collected by such a sensor, so as to determine the motion trajectory of the display module according to the collected instantaneous speed and acceleration and in combination with parameters such as time.

可选的,预先在显示模组所连接的镜片上选定一固定参考点作为原点,显示模组从该原点开始移动并始终监测显示模组的运动轨迹。该运动轨迹上的任意一点相对于原点的位置即可以表示为显示模组相对于所连接的镜片的相对位置。Optionally, a fixed reference point is selected as the origin in advance on the lens connected to the display module, and the display module moves from the origin and the motion trajectory of the display module is always monitored. The position of any point on the motion trajectory relative to the origin can be expressed as the relative position of the display module relative to the connected lens.

示例性地,如图25所示,图25是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。例如镜片52上的P0点为预先选定的原点,显示模组2从原点沿着路径l1移动到了P1点、又沿着路径l2移动到了P2点、接着沿着l3移动到了P3点、最后沿着l4移动到了P4点。可以通过监测到的显示模组2的运动参数(例如速度、加速度等)确定显示模组2在该运动过程在任意时刻t时的运动轨迹l,在任意 时刻t时的运动轨迹的终点相对于原点P0的位置关系即可以表示显示模组2在镜片52上的相对位置。例如,在t1时刻显示模组2移动至了P1点,根据确定出的路径l1可以确定该P1点相对于原点P0的位置关系,即显示模组2在镜片52上的相对位置,示例性地将其表示为表示P1点是位于向量终点的位置处,且该向量起点是P0。For example, as shown in FIG. 25, FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. For example, point P0 on the lens 52 is a pre-selected origin, and the display module 2 moves from the origin along path l1 to point P1, then moves along path l2 to point P2, then moves along l3 to point P3, and finally moves along l4 to point P4. The motion trajectory l of the display module 2 at any time t in the motion process can be determined by monitoring the motion parameters (such as speed, acceleration, etc.) of the display module 2. The positional relationship of the end point of the motion trajectory at time t relative to the origin P0 can represent the relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 52. For example, at time t1, the display module 2 moves to point P1. According to the determined path l1, the positional relationship of point P1 relative to the origin P0, that is, the relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 52, can be determined, which is exemplarily represented as Indicates that point P1 is located at the vector At the end point, the vector The starting point is P0.

同理,而当显示模组2从P1点运动到P2的过程中的运动轨迹为l2,显然P2相对于P1的位置关系可以表示为表示P2点是位于向量终点的位置处,且该向量起点是P1。基于数学上的向量关系可知,因此有相应地, 显然,上述的向量其实是显示模组2在此过程中的位移。Similarly, when the motion trajectory of the display module 2 from point P1 to point P2 is l2, it is obvious that the position relationship of P2 relative to P1 can be expressed as Indicates that point P2 is located at the vector At the end point, the vector The starting point is P1. Based on the mathematical vector relationship, Therefore, there is Accordingly, Obviously, the above vector actually shows the displacement of module 2 during this process.

需要补充说明的是,在上述示例中,在描述显示模组2的路径和移动轨迹时均是以直线轨迹(路径)进行示例的,显然显示模组2是可以任意移动的,并不限于上述示例的直线轨迹的形式,例如是曲线轨迹。It should be noted that in the above examples, a straight line trajectory (path) is used as an example to describe the path and movement trajectory of the display module 2. Obviously, the display module 2 can be moved arbitrarily and is not limited to the form of the straight line trajectory in the above examples, such as a curved trajectory.

有关显示模组的触摸部的接触的检测,请参见前文的相关说明,在此不再赘述。Regarding the detection of contact of the touch portion of the display module, please refer to the relevant description in the previous text, which will not be repeated here.

S102,在成像区设置模式下检测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第一相对位置处所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,将所述第一相对位置标记为第一拟合点。所述第一相对位置是所述显示模组在所述镜片上的一任意位置。在所述成像区设置模式下所述第一触摸模式是用于表示用户确认能看清所述显示模组的显示区的触摸模式。S102, in the imaging area setting mode, when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a first relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to a first touch pattern, the first relative position is marked as a first fitting point. The first relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens. In the imaging area setting mode, the first touch pattern is a touch pattern used to indicate that the user confirms that the display area of the display module can be clearly seen.

成像区设置模式是为用户提供的在显示模组所连接的镜片上设置预设成像区的一项逻辑功能。在一些可选的实施方式中,在显示模组首次连接在镜片上开机时会自动进入成像区设置模式。在一些可选的实施方式中,在与显示模组连接的智能终端上提供了控制显示模组的APP,用户可以通过该APP中的成像区设置功能选项启动成像区设置模式。显示模组在进入该模式后,会进入预设成像区设置流程。The imaging area setting mode is a logical function provided for the user to set a preset imaging area on the lens connected to the display module. In some optional embodiments, the imaging area setting mode is automatically entered when the display module is connected to the lens for the first time and turned on. In some optional embodiments, an APP for controlling the display module is provided on the smart terminal connected to the display module, and the user can start the imaging area setting mode through the imaging area setting function option in the APP. After entering this mode, the display module will enter the preset imaging area setting process.

示例性地,图23中所示的近眼显示装置10是图25所示的护目镜5,在显示模组2首次连接在镜片52上开机时自动进入成像区设置模式,用户也可以通过智能终端4上的控制显示模组的APP中成像区设置功能选项启动显示模组2的成像区设置模式。Exemplarily, the near-eye display device 10 shown in FIG. 23 is the goggles 5 shown in FIG. 25 , which automatically enters the imaging area setting mode when the display module 2 is first connected to the lens 52 and turned on. The user can also start the imaging area setting mode of the display module 2 through the imaging area setting function option in the APP that controls the display module on the smart terminal 4.

在监测到显示模组的瞬时速度为0时,可以确认显示模组静止于镜片上。When the instantaneous speed of the display module is monitored to be 0, it can be confirmed that the display module is stationary on the lens.

示例性地,在图25中的示例中,在最初可以检测到显示模组2静止于P0点,随后可以再次检测到显示模组2静止于P1点。接着会依次检测到显示模组静止于P2点、P3点和P4点。即P1、P2、P3和P4均是第一相对位置。For example, in the example in FIG25 , it is initially detected that the display module 2 is stationary at point P0, and then it is again detected that the display module 2 is stationary at point P1. Then, it is sequentially detected that the display module is stationary at points P2, P3, and P4. That is, P1, P2, P3, and P4 are all first relative positions.

第一触摸模式可以是预先设定的一种触摸模式,例如是对显示模组的触摸部进行了单击、双击或三连击等。当检测到显示模组静止于镜片上的某一位置处被按照第一触摸模式触摸了触摸部,则将显示模组所在的该位置标记为第一拟合点。拟合点是用来拟合预设成像区的边界点。The first touch mode may be a preset touch mode, such as a single click, double click, or triple click on the touch portion of the display module. When it is detected that the display module is stationary at a certain position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, the position where the display module is located is marked as a first fitting point. The fitting point is used to fit the boundary point of the preset imaging area.

示例性地,在图25中的示例中,在检测到显示模组2在从P0点移动至P1、P2、P3和P4点处,且静止于P1、P2、P3和P4点处时还均检测到触摸部被按照第一触摸模式(例如单击)进行了触摸,因此,将P1、P2、P3和P4点均标记为第一拟合点。Exemplarily, in the example in Figure 25, when it is detected that the display module 2 moves from point P0 to points P1, P2, P3 and P4, and remains stationary at points P1, P2, P3 and P4, it is also detected that the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode (for example, a single click), therefore, points P1, P2, P3 and P4 are all marked as first fitting points.

S103,在标记出至少三个第一拟合点的情况下,将所述至少三个第一拟合点拟合成一个封闭区域。S103: When at least three first fitting points are marked, fit the at least three first fitting points into a closed area.

S104,将所述封闭区域设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区。S104, setting the closed area as a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.

基于数学常识可知,在空间中至少需要三点才能围合成一个封闭区域。因此,在标记出至少三个第一拟合点后,可以将标记出的所有第一拟合点拟合成一个封闭区域。并将根据所有第一拟合点拟合出的 封闭区域设置为显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上成像的预设成像区。Based on mathematical common sense, it is known that at least three points are needed in space to enclose a closed area. Therefore, after marking at least three first fitting points, all the marked first fitting points can be fitted into a closed area. The closed area is set as a preset imaging area for the display module to form an image on the lens currently connected.

拟合是指将多个点围合成一个封闭区域,且任意两个点之间的连线不与其他任意两点之间的连线相交叉。在一些可选的实施方式中,可以将至少三个第一拟合点拟合成预设形状的封闭区域。例如,该预设形状可以是椭圆形(圆形是一种特殊的椭圆形)、矩形、三角形等等。在一些可选的实施方式中,在进行区域拟合时,在任意两个直线距离最短的第一拟合点之间可以用曲线连接也可以用直线连接,在用曲线连接时优选使用光滑曲线连接。Fitting means enclosing a plurality of points into a closed area, and the line between any two points does not intersect the line between any other two points. In some optional embodiments, at least three first fitting points can be fitted into a closed area of a preset shape. For example, the preset shape can be an ellipse (a circle is a special ellipse), a rectangle, a triangle, etc. In some optional embodiments, when performing region fitting, any two first fitting points with the shortest straight-line distance can be connected by a curve or a straight line. When connecting by a curve, a smooth curve is preferably used.

示例性地,如图26和图27所示,图26和图27均是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图26,将四个第一拟合点 拟合成一个椭圆形区域,将该椭圆区域设置为显示模组2在镜片52上的预设成像区522。请参见图27,将四个第一拟合点P1、P2、P3和P4拟合成一个四边形区域,将该四边形区域设置为显示模组2在镜片52上的预设成像区522。For example, as shown in FIG26 and FIG27, FIG26 and FIG27 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG26, the four first fitting points Fitting into an elliptical area, the elliptical area is set as the preset imaging area 522 of the display module 2 on the lens 52. Referring to FIG. 27, the four first fitting points P1, P2, P3 and P4 are fitted into a quadrilateral area, the quadrilateral area is set as the preset imaging area 522 of the display module 2 on the lens 52.

在一些可选的实施方式中,为了方便用户设置预设成像区,上述步骤S101-S104可以通过与显示模组通信连接的智能终端(请参见图4)辅助设置,下面进行示例性地说明。In some optional implementations, in order to facilitate the user to set the preset imaging area, the above steps S101-S104 can be assisted by a smart terminal (see FIG. 4 ) that is communicatively connected to the display module, which is exemplarily described below.

如图28至图29所示,图28至图29均是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图28至29,显示模组2与智能终端6保持通信连接,且智能终端6预先获取了护目镜5的虚拟轮廓模型。该虚拟轮廓模型可以通过3D扫描仪扫描护目镜5获取,也可以是从生产护目镜5的厂家处获取的。在将显示模组2连接(放置)到镜片52上后,显示模组2启动成像区设置模式时,在智能终端6的屏幕上相应输出护目镜5的虚拟轮廓模型,并在护目镜5的虚拟轮廓模型上对显示模组2在护目镜5上的相对位置进行示踪。可以将显示模组2移动至所连接的镜片52上的不同位置处进行定位,且每个定位点(也即拟合点)以佩戴眼镜5的用户确认能够看清为准。即用户将显示模组2放置镜片52上的不同位置处进行“瞄点”定位,在智能终端6上示出这些定位点,然后将所有的定位点拟合成预设成像区。As shown in Figures 28 to 29, Figures 28 to 29 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figures 28 to 29, the display module 2 maintains a communication connection with the smart terminal 6, and the smart terminal 6 pre-acquires the virtual contour model of the goggles 5. The virtual contour model can be obtained by scanning the goggles 5 with a 3D scanner, or it can be obtained from the manufacturer of the goggles 5. After the display module 2 is connected (placed) on the lens 52, when the display module 2 starts the imaging area setting mode, the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 is output on the screen of the smart terminal 6 accordingly, and the relative position of the display module 2 on the goggles 5 is traced on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5. The display module 2 can be moved to different positions on the connected lens 52 for positioning, and each positioning point (i.e., fitting point) is subject to the user wearing the glasses 5 confirming that it can be seen clearly. That is, the user places the display module 2 at different positions on the lens 52 to perform “aiming point” positioning, displays these positioning points on the smart terminal 6, and then fits all the positioning points into a preset imaging area.

请参见图28,在显示模组2刚进入成像区设置模式时,在智能终端6上的屏幕上在护目镜5的虚拟轮廓模型上示出了显示模组2的初始位置P0,当显示模组2从P0移动至P1,在在智能终端6上的屏幕上在护目镜5的虚拟轮廓模型上示出了位置P1,用户若确认现实模组2在P1点处时能看清,则记录P1相对于原点P0位置。请参见图29,在完成“瞄点”定位后,在智能终端6上的屏幕上在护目镜5的虚拟轮廓模型上示出了找到的所有定位点,例如图29中示例的P1、P2、P3和P4。请参见图30,在智能终端6上的屏幕上在护目镜5的虚拟轮廓模型上示出拟合出的椭圆形的封闭区域,并将该封闭区域设置为显示模组2在镜片52上成像的预设成像区522。Please refer to FIG28. When the display module 2 just enters the imaging area setting mode, the initial position P0 of the display module 2 is shown on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 on the screen of the smart terminal 6. When the display module 2 moves from P0 to P1, the position P1 is shown on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 on the screen of the smart terminal 6. If the user confirms that the display module 2 can be seen clearly at the point P1, the position of P1 relative to the origin P0 is recorded. Please refer to FIG29. After completing the "aim point" positioning, all the positioning points found are shown on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 on the screen of the smart terminal 6, such as P1, P2, P3 and P4 in the example of FIG29. Please refer to FIG30. The fitted elliptical closed area is shown on the virtual contour model of the goggles 5 on the screen of the smart terminal 6, and the closed area is set as the preset imaging area 522 for the display module 2 to be imaged on the lens 52.

在一些可选的实施方式中,在选取第一相对位置时,优先选取镜片上靠近镜框的极限位置点,例如镜片上接近镜框的边缘区域的位置点,若用户确认在这些位置点无法看清显示模组,则提示用户将显示模组渐渐向镜片的中心位置点靠近,以使得最后拟合出的预设成像区尽可能地大,以增大预设成像区的面积。显然,标定的第一拟合点的数据量越多,拟合出的预设成像区越能更加接近用户的可视区。因此,可以灵活地设置拟合预设成像区的第一拟合点的数量。In some optional embodiments, when selecting the first relative position, the extreme position points on the lens close to the frame are preferentially selected, such as the position points on the lens close to the edge area of the frame. If the user confirms that the display module cannot be seen clearly at these position points, the user is prompted to gradually move the display module closer to the center position point of the lens, so that the final fitted preset imaging area is as large as possible to increase the area of the preset imaging area. Obviously, the more data of the calibrated first fitting points, the closer the fitted preset imaging area can be to the user's visual area. Therefore, the number of first fitting points for fitting the preset imaging area can be flexibly set.

在本申请实施例中,在成像区设置模式下,通过检测显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的相对位置以及显示模组的触摸部的接触,从而在显示模组当前连接的镜片上找出至少三个经用户确认可以看清的第一拟合点,然后将找出的至少三个拟合点拟合成一个封闭区域,既然该封闭区域上的边界点(显然这些边界点包括第一拟合点)都能被用户看清,自然用户也能看清该封闭区域,将该封闭区域设置为显示模 组在镜片上的预设成像区。之后,显示模组将在镜片上的该预设成像区内成像,而不会在镜片上的盲区内成像,从而有效地解决了连接在眼镜的镜片上的显示模组在镜片上的盲区内成像,将导致佩戴眼镜的用户无法看到或看清盲区内的虚拟信息的技术问题。In the embodiment of the present application, in the imaging area setting mode, by detecting the relative position of the display module on the lens currently connected and the contact of the touch portion of the display module, at least three first fitting points that are confirmed by the user and can be clearly seen are found on the lens currently connected to the display module, and then the at least three fitting points found are fitted into a closed area. Since the boundary points on the closed area (obviously these boundary points include the first fitting points) can be clearly seen by the user, the user can naturally also see the closed area, and the closed area is set as the display module. Afterwards, the display module will form an image in the preset imaging area on the lens, and will not form an image in the blind area on the lens, thereby effectively solving the technical problem that the display module connected to the lens of the glasses forms an image in the blind area on the lens, which will cause the user wearing the glasses to be unable to see or clearly see the virtual information in the blind area.

本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,该显示模组被配置成放置在光学镜片上,以及显示模组被配置成输出图像内容。示例性地,如图1至图5、图22-图23所示,该显示模组可以是图1至图5中示出的显示模组2,该显示模组2可以在镜片12或镜片52上输出图像内容。执行该显示模组的控制方法的可以是图1至图5中的眼镜1、图1至图5中的显示模组2、图4中的近眼显示装置10或智能终端4中至少之一,其能够实现控制显示模组2在其所连接的眼镜1(或近眼显示装置10或护目镜5)上所成像的GUI的具体信息。如图25所示,图25是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。为了便于理解本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法,下面将以图23中示例的护目镜5和图32所示的场景为例,对图25所示的步骤流程进行说明。请参见图25,该显示模组的控制方法,包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a control method of a display module, the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content. Exemplarily, as shown in Figures 1 to 5 and Figures 22-23, the display module may be the display module 2 shown in Figures 1 to 5, and the display module 2 may output image content on the lens 12 or the lens 52. The control method of the display module may be performed by at least one of the glasses 1 in Figures 1 to 5, the display module 2 in Figures 1 to 5, the near-eye display device 10 in Figure 4, or the smart terminal 4, which can realize the specific information of the GUI imaged by the control display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10 or goggles 5) to which it is connected. As shown in Figure 25, Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application. In order to facilitate the understanding of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application, the step flow shown in Figure 25 will be described below by taking the goggles 5 illustrated in Figure 23 and the scene shown in Figure 32 as an example. Referring to FIG. 25 , the control method of the display module includes:

S21,获取所述镜片的第一虚拟轮廓模型和所述用户的眼部的第二虚拟轮廓模型;S21, acquiring a first virtual contour model of the lens and a second virtual contour model of the user's eye;

S22,在所述第一虚拟轮廓模型上扫描出与所述第二虚拟轮廓模型相同的或相似的轮廓区域,将所述轮廓区域设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区。S22, scanning a contour area that is the same as or similar to the second virtual contour model on the first virtual contour model, and setting the contour area as a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.

请参见图32,智能终端6获取镜片的第一虚拟轮廓模型5'的有关说明请参见前文,在此不再赘述。同样的,也可以用3D扫描仪获取佩戴护目镜5的用户A的眼部的第二虚拟轮廓模型,智能终端6从该3D扫描仪获取第二虚拟轮廓模型。智能终端6将该第二虚拟轮廓模型与第一虚拟轮廓模型5'进行重叠呈现,并在第一虚拟轮廓模型5'上扫描出与第二虚拟轮廓模型相同或者相似的轮廓区域522',将该轮廓区域522'设置为显示模组2在镜片52上的预设成像区522。Please refer to Figure 32. Please refer to the previous text for the relevant instructions on how the smart terminal 6 obtains the first virtual contour model 5' of the lens, which will not be repeated here. Similarly, a second virtual contour model of the eye of user A wearing goggles 5 can also be obtained by a 3D scanner, and the smart terminal 6 obtains the second virtual contour model from the 3D scanner. The smart terminal 6 presents the second virtual contour model overlapping with the first virtual contour model 5', and scans a contour area 522' that is the same or similar to the second virtual contour model on the first virtual contour model 5', and sets the contour area 522' as the preset imaging area 522 of the display module 2 on the lens 52.

这种设置预设成像区的方式相对于前述的设置预设成像区的方式而言,其设置流程更加快捷,但难度在于针对每个眼镜,佩戴该眼镜的每个用户都需要同时获取眼镜的镜片的虚拟轮廓和用户的眼部的虚拟轮廓。因此,在实际中,用户可以根据实际情况灵活选择预设成像区的设置方式。Compared with the aforementioned method of setting the preset imaging area, this method of setting the preset imaging area is faster in setting process, but the difficulty lies in that for each pair of glasses, each user wearing the glasses needs to obtain the virtual contour of the glasses lens and the virtual contour of the user's eye at the same time. Therefore, in practice, the user can flexibly select the setting method of the preset imaging area according to the actual situation.

在完成预设成像区的设置后,显示模组在位于所连接的镜片上的预设成像区内时将可以在所连接的镜片上的预设成像区内成像。而显示模组在位于所连接的镜片上的预设成像区外不会在所连接的镜片上成像。因此,在一些可选的实施方式中,在检测到所述显示模组位于所述预设成像区外的情况下,启动低功耗模式。After the preset imaging area is set, the display module can form an image in the preset imaging area on the connected lens when it is located in the preset imaging area on the connected lens. However, the display module will not form an image on the connected lens when it is located outside the preset imaging area on the connected lens. Therefore, in some optional implementations, when it is detected that the display module is outside the preset imaging area, the low power consumption mode is started.

示例性地,在图27中,在完成预设成像区的设置后,当显示模组2移动到镜片52上的区域522之外时,显示模组2启动低功耗模式。从而节约设备的电能,延长设备的续航时间和使用寿命。在低功耗模式中,显示模组2可以是处于完全不工作的状态或待机状态或部分模块工作的状态,而在显示模组2重新移动至区域522内时,显示模组2关闭低功耗模式恢复工作。在一些可选的实施方式中,用户还可以将非预设成像区(即在图27中的示例中,即镜片52上的区域522之外的区域)对不同时间段的低功耗模式对应的具体状态进行设置,例如将晚上11点至次日7点的低功耗模式设置为完全不工作的状态,将早晨7点至9点、中午12点至下午2点、傍晚5点至8点的低功耗模式设置为待机状态,而将其余时间段设置为部分模块工作(例如监测显示模组的运动状态的硬件处于工作中)的状态。Exemplarily, in FIG27, after completing the setting of the preset imaging area, when the display module 2 moves outside the area 522 on the lens 52, the display module 2 starts the low power consumption mode. Thereby saving the electric energy of the device and extending the battery life and service life of the device. In the low power consumption mode, the display module 2 may be in a completely non-operating state or a standby state or a state where some modules are working, and when the display module 2 moves back into the area 522, the display module 2 turns off the low power consumption mode and resumes working. In some optional embodiments, the user can also set the specific state corresponding to the low power consumption mode of different time periods in the non-preset imaging area (i.e., in the example in FIG27, the area outside the area 522 on the lens 52), for example, setting the low power consumption mode from 11 pm to 7 am the next day to a completely non-operating state, setting the low power consumption mode from 7 am to 9 am, from 12 pm to 2 pm, and from 5 pm to 8 pm to a standby state, and setting the remaining time periods to a state where some modules are working (e.g., the hardware for monitoring the motion state of the display module is working).

在一些可选的实施方式中,在前述实施方式的基础上,本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法还包括:In some optional implementations, based on the foregoing implementations, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:

在接收到分区指令的情况下,将所述预设成像区划分成至少两个子成像区; In case of receiving a partitioning instruction, dividing the preset imaging area into at least two sub-imaging areas;

在接收到在第一子成像区域内成像第一图形界面的映射指令时,控制所述显示模组在所述第一子成像区域内成像所述第一图形界面;所述第一子成像区域是所述至少两个子成像区中的任意一子成像区域。When a mapping instruction for imaging a first graphic interface in a first sub-imaging area is received, the display module is controlled to image the first graphic interface in the first sub-imaging area; the first sub-imaging area is any one of the at least two sub-imaging areas.

用户可以自行将预设成像区分割成多个子成像区,并在不同的子成像区呈现不同的图像,且每个子区域中呈现的图像也可以由用户自行设置。显示模组在接收到用户输入的分区指令的情况下,显示模组响应于分区指令中的区域数目,将预设成像区分割成该区域数目的子成像区(示例性地,如图33中所示,将预设成像区522划分成了6个子成像区)。显示模组在接收针对某个子成像区的映射指令的情况下,根据映射指令中映射的数据,在该子成像区域中成像出该映射指令中映射的数据对应的图形界面。The user can divide the preset imaging area into multiple sub-imaging areas and present different images in different sub-imaging areas, and the image presented in each sub-area can also be set by the user. When the display module receives the partition instruction input by the user, the display module responds to the number of areas in the partition instruction and divides the preset imaging area into sub-imaging areas of the number of areas (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the preset imaging area 522 is divided into 6 sub-imaging areas). When the display module receives a mapping instruction for a sub-imaging area, the display module images a graphical interface corresponding to the data mapped in the mapping instruction in the sub-imaging area according to the data mapped in the mapping instruction.

示例性地,如图33所示,图33是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。请参见图33,用户在镜片52上为显示模组2设置预设成像区522,该预设成像区522被划分成了6个子成像区,在每个子成像区中成像出了每个子成像区中映射的数据的图形界面。图33中所示的图标A-I可以是应用程序或文件的图标(的缩略图),也可以其他的内容,例如是正在播放的视频等等。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG33, FIG33 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG33, the user sets a preset imaging area 522 for the display module 2 on the lens 52, and the preset imaging area 522 is divided into 6 sub-imaging areas, and a graphical interface of the data mapped in each sub-imaging area is imaged in each sub-imaging area. The icons A-I shown in FIG33 can be icons (thumbnails) of applications or files, or other content, such as a video being played, etc.

在本申请实施例中,为了能够充分让此类传统眼镜具有增强现实显示功能,并可以在其上实现高效交互,用户可根据需要自定义布局具体的预设成像区,例如眼镜的镜片整体为圆形或方形或者其它形状,其具有大于人眼视野范围的镜片区域,此时用户可以取视野比较好的位置为预设成像区,预设成像区可以分割成多个子成像区,其中每个子成像区可以配置输出与之相应的图形界面,多个子区域可以实现多个图形界面的多路输出。In an embodiment of the present application, in order to fully enable such traditional glasses to have an augmented reality display function and to achieve efficient interaction thereon, the user can customize the layout of specific preset imaging areas as needed. For example, the lenses of the glasses are generally round or square or other shapes, and have a lens area that is larger than the field of view of the human eye. At this time, the user can take a position with a better field of view as the preset imaging area. The preset imaging area can be divided into multiple sub-imaging areas, each of which can be configured to output a corresponding graphical interface, and multiple sub-areas can realize multi-channel output of multiple graphical interfaces.

很显然,针对一个特定的眼镜会因其佩戴用户的不同,对每个用户而言其盲区和可视区也是不同的。而针对一个特定的用户会因其佩戴的眼镜的不同,对每个眼镜而言其盲区和可视区也是不同的。也就是说,前述的实施例中提供的预设成像区的设置方法需要因人而异、因眼镜而异。换句话说,用户A佩戴眼镜A时设置的预设成像区A可能对用户B佩戴眼镜A而言是不适合的,用户B佩戴眼镜A可能无法看清预设成像区A内的一些区域,用户B佩戴眼镜A时可能需要重新设置预设成像区B。因此,在一些可选的实施方式中,针对显示模组当前连接的镜片,可以将设置预设成像区的用户的身份信息与该用户设置的预设成像区进行关联,以便后续不同用户佩戴眼镜时显示模组基于与该用户相关联的预设成像区进行成像。因此,在一些可选的实施方式中,在前述实施方式的基础上,本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法还包括:Obviously, for a specific pair of glasses, the blind area and visible area will be different for each user due to the different users who wear them. And for a specific user, the blind area and visible area will be different for each pair of glasses due to the different glasses they wear. That is to say, the setting method of the preset imaging area provided in the aforementioned embodiment needs to vary from person to person and from glasses to glasses. In other words, the preset imaging area A set when user A wears glasses A may not be suitable for user B wearing glasses A. User B may not be able to see some areas within the preset imaging area A when wearing glasses A. User B may need to reset the preset imaging area B when wearing glasses A. Therefore, in some optional embodiments, for the lens currently connected to the display module, the identity information of the user who sets the preset imaging area can be associated with the preset imaging area set by the user, so that when different users wear glasses subsequently, the display module performs imaging based on the preset imaging area associated with the user. Therefore, in some optional embodiments, on the basis of the aforementioned embodiments, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application also includes:

获取所述用户的身份信息;Obtaining identity information of the user;

将所述身份信息与所述预设成像区建立映射规则并保存。A mapping rule is established between the identity information and the preset imaging area and saved.

此处的用户即是在显示模组当前连接的镜片上设置预设成像区的用户。可以是前述步骤S102中按照第一触摸模式触摸显示模组的触摸部的用户,也可以是前述步骤S21中第二虚拟轮廓模型对应的用户。The user here is the user who sets the preset imaging area on the lens currently connected to the display module, and may be the user who touches the touch portion of the display module according to the first touch mode in the aforementioned step S102, or the user corresponding to the second virtual contour model in the aforementioned step S21.

用户的身份信息可以是用户的账号/密码、声纹、指纹、虹膜等等。The user's identity information can be the user's account/password, voiceprint, fingerprint, iris, etc.

当用户在佩戴一个眼镜完成预设成像区的设置后,可以将该用户的身份信息与该用户设置的预设成像区建立一条映射规则,并保存该映射规则,用户下次使用该眼镜时,直接根据该映射规则获取该用户在该眼镜上设置的预设成像区。When a user completes the setting of a preset imaging area while wearing a pair of glasses, a mapping rule can be established between the user's identity information and the preset imaging area set by the user, and the mapping rule can be saved. The next time the user uses the glasses, the preset imaging area set by the user on the glasses can be directly obtained according to the mapping rule.

示例性地,针对显示模组2,用户A在护目镜5上设置的预设成像区A1,就将用户A的身份信息ID-A与预设成像区A1建立映射,用户在眼镜1上设置的预设成像区A2,就将用户A的身份信息ID-A与预设成像区A2建立映射。针对显示模组2,用户B在护目镜5上设置的预设成像区B1,就将用户B的身份信息ID-B与预设成像区B1建立映射。并保存这些映射规则。 For example, for the display module 2, the preset imaging area A1 set by user A on the goggles 5 is mapped with the user A's identity information ID-A and the preset imaging area A1, and the preset imaging area A2 set by the user on the glasses 1 is mapped with the user A's identity information ID-A and the preset imaging area A2. For the display module 2, the preset imaging area B1 set by user B on the goggles 5 is mapped with the user B's identity information ID-B and the preset imaging area B1. These mapping rules are saved.

如图34所示,图34是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。请参见图34,本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,在前述的实施例的基础上,还包括:As shown in FIG34 , FIG34 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG34 , the embodiment of the present application provides a control method of the display module, which, based on the above-mentioned embodiment, further includes:

S105,在退出所述成像区设置模式后又启动成像区设置模式的情况下,又检测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第二相对位置处且所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,将所述第二相对位置标记为第二拟合点;所述第二相对位置是所述镜片上与所述第一相对位置不同的一任意位置;S105, when the imaging area setting mode is started again after the imaging area setting mode is exited, when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a second relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, marking the second relative position as a second fitting point; the second relative position is an arbitrary position on the lens different from the first relative position;

S106,在标记出至少一个第二拟合点的情况下,将所述至少三个第一拟合点和所述至少一个第二拟合点拟合成一个第一新封闭区域,将所述第一新封闭区域更新设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区;或S106, when at least one second fitting point is marked, fitting the at least three first fitting points and the at least one second fitting point into a first new closed area, and updating the first new closed area to be a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens; or

S107,在标记出至少三个第二拟合点的情况下,将所述至少三个第二拟合点拟合成一个第二新封闭区域,将所述第二新封闭区域更新设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区。S107, when at least three second fitting points are marked, fitting the at least three second fitting points into a second new closed area, and updating the second new closed area to be a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.

用户在设置了预设成像区后,可能觉着设置的预设成像区不太理想,想要对原来设置的预设成像区进行局部更新或者完全重新设置。因此,用户在设置好预设成像区后可以又重新进入成像区设置模式,更新或重设预设成像区。即用户在再次进入成像区设置模式时,可以在镜片再次进行“瞄点”定位,找出一些与第一拟合点不同的定位点(即第二拟合点),将第二拟合点加入第一拟合点中重新拟合预设成像区(即步骤S106)以更新预设成像区,或者找出至少三个第二拟合点并依据这至少三个第二拟合点重新拟合出新的预设成像区(即步骤S107)以重新设置预设成像区。After setting the preset imaging area, the user may feel that the preset imaging area is not ideal and want to partially update or completely reset the preset imaging area. Therefore, after setting the preset imaging area, the user can re-enter the imaging area setting mode to update or reset the preset imaging area. That is, when the user re-enters the imaging area setting mode, the lens can be "aimed" again, and some positioning points different from the first fitting points (i.e., second fitting points) can be found, and the second fitting points can be added to the first fitting points to re-fit the preset imaging area (i.e., step S106) to update the preset imaging area, or at least three second fitting points can be found and a new preset imaging area can be re-fitted based on the at least three second fitting points (i.e., step S107) to reset the preset imaging area.

如图35所示,图35是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。请参见图35,本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,在前述的实施例的基础上,还包括:As shown in FIG35 , FIG35 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG35 , the embodiment of the present application provides a control method of the display module, which, based on the above-mentioned embodiment, further includes:

S31,识别佩戴第一眼镜的第一用户的第一身份,所述第一眼镜包括所述镜片;S31, identifying a first identity of a first user wearing a first pair of glasses, where the first pair of glasses includes the lenses;

S32,在预置的映射集中搜索与所述第一身份相匹配的映射规则;S32, searching a preset mapping set for a mapping rule that matches the first identity;

S33,在从所述映射集中搜索到有且仅有一条映射规则的情况下,将搜索到的该映射规则中的预设成像区设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的成像区;所述映射集中每一条映射规则是预先设定的一个用户身份与一个预设成像区之间的映射关系,所述映射集中的各个映射规则各不相同。S33, when there is only one mapping rule searched from the mapping set, setting the preset imaging area in the searched mapping rule as the imaging area of the display module on the lens; each mapping rule in the mapping set is a pre-set mapping relationship between a user identity and a preset imaging area, and each mapping rule in the mapping set is different.

第一用户可以任意的一个用户。The first user may be any user.

在一些可选的实施方式中,可以通过与显示模组通信连接的智能终端获取用户登录的账号/密码、指纹信息从而识别佩戴第一眼镜的第一用户的第一身份,也可以通过显示模组上的摄像头采集第一用户的虹膜信息从而识别第一用户的身份信息。In some optional embodiments, the user's login account/password and fingerprint information can be obtained through a smart terminal that is communicatively connected to the display module to identify the first identity of the first user wearing the first glasses, or the first user's iris information can be collected through a camera on the display module to identify the identity information of the first user.

显示模组可以连接在任何的眼镜上,因此映射集与每个眼镜相关联。例如,可以为眼镜A配置映射集A,在映射集A中记录各个用户佩戴眼镜A时设置的预设成像区的至少一个映射规则。可以为眼镜B配置映射集B,在映射集B中记录各个用户佩戴眼镜B时设置的预设成像区的至少一个映射规则。The display module can be connected to any glasses, so the mapping set is associated with each pair of glasses. For example, mapping set A can be configured for glasses A, and at least one mapping rule of the preset imaging area set when each user wears glasses A is recorded in mapping set A. Mapping set B can be configured for glasses B, and at least one mapping rule of the preset imaging area set when each user wears glasses B is recorded in mapping set B.

在识别到第一用户的第一身份后,可以从第一眼镜的映射集中搜索与第一身份相匹配的映射规则。在从第一眼镜的映射集中搜索到有且仅有一条映射规则的情况下,将搜索到的该映射规则中的预设成像区设置为显示模组在镜片上成像的成像区。After the first identity of the first user is identified, a mapping rule matching the first identity may be searched from the mapping set of the first glasses. When only one mapping rule is found from the mapping set of the first glasses, the preset imaging area in the searched mapping rule is set as the imaging area of the display module on the lens.

如图36所示,图36是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。请参见图36,本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法在图35所示的实施例的基础上,还包括:As shown in FIG36, FIG36 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG36, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application is based on the embodiment shown in FIG35, and further includes:

S34,在从所述映射集中搜索到至少两条映射规则的情况下,检测针对所述至少两条映射规则中各自的预设成像区的选择指令,并将被所述选择指令所选中预设成像区设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的成像区,或将所述至少两条映射规则中第一预设成像区设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的 成像区,所述第一预设成像区是所述第一用户选择预设成像区的历史选择记录中最后一次选中的预设成像区。S34, in the case where at least two mapping rules are searched from the mapping set, detecting a selection instruction for each of the preset imaging areas in the at least two mapping rules, and setting the preset imaging area selected by the selection instruction as the imaging area for the display module to image on the lens, or setting the first preset imaging area in the at least two mapping rules as the imaging area for the display module to image on the lens. Imaging area, the first preset imaging area is the preset imaging area selected last time in the historical selection record of the first user selecting the preset imaging area.

如果从第一眼镜的映射集中搜索到至少两条映射规则的情况下,说明第一用户在第一眼镜上设置了多个预设成像区,可以在与显示模组通信连接的智能终端上示出这些预设成像区以供第一用户选择,并将用户输入的选择指令选中的预设成像区设置为显示模组在所述镜片上成像的成像区。或者还可以将第一用户选择预设成像区的历史选择记录中最后一次选中的预设成像区设置为显示模组在所述镜片上成像的成像区。If at least two mapping rules are searched from the mapping set of the first glasses, it means that the first user has set multiple preset imaging areas on the first glasses, and these preset imaging areas can be displayed on the smart terminal connected to the display module for selection by the first user, and the preset imaging area selected by the selection instruction input by the user is set as the imaging area formed by the display module on the glasses. Alternatively, the preset imaging area selected last in the historical selection record of the first user selecting the preset imaging area can be set as the imaging area formed by the display module on the glasses.

如图37所示,图37是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。请参见图37,本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法在图36所示的实施例的基础上,还包括:As shown in FIG37, FIG37 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG37, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application is based on the embodiment shown in FIG36, and further includes:

S35,在从所述映射集中未搜索到映射规则的情况下,启动所述成像区设置模式;S35, when no mapping rule is found from the mapping set, starting the imaging area setting mode;

S36,在所述成像区设置模式下检测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三相对位置处所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,将所述第三相对位置标记为第三拟合点;所述第三相对位置是所述显示模组在所述镜片上的一任意位置;S36, in the case where it is detected in the imaging area setting mode that the display module is stationary at a third relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, marking the third relative position as a third fitting point; the third relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens;

S37,在标记出至少三个第三拟合点的情况下,将所述至少三个第三拟合点拟合成一个第三封闭区域;S37, when at least three third fitting points are marked, fitting the at least three third fitting points into a third closed area;

S38,将所述第三封闭区域设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的第三预设成像区。S38, setting the third closed area as a third preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.

在从所述映射集中未搜索到映射规则的情况下,说明第一用户尚未在第一眼镜上设置预设成像区,因此启动成像区设置模式,以便第一用户在第一眼镜上为显示模组设置预设成像区。有关第一用户在第一镜片上寻找第三拟合点,并将找出的第三拟合点拟合成第三预设成像区的具体过程可以参照前文中设置预设成像区的说明,在此不再赘述。In the case where no mapping rule is searched from the mapping set, it means that the first user has not set the preset imaging area on the first glasses, so the imaging area setting mode is started so that the first user can set the preset imaging area for the display module on the first glasses. The specific process of the first user finding the third fitting point on the first lens and fitting the found third fitting point into the third preset imaging area can refer to the description of setting the preset imaging area in the previous text, which will not be repeated here.

在一些可选的实施方式中,在上述图20所示的实施方式的基础上,所述显示模组的控制方法,还包括:将所述第一身份与所述第三预设成像区建立第三映射规则,并将所述第三映射规则归入所述映射集中。In some optional embodiments, based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 20 above, the control method of the display module further includes: establishing a third mapping rule between the first identity and the third preset imaging area, and incorporating the third mapping rule into the mapping set.

将第一用户的第一身份与第三预设成像区建立第三映射规则,并归于第一眼镜的映射集中,以便第一用户下次使用第一眼镜时快速确定第一用户使用第一眼镜所对应的预设成像区。A third mapping rule is established between the first identity of the first user and the third preset imaging area, and is included in the mapping set of the first glasses, so that the first user can quickly determine the preset imaging area corresponding to the first glasses when using the first glasses next time.

如图38所示,图38是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。请参见图38,本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,在前述的实施例的基础上,还包括:As shown in FIG38 , FIG38 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method of the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG38 , an embodiment of the present application provides a control method of the display module, which, based on the aforementioned embodiment, further includes:

S41,在退出所述成像区设置模式后又启动成像区设置模式的情况下,又检测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第四相对位置处所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,将所述第四相对位置标记为第四拟合点;所述第四相对位置是所述显示模组在所述镜片上一任意位置;S41, when the imaging area setting mode is started again after the imaging area setting mode is exited, when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a fourth relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, marking the fourth relative position as a fourth fitting point; the fourth relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens;

S42,在标记出至少三个第四拟合点的情况下,确定所述至少三个第四拟合点与所述至少三个第一拟合点重复率;S42, when at least three fourth fitting points are marked, determining a repetition rate between the at least three fourth fitting points and the at least three first fitting points;

S43,在确定所述重复率不小于预设阈值时,将所述预设成像区设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的当前成像区。S43, when it is determined that the repetition rate is not less than the preset threshold, setting the preset imaging area as the current imaging area of the display module on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,用户可能已经忘记自己曾经为当前所佩戴的眼镜已经设置过预设成像区,当显示模组检测到再次进入预设成像区设置模式的情况下,检测到的第四拟合点与第一拟合点的在镜片上的相对位置的重复率达到预设阈值(例如90%),则放弃设置预设成像区,而直接将依据第一拟合点拟合出的预设成像区配置为显示模组在所述镜片上成像的当前成像区。 In some optional embodiments, the user may have forgotten that he or she has ever set a preset imaging area for the glasses currently worn. When the display module detects that the preset imaging area setting mode is entered again, and the repetition rate of the relative positions of the detected fourth fitting point and the first fitting point on the lens reaches a preset threshold (for example, 90%), the setting of the preset imaging area is abandoned, and the preset imaging area fitted according to the first fitting point is directly configured as the current imaging area of the display module on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,在上述图37所示的实施方式的基础上,所述显示模组的控制方法,还包括:在确定所述重复率小于预设阈值时,将所述至少三个第四拟合点拟合成一个第四封闭区域,将所述第四封闭区域设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的当前成像区。In some optional embodiments, based on the embodiment shown in Figure 37 above, the control method of the display module also includes: when it is determined that the repetition rate is less than a preset threshold, fitting the at least three fourth fitting points into a fourth closed area, and setting the fourth closed area as the current imaging area of the display module on the lens.

需要说明的是,虽然以上示例中均以单目(即只在眼镜的一个镜片上连接有本申请实施例所提供的显示模组)为例进行了说明,但是,很显然本申请所提供的所有实施方式也可以适用于双目(即在眼镜的两个镜片上均连接有本申请实施例所提供的显示模组)的场景。It should be noted that although the above examples are all described using monocular (i.e., the display module provided by the embodiment of the present application is connected to only one lens of the glasses) as an example, it is obvious that all the implementation methods provided in the present application can also be applied to binocular (i.e., the display modules provided by the embodiment of the present application are connected to both lenses of the glasses) scenarios.

本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法,执行主体可以为显示模组的控制装置。本申请实施例中以显示模组的控制装置执行显示模组的控制方法为例,说明本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制装置。The control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by a control device of the display module. In the embodiment of the present application, the control device of the display module executing the control method of the display module is taken as an example to illustrate the control device of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.

如图39所示,示出了本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的控制装置的结构示意图。请参见图39,所述显示模组的控制装置7,所述显示模组被配置成放置在光学镜片上,以及显示模组被配置成输出图像内容,控制装置7包括:As shown in FIG39 , a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application is shown. Referring to FIG39 , the control device 7 of the display module, the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content, and the control device 7 includes:

第一检测模块71,用于检测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的相对位置以及所述显示模组的触摸部的接触;A first detection module 71 is used to detect the relative position of the display module on the currently connected lens and the contact of the touch portion of the display module;

第一标记模块72,用于在成像区设置模式下检测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第一相对位置处所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,将所述第一相对位置标记为第一拟合点;所述第一相对位置是所述显示模组在所述镜片上的一任意位置,在所述成像区设置模式下所述第一触摸模式是用于表示用户确认能看清所述显示模组的显示区的触摸模式;A first marking module 72 is configured to mark the first relative position as a first fitting point when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a first relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to a first touch pattern in an imaging area setting mode; the first relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens, and the first touch pattern is a touch pattern used to indicate that the user confirms that the display area of the display module can be clearly seen in the imaging area setting mode;

第一拟合模块73,用于在标记出至少三个第一拟合点的情况下,将所述至少三个第一拟合点拟合成一个封闭区域;A first fitting module 73, configured to fit the at least three first fitting points into a closed area when at least three first fitting points are marked;

第一设置模块74,用于将所述封闭区域设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区。The first setting module 74 is used to set the closed area as a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

在检测到所述显示模组位于所述预设成像区外的情况下,启动低功耗模式。When it is detected that the display module is outside the preset imaging area, a low power consumption mode is started.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第一划分模块,用于在接收到分区指令的情况下,将所述预设成像区划分成至少两个子成像区;A first division module, configured to divide the preset imaging area into at least two sub-imaging areas when receiving a partition instruction;

第一成像模块,用于在接收到在第一子成像区域内成像第一图形界面的映射指令时,控制所述显示模组在所述第一子成像区域内成像所述第一图形界面;所述第一子成像区域是所述至少两个子成像区中的任意一子成像区域。The first imaging module is used to control the display module to image the first graphic interface in the first sub-imaging area when receiving a mapping instruction to image the first graphic interface in the first sub-imaging area; the first sub-imaging area is any one of the at least two sub-imaging areas.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第二标记模块,用于在退出所述成像区设置模式后又启动成像区设置模式的情况下,又检测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第二相对位置处且所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,将所述第二相对位置标记为第二拟合点;所述第二相对位置是所述镜片上与所述第一相对位置不同的一任意位置;a second marking module, for, when the imaging area setting mode is started again after the imaging area setting mode is exited, and when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a second relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, marking the second relative position as a second fitting point; the second relative position is an arbitrary position on the lens different from the first relative position;

第二拟合模块,用于在标记出至少一个第二拟合点的情况下,将所述至少三个第一拟合点和所述至少一个第二拟合点拟合成一个第一新封闭区域,将所述第一新封闭区域更新设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区;或在标记出至少三个第二拟合点的情况下,将所述至少三个第二拟合点拟合成一个第二新封闭区域,将所述第二新封闭区域更新设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区。A second fitting module is used to fit the at least three first fitting points and the at least one second fitting point into a first new closed area when at least one second fitting point is marked, and update the first new closed area to be the preset imaging area of the display module on the lens; or to fit the at least three second fitting points into a second new closed area when at least three second fitting points are marked, and update the second new closed area to be the preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第一识别模块,用于识别佩戴第一眼镜的第一用户的第一身份,所述第一眼镜包括所述镜片; a first identification module, configured to identify a first identity of a first user wearing a first pair of glasses, wherein the first pair of glasses includes the lenses;

第一搜索模块,用于在预置的映射集中搜索与所述第一身份相匹配的映射规则;A first search module, configured to search a mapping rule matching the first identity in a preset mapping set;

第二设置模块,用于在从所述映射集中搜索到有且仅有一条映射规则的情况下,将搜索到的该映射规则中的预设成像区设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的成像区;所述映射集中每一条映射规则是预先设定的一个用户身份与一个预设成像区之间的映射关系,所述映射集中的各个映射规则各不相同。The second setting module is used to set the preset imaging area in the searched mapping rule as the imaging area of the display module on the lens when there is only one mapping rule searched from the mapping set; each mapping rule in the mapping set is a pre-set mapping relationship between a user identity and a preset imaging area, and each mapping rule in the mapping set is different.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第三设置模块,用于在从所述映射集中搜索到至少两条映射规则的情况下,检测针对所述至少两条映射规则中各自的预设成像区的选择指令,并将被所述选择指令所选中预设成像区设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的成像区,或将所述至少两条映射规则中第一预设成像区设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的成像区,所述第一预设成像区是所述第一用户选择预设成像区的历史选择记录中最后一次选中的预设成像区。A third setting module is used to detect, when at least two mapping rules are searched from the mapping set, a selection instruction for each preset imaging area in the at least two mapping rules, and set the preset imaging area selected by the selection instruction as the imaging area for the display module to image on the lens, or set the first preset imaging area in the at least two mapping rules as the imaging area for the display module to image on the lens, wherein the first preset imaging area is the preset imaging area selected last time in the historical selection record of the first user selecting the preset imaging area.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第一启动模块,用于在从所述映射集中未搜索到映射规则的情况下,启动所述成像区设置模式;A first starting module, configured to start the imaging area setting mode when no mapping rule is found from the mapping set;

第三标记模块,用于在所述成像区设置模式下检测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三相对位置处所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,将所述第三相对位置标记为第三拟合点;所述第三相对位置是所述显示模组在所述镜片上的一任意位置;a third marking module, configured to mark the third relative position as a third fitting point when it is detected in the imaging area setting mode that the display module is stationary at a third relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode; the third relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens;

第三拟合模块,用于在标记出至少三个第三拟合点的情况下,将所述至少三个第三拟合点拟合成一个第三封闭区域;A third fitting module, configured to fit the at least three third fitting points into a third closed area when at least three third fitting points are marked;

第四设置模块,用于将所述第三封闭区域设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的第三预设成像区。The fourth setting module is used to set the third closed area as a third preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第一建立模块,用于将所述第一身份与所述第三预设成像区建立第三映射规则,并将所述第三映射规则归入所述映射集中。The first establishing module is used to establish a third mapping rule between the first identity and the third preset imaging area, and classify the third mapping rule into the mapping set.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第四标记模块,用于在退出所述成像区设置模式后又启动成像区设置模式的情况下,又检测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第四相对位置处所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,将所述第四相对位置标记为第四拟合点;所述第四相对位置是所述显示模组在所述镜片上一任意位置;a fourth marking module, for, when the imaging area setting mode is started again after the imaging area setting mode is exited, and when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a fourth relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, marking the fourth relative position as a fourth fitting point; the fourth relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens;

第四拟合模块,用于在标记出至少三个第四拟合点的情况下,确定所述至少三个第四拟合点与所述至少三个第一拟合点重复率;a fourth fitting module, configured to determine, when at least three fourth fitting points are marked, a repetition rate between the at least three fourth fitting points and the at least three first fitting points;

第五设置模块,用于在确定所述重复率不小于预设阈值时,将所述预设成像区设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的当前成像区。The fifth setting module is used to set the preset imaging area as the current imaging area of the display module on the lens when it is determined that the repetition rate is not less than a preset threshold.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第六设置模块,用于在确定所述重复率小于预设阈值时,将所述至少三个第四拟合点拟合成一个第四封闭区域,将所述第四封闭区域设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像的当前成像区。The sixth setting module is used to fit the at least three fourth fitting points into a fourth closed area when it is determined that the repetition rate is less than a preset threshold, and set the fourth closed area as the current imaging area of the display module on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第一获取模块,用于获取所述镜片的第一虚拟轮廓模型和所述用户的眼部的第二虚拟轮廓模型;A first acquisition module, used for acquiring a first virtual contour model of the lens and a second virtual contour model of the user's eye;

第七设置模块,用于在所述第一虚拟轮廓模型上扫描出与所述第二虚拟轮廓模型相同的或相似的轮廓区域,将所述轮廓区域设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区。The seventh setting module is used to scan a contour area that is the same as or similar to the second virtual contour model on the first virtual contour model, and set the contour area as a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述控制装置7还包括:In some optional implementations, the control device 7 further includes:

第二获取模块,用于获取所述用户的身份信息; A second acquisition module, used to acquire the identity information of the user;

第二建立模块,用于将所述身份信息与所述预设成像区建立映射规则并保存。The second establishing module is used to establish and save a mapping rule between the identity information and the preset imaging area.

本申请实施例中的显示模组的控制装置7可以是电子设备,也可以是电子设备中的部件,例如集成电路或芯片。该电子设备可以是终端,也可以为除终端之外的其他设备。示例性的,电子设备可以为手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、车载电子设备、移动上网装置(Mobile Internet Device,MID)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、机器人、可穿戴设备、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本或者个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)等,还可以为服务器、网络附属存储器(Network Attached Storage,NAS)、个人计算机(personal computer,PC)、电视机(television,TV)、柜员机或者自助机等,本申请实施例不作具体限定。The control device 7 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application can be an electronic device or a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or a chip. The electronic device can be a terminal or other devices other than a terminal. Exemplarily, the electronic device can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a PDA, a vehicle-mounted electronic device, a mobile Internet device (Mobile Internet Device, MID), an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, a robot, a wearable device, an ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), a netbook or a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), etc. It can also be a server, a network attached storage (Network Attached Storage, NAS), a personal computer (personal computer, PC), a television (television, TV), a teller machine or a self-service machine, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not make specific limitations.

本申请实施例中的显示模组的控制装置7可以为具有操作系统的装置。该操作系统可以为安卓(Android)操作系统,可以为ios操作系统,还可以为其他可能的操作系统,本申请实施例不作具体限定。The control device 7 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application may be a device having an operating system. The operating system may be an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or other possible operating systems, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.

本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制装置7能够实现图1-图5、图22至图38的实施例实现的各个过程,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。The control device 7 of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can implement the various processes implemented in the embodiments of Figures 1 to 5 and Figures 22 to 38. To avoid repetition, they will not be repeated here.

本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备130,如图19所示,电子设备130可包括处理器131和存储器132,存储器132上存储有可在所述处理器131上运行的程序或指令,该程序或指令被处理器131执行时实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。The embodiment of the present application also provides an electronic device 130. As shown in FIG19 , the electronic device 130 may include a processor 131 and a memory 132. The memory 132 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 131. When the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated here.

本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备,该电子设备硬件结构为如图20所示的示意图,相同功能的部件此处不再赘述,其中,处理器1410,用于:检测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的相对位置以及所述显示模组的触摸部的接触;在成像区设置模式下检测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第一相对位置处所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,将所述第一相对位置标记为第一拟合点;所述第一相对位置是所述显示模组在所述镜片上的一任意位置,在所述成像区设置模式下所述第一触摸模式是用于表示用户确认能看清所述显示模组的显示区的触摸模式;在标记出至少三个第一拟合点的情况下,将所述至少三个第一拟合点拟合成一个封闭区域;将所述封闭区域设置为所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区。An embodiment of the present application also provides an electronic device, the hardware structure of which is a schematic diagram as shown in Figure 20, and components with the same functions are not repeated here, wherein the processor 1410 is used to: detect the relative position of the display module on the currently connected lens and the contact of the touch portion of the display module; in the imaging area setting mode, when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a first relative position on the lens and the touch portion is touched according to a first touch pattern, mark the first relative position as a first fitting point; the first relative position is an arbitrary position of the display module on the lens, and in the imaging area setting mode, the first touch pattern is a touch pattern used to indicate that the user confirms that the display area of the display module can be clearly seen; when at least three first fitting points are marked, fit the at least three first fitting points into a closed area; and set the closed area as a preset imaging area of the display module on the lens.

在一些可选的实施方式中,本申请实施例还提供一种近眼显示装置150,近眼显示装置150可以如上述图21所示,显示装置150可包括处理器151和存储器152,存储器152上存储有可在所述处理器151上运行的程序或指令,该程序或指令被处理器131执行时实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。In some optional embodiments, the embodiments of the present application also provide a near-eye display device 150. The near-eye display device 150 can be as shown in Figure 21 above. The display device 150 may include a processor 151 and a memory 152. The memory 152 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 151. When the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, it will not be repeated here.

请继续参见图40,在预设成像区内的中心区中同时成像有两个缩略图[A]和[B],在靠近镜框11的边缘的区域内同时成像有三个缩略图[D1]、[D2]和[D3]。需要提供相应的交互手段,以便用户从这些(图标的)缩略图中选择需要选中的缩略图,从而实现用户与显示模组的交互。同时,需要保证用户能够较为快速精准地选中欲选中的缩略图而不会出现选错或混乱的情况。Please continue to refer to FIG. 40 . Two thumbnails [A] and [B] are simultaneously imaged in the central area of the preset imaging area, and three thumbnails [D1], [D2] and [D3] are simultaneously imaged in the area near the edge of the frame 11. It is necessary to provide corresponding interactive means so that the user can select the thumbnail to be selected from these (icon) thumbnails, thereby realizing the interaction between the user and the display module. At the same time, it is necessary to ensure that the user can select the thumbnail to be selected relatively quickly and accurately without making a wrong selection or confusion.

在相关技术中,显示模组在近眼显示装置上的某个区域内可能同时成像有多个应用或文件(的图标的)缩略图,如何使用户能够精准地与这些缩略图进行交互而不会出现混乱或错误是一个亟待解决的技术问题。本申请实施例的目的是提供一种显示模组的控制方法、装置、电子设备、近眼显示装置、介质、芯片和计算机程序产品,以独立或半独立地在一定程度上解决如果连接在近眼显示装置上的显示模组在 近眼显示装置的某个区域内同时成像有多个应用或文件(的图标的)缩略图,用户与这些缩略图进行交互容易出现混乱或错误的技术问题。所述的独立解决是指提供一种硬件方面的构造方案,该方案可以独立地工作而不需要软件的配合,即可达成近眼显示技术中连接在近眼显示装置上的显示模组在近眼显示装置的某个区域内同时成像有多个应用或文件(的图标的)缩略图,用户能精准与这些缩略图进行交互而不会容易出现混乱或错误的效果。所述的半独立地解决是指提供一种硬件方面的构造方案,该硬件构造方案在与近眼显示软件——例如AR技术中供用户与虚拟信息进行交互的软件——配合工作时,能够达成近眼显示技术中连接在近眼显示装置上的显示模组在近眼显示装置的某个区域内同时成像有多个应用或文件(的图标的)缩略图,用户能精准与这些缩略图进行交互而不会容易出现混乱或错误的效果。In the related art, a display module may simultaneously image multiple thumbnails of applications or files (icons) in a certain area on a near-eye display device. How to enable users to accurately interact with these thumbnails without confusion or errors is a technical problem that needs to be solved urgently. The purpose of the embodiments of the present application is to provide a control method, device, electronic device, near-eye display device, medium, chip and computer program product of a display module, so as to independently or semi-independently solve the problem of a display module connected to a near-eye display device being in a state of ... A technical problem that multiple thumbnails of applications or files (icons) are simultaneously imaged in a certain area of a near-eye display device, and it is easy for users to interact with these thumbnails and cause confusion or errors. The independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can work independently without the cooperation of software, so that the display module connected to the near-eye display device in the near-eye display technology can simultaneously image multiple thumbnails of applications or files (icons) in a certain area of the near-eye display device, and the user can accurately interact with these thumbnails without easily causing confusion or errors. The semi-independent solution refers to providing a hardware construction scheme that can achieve the effect that the display module connected to the near-eye display device in the near-eye display technology simultaneously images multiple thumbnails of applications or files (icons) in a certain area of the near-eye display device when working in conjunction with near-eye display software, such as software for users to interact with virtual information in AR technology, and can accurately interact with these thumbnails without easily causing confusion or errors.

本申请实施例提供一种显示模组的控制方法、装置、电子设备、近眼显示装置、介质、芯片和计算机程序产品,能够独立或半独立地在一定程度上解决如果连接在近眼显示装置上的显示模组在近眼显示装置的某个区域内同时成像有多个应用或文件(的图标的)缩略图,用户与这些缩略图进行交互容易出现混乱或错误的技术问题。The embodiments of the present application provide a control method, device, electronic device, near-eye display device, medium, chip and computer program product for a display module, which can independently or semi-independently solve to a certain extent the technical problem that if a display module connected to the near-eye display device simultaneously images thumbnails of multiple applications or files (icons) in a certain area of the near-eye display device, it is easy for confusion or errors to occur when a user interacts with these thumbnails.

在此基础上,下面对本申请实施例作具体说明。On this basis, the embodiments of the present application are described in detail below.

本申请实施例提供了一种显示模组的控制方法,该显示模组被配置成放置在光学镜片上,以及显示模组被配置成输出图像内容。示例性地,如图1至图48所示,该显示模组可以是图1至图48中示出的显示模组2,该显示模组2可以在镜片12上输出图像内容。执行该显示模组的控制方法的可以是图1至图48中的眼镜1、显示模组2、近眼显示装置10或智能终端4中至少之一,其能够实现控制显示模组2在其所连接的眼镜1(或近眼显示装置10)上所成像的GUI的具体信息。如图41所示,图41是本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法的步骤流程的示意图。该显示模组的控制方法,包括:An embodiment of the present application provides a control method for a display module, wherein the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content. Exemplarily, as shown in Figures 1 to 48, the display module may be the display module 2 shown in Figures 1 to 48, and the display module 2 may output image content on the lens 12. The control method for the display module may be executed by at least one of the glasses 1, the display module 2, the near-eye display device 10 or the smart terminal 4 in Figures 1 to 48, which can realize the control of the specific information of the GUI imaged by the display module 2 on the glasses 1 (or near-eye display device 10) to which it is connected. As shown in Figure 41, Figure 41 is a schematic diagram of the step flow of the control method for the display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. The control method for the display module includes:

S111,在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是主界面的情况下,检测所述显示模组与所述主界面上的各个缩略图之间的相对位置;S111, when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a main interface, detecting the relative position between the display module and each thumbnail on the main interface;

S112,在检测到所述显示模组置于一个缩略图之上的情况下,运行所述缩略图关联的应用,在所述显示模组上放大并显示所述缩略图。S112: When it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail, run an application associated with the thumbnail, and enlarge and display the thumbnail on the display module.

镜片是显示模组当前所连接的眼镜上的镜片。示例性地,可以为上述实施例描述的,此处不再赘述。The lens is the lens on the glasses to which the display module is currently connected. For example, it can be described in the above embodiment, which will not be repeated here.

在本申请实施例中,用于在眼镜的镜片上增强现实显示成像的显示模组可以在其所连接的镜片上做一些运动,而不是将显示模组固定在镜片上。在一些可选的实施方式中,在显示模组中内置有惯性传感器或加速度传感器(或陀螺仪),通过此类传感器可以采集显示模组的瞬时速度和加速度,从而根据采集到的瞬时速度和加速度并结合时间等参数确定显示模组的运动轨迹。In the embodiment of the present application, the display module for augmented reality display imaging on the lens of the glasses can make some movements on the lens to which it is connected, instead of fixing the display module on the lens. In some optional embodiments, an inertial sensor or an acceleration sensor (or a gyroscope) is built into the display module, and the instantaneous speed and acceleration of the display module can be collected by such a sensor, so as to determine the motion trajectory of the display module according to the collected instantaneous speed and acceleration and in combination with parameters such as time.

操作系统通常会为用户提供桌面或主界面功能,用户可以在桌面或主界面上自定义一些文件和应用或程序的图标(的缩略图)。例如,在图40所示的示例中,显示模组2在镜片12上成像出了显示模组2为用户提供的主界面功能,用户可以在该主界面中自行定义一些文件和应用或程序的图标(的缩略图)。The operating system usually provides a desktop or main interface function for the user, and the user can customize some files and application or program icons (thumbnails) on the desktop or main interface. For example, in the example shown in FIG40 , the display module 2 images the main interface function provided by the display module 2 for the user on the lens 12, and the user can define some files and application or program icons (thumbnails) in the main interface.

可选的,预先在显示模组所连接的镜片上选定一固定参考点作为原点,显示模组从该原点开始移动并始终监测显示模组的运动轨迹。该运动轨迹上的任意一点相对于原点的位置即可以表示为显示模组相对于所连接的镜片的相对位置。而主界面上的各个缩略图在镜片上的相对位置是在显示模组成像输出时就已经确定的,即各个缩略图在镜片上的相对位置是已知的。Optionally, a fixed reference point is selected as the origin in advance on the lens connected to the display module, and the display module moves from the origin and the motion trajectory of the display module is always monitored. The position of any point on the motion trajectory relative to the origin can be expressed as the relative position of the display module relative to the connected lens. The relative positions of the thumbnails on the lens on the main interface are determined when the display module is imaged and output, that is, the relative positions of the thumbnails on the lens are known.

示例性地,如图42所示,图42是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。例如镜片12上的P0点为预先选定的原点,显示模组2从原点沿着路径l1移动到了P1点、又沿着路径l2移动到了P2点。可以通过监测到的显示模组2的运动参数(例如速度、加速度等)确定显示模组2在该 运动过程在任意时刻t时的运动轨迹l,在任意时刻t时的运动轨迹的终点相对于原点P0的位置关系即可以表示显示模组2在镜片12上的相对位置。例如,在t1时刻显示模组2移动至了P1点,根据确定出的路径l1可以确定该P1点相对于原点P0的位置关系,即显示模组2在镜片12上的相对位置,示例性地将其表示为表示P1点是位于向量终点的位置处,且该向量起点是P0。For example, as shown in FIG42, FIG42 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. For example, point P0 on the lens 12 is a pre-selected origin, and the display module 2 moves from the origin along the path l1 to point P1, and then moves along the path l2 to point P2. The motion parameters (such as speed, acceleration, etc.) of the display module 2 can be monitored to determine the display module 2 in the application scenario. The motion trajectory l of the motion process at any time t, and the position relationship of the end point of the motion trajectory at any time t relative to the origin P0 can represent the relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 12. For example, at time t1, the display module 2 moves to point P1, and the position relationship of point P1 relative to the origin P0 can be determined according to the determined path l1, that is, the relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 12, which is exemplarily represented as Indicates that point P1 is located at the vector At the end point, the vector The starting point is P0.

同理,而当显示模组2从P1点运动到P2的过程中的运动轨迹为l2,显然P2相对于P1的位置关系可以表示为表示P2点是位于向量终点的位置处,且该向量起点是P1。基于数学上的向量关系可知,因此有显然,上述的向量其实是显示模组2在此过程中的位移。Similarly, when the motion trajectory of the display module 2 from point P1 to point P2 is l2, it is obvious that the position relationship of P2 relative to P1 can be expressed as Indicates that point P2 is located at the vector At the end point, the vector The starting point is P1. Based on the mathematical vector relationship, Therefore, there is Obviously, the above vector actually shows the displacement of module 2 during this process.

需要补充说明的是,在上述示例中,在描述显示模组2的路径和移动轨迹时均是以直线轨迹(路径)进行示例的,显然显示模组2是可以任意移动的,并不限于上述示例的直线轨迹的形式,例如是曲线轨迹。It should be noted that in the above examples, a straight line trajectory (path) is used as an example to describe the path and movement trajectory of the display module 2. Obviously, the display module 2 can be moved arbitrarily and is not limited to the form of the straight line trajectory in the above examples, such as a curved trajectory.

而当显示模组2在镜片12上成像主界面时,主界面上的各个缩略图在镜片12上的相对位置是已知的,基于已知的缩略图在镜片12上的相对位置和监测到的显示模组2在镜片12上的相对位置,可以确定显示模组2和主界面上的各个缩略图之间的相对位置关系。When the display module 2 forms an image of the main interface on the lens 12, the relative positions of the thumbnails on the main interface on the lens 12 are known. Based on the known relative positions of the thumbnails on the lens 12 and the monitored relative position of the display module 2 on the lens 12, the relative position relationship between the display module 2 and the thumbnails on the main interface can be determined.

在检测到显示模组置于一个缩略图之上的情况下,在显示模组上放大并显示缩略图。When it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail, the thumbnail is enlarged and displayed on the display module.

示例性地,在图40中用户将显示模组2移动至缩略图[A]之上,则在显示模组2的显示区21内放大显示该缩略图[A]。Exemplarily, in FIG. 40 , the user moves the display module 2 onto the thumbnail [A], and the thumbnail [A] is displayed in an enlarged manner in the display area 21 of the display module 2 .

在本申请实施例中,在显示模组在所连接的镜片上成像出主界面时,检测显示模组与主界面上的各个缩略图之间的相对位置,在检测到显示模组置于一个缩略图之上的情况下,放大该缩略图。以便用户确认是否需要选中该缩略图。从而在一定程度上实现用户精准地与这些缩略图进行交互而不会出现混乱或错误。In the embodiment of the present application, when the display module images the main interface on the connected lens, the relative position between the display module and each thumbnail on the main interface is detected, and when it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail, the thumbnail is enlarged, so that the user can confirm whether to select the thumbnail. In this way, the user can interact with these thumbnails accurately to a certain extent without confusion or error.

在一些可选的实施方式中,本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法还包括:在检测到所述显示模组置于至少一个缩略图之上的情况下,在所述显示模组上放大并显示所述至少一个缩略图中距离所显示模组最近的缩略图。In some optional embodiments, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application also includes: when it is detected that the display module is placed on at least one thumbnail, enlarging and displaying the thumbnail of the at least one thumbnail closest to the display module on the display module.

示例性的,在图43中,显示模组2移动置于缩略图[D1]、[D2]和[D3]之上,在确定显示模组2与缩略图之间的距离时,以缩略图的中心点与显示模组2的显示区的中心点之间的距离为依据,显然缩略图[D1]距离显示模组2的距离更近,因此则在显示模组2的显示区21内放大显示该缩略图[D1]。Exemplarily, in FIG. 43 , the display module 2 is moved and placed above the thumbnails [D1], [D2], and [D3]. When determining the distance between the display module 2 and the thumbnails, the distance between the center point of the thumbnail and the center point of the display area of the display module 2 is used as a basis. Obviously, the thumbnail [D1] is closer to the display module 2, so the thumbnail [D1] is enlarged and displayed in the display area 21 of the display module 2.

在一些可选的实施方式中,本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法还包括:In some optional implementations, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:

在存在缩略图被放大的情况下,检测所述显示模组上的触摸部的接触;In the case where the thumbnail is enlarged, detecting contact of a touch portion on the display module;

在检测到所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像被放大的缩略图所关联的应用的图形界面;所述第一触摸模式被预置为被放大的缩略图所关联的应用的触发条件When it is detected that the touch portion is touched according to the first touch mode, the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of an application associated with the enlarged thumbnail in a preset imaging area on the lens; the first touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for the application associated with the enlarged thumbnail

第一触摸模式可以是单击、双击、三连击等等。The first touch mode may be a single tap, a double tap, a triple tap, and the like.

当某个缩略图在显示模组上被放大显示,而用户又按照第一触摸模式触摸了显示模组的触摸部,即确定用户欲启动(或进入)被放大显示的缩略图所关联的应用。因此,当某个缩略图在显示模组上被放大显示,而又检测到显示模组的触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸,则前台运行该缩略图所关联的应用,并控制显示模组在镜片上的预设成像区内成像被放大的缩略图所关联的应用的图形界面。当该缩略图关 联的应用已经在后台运行,则将其切换至前台运行。即实现了辅助用户选中主界面中的缩略图,以进入缩略图关联的应用并使用相关的功能。When a certain thumbnail is enlarged and displayed on the display module, and the user touches the touch portion of the display module according to the first touch mode, it is determined that the user wants to start (or enter) the application associated with the enlarged thumbnail. Therefore, when a certain thumbnail is enlarged and displayed on the display module, and it is detected that the touch portion of the display module is touched according to the first touch mode, the application associated with the thumbnail is run in the foreground, and the display module is controlled to image the graphical interface of the application associated with the enlarged thumbnail in the preset imaging area on the lens. When the thumbnail is closed, If the associated application is already running in the background, it will be switched to the foreground. That is, the user is assisted in selecting a thumbnail in the main interface to enter the application associated with the thumbnail and use related functions.

示例性的,在前述的被放大显示的是缩略图[A]示例中,当被放大显示的是缩略图[A]时检测到显示模组2的触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸了,则前台运行缩略图[A]关联的应用,并控制显示模组2在镜片上的预设成像区121内成像被放大的缩略图[A]所关联的应用的图形界面。示例性的,在前述的被放大显示的是缩略图[D1]示例中,则前台运行缩略图[D1]关联的应用,并控制显示模组2在镜片上的预设成像区121内成像被放大的缩略图[D1]所关联的应用的图形界面。Exemplarily, in the aforementioned example where the thumbnail [A] is magnified and displayed, when the thumbnail [A] is magnified and displayed, it is detected that the touch portion of the display module 2 is touched according to the first touch mode, then the application associated with the thumbnail [A] is run in the foreground, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the graphical interface of the application associated with the magnified thumbnail [A] in the preset imaging area 121 on the lens. Exemplarily, in the aforementioned example where the thumbnail [D1] is magnified and displayed, the application associated with the thumbnail [D1] is run in the foreground, and the display module 2 is controlled to image the graphical interface of the application associated with the magnified thumbnail [D1] in the preset imaging area 121 on the lens.

在本申请实施例中,在显示模组在所连接的镜片上成像出主界面时,检测显示模组与主界面上的各个缩略图之间的相对位置,在检测到显示模组置于一个缩略图之上的情况下,放大该缩略图。以便用户确认是否需要选中该缩略图。当用户又按照第一触摸模式触摸了显示模组的触摸部,即确定用户欲启动(或进入)被放大显示的缩略图所关联的应用,并进入该应用以及成像其图形界面。实现了辅助用户选中主界面中的缩略图,以进入缩略图关联的应用并使用相关的功能,从而在一定程度上实现用户精准地与这些缩略图进行交互而不会出现混乱或错误。In an embodiment of the present application, when the display module images the main interface on the connected lens, the relative position between the display module and each thumbnail on the main interface is detected, and when it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail, the thumbnail is enlarged. So that the user can confirm whether the thumbnail needs to be selected. When the user touches the touch portion of the display module according to the first touch mode again, it is determined that the user wants to start (or enter) the application associated with the enlarged thumbnail, and enter the application and image its graphical interface. It is achieved to assist the user in selecting the thumbnail in the main interface, so as to enter the application associated with the thumbnail and use the related functions, so as to enable the user to interact with these thumbnails accurately to a certain extent without confusion or errors.

在一些可选的实施方式中,本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法还包括:In some optional implementations, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:

在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是主界面的情况下,监测所述显示模组的运动状态、检测所述显示模组上的触摸部的接触和获取多媒体数据;When the display module images the main interface in the preset imaging area on the lens, monitoring the movement state of the display module, detecting the contact of the touch part on the display module and acquiring multimedia data;

在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的情况下,或在检测到所述触摸部被按照第二触摸模式触摸的情况下,或在所述多媒体数据中识别到翻页指令的情况下,控制所述显示模组将在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的主界面的当前页切换为成像所述主界面的上一页或下一页;所述显示模组进行轴旋转、所述第二触摸模式和所述翻页指令被预置为触发翻页功能的触发条件。When the display module is monitored to be rotating along its axis, or when it is detected that the touch portion is touched in accordance with a second touch mode, or when a page turning instruction is recognized in the multimedia data, the display module is controlled to switch the current page of the main interface imaged in a preset imaging area on the lens to the previous page or next page of the main interface imaged; the display module is rotating along its axis, the second touch mode and the page turning instruction are preset as trigger conditions for triggering a page turning function.

在显示模组在镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是主界面的情况下,监测显示模组的运动状态、检测显示模组上的触摸部的接触和获取多媒体数据。监测显示模组的运动状态和检测显示模组上的触摸部的说明请参见前文,在此不再赘述。显示模组可以通过自身的摄像头、麦克风等获取多媒体数据,也可以从网络中或与之通信连接的智能终端、近眼显示装置处获取多媒体数据。When the display module images the main interface in the preset imaging area on the lens, the motion state of the display module is monitored, the contact of the touch portion on the display module is detected, and multimedia data is obtained. For the description of monitoring the motion state of the display module and detecting the touch portion on the display module, please refer to the previous text and will not be repeated here. The display module can obtain multimedia data through its own camera, microphone, etc., or it can obtain multimedia data from the network or a smart terminal or near-eye display device that is connected to it for communication.

示例性地,如图44和图45所示,图44和图45是本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的一应用场景的示意图。可以将显示模组2沿图47所示的逆时针方向轴旋转预置为触发主界面向上(或向下)翻页的触发条件,以及将显示模组2沿图45所示的顺时针方向轴旋转预置为触发主界面向下(或向上)翻页的触发条件。在监测到显示模组2进行逆时针(或顺时针)轴旋转的情况下,控制显示模组2对当前在镜片12上成像出的主界面进行更新,即控制显示模组2在镜片12成像出主界面的上一页(或下一页)。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45 are schematic diagrams of an application scenario of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application. The display module 2 can be preset to rotate along the counterclockwise axis shown in FIG. 47 as a trigger condition for triggering the main interface to turn up (or down) pages, and the display module 2 can be preset to rotate along the clockwise axis shown in FIG. 45 as a trigger condition for triggering the main interface to turn down (or up) pages. When the display module 2 is detected to rotate counterclockwise (or clockwise), the display module 2 is controlled to update the main interface currently imaged on the lens 12, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to image the previous page (or next page) of the main interface on the lens 12.

示例性地,第二触摸模式可以包括两种不同的触摸方式,例如单击与双击,或双击与三连击。其中,两种不同的触摸方式中的一种触摸方式是上翻页的触发条件,一种触摸方式是下翻页的触发条件。例如,在检测到单击时,主界面向上翻页,即控制显示模组2在镜片12成像出主界面的上一页;在检测到三连击时,主界面向下翻页,即控制显示模组2在镜片12成像出主界面的下一页。Exemplarily, the second touch mode may include two different touch modes, such as single click and double click, or double click and triple click. Among them, one of the two different touch modes is a trigger condition for turning the page up, and the other touch mode is a trigger condition for turning the page down. For example, when a single click is detected, the main interface turns up, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to image the previous page of the main interface on the lens 12; when a triple click is detected, the main interface turns down, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to image the next page of the main interface on the lens 12.

需要补充说明的是,第一触摸模式和第二触摸模式应该是完全不同的两种触摸模式,以保证从主界面中启动应用和主界面翻页功能的有序进行,而不会出现错误。It should be noted that the first touch mode and the second touch mode should be two completely different touch modes to ensure that the application can be started from the main interface and the page turning function of the main interface can be carried out in an orderly manner without any error.

示例性地,多媒体数据是语音数据或手势数据,在从中识别到翻页的语音指令或目标手势时,主界面进行翻页,即控制显示模组2在镜片12成像出主界面的上一页(或下一页)。Exemplarily, the multimedia data is voice data or gesture data, and when a voice command or target gesture for turning a page is recognized therefrom, the main interface turns a page, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to image the previous page (or next page) of the main interface on the lens 12 .

在一些可选的实施方式中,将检测到显示模组置于缩略图上轴旋转预置为主界面缩放功能的触发条 件。将显示模组顺时针(或逆时针)轴旋转预置为放大显示模组之下的缩略图的触发条件;将显示模组逆时针(或顺时针)轴旋转预置为缩放主界面的触发条件。In some optional implementations, the detection of the display module being placed on the thumbnail and rotating the axis is preset as a trigger bar for the main interface zoom function. Preset the display module clockwise (or counterclockwise) axis rotation as the trigger condition for enlarging the thumbnail under the display module; preset the display module counterclockwise (or clockwise) axis rotation as the trigger condition for zooming the main interface.

示例性性,如图46所示,在图45所示的场景,当显示模组2顺时针轴旋转,放大缩略图[J];如图46所示,在图45所示的场景,当显示模组2逆时针轴旋转,缩放主界面的当前页。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 46 , in the scene shown in FIG. 45 , when the display module 2 rotates clockwise, the thumbnail is enlarged [J]; as shown in FIG. 46 , in the scene shown in FIG. 45 , when the display module 2 rotates counterclockwise, the current page of the main interface is scaled.

在一些可选的实施方式中,本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法还包括:In some optional implementations, the control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application further includes:

在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是应用的图形界面的情况下,监测所述显示模组的运动状态、检测所述显示模组上的触摸部的接触和获取多媒体数据;In the case where the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a graphical interface of an application, monitoring the movement state of the display module, detecting the contact of a touch portion on the display module, and acquiring multimedia data;

在监测到所述运动状态是所述显示模组进行轴旋转的情况下,或在检测所述触摸部被按照目标触摸模式被触摸的情况下,或在所述多媒体数据中识别到目标指令的情况下,控制所述显示模组对在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的所述应用的图形界面的第一目标区域进行跟新;所述第一目标区域是所述应用中的子功能对应的图形区域,所述显示模组轴旋转、所述目标触摸模式和所述目标指令被预置为触发应用的子功能的触发条件。When it is detected that the motion state is an axial rotation of the display module, or when it is detected that the touch portion is touched according to a target touch pattern, or when a target instruction is recognized in the multimedia data, the display module is controlled to update a first target area of the graphical interface of the application imaged in a preset imaging area on the lens; the first target area is a graphic area corresponding to a sub-function in the application, and the axial rotation of the display module, the target touch pattern and the target instruction are preset as trigger conditions for triggering the sub-function of the application.

示例性地,当前成像的是音乐播放器功能的图形界面,则可以将显示模组2沿逆时针方向轴旋转预置为触发切歌至上一首(或下一首)的触发条件,以及将显示模组2沿顺时针方向轴旋转预置为触发切歌至下一首(或上一首)的触发条件。在监测到显示模组2进行逆时针(或顺时针)轴旋转的情况下,对当前正在播放的歌曲进行切歌操作,并控制显示模组2对当前在镜片12上成像出的音乐播放器界面进行更新,即控制显示模组2对在镜片12成像出音乐播放器界面中的歌曲信息更新为上一首(或下一首)歌曲的信息。For example, if the current image is a graphical interface of a music player function, the counterclockwise rotation of the display module 2 can be preset as a trigger condition for triggering a song switch to the previous song (or the next song), and the clockwise rotation of the display module 2 can be preset as a trigger condition for triggering a song switch to the next song (or the previous song). When the counterclockwise (or clockwise) rotation of the display module 2 is detected, the song currently being played is switched, and the display module 2 is controlled to update the music player interface currently imaged on the lens 12, that is, the display module 2 is controlled to update the song information in the music player interface imaged on the lens 12 to the information of the previous song (or the next song).

其中,多媒体数据可以是显示模组上内置的微型摄像头采集的图像/视频数据或微型麦克风采集的语音数据,眼球追踪数据是显示模组上内置的微型摄像头采集的用户的眼部图像数据。Among them, the multimedia data can be image/video data collected by the built-in micro camera on the display module or voice data collected by the micro microphone, and the eye tracking data is the user's eye image data collected by the built-in micro camera on the display module.

目标触摸模式可以是单击、双击、三连击等等。目标指令可以是预设的目标手势、目标语音等。目标眼动模式可以是眼球按照预设的规律活动。类似地,所述目标触摸模式和所述目标指令和前述的显示模组轴旋转相似,它们也可以被预置为应用的子功能的触发条件。在检测到显示模组的触摸部被按照目标触摸模式触摸的情况下,或在从多媒体数据中识别到目标指令的情况下,触发(预置的)触发条件是所述目标触摸模式、所述目标指令和显示模组轴旋转的应用的子功能,从而控制显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的图形界面中区域进行更新。其原理与前述的显示模组轴旋转触发应用的子功能,从而控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的图形界面中区域进行更新的原理相似,在此不再赘述,本领域技术人员可以参照前文即可理解。The target touch mode may be a single click, a double click, a triple click, and the like. The target instruction may be a preset target gesture, a target voice, and the like. The target eye movement pattern may be an eye movement according to a preset rule. Similarly, the target touch mode and the target instruction are similar to the aforementioned display module axis rotation, and they may also be preset as trigger conditions for the sub-functions of the application. In the case where it is detected that the touch portion of the display module is touched according to the target touch mode, or in the case where a target instruction is identified from multimedia data, the trigger (preset) trigger condition is the target touch mode, the target instruction, and the sub-function of the application of the display module axis rotation, thereby controlling the display module to update the area in the graphical interface currently imaged on the lens. The principle is similar to the principle that the aforementioned display module axis rotation triggers the sub-function of the application, thereby controlling the display module to update the area in the graphical interface currently imaged on the lens, and will not be repeated here. Those skilled in the art can refer to the foregoing to understand.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述显示模组的控制方法还包括:In some optional implementations, the control method of the display module further includes:

在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的转动角度不小于预设的第一阈值角度β的情况下,控制所述显示模组对在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的图形界面的进行跟新。When it is detected that the rotation angle of the display module during the axial rotation is not less than a preset first threshold angle β, the display module is controlled to update the graphic interface imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens.

第一阈值角度β可以由本领域技术人员或用户根据实际需求灵活设置。例如,可以是15°、20°、25°或30°等。The first threshold angle β can be flexibly set by those skilled in the art or users according to actual needs, for example, it can be 15°, 20°, 25° or 30°.

从而可以避免显示模组2被轻微带动进行了轴旋转时就开始更新在镜片12上成像出的图形界面。因此,可以在一定程度上减少误触发第三逻辑功能的子功能。This can prevent the display module 2 from updating the graphic interface imaged on the lens 12 when the display module 2 is slightly driven to rotate its axis. Therefore, the sub-functions of the third logic function can be reduced by mistake to a certain extent.

需要说明的是,虽然以上示例中均以单目(即只在眼镜的一个镜片上连接有本申请实施例所提供的显示模组)为例进行了说明,但是,很显然本申请所提供的所有实施方式也可以适用于双目(即在眼镜的两个镜片上均连接有本申请实施例所提供的显示模组)的场景。 It should be noted that although the above examples are all described using monocular (i.e., the display module provided by the embodiment of the present application is connected to only one lens of the glasses) as an example, it is obvious that all the implementation methods provided in the present application can also be applied to binocular (i.e., the display modules provided by the embodiment of the present application are connected to both lenses of the glasses) scenarios.

本申请实施例提供的投影设备的连接方法,执行主体可以为显示模组的控制装置。本申请实施例中以显示模组的控制装置执行显示模组的控制方法为例,说明本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制装置。The connection method of the projection device provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by the control device of the display module. In the embodiment of the present application, the control device of the display module executing the control method of the display module is taken as an example to illustrate the control device of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application.

如图48所示,示出了本申请实施例提供的一种显示模组的控制装置的结构示意图。请参见图48,所述显示模组的控制装置500,所述显示模组被配置成放置在光学镜片上,以及显示模组被配置成输出图像内容,控制装置500包括:As shown in FIG48 , a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device of a display module provided in an embodiment of the present application is shown. Referring to FIG48 , the control device 500 of the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content, and the control device 500 includes:

第一检测模块510,用于在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是主界面的情况下,检测所述显示模组与所述主界面上的各个缩略图之间的相对位置;A first detection module 510 is used to detect the relative position between the display module and each thumbnail on the main interface when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is the main interface;

第一放大模块520,用于在检测到所述显示模组置于一个缩略图之上的情况下,在所述显示模组上放大并显示所述缩略图。The first magnifying module 520 is configured to magnify and display a thumbnail on the display module when it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述装置500还包括:In some optional implementations, the device 500 further includes:

第二放大模块,用于在检测到所述显示模组置于至少一个缩略图之上的情况下,在所述显示模组上放大并显示所述至少一个缩略图中距离所显示模组最近的缩略图。The second magnifying module is used for magnifying and displaying the thumbnail of the at least one thumbnail closest to the display module on the display module when it is detected that the display module is placed on the at least one thumbnail.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述装置500还包括:In some optional implementations, the device 500 further includes:

第二检测模块,用于在存在缩略图被放大的情况下,检测所述显示模组上的触摸部的接触;A second detection module is used to detect contact of a touch portion on the display module when the thumbnail is enlarged;

第一控制模块,用于在检测到所述触摸部被按照第一触摸模式触摸的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像被放大的缩略图所关联的应用的图形界面;所述第一触摸模式被预置为被放大的缩略图所关联的应用的触发条件。The first control module is used to control the display module to image a graphical interface of an application associated with the enlarged thumbnail in a preset imaging area on the lens when detecting that the touch portion is touched according to a first touch mode; the first touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for the application associated with the enlarged thumbnail.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述装置5还包括:In some optional embodiments, the device 5 further comprises:

第一监测模块,用于在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是主界面的情况下,监测所述显示模组的运动状态;A first monitoring module, configured to monitor the motion state of the display module when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a main interface;

第二控制模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的情况下,控制所述显示模组将在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的主界面的当前页切换为成像所述主界面的上一页或下一页;所述显示模组进行轴旋转被预置为触发翻页功能的触发条件。The second control module is used to control the display module to switch the current page of the main interface imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens to the previous page or next page of the main interface imaged when the display module is detected to be rotating along its axis; the rotation of the display module along its axis is preset as a trigger condition for triggering a page turning function.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述装置5还包括:In some optional embodiments, the device 5 further comprises:

第三检测模块,用于在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是主界面的情况下,检测所述显示模组上的触摸部的接触;A third detection module is used to detect contact of a touch portion on the display module when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a main interface;

第三控制模块,用于在检测到所述触摸部被按照第二触摸模式触摸的情况下,控制所述显示模组将在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的主界面的当前页切换为成像所述主界面的上一页或下一页;所述第二触摸模式被预置为触发翻页功能的触发条件。The third control module is used to control the display module to switch the current page of the main interface imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens to the previous page or next page of the main interface when it is detected that the touch portion is touched according to the second touch mode; the second touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for triggering a page turning function.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述装置500还包括:In some optional implementations, the device 500 further includes:

第一获取模块,用于在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是主界面的情况下,获取多媒体数据;A first acquisition module, configured to acquire multimedia data when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a main interface;

第四控制模块,用于在所述多媒体数据中识别到翻页指令的情况下,控制所述显示模组将在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的主界面的当前页切换为成像所述主界面的上一页或下一页;所述翻页指令被预置为触发翻页功能的触发条件。The fourth control module is used to control the display module to switch the current page of the main interface imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens to the previous page or next page of the main interface when a page turning instruction is recognized in the multimedia data; the page turning instruction is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the page turning function.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述装置500还包括:In some optional implementations, the device 500 further includes:

第二监测模块,用于在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是应用的图形界面的情况下,监测所述显示模组的运动状态; A second monitoring module is used to monitor the movement state of the display module when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a graphical interface of an application;

第五控制模块,用于在监测到所述运动状态是所述显示模组进行轴旋转的情况下,控制所述显示模组对在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的所述应用的图形界面的第一目标区域进行跟新;所述第一目标区域是所述应用中的子功能对应的图形区域,所述显示模组轴旋转被预置为触发应用的子功能的触发条件。The fifth control module is used to control the display module to update the first target area of the graphical interface of the application imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens when it is detected that the movement state is the axial rotation of the display module; the first target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the application, and the axial rotation of the display module is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function of the application.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述装置500还包括:In some optional implementations, the device 500 further includes:

第四控制模块,用于在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是应用的图形界面的情况下,检测所述显示模组上的触摸部的接触;A fourth control module, configured to detect contact of a touch portion on the display module when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a graphical interface of an application;

第六控制模块,用于在检测所述触摸部被按照目标触摸模式被触摸的情况下,控制所述显示模组对在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的所述应用的图形界面的第一目标区域进行跟新;所述第一目标区域是所述应用中的子功能对应的图形区域,所述目标触摸模式被预置为触发应用的子功能的触发条件。The sixth control module is used to control the display module to update the first target area of the graphical interface of the application imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens when detecting that the touch portion is touched according to the target touch mode; the first target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the application, and the target touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function of the application.

在一些可选的实施方式中,所述装置500还包括:In some optional implementations, the device 500 further includes:

第二获取模块,用于在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是应用的图形界面的情况下,获取多媒体数据;A second acquisition module, configured to acquire multimedia data when the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a graphical interface of an application;

第七控制模块,用于在所述多媒体数据中识别到目标指令的情况下,控制所述显示模组对在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的所述应用的图形界面的第一目标区域进行跟新;所述第一目标区域是所述应用中的子功能对应的图形区域,所述目标指令被预置为触发应用的子功能的触发条件。The seventh control module is used to control the display module to update the first target area of the graphical interface of the application imaged in the preset imaging area on the lens when a target instruction is recognized in the multimedia data; the first target area is a graphic area corresponding to a sub-function in the application, and the target instruction is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function of the application.

本申请实施例中的显示模组的控制装置5可以是电子设备,也可以是电子设备中的部件,例如集成电路或芯片。该电子设备可以是终端,也可以为除终端之外的其他设备。示例性的,电子设备可以为手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、车载电子设备、移动上网装置(Mobile Internet Device,MID)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、机器人、可穿戴设备、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本或者个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)等,还可以为服务器、网络附属存储器(Network Attached Storage,NAS)、个人计算机(personal computer,PC)、电视机(television,TV)、柜员机或者自助机等,本申请实施例不作具体限定。The control device 5 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application can be an electronic device or a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or a chip. The electronic device can be a terminal or other devices other than a terminal. Exemplarily, the electronic device can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a PDA, a vehicle-mounted electronic device, a mobile Internet device (Mobile Internet Device, MID), an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, a robot, a wearable device, an ultra-mobile personal computer (ultra-mobile personal computer, UMPC), a netbook or a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), etc. It can also be a server, a network attached storage (Network Attached Storage, NAS), a personal computer (personal computer, PC), a television (television, TV), a teller machine or a self-service machine, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not make specific limitations.

本申请实施例中的显示模组的控制装置5可以为具有操作系统的装置。该操作系统可以为安卓(Android)操作系统,可以为ios操作系统,还可以为其他可能的操作系统,本申请实施例不作具体限定。The control device 5 of the display module in the embodiment of the present application may be a device having an operating system. The operating system may be an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or other possible operating systems, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.

本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制装置500能够实现图1至图46的实施例实现的各个过程,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。The control device 500 of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can implement each process implemented in the embodiments of Figures 1 to 46, and will not be described again here to avoid repetition.

在一些可选的实施方式中,如图19所示,本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备130,包括处理器131和存储器132,存储器132上存储有可在所述处理器131上运行的程序或指令,该程序或指令被处理器131执行时实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。In some optional embodiments, as shown in FIG. 19 , the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device 130, including a processor 131 and a memory 132, wherein the memory 132 stores programs or instructions that can be executed on the processor 131, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not described here.

需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的电子设备包括上述所述的移动电子设备和非移动电子设备。It should be noted that the electronic devices in the embodiments of the present application include the mobile electronic devices and non-mobile electronic devices mentioned above.

图20为实现本申请实施例的一种电子设备的硬件结构示意图。FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device implementing an embodiment of the present application.

该电子设备140包括但不限于:射频单元141、网络模块142、音频输出单元143、输入单元144、传感器145、显示单元146、用户输入单元147、接口单元148、存储器149以及处理器1410等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解,电子设备140还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源(比如电池),电源可以通 过电源管理系统与处理器1410逻辑相连,从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。图48中示出的电子设备结构并不构成对电子设备的限定,电子设备可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置,在此不再赘述。The electronic device 140 includes, but is not limited to, a radio frequency unit 141, a network module 142, an audio output unit 143, an input unit 144, a sensor 145, a display unit 146, a user input unit 147, an interface unit 148, a memory 149, and a processor 1410. It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the electronic device 140 may also include a power source (such as a battery) for supplying power to each component. The power source may be connected to a power supply unit 1411 through a power supply unit 142. The power management system is logically connected to the processor 1410, so that the power management system can realize functions such as managing charging, discharging, and power consumption management. The electronic device structure shown in FIG48 does not constitute a limitation on the electronic device. The electronic device may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or arrange components differently, which will not be described in detail here.

其中,处理器1410,用于:The processor 1410 is configured to:

在所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的是主界面的情况下,检测所述显示模组与所述主界面上的各个缩略图之间的相对位置;In the case where the image formed by the display module in the preset imaging area on the lens is a main interface, detecting the relative position between the display module and each thumbnail on the main interface;

在检测到所述显示模组置于一个缩略图之上的情况下,运行所述缩略图关联的应用,并控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上的预设成像区内成像的所述应用的图形界面。When it is detected that the display module is placed on a thumbnail, an application associated with the thumbnail is run, and the display module is controlled to image a graphic interface of the application in a preset imaging area on the lens.

应理解的是,本申请实施例中,输入单元144可以包括图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU)1441和麦克风1442,图形处理器1441对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。显示单元146可包括显示面板1461,可以采用液晶显示器、有机发光二极管等形式来配置显示面板1461。用户输入单元147包括触控面板1471以及其他输入设备1472中的至少一种。触控面板1471,也称为触摸屏。触控面板1471可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。其他输入设备1472可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the input unit 144 may include a graphics processing unit (GPU) 1441 and a microphone 1442, and the graphics processor 1441 processes the image data of a static picture or video obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode. The display unit 146 may include a display panel 1461, and the display panel 1461 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, an organic light emitting diode, etc. The user input unit 147 includes a touch panel 1471 and at least one of other input devices 1472. The touch panel 1471 is also called a touch screen. The touch panel 1471 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller. Other input devices 1472 may include, but are not limited to, a physical keyboard, function keys (such as a volume control key, a switch key, etc.), a trackball, a mouse, and a joystick, which will not be repeated here.

存储器149可用于存储软件程序以及各种数据。存储器149可主要包括存储程序或指令的第一存储区和存储数据的第二存储区,其中,第一存储区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序或指令(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等。此外,存储器149可以包括易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或者,存储器149可以包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDRSDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DRRAM)。本申请实施例中的存储器149包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。The memory 149 can be used to store software programs and various data. The memory 149 may mainly include a first storage area for storing programs or instructions and a second storage area for storing data, wherein the first storage area may store an operating system, an application program or instructions required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc. In addition, the memory 149 may include a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or the memory 149 may include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory. The volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), a static random access memory (SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (DRAM), a synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), a double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDRSDRAM), an enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (ESDRAM), a synchronous link dynamic random access memory (SLDRAM) and a direct memory bus random access memory (DRRAM). The memory 149 in the embodiment of the present application includes but is not limited to these and any other suitable types of memory.

处理器1410可包括一个或多个处理单元;可选的,处理器1410集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器,其中,应用处理器主要处理涉及操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等的操作,调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信信号,如基带处理器。可以理解的是,上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器1410中。The processor 1410 may include one or more processing units; optionally, the processor 1410 integrates an application processor and a modem processor, wherein the application processor mainly processes operations related to an operating system, a user interface, and application programs, and the modem processor mainly processes wireless communication signals, such as a baseband processor. It is understandable that the modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 1410.

本申请实施例提供的显示模组的控制方法,执行主体可以为近眼显示装置。本申请实施例中以近眼显示装置执行显示模组的控制方法为例,说明本申请实施例提供的近眼显示装置。The control method of the display module provided in the embodiment of the present application can be executed by a near-eye display device. In the embodiment of the present application, the near-eye display device executing the control method of the display module is taken as an example to illustrate the near-eye display device provided in the embodiment of the present application.

在一些可选的实施方式中,如图21所示,本申请实施例还提供一种近眼显示装置150,包括处理器151和存储器152,存储器152上存储有可在所述处理器151上运行的程序或指令,该程序或指令被处理器131执行时实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。In some optional embodiments, as shown in FIG. 21 , the embodiment of the present application further provides a near-eye display device 150, including a processor 151 and a memory 152, wherein the memory 152 stores programs or instructions that can be executed on the processor 151, and when the program or instructions are executed by the processor 131, the various steps of the control method embodiment of the above-mentioned display module are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, they are not repeated here.

上述任一产品实施例均能通过其自身的处理器运行实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个过程,均能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,不再一一赘述。 Any of the above-mentioned product embodiments can implement the various processes of the above-mentioned display module control method embodiment through its own processor operation, and can achieve the same technical effect. In order to avoid repetition, they will not be described one by one.

上述任一产品实施例均能通过其自身的处理器运行实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个过程,均能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,不再一一赘述。Any of the above-mentioned product embodiments can implement the various processes of the above-mentioned display module control method embodiment through its own processor operation, and can achieve the same technical effect. In order to avoid repetition, they will not be described one by one.

本申请实施例还提供一种可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储有程序或指令,该程序或指令被处理器执行时实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。其中,所述处理器为上述实施例中所述的电子设备或电子系统中的处理器。所述可读存储介质,包括计算机可读存储介质,如计算机只读存储器ROM、随机存取存储器RAM、磁碟或者光盘等。The embodiment of the present application also provides a readable storage medium, on which a program or instruction is stored. When the program or instruction is executed by a processor, each process of the control method embodiment of the display module is implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, it is not repeated here. Among them, the processor is the processor in the electronic device or electronic system described in the above embodiment. The readable storage medium includes a computer-readable storage medium, such as a computer read-only memory ROM, a random access memory RAM, a disk or an optical disk, etc.

本申请实施例另提供了一种芯片,所述芯片包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合,所述处理器用于运行程序或指令,实现上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, which includes a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is coupled to the processor, and the processor is used to run programs or instructions to implement the various processes of the above-mentioned display module control method embodiment, and can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, it will not be repeated here.

应理解,本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为系统级芯片、系统芯片、芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。It should be understood that the chip mentioned in the embodiments of the present application can also be called a system-level chip, a system chip, a chip system or a system-on-chip chip, etc.

本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,该程序产品被存储在存储介质中,该程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现如上述显示模组的控制方法实施例的各个过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。An embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which is stored in a storage medium. The program product is executed by at least one processor to implement the various processes of the control method embodiment of the display module as described above, and can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, it will not be repeated here.

在本申请实施例所提供的实施方式中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施方式仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the implementation methods provided in the embodiments of the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device implementation methods described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.

另外,在本申请实施例各个实施方式中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each implementation of the embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.

所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请实施例各个实施方式所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each implementation method of the embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.

近眼显示装置也称头戴显示或可穿戴显示,应用于光学镜片上,在一些情形中,在技术层面,增强现实AR(Augmented Reality)、虚拟现实VR(Virtual Reality)、混合现实MR(Mixed Reality)以及拓展现实XR(Extended Reality),都可以称为近眼显示。本申请示例中的光学镜片可以是护目镜、智能眼镜、近视眼镜、远视眼镜、运动眼镜或者其它近眼或头戴式的光学镜片等等,用户的光学镜片可朝向人眼镜。近眼显示装置具有光机,光机可以包括微显示器,例如Micro-LED(Micro Light-Emitting Diode,微发光半导体)、uLED(微型发光二极管)、Micro-oled(Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode,微有机发光二极管)、LCoS(Liquid Crystal On Silicon,硅基液晶)、LCD(Liquid Crystal Display,液晶显示)、DMD(Digital Micromirror Device,数字微镜元件)/DLP(Digital Light Processing,数字光处理)或LBS(Laser Beam Scanning,激光束扫描)等、或这些技术的任意组合,可以理解,光机还可以包括微光学 模组等,微光学模组设置在微显示器前方,显示器的光线经过微光学模组后射出。本申请其他各实施例中关于微显示器的描述可参考此相关说明。Near-eye display devices are also called head-mounted displays or wearable displays, and are applied to optical lenses. In some cases, at the technical level, augmented reality AR (Augmented Reality), virtual reality VR (Virtual Reality), mixed reality MR (Mixed Reality) and extended reality XR (Extended Reality) can all be called near-eye displays. The optical lenses in the examples of this application can be goggles, smart glasses, myopia glasses, hyperopia glasses, sports glasses or other near-eye or head-mounted optical lenses, etc. The user's optical lenses can be facing the human eye. The near-eye display device has an optical machine, which may include a micro display, such as Micro-LED (Micro Light-Emitting Diode), uLED (micro light-emitting diode), Micro-oled (Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode), LCoS (Liquid Crystal On Silicon), LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), DMD (Digital Micromirror Device)/DLP (Digital Light Processing) or LBS (Laser Beam Scanning), etc., or any combination of these technologies. It can be understood that the optical machine may also include micro-optics Modules, etc., the micro-optical module is arranged in front of the micro-display, and the light of the display is emitted after passing through the micro-optical module. The description of the micro-display in other embodiments of the present application can refer to this related description.

近眼显示装置还可以包括电路板、用于向光机和电路板供电的电池以及用于实现各部件与电池之间电性连接的电性元件。以AR眼镜为例,在一般情形下,电路板以及电池等电性元件安装于AR眼镜的镜腿上,光机安装于光学镜片上,在光机的外部设置有用于布线的通道,以便于向光机供电。由于在一些情形下,AR眼镜的镜腿具有相对镜框转动的需求,使得光机与电池等电性元件之间的连接受到镜腿相对运动的影响,导致光机与电池等电性元件的布线容易出现相对错位和短路;随着镜腿的相对运动,光机和电池等电性元件的布线部位还容易产生进水等问题,影响AR眼镜的使用。在一般情形下,近眼显示装置通常为头戴显示或其他可穿戴显示,设置在人眼视觉的前方,结构相对复杂,对于产品的固定难度提高,影响产品的生产效率。The near-eye display device may also include a circuit board, a battery for supplying power to the optical engine and the circuit board, and an electrical component for realizing electrical connection between each component and the battery. Taking AR glasses as an example, in general, the circuit board and electrical components such as batteries are installed on the temples of the AR glasses, the optical engine is installed on the optical lens, and a channel for wiring is provided on the outside of the optical engine to facilitate power supply to the optical engine. Because in some cases, the temples of AR glasses have the need to rotate relative to the frame, the connection between the optical engine and electrical components such as batteries is affected by the relative movement of the temples, resulting in relative misalignment and short circuit in the wiring of the optical engine and electrical components such as batteries; with the relative movement of the temples, the wiring parts of the optical engine and electrical components such as batteries are also prone to water ingress and other problems, affecting the use of AR glasses. In general, the near-eye display device is usually a head-mounted display or other wearable display, which is set in front of the human eye's vision. The structure is relatively complex, which increases the difficulty of fixing the product and affects the production efficiency of the product.

本申请针对上述问题,提出一种用于光学镜片的近眼显示模组,近眼显示模组可以直接安装于镜框或者光学镜片上。近眼显示模组包括用于连接光学镜片的第一连接部以及用于安装光机的安装座;第一连接部上开设有用于安装电器件的第一电器仓,安装座形成有用于安装光机的安装槽,安装座位于第一连接部沿第一方向上的一侧,第一方向与安装槽的轴向呈夹角设置。本申请示例中的第一连接部内设置第一电器仓,可以便于将电池等电器元件安装于第一连接部上,减少在光学镜片外部再单独设置用于连接电池和光机的布线结构,进而可以减少由于镜腿相对镜框运动导致的电性连接部位产生的进水等问题;由于安装槽的轴向与第一方向呈夹角设置,使得安装座和第一电器仓沿第一方向设置,可以便于减小近眼显示装置的厚度,在安装到光学镜片上之后,可以减少对人眼的视觉压迫感,提升产品的舒适性。In view of the above problems, the present application proposes a near-eye display module for optical lenses, which can be directly installed on a frame or an optical lens. The near-eye display module includes a first connecting portion for connecting the optical lens and a mounting seat for installing an optical machine; a first electrical compartment for installing electrical components is provided on the first connecting portion, and a mounting seat is formed with a mounting groove for installing the optical machine, and the mounting seat is located on one side of the first connecting portion along the first direction, and the first direction is arranged at an angle with the axial direction of the mounting groove. In the example of the present application, a first electrical compartment is arranged in the first connecting portion, which can facilitate the installation of electrical components such as batteries on the first connecting portion, reduce the need for a wiring structure for connecting batteries and optical machines to be separately arranged outside the optical lens, and further reduce the problem of water ingress and other problems caused by the relative movement of the temples to the frame; since the axial direction of the mounting groove is arranged at an angle with the first direction, the mounting seat and the first electrical compartment are arranged along the first direction, which can facilitate the reduction of the thickness of the near-eye display device, and after being installed on the optical lens, the visual pressure on the human eye can be reduced, and the comfort of the product can be improved.

请参阅图49,为方便描述,以下以本申请示例中的近眼显示模组2用于眼镜为例进行阐述。眼镜可以包括镜框11、光学镜片12和镜腿13,光学镜片12可以安装于镜框11上,镜腿与镜框11相连接。近眼显示模组2可以安装于镜框11和/或光学镜片12,可以减少在镜腿上设置过大的电池等供电模块,或减少在镜腿和光学镜片12之间设置用于连接电池等供电模块和近眼显示模组2的布线部位,可以降低由于镜腿和镜片的相对运动而导致的布线部位进水、断路、短路等问题,显示组件1能够与现有的例如近视、远视、护目、运动眼镜等普通眼镜结合即可实现增强显示的功能,使得普通眼镜具备智能眼镜的增强现实的功能。Please refer to Figure 49. For the convenience of description, the following is an example of the near-eye display module 2 used for glasses in the example of the present application. The glasses may include a frame 11, an optical lens 12 and a temple 13. The optical lens 12 may be mounted on the frame 11, and the temple is connected to the frame 11. The near-eye display module 2 may be mounted on the frame 11 and/or the optical lens 12, which may reduce the need for overly large power supply modules such as batteries on the temples, or reduce the need for wiring parts between the temples and the optical lens 12 for connecting power supply modules such as batteries and the near-eye display module 2. The problems of water ingress, disconnection, short circuit, etc. in the wiring parts caused by the relative movement of the temples and the lenses may be reduced. The display component 1 may be combined with existing ordinary glasses such as myopia, hyperopia, eye protection, sports glasses, etc. to realize the function of enhanced display, so that ordinary glasses have the function of augmented reality of smart glasses.

请参阅图50、图51和图52,本申请公开了一种近眼显示模组2的示例。以下分别进行详细说明。Please refer to Figures 50, 51 and 52, the present application discloses an example of a near-eye display module 2. Each of them will be described in detail below.

近眼显示模组2包括第一连接部101和安装座105,第一连接部101用于连接于光学镜片12和/或镜框,第一连接部101开设有用于安装电器件的第一电器仓1110;安装座105连接于第一连接部101沿第一方向2a上的一侧,安装座105形成有用于安装光机400的安装槽1401,第一方向2a与安装槽1401的轴向呈夹角设置。The near-eye display module 2 includes a first connecting portion 101 and a mounting seat 105. The first connecting portion 101 is used to connect to the optical lens 12 and/or the frame. The first connecting portion 101 is provided with a first electrical compartment 1110 for installing electrical components. The mounting seat 105 is connected to one side of the first connecting portion 101 along the first direction 2a. The mounting seat 105 is formed with a mounting groove 1401 for installing the optical machine 400. The first direction 2a is set at an angle to the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401.

请结合参阅图51和图52,第一连接部101可以作为近眼显示模组2的主体结构,用于连接于光学镜片12上。本示例中第一连接部101上可以设置固定面1203,固定面1203可以采用塑料等材质,固定面1203用于与光学镜片12相连接,或者与镜框相连接。本示例中的第一连接部101可以直接与光学镜片12相连接,也可以通过例如磁吸、挂扣等其他中间连接件与光学镜片12相连接。本示例中的第一连接部101可以固定连接于光学镜片12上,例如,第一连接部101可以粘接在光学镜片12上,以使第一连接部101在光学镜片12上保持相对固定位置。本示例中的第一连接部101可以可移动地安装于光学镜片12上,例如,第一连接部101可以与光学镜片12可相对滑动连接或可相对转动地连接。本示例中的第一连接部101也可以可拆卸地安装于光学镜片12上,例如,第一连接部101可以卡接或吸附于光 学镜片12上。固定面1203还可设有缓冲层,可以降低对光学镜片12的磨损。Please refer to Figures 51 and 52 in combination. The first connecting portion 101 can be used as the main structure of the near-eye display module 2, and is used to connect to the optical lens 12. In this example, a fixing surface 1203 can be set on the first connecting portion 101, and the fixing surface 1203 can be made of plastic or other materials. The fixing surface 1203 is used to connect to the optical lens 12, or to connect to the frame. The first connecting portion 101 in this example can be directly connected to the optical lens 12, or it can be connected to the optical lens 12 through other intermediate connecting parts such as magnetic attraction and hanging buckles. The first connecting portion 101 in this example can be fixedly connected to the optical lens 12, for example, the first connecting portion 101 can be bonded to the optical lens 12 so that the first connecting portion 101 maintains a relatively fixed position on the optical lens 12. The first connecting portion 101 in this example can be movably mounted on the optical lens 12, for example, the first connecting portion 101 can be relatively slidably connected to the optical lens 12 or relatively rotatably connected. The first connecting portion 101 in this example can also be detachably mounted on the optical lens 12. For example, the first connecting portion 101 can be snapped or adsorbed on the optical lens 12. The fixing surface 1203 may also be provided with a buffer layer to reduce the wear on the optical lens 12.

请结合参阅图51、图5和图54,第一连接部101至少局部为中空结构,第一电器仓1110为开设于第一连接部101内的中空腔体。第一电器仓1110用于安装电器件。本申请示例中的电器件包括但不限于电池8、电路板等,为方便描述,以下以第一电器仓1110内安装有电池8进行阐述。Please refer to FIG. 51, FIG. 5 and FIG. 54, the first connection part 101 is at least partially a hollow structure, and the first electrical compartment 1110 is a hollow cavity opened in the first connection part 101. The first electrical compartment 1110 is used to install electrical components. The electrical components in the example of this application include but are not limited to batteries 8, circuit boards, etc. For the convenience of description, the following description is based on the assumption that the first electrical compartment 1110 is installed with batteries 8.

安装座105用于安装光机400,安装座105上开设有安装槽1401,安装槽1401可以为贯穿安装座105的贯通槽或开设于安装座105上的沉槽。The mounting seat 105 is used to mount the optical machine 400 . A mounting groove 1401 is formed on the mounting seat 105 . The mounting groove 1401 may be a through groove penetrating the mounting seat 105 or a recessed groove formed on the mounting seat 105 .

安装槽1401具有轴向,光机400具有出光面和垂直于出光面的光轴。在一些示例中,光机400的出光面位于安装槽1401的轴向上的一侧,本示例中的光机400的出光面可以与安装槽1401的轴线方向相垂直,对应光机400的光轴可以与安装槽1401的轴线相平行;或者,光机400出光面与安装槽1401的轴线不垂直,并且光机400的光轴与第一方向呈夹角设置,光机400的光轴可以与第一方向不平行也不重合。如图50所示2b方向可以为安装槽1401的轴向,光机400光轴可以为沿2b方向设置。本示例中的安装座105可以与第一连接部101呈分体设置并相互连接,安装座105也可以与第一连接部101一体设置。The mounting groove 1401 has an axial direction, and the optical machine 400 has a light emitting surface and an optical axis perpendicular to the light emitting surface. In some examples, the light emitting surface of the optical machine 400 is located on one side of the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401. The light emitting surface of the optical machine 400 in this example can be perpendicular to the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401, and the corresponding optical axis of the optical machine 400 can be parallel to the axis of the mounting groove 1401; or, the light emitting surface of the optical machine 400 is not perpendicular to the axis of the mounting groove 1401, and the optical axis of the optical machine 400 is set at an angle to the first direction, and the optical axis of the optical machine 400 can be neither parallel nor coincident with the first direction. As shown in Figure 50, the 2b direction can be the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401, and the optical axis of the optical machine 400 can be set along the 2b direction. The mounting seat 105 in this example can be separately set with the first connecting portion 101 and connected to each other, and the mounting seat 105 can also be set integrally with the first connecting portion 101.

安装座105连接于第一连接部101沿第一方向2a上的一侧,以使安装座105和第一连接部101沿第一方向2a排布。第一方向2a与安装槽1401的轴向呈夹角设置,是指第一方向2a与安装槽1401的轴向不平行也不重合。如图50和图54中所示,安装槽1401的轴向可以与第一方向2a相互垂直,本示例中,由于第一连接部101内设置有第一电器仓1110,安装座105设置有安装槽1401,当安装座105与第一连接部101沿第一方向2a排布时,第一电器仓1110和安装槽1401可以大体沿第一方向2a排布,以使第一电器仓1110和安装槽1401可以沿第一方向2a上相互错开设置。可以理解的是,安装槽1401的轴向也可以与第一方向2a不垂直,当将安装槽1401和第一电器仓1110沿第一方向2a上排布时,也可以一定程度减小近眼显示模组2在安装槽1401的轴线方向上的厚度。在将光机400安装于安装槽1401、电池8安装于第一电器仓1110之后,由于电池8和光机400可以大体沿第一方向2a分布,可以将安装槽1401的轴向上的一侧作为光机400的出光侧,当近眼显示模组2安装于光学镜片12的外侧、光线穿过光学镜片12进入人眼时,近眼显示模组2在光学镜片12上的整体厚度相对较小,可以在不增大AR设备的整体厚度的前提下向光机400供电;当近眼显示模组2安装于光学镜片12的内侧,光线不穿过镜片,光线可直接进入人眼,由于可以不增加近眼显示模组2的整体厚度,可以减少近眼显示模组2对人眼球的侵入感,进而降低近眼显示模组2给用户带来的压迫感,提升产品的舒适性。本申请示例中的第一电器仓1110和安装槽1401沿第一方向2a设置,使得第一电器仓1110内的电池8等电器结构与安装槽1401内的光机400可以在近眼显示模组2上保持相对平衡,以平衡近眼显示模组2的配重,有助于提升近眼显示模组2在光学镜片12上的稳定性。The mounting seat 105 is connected to one side of the first connection part 101 along the first direction 2a, so that the mounting seat 105 and the first connection part 101 are arranged along the first direction 2a. The first direction 2a is set at an angle with the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401, which means that the first direction 2a is not parallel to the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401 and does not overlap. As shown in Figures 50 and 54, the axial direction of the mounting groove 1401 can be perpendicular to the first direction 2a. In this example, since the first connection part 101 is provided with the first electrical appliance compartment 1110, the mounting seat 105 is provided with the mounting groove 1401. When the mounting seat 105 and the first connection part 101 are arranged along the first direction 2a, the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 and the mounting groove 1401 can be arranged substantially along the first direction 2a, so that the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 and the mounting groove 1401 can be staggered with each other along the first direction 2a. It is understandable that the axial direction of the installation groove 1401 may not be perpendicular to the first direction 2a. When the installation groove 1401 and the first electrical compartment 1110 are arranged along the first direction 2a, the thickness of the near-eye display module 2 in the axial direction of the installation groove 1401 can also be reduced to a certain extent. After the optical engine 400 is installed in the installation groove 1401 and the battery 8 is installed in the first electrical compartment 1110, since the battery 8 and the optical engine 400 can be roughly distributed along the first direction 2a, the axial side of the installation groove 1401 can be used as the light output side of the optical engine 400. When the near-eye display module 2 is installed on the outer side of the optical lens 12 and the light passes through the optical lens 12 to enter the human eye, the overall thickness of the near-eye display module 2 on the optical lens 12 is relatively small, and the optical engine 400 can be powered without increasing the overall thickness of the AR device; when the near-eye display module 2 is installed on the inner side of the optical lens 12, the light does not pass through the lens, and the light can directly enter the human eye. Since the overall thickness of the near-eye display module 2 does not need to be increased, the intrusion of the near-eye display module 2 on the human eyeball can be reduced, thereby reducing the sense of oppression brought to the user by the near-eye display module 2, thereby improving the comfort of the product. In the example of the present application, the first electrical compartment 1110 and the mounting groove 1401 are arranged along the first direction 2a, so that the electrical structures such as the battery 8 in the first electrical compartment 1110 and the optical machine 400 in the mounting groove 1401 can maintain relative balance on the near-eye display module 2 to balance the weight of the near-eye display module 2, which helps to improve the stability of the near-eye display module 2 on the optical lens 12.

本示例中,由于可以直接将电池8或相关电路板安装于第一电器仓3内,可以减少AR设备的镜腿13和镜框11的连接处额外设置用于连接光机400和电池8的电性元件,一方面,可以减少由于镜腿和镜框11的相对运动而导致的电性元件部位进水或磨损的问题;另一方面可以降低镜腿和镜框11的连接部位的复杂性,简化AR设备的结构,在一些应用场景中,近眼显示模组2可不用连接镜腿的电性元件而独立工作(例如显示图像内容等),极大地提升显示组件1的便携性和移动性,可与其它例如近远视、护目、头盔等传统头戴式设备兼容,应用场景更加丰富多样。In this example, since the battery 8 or the related circuit board can be directly installed in the first electrical compartment 3, the additional electrical components for connecting the optical machine 400 and the battery 8 at the connection between the temple 13 and the frame 11 of the AR device can be reduced. On the one hand, the problem of water ingress or wear of the electrical components caused by the relative movement of the temple and the frame 11 can be reduced; on the other hand, the complexity of the connection between the temple and the frame 11 can be reduced, and the structure of the AR device can be simplified. In some application scenarios, the near-eye display module 2 can work independently (for example, displaying image content, etc.) without being connected to the electrical components of the temple, which greatly improves the portability and mobility of the display component 1, and is compatible with other traditional head-mounted devices such as myopia and hyperopia, eye protection, and helmets, and the application scenarios are more diverse.

本示例中可以在第一连接部101上开设直接连通第一电器仓1110内和安装槽1401的第一过线孔15,以通过电性元件从近眼显示模组2内部连接电池8和光机400;通过将电池8安装在第一连接部101内 部,可以减少在第一连接部101或安装座105外部开设布线结构,在对近眼显示模组2进行封装时,可以简化封装步骤,提升产品的生产效率。本示例中也可以在第一连接部101上开设连通第一电器仓1110和第一连接部101外壁的第一过线孔15,通过将穿设第一过线孔15的电性结构连接第一电器仓1110内的电池8和光机400。In this example, a first wire hole 15 directly connected to the first electrical compartment 1110 and the mounting groove 1401 can be opened on the first connecting portion 101 to connect the battery 8 and the optical machine 400 from the inside of the near-eye display module 2 through an electrical component; by installing the battery 8 in the first connecting portion 101 The wiring structure can be reduced by installing the first connection part 101 or the mounting seat 105 outside, and the packaging steps can be simplified when the near-eye display module 2 is packaged, thereby improving the production efficiency of the product. In this example, a first wire hole 15 connecting the first electrical compartment 1110 and the outer wall of the first connection part 101 can also be opened on the first connection part 101, and the battery 8 and the optical machine 400 in the first electrical compartment 1110 are connected by the electrical structure passing through the first wire hole 15.

本申请示例中的光机400可以包括光学模组42和微显示器41,光学模组42和微显示器41可以相互连接固定,也可以分别将光学模组42和微显示器41与安装座105相连接固定。The optical machine 400 in the example of the present application may include an optical module 42 and a micro display 41 . The optical module 42 and the micro display 41 may be connected and fixed to each other, or the optical module 42 and the micro display 41 may be connected and fixed to the mounting seat 105 separately.

请结合参阅图50、图51以及图55至图58,在一些示例中,第一连接部101包括第一盖体102和第二盖体103;第一盖体102开设有第一电器仓1110;第二盖体103盖合于第一盖体102,第二盖体103用于封闭第一电器仓1110;第一盖体102和第二盖体103中的至少一者与安装座105相连接。Please refer to Figures 50, 51 and 55 to 58. In some examples, the first connecting portion 101 includes a first cover body 102 and a second cover body 103; the first cover body 102 is provided with a first electrical appliance compartment 1110; the second cover body 103 covers the first cover body 102, and the second cover body 103 is used to close the first electrical appliance compartment 1110; at least one of the first cover body 102 and the second cover body 103 is connected to the mounting base 105.

第一电器仓1110可以为开设于第一盖体102上的凹槽,第一电器仓1110可以具有敞口,电池8可以通过敞口放入第一电器仓1110内。The first electrical appliance compartment 1110 may be a groove opened on the first cover body 102 . The first electrical appliance compartment 1110 may have an opening, and the battery 8 may be placed in the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 through the opening.

第二盖体103连接于第一盖体102,并可以用于将第一电器仓1110的敞口封闭。The second cover 103 is connected to the first cover 102 and can be used to close the opening of the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 .

请参阅图50、图51以及图55和图56,本示例中的第一电器仓1110的敞口可以开设于第一盖体102沿第二方向2b上的一侧,第二盖体103可以沿第二方向2b盖合于第一盖体102上,所述第二方向2b可以与安装槽1401的轴向相平行。本示例中的第一盖体102背向第二盖体103的一侧端面可以作为第一连接部101的固定面1203,或者,第二盖体103背向第一盖体102的一侧端面可以作为第一连接部101的固定面1203。Please refer to Figures 50, 51, 55 and 56. In this example, the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110 can be opened on one side of the first cover body 102 along the second direction 2b, and the second cover body 103 can cover the first cover body 102 along the second direction 2b. The second direction 2b can be parallel to the axial direction of the installation groove 1401. In this example, the end surface of the first cover body 102 facing away from the second cover body 103 can be used as the fixing surface 1203 of the first connecting part 101, or the end surface of the second cover body 103 facing away from the first cover body 102 can be used as the fixing surface 1203 of the first connecting part 101.

请参阅图57和图58,本示例中的第一电器仓1110的敞口可以开设于第一盖体102沿第一方向2a上的一侧,并且第一电器仓1110的敞口可以背离安装座设置,第二盖体103可以沿第一方向2a盖合于第一连接部101上。Please refer to Figures 57 and 58. In this example, the opening of the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 can be opened on one side of the first cover body 102 along the first direction 2a, and the opening of the first electrical appliance compartment 1110 can be set away from the mounting seat, and the second cover body 103 can cover the first connecting part 101 along the first direction 2a.

本示例中通过采用第一盖体102和第二盖体组合形成第一连接部101,可以方便在第一盖体102上开设第一电器仓1110,在对第一盖体102进行加工时,可以方便进行成型和开模。本示例中可以将第一盖体102和第二盖体103相互固定连接,例如,可以将第一盖体102和第二盖体103相互粘接固定。本示例中也可以将第一盖体102和第二盖体103可拆卸连接,例如,可以将第一盖体102和第二盖体103相互卡接或螺纹连接。在一些示例中,在第一盖体102和第二盖体103的其中一者凸设有定位柱1204,另一者开设有定位孔117,定位柱1204可以嵌置于定位孔117内,以便于第一盖体102和第二盖体103的相互定位和安装。In this example, by using the first cover 102 and the second cover to form the first connecting portion 101, it is convenient to open the first electrical compartment 1110 on the first cover 102, and when the first cover 102 is processed, it is convenient to perform molding and mold opening. In this example, the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 can be fixedly connected to each other, for example, the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 can be bonded and fixed to each other. In this example, the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 can also be detachably connected, for example, the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 can be mutually clamped or threaded. In some examples, one of the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 is convexly provided with a positioning column 1204, and the other is provided with a positioning hole 117, and the positioning column 1204 can be embedded in the positioning hole 117, so as to facilitate the mutual positioning and installation of the first cover 102 and the second cover 103.

本示例中的第一盖体102和第二盖体103中的至少一者与安装座105相连接,是指安装座105与第一盖体102或第二盖体103中的一者相连接,或者,安装座105同时连接于第一盖体102和第二盖体103。以本示例中的安装座105与第一连接部101相互卡接为例,安装座105可以与第一盖体102或第二盖体103中的一者相互卡接,安装座105也可以同时卡接于第一盖体102和第二盖体103上。In this example, at least one of the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 is connected to the mounting seat 105, which means that the mounting seat 105 is connected to one of the first cover 102 or the second cover 103, or the mounting seat 105 is simultaneously connected to the first cover 102 and the second cover 103. Taking the mounting seat 105 and the first connecting portion 101 in this example as an example, the mounting seat 105 can be mutually engaged with one of the first cover 102 or the second cover 103, or the mounting seat 105 can be simultaneously engaged with the first cover 102 and the second cover 103.

请参阅图52、图54和图55,在一些示例中,第一盖体102上开设有连通安装槽1401和第一电器仓1110的第一布线槽113,第一布线槽113用于供光机400的导电模块穿过并连接于电器件。Please refer to Figures 52, 54 and 55. In some examples, the first cover body 102 is provided with a first wiring groove 113 connecting the installation groove 1401 and the first electrical compartment 1110. The first wiring groove 113 is used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through and connect to the electrical device.

为方便阐述,本示例中以电器件为电池8为例,导电模块可以与电池8的对应电极相连接。第一布线槽113连通安装槽1401和第一电器仓1110,以使光机400的导电模块可以经由第一布线槽113进入第一电器仓1110内。本申请示例中的光机400的导电模块可以为导线、金属片、柔性电路板或镀铜层等。通过在第一盖体102上设置用于布设导电模块的第一布线槽113,可以便于将导电模块设置在第一连接部101内部,光机400的导电模块不暴露于第一连接部101外侧,以减少布线部位进水短路的问题。 本示例中的布线槽可以为贯通第一盖体102靠近安装座105一端的通槽。本示例中的第一布线槽113可以用于供光机400的导电模块穿过并连接于电池8的正极,第一布线槽113也可以用于供光机400的导电模块穿过并连接于电池8的负极,第一布线槽113也可以用于供光机400的导电模块穿过并分别连接电池8的正极和负极。在一些示例中,第二盖体103沿上述示例中所述的第二方向2b盖合于第一盖体102上,第一布线槽113可以具有朝向第二盖体103的敞口,第二盖体103可以盖合于第一布线槽113的敞口上,以使第一布线槽113的一端连通安装槽1401,另一端连通第一电器仓1110。For the convenience of explanation, in this example, the electrical device is taken as a battery 8, and the conductive module can be connected to the corresponding electrode of the battery 8. The first wiring groove 113 connects the installation groove 1401 and the first electrical compartment 1110, so that the conductive module of the optical machine 400 can enter the first electrical compartment 1110 through the first wiring groove 113. The conductive module of the optical machine 400 in the example of the present application can be a wire, a metal sheet, a flexible circuit board or a copper-plated layer, etc. By providing a first wiring groove 113 for arranging the conductive module on the first cover body 102, it is convenient to arrange the conductive module inside the first connecting part 101, and the conductive module of the optical machine 400 is not exposed to the outside of the first connecting part 101, so as to reduce the problem of water ingress and short circuit in the wiring part. The wiring groove in this example can be a through groove that passes through the first cover 102 near one end of the mounting seat 105. The first wiring groove 113 in this example can be used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through and connect to the positive electrode of the battery 8, the first wiring groove 113 can also be used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through and connect to the negative electrode of the battery 8, and the first wiring groove 113 can also be used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through and connect to the positive and negative electrodes of the battery 8 respectively. In some examples, the second cover 103 is covered on the first cover 102 along the second direction 2b described in the above examples, the first wiring groove 113 can have an opening toward the second cover 103, and the second cover 103 can be covered on the opening of the first wiring groove 113, so that one end of the first wiring groove 113 is connected to the mounting groove 1401, and the other end is connected to the first electrical compartment 1110.

在一些示例中,在第一盖体102上开设有第一过线孔15,第一过线孔15的一端连通第一布线槽113,另一端连通安装槽1401,第一过线孔15用于容置光机400的导电模块,光机400的导电模块穿过第一过线孔15并经由第一布线槽113连通电器件。In some examples, a first wire passing hole 15 is opened on the first cover body 102, one end of the first wire passing hole 15 is connected to the first wiring groove 113, and the other end is connected to the installation groove 1401. The first wire passing hole 15 is used to accommodate the conductive module of the optical machine 400. The conductive module of the optical machine 400 passes through the first wire passing hole 15 and is connected to the electrical device via the first wiring groove 113.

请参阅图55,在一些示例中,第一盖体102开设有用于容置极片的第一沉槽112,第一沉槽112连通第一布线槽113和第一电器仓1110,极片可以用于连接导电模块和电器件,例如,极片可以用于连接电池8的对应电极。Please refer to Figure 55. In some examples, the first cover body 102 is provided with a first recess 112 for accommodating the electrode. The first recess 112 is connected to the first wiring groove 113 and the first electrical compartment 1110. The electrode can be used to connect the conductive module and the electrical device. For example, the electrode can be used to connect the corresponding electrode of the battery 8.

第一沉槽112连通第一布线槽113和第一电器仓1110,是指第一沉槽112至少具有分别连通第一布线槽113和第一电器仓1110的开口,以使第一沉槽112内的极片可以用于连接电器件和第一布线槽113内的导电模块。本示例中所述的极片可以为金属片或其他能够用于导电的结构。本示例中的第一沉槽112可以作为电器件和导电模块的中间连接件,以便于导电模块和电器件的连接。以电器件为电池8为例,由于极片可以安装于第一布线槽113内,极片不占用第一电器仓1110的空间,可以减少极片对电池8的干涉,提升电池8安装的便捷性,也有助于提高电池8的稳定性。The first sink 112 is connected to the first wiring groove 113 and the first electrical compartment 1110, which means that the first sink 112 has at least an opening that is connected to the first wiring groove 113 and the first electrical compartment 1110, so that the pole piece in the first sink 112 can be used to connect the electrical device and the conductive module in the first wiring groove 113. The pole piece described in this example can be a metal sheet or other structure that can be used for conduction. The first sink 112 in this example can be used as an intermediate connector between the electrical device and the conductive module to facilitate the connection between the conductive module and the electrical device. Taking the electrical device as a battery 8 as an example, since the pole piece can be installed in the first wiring groove 113, the pole piece does not occupy the space of the first electrical compartment 1110, which can reduce the interference of the pole piece with the battery 8, improve the convenience of installing the battery 8, and also help to improve the stability of the battery 8.

请参阅图51、图52以及图55,在一些示例中,以电器件为电池8为例,第一电器仓1110具有朝向第二盖体103的敞口以及与敞口相对设置的底壁,第一沉槽112开设于第一电器仓1110的底壁。第一电器仓1110的敞口用于供电池8进入第一电器仓1110内,第一电器仓1110底壁与第一电器仓1110的敞口相对设置,第一电器仓1110的底壁所在位置可以为电池8在第一电器仓1110内的最深安装位置。第一沉槽112开设于第一电器仓1110的底壁上,以使电极安装于第一沉槽112内之后,电极不占用第一电器仓1110内部空间。在一些示例中,第一电器仓1110的敞口可以位于第一盖体102沿第一方向2a上远离安装座105的一侧,第二盖体103可以沿第一方向2a盖合第一电器仓1110的敞口,第一电器仓1110的底壁可以位于第一电器仓1110沿第一方向2a上靠近安装座105的一侧,第一布线槽113可以就近连接安装槽1401和第一沉槽112。在一些示例中,第二盖体103沿第二方向2b盖合于第一电器仓1110的敞口,第一电器仓1110的底壁可以位于第一电器仓1110沿第二方向2b上的一个端面,第一布线槽113可以部分位于第一电器仓1110的底壁上,部分位于第一电器仓1110的侧壁上,并连通安装槽1401。Please refer to FIG. 51, FIG. 52 and FIG. 55. In some examples, taking the electrical device as a battery 8, the first electrical compartment 1110 has an opening facing the second cover 103 and a bottom wall arranged opposite to the opening, and the first sink 112 is opened on the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110. The opening of the first electrical compartment 1110 is used for the battery 8 to enter the first electrical compartment 1110. The bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110 is arranged opposite to the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110. The bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110 is located at the deepest installation position of the battery 8 in the first electrical compartment 1110. The first sink 112 is opened on the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110, so that after the electrode is installed in the first sink 112, the electrode does not occupy the internal space of the first electrical compartment 1110. In some examples, the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110 may be located on a side of the first cover 102 away from the mounting seat 105 along the first direction 2a, the second cover 103 may cover the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110 along the first direction 2a, the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110 may be located on a side of the first electrical compartment 1110 close to the mounting seat 105 along the first direction 2a, and the first wiring groove 113 may connect the mounting groove 1401 and the first sink 112 nearby. In some examples, the second cover 103 covers the opening of the first electrical compartment 1110 along the second direction 2b, the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110 may be located on an end surface of the first electrical compartment 1110 along the second direction 2b, the first wiring groove 113 may be partially located on the bottom wall of the first electrical compartment 1110, partially located on the side wall of the first electrical compartment 1110, and connected to the mounting groove 1401.

在一些示例中,第一盖体102还开设有连通安装槽1401和第一电器仓1110的第二布线槽116,第二布线槽116用于供光机400的导电模块穿过并连接于电器件。以本示例中的电器件为电池为例,本示例中的第二布线槽116与第一布线槽113相配合,以使光机400的导电模块可以分别连接电池8的正负极,以光机400的导电模块穿设第一布线槽113并连接电池8的正极为例,第二布线槽116用于供光机400的导电模块穿过并连接于电池8的负极。本示例中的电器件还以为电池8和电路板的组合,第二布线槽116可以用于供光机的导电模块穿过并连接电路板和光机400。本示例中的第一布线槽113可以与第二布线槽116相互连通,第一布线槽113也可以与第二布线槽116相互独立设置。在一些示例中,在第一盖体102靠近安装槽1401的一端开设有上述任一示例中所述的第一过线孔15,第一布线槽113和第二布线槽116可以分别连通第一过线孔15。 In some examples, the first cover 102 is further provided with a second wiring groove 116 connecting the mounting groove 1401 and the first electrical compartment 1110, and the second wiring groove 116 is used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through and connect to the electrical device. Taking the electrical device in this example as a battery, the second wiring groove 116 in this example cooperates with the first wiring groove 113 so that the conductive module of the optical machine 400 can be connected to the positive and negative electrodes of the battery 8 respectively. Taking the conductive module of the optical machine 400 passing through the first wiring groove 113 and connecting the positive electrode of the battery 8 as an example, the second wiring groove 116 is used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through and connect to the negative electrode of the battery 8. The electrical device in this example is also a combination of a battery 8 and a circuit board, and the second wiring groove 116 can be used for the conductive module of the optical machine to pass through and connect the circuit board and the optical machine 400. In this example, the first wiring groove 113 can be connected to the second wiring groove 116, and the first wiring groove 113 can also be set independently of the second wiring groove 116. In some examples, the first wire hole 15 described in any of the above examples is opened at one end of the first cover body 102 close to the installation groove 1401 , and the first wiring groove 113 and the second wiring groove 116 can be connected to the first wire hole 15 respectively.

请参阅图54和图56,在一些示例中,第二盖体103朝向第一盖体102的一侧开设有第二沉槽1201,第二沉槽1201用于容置电池8、电路板、磁体53以及配重块中的至少一者。第一盖体102和第二盖体103相互盖合之后,第一盖体102可以将第二盖体103的第二沉槽1201封闭,以使第二沉槽1201内的电池8、电路板、磁体53或配重块不会裸露在第一连接部101外部。本示例中通过设置第二沉槽1201,可以便于在第一连接部101内部增设电池8等结构,以延长近眼显示模组2的续航时间。近眼显示模组2的电路板结构可以安装于第二沉槽1201内,通过电路板平衡近眼显示模组2的配重的同时,将电路板等结构收纳于第一连接部101内部,减少近眼显示模组2外部的电路板的铺设,有助于简化近眼显示模组2的结构,提升其装配性能。第二沉槽1201还可以用于安装磁体53和/或配重块,可以通过磁体53将近眼显示模组2吸附在光学镜片12上的预设位置,以便于根据需要调整近眼显示模组2在光学镜片12上的位置,以适应不同瞳距的用户。本示例中的第二沉槽1201还可以用于安装其他功能模块。Please refer to Figures 54 and 56. In some examples, the second cover 103 is provided with a second sink 1201 on one side facing the first cover 102. The second sink 1201 is used to accommodate at least one of the battery 8, the circuit board, the magnet 53, and the counterweight. After the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 are covered with each other, the first cover 102 can close the second sink 1201 of the second cover 103 so that the battery 8, the circuit board, the magnet 53, or the counterweight in the second sink 1201 will not be exposed outside the first connecting portion 101. In this example, by providing the second sink 1201, it is convenient to add structures such as the battery 8 inside the first connecting portion 101 to extend the battery life of the near-eye display module 2. The circuit board structure of the near-eye display module 2 can be installed in the second sink 1201. While the counterweight of the near-eye display module 2 is balanced by the circuit board, the circuit board and other structures are stored inside the first connecting portion 101, reducing the laying of the circuit board outside the near-eye display module 2, which helps to simplify the structure of the near-eye display module 2 and improve its assembly performance. The second sink 1201 can also be used to install magnets 53 and/or counterweights. The near-eye display module 2 can be adsorbed to a preset position on the optical lens 12 by the magnet 53, so that the position of the near-eye display module 2 on the optical lens 12 can be adjusted as needed to accommodate users with different pupil distances. The second sink 1201 in this example can also be used to install other functional modules.

请继续参阅图54和图56,在一些示例中,第二盖体103沿第二方向2b盖合于第一盖体102上,第二方向2b与第一方向2a呈夹角设置,第二盖体103上开设有第三布线槽1202,第三布线槽1202连通安装槽1401和第二沉槽1201。本示例中的第三布线槽1202至少具有连通安装槽1401和第二沉槽1201的开口,以便于将第二沉槽1201内的电器元件与光机400电性连接。本示例中的第二盖体103沿第二方向2b盖合于第一盖体102,所述第二方向2b可以平行于安装槽1401的轴向。本示例中的第二沉槽1201的深度可以根据所需安装的电池8和/或电路板和/或磁体53和/或配重块的数量、形状以及体积来确定。可选地,第二沉槽1201和第一沉槽112相对设置,以节省第一连接部101内部空间。本示例中的第二沉槽1201可以便于为近眼显示模组2内部提供充分的空间,以便于在需要时对近眼显示模组2进行功能部件的扩容。在一些应用场景中,例如单个磁吸对电池的吸附力可能不足以支撑近眼显示模组2在光学镜片12上,为了实现更大地吸力夹持,可在第二沉槽1201中加设金属块或磁体,实现第一连接部101与外部的磁体相互磁吸夹持更加稳定。Please continue to refer to Figures 54 and 56. In some examples, the second cover 103 covers the first cover 102 along the second direction 2b, the second direction 2b is set at an angle with the first direction 2a, and the second cover 103 is provided with a third wiring groove 1202, which is connected to the installation groove 1401 and the second sink groove 1201. The third wiring groove 1202 in this example has at least an opening connecting the installation groove 1401 and the second sink groove 1201, so as to electrically connect the electrical components in the second sink groove 1201 with the optical machine 400. The second cover 103 in this example covers the first cover 102 along the second direction 2b, and the second direction 2b can be parallel to the axial direction of the installation groove 1401. The depth of the second sink groove 1201 in this example can be determined according to the number, shape and volume of the batteries 8 and/or circuit boards and/or magnets 53 and/or counterweights to be installed. Optionally, the second sink groove 1201 and the first sink groove 112 are arranged relative to each other to save space inside the first connecting part 101. The second sink groove 1201 in this example can provide sufficient space inside the near-eye display module 2 to facilitate the expansion of functional components of the near-eye display module 2 when necessary. In some application scenarios, for example, the adsorption force of a single magnetic suction on the battery may not be sufficient to support the near-eye display module 2 on the optical lens 12. In order to achieve greater suction clamping, a metal block or magnet can be added to the second sink groove 1201 to achieve a more stable magnetic clamping between the first connecting part 101 and the external magnet.

请参阅图50、图51和图55,在一些示例中,第一连接部101上开设有通孔114,通孔114的一端连通第一电器仓1110,另一端贯通至第一连接部101的外壁,通孔114用于供电器件向第一连接部101的内外移动;近眼显示模组2还包括密封仓盖115,密封仓盖115用于封闭通孔114。本示例中的通孔114贯通第一连接部101的侧壁并连通第一电器仓1110,以使第一电器仓1110内的电器件可以经由通孔114向第一连接部101外侧移动,以电池8为例,电池8可以通过通孔114进入第一电器仓1110内,以便于电池8的安装。密封仓盖115用于安装于第一连接部101上,以便于在需要时将通孔114封闭。密封仓盖115可以呈环形或者具有安装槽,电池8可安装于密封仓盖115中,由于密封仓盖115整个周向地围绕电池8,从而能够实现电池8的放入与取出。密封仓盖115还可设有扣手位能够相对第一盖体102漏出,方便用户操作。第一电器仓1110内安装电池8时,可以将电池8由通孔114嵌入第一电器仓1110内,并采用密封仓盖将通孔114封闭。本示例中的密封仓盖可以与通孔114的形状和尺寸相一致,以使密封仓盖能够将通孔114完全封闭;本示例中的密封仓盖也可以覆盖在第一连接部101的外表面,以从第一连接部101的外表面覆盖通孔114;本示例中的密封仓盖也可以部分嵌置于通孔114内,部分覆盖在第一连接部101的外表面,以便于密封仓盖的固定。可选地,第一连接部101包括上述任一示例中所述的第一盖体102和第二盖体103,通孔114可以开设于第一盖体102上,也可以开设于第二盖体103上,为方便描述,以下以通孔114开设于第一盖体102上为例进行阐述。在一些示例中,在第一盖体102上开设有上述任一示例中所述的第一沉槽112,第一沉槽112用于安装极片,第一沉槽112可以与通孔114相互错开设置。 Please refer to FIG. 50, FIG. 51 and FIG. 55. In some examples, a through hole 114 is provided on the first connection part 101. One end of the through hole 114 is connected to the first electrical compartment 1110, and the other end is passed through the outer wall of the first connection part 101. The through hole 114 is used to allow the power supply device to move inside and outside the first connection part 101. The near-eye display module 2 also includes a sealing compartment cover 115, which is used to close the through hole 114. The through hole 114 in this example passes through the side wall of the first connection part 101 and is connected to the first electrical compartment 1110, so that the electrical device in the first electrical compartment 1110 can move to the outside of the first connection part 101 through the through hole 114. Taking the battery 8 as an example, the battery 8 can enter the first electrical compartment 1110 through the through hole 114 to facilitate the installation of the battery 8. The sealing compartment cover 115 is used to be installed on the first connection part 101 so as to close the through hole 114 when necessary. The sealed compartment cover 115 may be annular or have a mounting groove, and the battery 8 may be installed in the sealed compartment cover 115. Since the sealed compartment cover 115 surrounds the battery 8 in the entire circumference, the battery 8 can be put in and taken out. The sealed compartment cover 115 may also be provided with a gripping position so that it can be leaked relative to the first cover body 102, which is convenient for user operation. When the battery 8 is installed in the first electrical compartment 1110, the battery 8 can be embedded in the first electrical compartment 1110 through the through hole 114, and the through hole 114 is closed by the sealed compartment cover. The sealed compartment cover in this example may be consistent with the shape and size of the through hole 114, so that the sealed compartment cover can completely close the through hole 114; the sealed compartment cover in this example may also cover the outer surface of the first connecting portion 101 to cover the through hole 114 from the outer surface of the first connecting portion 101; the sealed compartment cover in this example may also be partially embedded in the through hole 114 and partially covered on the outer surface of the first connecting portion 101, so as to facilitate the fixing of the sealed compartment cover. Optionally, the first connecting portion 101 includes the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 described in any of the above examples, and the through hole 114 can be provided on the first cover 102 or the second cover 103. For the convenience of description, the following description is made by taking the through hole 114 provided on the first cover 102 as an example. In some examples, the first sinking groove 112 described in any of the above examples is provided on the first cover 102, and the first sinking groove 112 is used to install the pole piece, and the first sinking groove 112 and the through hole 114 can be staggered.

请参阅图51和图54,在一些示例中,近眼显示模组2还包括与密封仓盖115相连接的环状固定部1151,环状固定部1151用于套设于电器件的外围,通孔114还用于供环状固定部1151向第一连接部101的外侧移动。本示例中的环状固定部1151用于套设在电器件的外围,在密封仓盖115经由通孔114向第一连接部101外侧移动时,环状固定部1151可以带动电器件同步移动,进而便于电器件的拆装。本示例中的环状固定部1151可以与密封仓盖115一体设置,环状固定部1151也可以与密封仓盖115分体设置并相互连接。本示例中的环状固定部1151可以为完整的环状结构,也可以为部分断开的环状结构。Please refer to Figures 51 and 54. In some examples, the near-eye display module 2 also includes an annular fixing portion 1151 connected to the sealing chamber cover 115. The annular fixing portion 1151 is used to be sleeved on the periphery of the electrical device, and the through hole 114 is also used for the annular fixing portion 1151 to move toward the outside of the first connecting portion 101. The annular fixing portion 1151 in this example is used to be sleeved on the periphery of the electrical device. When the sealing chamber cover 115 moves toward the outside of the first connecting portion 101 through the through hole 114, the annular fixing portion 1151 can drive the electrical device to move synchronously, thereby facilitating the disassembly and assembly of the electrical device. The annular fixing portion 1151 in this example can be integrally provided with the sealing chamber cover 115, or the annular fixing portion 1151 can be separately provided with the sealing chamber cover 115 and connected to each other. The annular fixing portion 1151 in this example can be a complete annular structure or a partially disconnected annular structure.

请参阅图50和图51,在一些示例中,通孔114设于第一连接部101远离安装座105的一端,通孔114用于供电器件沿第一方向2a移动。本示例中,由于安装座105设于第一连接部101沿第一方向2a上的一侧,通过使电器件经由通孔114沿第一方向2a移动,可以减少电器件拆装时安装座105对电器件的干涉。Please refer to Figures 50 and 51. In some examples, the through hole 114 is provided at one end of the first connection portion 101 away from the mounting seat 105, and the through hole 114 is used to allow the power device to move along the first direction 2a. In this example, since the mounting seat 105 is provided on one side of the first connection portion 101 along the first direction 2a, by allowing the electrical device to move along the first direction 2a via the through hole 114, the interference of the mounting seat 105 on the electrical device during assembly and disassembly of the electrical device can be reduced.

请参阅图57和图58,在一些示例中,第一连接部101包括第一盖体102和第二盖体103,第一盖体102与安装座105相连接,第一盖体102开设有第一电器仓1110,第一盖体102背离安装座105的一侧开设有连通第一电器仓1110的敞口;第二盖体103盖合于第一盖体102,第二盖体103沿第一方向2a盖合于第一盖体102的敞口。第二盖体103盖合于第一盖体102背离安装座105的一侧,以将第一电器仓1110封闭。敞口用于供电池8等电器件进入第一电器仓1110内。本示例中通过将第二盖体103沿第一方向2a盖合于第一盖体102,可以减少安装座105对第二盖体103的干涉,提升第一盖体102和第二盖体103的安装性能。在一些示例中,第二盖体103上对应第一电器仓1110的位置可以开设第二沉槽1201,当第一盖体102和第二盖体103相互盖合形成第一连接部101时,电器件可以部分位于第二沉槽1201内。可选地,第二沉槽1201也可以用于安装电路板、磁铁等其他功能模块。在一些示例中,在第一盖体102上开设有上述任一示例中所述的第一布线槽113,以便于光机400的导电模块与电器件相连接;第一布线槽113可以位于第一盖体102远离第二盖体103的一侧。在一些示例中,在第一盖体102上还可以设置上述任一示例中所述的第一沉槽112,第一沉槽112可以连接于第一布线槽113。Please refer to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 . In some examples, the first connection part 101 includes a first cover 102 and a second cover 103. The first cover 102 is connected to the mounting seat 105. The first cover 102 is provided with a first electrical compartment 1110. The first cover 102 has an opening connected to the first electrical compartment 1110 on one side away from the mounting seat 105. The second cover 103 covers the first cover 102. The second cover 103 covers the opening of the first cover 102 along the first direction 2a. The second cover 103 covers the side of the first cover 102 away from the mounting seat 105 to close the first electrical compartment 1110. The opening is used for electrical components such as the battery 8 to enter the first electrical compartment 1110. In this example, by covering the second cover 103 with the first cover 102 along the first direction 2a, the interference of the mounting seat 105 on the second cover 103 can be reduced, and the installation performance of the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 can be improved. In some examples, a second sink 1201 can be opened at a position corresponding to the first electrical compartment 1110 on the second cover 103, and when the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 cover each other to form the first connecting portion 101, the electrical device can be partially located in the second sink 1201. Optionally, the second sink 1201 can also be used to install other functional modules such as circuit boards and magnets. In some examples, the first wiring groove 113 described in any of the above examples is opened on the first cover 102 to facilitate the connection between the conductive module of the optical machine 400 and the electrical device; the first wiring groove 113 can be located on the side of the first cover 102 away from the second cover 103. In some examples, the first sinking groove 112 described in any of the above examples may also be provided on the first cover body 102 , and the first sinking groove 112 may be connected to the first wiring groove 113 .

请参阅图52和图58,在一些示例中,第一连接部101靠近安装座105的一侧设置有凸出部104,凸出部104的数量为两个,两个凸出部104呈间隔设置,安装座105分别连接于两个凸出部104,两个凸出部104以及安装座105围合形成安装槽1401。本示例中的两个凸出部104呈间隔设置,以使光机400可以部分位于两个凸出部104之间。安装座105分别连接于两个凸出部104,并与两个凸出部104围合形成安装槽1401。在一些示例中,安装座105朝向第一连接部101的一侧凹设有凹槽,安装座105的凹槽与两个凸出部104之间的空隙围合形成安装槽1401。本示例中的凸出部104可以作为第一连接部101与安装座105的连接部位,以提升第一连接部101与安装座105的连接部位的牢固性。在进行光机400的布线时,可选地,第一连接部101上开设有连通安装槽1401和第一电器仓1110的第一过线孔15,第一过线孔15用于容置光机400的导电模块;第一过线孔15远离第一电器仓1110的一端位于两个凸出部104之间。由于两个凸出部104相互间隔设置,可以使第一过线孔15隐藏在两个凸出部104之间,以减少光机400组件的导电模块的裸露,进而减少近眼显示模组2进水的问题。Please refer to FIG. 52 and FIG. 58 . In some examples, a protrusion 104 is provided on one side of the first connection portion 101 close to the mounting seat 105. There are two protrusions 104, which are arranged at intervals. The mounting seat 105 is connected to the two protrusions 104, respectively. The two protrusions 104 and the mounting seat 105 enclose a mounting groove 1401. In this example, the two protrusions 104 are arranged at intervals so that the optical machine 400 can be partially located between the two protrusions 104. The mounting seat 105 is connected to the two protrusions 104, respectively, and encloses the two protrusions 104 to form the mounting groove 1401. In some examples, a groove is provided on one side of the mounting seat 105 facing the first connection portion 101, and the groove of the mounting seat 105 and the gap between the two protrusions 104 enclose the mounting groove 1401. The protrusion 104 in this example can be used as a connection part between the first connection part 101 and the mounting seat 105 to improve the firmness of the connection part between the first connection part 101 and the mounting seat 105. When wiring the optical machine 400, optionally, a first wire hole 15 connecting the mounting groove 1401 and the first electrical compartment 1110 is opened on the first connection part 101, and the first wire hole 15 is used to accommodate the conductive module of the optical machine 400; the end of the first wire hole 15 away from the first electrical compartment 1110 is located between the two protrusions 104. Since the two protrusions 104 are arranged at intervals from each other, the first wire hole 15 can be hidden between the two protrusions 104 to reduce the exposure of the conductive module of the optical machine 400 component, thereby reducing the problem of water ingress into the near-eye display module 2.

在一些示例中,安装座105和凸出部104中的一者设置有卡接件1402,另一者设置有卡槽1301,卡接件1402卡接于卡槽1301。本示例中的卡接件1402与卡槽1301相互适配,以将安装座105安装于凸出部104上。为方便描述,以下以凸出部104上设置有卡槽1301,安装座105上设置有卡接件1402为例进行阐述。可选地,本示例中的卡槽1301可以为直槽、T型槽或其他形状的槽结构。可选地,本示例中的卡接件1402可以与安装座105一体设置,也可以与安装座105分体设置并连接于安装座105。 In some examples, one of the mounting seat 105 and the protrusion 104 is provided with a clamping member 1402, and the other is provided with a slot 1301, and the clamping member 1402 is clamped in the slot 1301. The clamping member 1402 and the slot 1301 in this example are adapted to each other so that the mounting seat 105 is mounted on the protrusion 104. For the convenience of description, the following is an example of the protrusion 104 being provided with the slot 1301 and the mounting seat 105 being provided with the clamping member 1402. Optionally, the slot 1301 in this example can be a straight slot, a T-slot, or a slot structure of other shapes. Optionally, the clamping member 1402 in this example can be provided integrally with the mounting seat 105, or can be provided separately from the mounting seat 105 and connected to the mounting seat 105.

请参阅图57和图58,在一些示例中,第一连接部101包括上述任一示例中所述的第一盖体102和第二盖体103,第二盖体103沿第一方向2a盖合于第一盖体102。在第一盖体102远离第二盖体103的一侧设置有上述凸出部104。57 and 58, in some examples, the first connection portion 101 includes the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 described in any of the above examples, and the second cover 103 covers the first cover 102 along the first direction 2a. The protrusion 104 is provided on one side of the first cover 102 away from the second cover 103.

请参阅图50至图56,在一些示例中,第一连接部101包括上述任一示例中所述的第一盖体102和第二盖体103,第二盖体103沿第二方向2b盖合于第一盖体102。在第一盖体102或第二盖体103靠近安装座105的一端设置有上述凸出部104。Please refer to Figures 50 to 56. In some examples, the first connection portion 101 includes the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 described in any of the above examples, and the second cover 103 covers the first cover 102 along the second direction 2b. The protrusion 104 is provided at one end of the first cover 102 or the second cover 103 close to the mounting seat 105.

请参阅图50至图56,在一些示例中,第一连接部101包括上述任一示例中所述的第一盖体102和第二盖体103,第二盖体103沿第二方向2b盖合于第一盖体102。第一盖体102和第二盖体103靠近安装座105的一端分别设置有上述凸出部104,安装座105上的卡接件1402同时卡接于第一盖体102和第二盖体103的凸出部104上。可选地,卡接件1402可以呈T型结构,第一盖体102和第二盖体103上的凸出部104上分别设置有卡槽1301,第二盖体103盖合于第一盖体102时,第一盖体102和第二盖体103上的卡槽1301围合形成T型槽,卡接件1402卡接于所述T型槽,以阻挡安装座相对第一连接部101沿第一方向2a上的移动。Please refer to Figures 50 to 56. In some examples, the first connection portion 101 includes the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 described in any of the above examples, and the second cover 103 covers the first cover 102 along the second direction 2b. The first cover 102 and the second cover 103 are respectively provided with the above-mentioned protrusions 104 at one end close to the mounting seat 105, and the clamping member 1402 on the mounting seat 105 is clamped on the protrusions 104 of the first cover 102 and the second cover 103 at the same time. Optionally, the clamping member 1402 can be in a T-shaped structure, and the protrusions 104 on the first cover body 102 and the second cover body 103 are respectively provided with clamping grooves 1301. When the second cover body 103 is covered on the first cover body 102, the clamping grooves 1301 on the first cover body 102 and the second cover body 103 are enclosed to form a T-shaped groove, and the clamping member 1402 is clamped in the T-shaped groove to block the movement of the mounting seat relative to the first connecting portion 101 along the first direction 2a.

请参阅图50至图54,在一些示例中,近眼显示模组2还包括固定座600,固定座600安装于安装槽1401,固定座600上开设有用于安装光机400的固定槽610;固定座600上开设有第二过线孔620,第二过线孔620用于容置光机400的导电模块;第二过线孔620的一端连通固定槽610,另一端贯通至固定座600的外壁。Please refer to Figures 50 to 54. In some examples, the near-eye display module 2 also includes a fixed base 600, which is installed in the installation groove 1401. The fixed base 600 is provided with a fixed groove 610 for installing the optical machine 400; the fixed base 600 is provided with a second wire hole 620, and the second wire hole 620 is used to accommodate the conductive module of the optical machine 400; one end of the second wire hole 620 is connected to the fixed groove 610, and the other end passes through the outer wall of the fixed base 600.

固定座600用于将光机400安装于安装座105上,同时固定座600可以起到保护光机400的作用。固定槽610可以为开设于固定座600上的通槽或沉槽。本示例中的固定座600可以固定连接于安装座105上,固定座600也可以可移动地安装于安装座105上。第二过线孔620作为用于容置光机400的导电模块的通道,以方便光机400的布线。The fixing seat 600 is used to install the optical machine 400 on the mounting seat 105, and the fixing seat 600 can also protect the optical machine 400. The fixing groove 610 can be a through groove or a sunken groove opened on the fixing seat 600. The fixing seat 600 in this example can be fixedly connected to the mounting seat 105, and the fixing seat 600 can also be movably installed on the mounting seat 105. The second wire hole 620 serves as a channel for accommodating the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to facilitate the wiring of the optical machine 400.

在一些示例中,第一连接部101上开设有如上述任一示例中所述的第一过线孔15,第二过线孔620可以与第一过线孔15相连通。In some examples, the first connection portion 101 is provided with a first wire passing hole 15 as described in any of the above examples, and the second wire passing hole 620 can be connected to the first wire passing hole 15 .

在一些示例中,第二过线孔620的轴向与固定槽610的轴向呈夹角设置。本示例中的第二过线孔620用于供光机400的导电模块穿过,以便于光机400的导电模块与第一电器仓1110内的电器件相连接。本示例中的固定槽610的形状可以与光机400的形状相适配,固定槽610具有敞口,固定槽610的敞口可以与光机400的出光侧同侧设置,固定槽610的轴向与第一方向2a呈夹角设置。可选地,固定槽610的轴向可以垂直于固定槽610的敞口所在平面。第二过线孔620的轴向与固定槽610的轴向呈夹角设置,是指第二过线孔620的轴向与固定槽610的轴向不平行也不重合。本示例中通过采用上述设置,可以从固定座600的侧面将光机400的导电模块引出,以缩短光机400的导电模块与第一电器仓1110之间的距离。由于可以从固定座600的侧面将导电模块引出,本示例中可以将固定槽610设置为沉槽结构,以便于对光机400和固定槽610的内壁面之间进行密封。In some examples, the axial direction of the second wire-passing hole 620 is set at an angle to the axial direction of the fixing groove 610. The second wire-passing hole 620 in this example is used for the conductive module of the optical machine 400 to pass through, so as to facilitate the connection of the conductive module of the optical machine 400 with the electrical components in the first electrical compartment 1110. The shape of the fixing groove 610 in this example can be adapted to the shape of the optical machine 400, and the fixing groove 610 has an opening. The opening of the fixing groove 610 can be set on the same side as the light-emitting side of the optical machine 400, and the axial direction of the fixing groove 610 is set at an angle to the first direction 2a. Optionally, the axial direction of the fixing groove 610 can be perpendicular to the plane where the opening of the fixing groove 610 is located. The axial direction of the second wire-passing hole 620 is set at an angle to the axial direction of the fixing groove 610, which means that the axial direction of the second wire-passing hole 620 is not parallel to nor coincident with the axial direction of the fixing groove 610. In this example, by adopting the above arrangement, the conductive module of the optical engine 400 can be led out from the side of the fixing seat 600 to shorten the distance between the conductive module of the optical engine 400 and the first electrical compartment 1110. Since the conductive module can be led out from the side of the fixing seat 600, the fixing groove 610 can be set as a sink structure in this example to facilitate sealing between the optical engine 400 and the inner wall surface of the fixing groove 610.

在一些示例中,固定座600开设有第二电器仓630,第二过线孔620通过第二电器仓630连通固定槽610。本示例中的第二电器仓630可以用于容置光机、电路板等结构,以将光机400的电路模块内置于固定座600内部,进而可以简化近眼显示模组2的结构,提升产品的紧凑性,便于产品的封装,同时可以方便对近眼显示模组2进行功能上的扩容。本示例中的第二电器仓630连通第二过线孔620,可以便于将光机400的导电模块和电路板等结构通过第二过线孔620引出,以便于布线。In some examples, the fixing base 600 is provided with a second electrical compartment 630, and the second wire hole 620 is connected to the fixing groove 610 through the second electrical compartment 630. The second electrical compartment 630 in this example can be used to accommodate structures such as an optical machine and a circuit board, so that the circuit module of the optical machine 400 can be built into the fixing base 600, thereby simplifying the structure of the near-eye display module 2, improving the compactness of the product, facilitating the packaging of the product, and facilitating the functional expansion of the near-eye display module 2. The second electrical compartment 630 in this example is connected to the second wire hole 620, which can facilitate the conductive module and circuit board of the optical machine 400 to be led out through the second wire hole 620 for easy wiring.

请参阅图52和图54,在一些示例中,固定座600的外壁面和安装槽1401的内壁面中的一者为凸弧 面,另一者为所述凸弧面相适配的凹弧面,安装槽1401用于允许在固定座600在内转动以调整光机400的出光角度。本示例中的凸弧面与凹弧面相互适配,是指凸弧面可以与凹弧面相互贴合,以使固定座600能够在安装槽1401内相对转动。当固定座600相对安装座105转动时,固定座600上的光机400也可以同步转动,进而可以使得光机400的出光角度同步变化。本示例中通过调整光机400相对人眼视场中的位置,以便准确调整光机400的位置,从而满足不同瞳距或视场范围的不同人群,并且能够满足不同用户观看需求和偏好。另一方面也可以在前期的研发中提供灵活的位置测试,实现预期的设计效果。Please refer to FIG. 52 and FIG. 54. In some examples, one of the outer wall surface of the fixing seat 600 and the inner wall surface of the mounting groove 1401 is a convex arc. The mounting groove 1401 is used to allow the fixed seat 600 to rotate inside to adjust the light output angle of the optical machine 400. The convex curved surface and the concave curved surface in this example are adapted to each other, which means that the convex curved surface can fit the concave curved surface so that the fixed seat 600 can rotate relatively in the mounting groove 1401. When the fixed seat 600 rotates relative to the mounting seat 105, the optical machine 400 on the fixed seat 600 can also rotate synchronously, so that the light output angle of the optical machine 400 can change synchronously. In this example, the position of the optical machine 400 relative to the field of view of the human eye is adjusted so as to accurately adjust the position of the optical machine 400, so as to meet the needs of different people with different pupil distances or field of view ranges, and to meet the viewing needs and preferences of different users. On the other hand, flexible position testing can also be provided in the early research and development to achieve the expected design effect.

本示例中的固定座600的外表面可以至少部分呈球面,安装槽1401的内壁面为凹弧面,以使固定座600可以在安装槽1401内相对安装座105转动。可选地,本示例中的固定座600的外表面也以为凹弧面,安装槽1401的内壁面可以为凸弧面,以使固定座600可以在安装槽1401内相对安装座105转动。The outer surface of the fixing seat 600 in this example may be at least partially spherical, and the inner wall surface of the mounting groove 1401 may be a concave arc surface, so that the fixing seat 600 can rotate relative to the mounting seat 105 in the mounting groove 1401. Optionally, the outer surface of the fixing seat 600 in this example may also be a concave arc surface, and the inner wall surface of the mounting groove 1401 may be a convex arc surface, so that the fixing seat 600 can rotate relative to the mounting seat 105 in the mounting groove 1401.

在上述近眼显示模组2的基础上,本申请还提出一种近眼显示装置的示例,近眼显示装置用于光学镜片12,包括如上述任一示例中的近眼显示模组2,近眼显示模组2的第一连接部101与光学镜片12相连接。本示例中的第一连接部101可以与光学镜片12固定连接,也可以与光学镜片12可拆卸连接。Based on the above-mentioned near-eye display module 2, the present application further proposes an example of a near-eye display device, which is used for an optical lens 12, and includes a near-eye display module 2 as in any of the above-mentioned examples, and a first connection portion 101 of the near-eye display module 2 is connected to the optical lens 12. The first connection portion 101 in this example can be fixedly connected to the optical lens 12, or can be detachably connected to the optical lens 12.

可以理解的是,本申请近眼显示装置的示例包括上述任一示例中的近眼显示装置,也包括上述任一示例中的技术效果,故不再赘述。It can be understood that the examples of the near-eye display device of the present application include the near-eye display device in any of the above examples, and also include the technical effects in any of the above examples, so they will not be repeated here.

请参阅图49和图59,在一些示例中,近眼显示模组2的第一连接部101与光学镜片12的第一侧相连接;近眼显示装置还包括第二连接部500,第二连接部500与第一连接部101相对设置,用于与光学镜片12的第二侧连接,光学镜片12的第一侧和第二侧为相对设置的两侧;第一连接部101和第二连接部500用于相互夹持镜片且允许安装座105在镜片上移动,以调整光机400相对镜片位置。Please refer to Figures 49 and 59. In some examples, the first connecting portion 101 of the near-eye display module 2 is connected to the first side of the optical lens 12; the near-eye display device also includes a second connecting portion 500, which is arranged opposite to the first connecting portion 101 and is used to connect to the second side of the optical lens 12, and the first side and the second side of the optical lens 12 are two sides arranged oppositely; the first connecting portion 101 and the second connecting portion 500 are used to clamp the lenses to each other and allow the mounting seat 105 to move on the lens to adjust the position of the optical machine 400 relative to the lens.

在一些示例中,第二连接部500可以为与第一连接部相连接固定的部件,例如第一连接部101可以采用粘接、卡接、螺纹连接等固定于第二连接部500,第一连接部101还可以通过中间连接件与第二连接部500相连接。在一些示例中,第一连接部101和第二连接部500可以为相互独立的部件,第一连接部101可以与第二连接部500相互配合起到夹持或者吸附的元件。In some examples, the second connection part 500 may be a component connected and fixed to the first connection part, for example, the first connection part 101 may be fixed to the second connection part 500 by bonding, clamping, threading, etc., and the first connection part 101 may also be connected to the second connection part 500 through an intermediate connection member. In some examples, the first connection part 101 and the second connection part 500 may be independent components, and the first connection part 101 may cooperate with the second connection part 500 to act as a clamping or adsorption element.

请参阅图59,在一些示例中,第二连接部500至少部分为磁性材料。本示例中的第二连接部500可以整体为磁性材料,也可以部分为磁性材料。如图49图59中所示,第二连接部500包括套筒510和嵌置于套筒510内的磁体53。由于电池8等结构能够被磁体53吸附,当将第一连接部101和第二连接部500分别设置于光学镜片12的两侧时,第二连接部500可以将第一连接部101吸附在光学镜片12上的预设位置。在一些示例中,第一连接部101包括上述任一示例中的第一盖体和第二盖体,在第二盖体上开设有第二沉槽,第二沉槽内可以用于安装磁体,以提升第一连接部和第二连接部的吸附性能。Please refer to Figure 59. In some examples, the second connecting part 500 is at least partially made of magnetic material. The second connecting part 500 in this example can be made of magnetic material as a whole or partially. As shown in Figures 49 to 59, the second connecting part 500 includes a sleeve 510 and a magnet 53 embedded in the sleeve 510. Since structures such as the battery 8 can be adsorbed by the magnet 53, when the first connecting part 101 and the second connecting part 500 are respectively arranged on both sides of the optical lens 12, the second connecting part 500 can adsorb the first connecting part 101 to a preset position on the optical lens 12. In some examples, the first connecting part 101 includes the first cover body and the second cover body in any of the above examples, and a second sink groove is provided on the second cover body, and the second sink groove can be used to install a magnet to improve the adsorption performance of the first connecting part and the second connecting part.

在一些示例中,在第二连接部500上设置有保护件520,所述保护件520可以为保护膜或保护罩,保护件520用于阻挡于磁体53和光学镜片12之间,以减少对光学镜片12的磨损。可选,套筒510的一端开设有供磁体53穿过并嵌置于套筒510内的敞口,保护件520包括保护层523以及与保护层523相连接的固定层525,保护层523覆盖套筒510的敞口,以阻挡于磁体53和光学镜片12之间,固定层525与套筒510内外套设,以提升第二连接部500的密封性。In some examples, a protective member 520 is provided on the second connection portion 500, and the protective member 520 may be a protective film or a protective cover, and the protective member 520 is used to block between the magnet 53 and the optical lens 12 to reduce the wear on the optical lens 12. Optionally, an opening is provided at one end of the sleeve 510 for the magnet 53 to pass through and be embedded in the sleeve 510, and the protective member 520 includes a protective layer 523 and a fixing layer 525 connected to the protective layer 523, and the protective layer 523 covers the opening of the sleeve 510 to block between the magnet 53 and the optical lens 12, and the fixing layer 525 is disposed inside and outside the sleeve 510 to improve the sealing performance of the second connection portion 500.

请结合参阅图49,在一些示例中,第一连接部101具有固定面1203,固定面1203与第二连接部500相对设置;固定面1203与光机400的出光侧同侧设置;本示例中的固定面1203可以为第一连接部101上的一个表面。固定面1203与光机400的出光侧同侧设置,在安装近眼显示装置时,近眼显示模组2位于光学镜片12的外侧,第二连接部500可以位于光学镜片12的内侧,以减少近眼显示装置对用户的视觉侵入感,提升产品的舒适性。 Please refer to FIG. 49 . In some examples, the first connection part 101 has a fixing surface 1203, and the fixing surface 1203 is arranged opposite to the second connection part 500; the fixing surface 1203 is arranged on the same side as the light-emitting side of the optical machine 400; the fixing surface 1203 in this example can be a surface on the first connection part 101. The fixing surface 1203 is arranged on the same side as the light-emitting side of the optical machine 400. When the near-eye display device is installed, the near-eye display module 2 is located on the outside of the optical lens 12, and the second connection part 500 can be located on the inside of the optical lens 12 to reduce the visual intrusion of the near-eye display device to the user and improve the comfort of the product.

在一些示例中,与上一示例的不同之处在于,固定面1203背离光机400的出光侧设置。本示例中的固定面1203可以为第一连接部101上的一个表面。固定面1203与光机400的出光侧异侧设置,在安装近眼显示装置时,近眼显示模组2位于光学镜片12的内侧,第二连接部500可以位于光学镜片12的外侧。In some examples, the difference from the previous example is that the fixing surface 1203 is arranged away from the light-emitting side of the optical engine 400. The fixing surface 1203 in this example can be a surface on the first connecting portion 101. The fixing surface 1203 is arranged on the opposite side of the light-emitting side of the optical engine 400. When the near-eye display device is installed, the near-eye display module 2 is located on the inner side of the optical lens 12, and the second connecting portion 500 can be located on the outer side of the optical lens 12.

在上述近眼显示装置的示例的基础上,本申请还提出一种可穿戴设备的示例,可穿戴设备可以是近远视、运动、护目等眼镜或者头盔或智能眼镜等等,包括如上述任一示例中的近眼显示模组或装置。Based on the above-mentioned examples of near-eye display devices, the present application also proposes an example of a wearable device, which may be glasses for myopia or hyperopia, sports, eye protection, or a helmet or smart glasses, etc., including a near-eye display module or device as in any of the above-mentioned examples.

由于头戴式设备往往会长时间佩戴,所以更小体积及轻便式的头戴式设备是各大厂商不断追求的目标,现有例如棱镜(Prism)技术的模组往往重量、体积相对仍然较大,而光波导技术的光学效率较低,上述现有技术都会极大地改变原有例如近视、远视、护目、太阳镜等传统普通眼镜或者头盔等头戴式设备的外观、结构形态等等,现有技术的方案要实现与现有传统眼镜、头盔等头戴式设备结合变得异常困难。另外作为需要传输到人眼视网膜的设备,以头戴式设备为例,其在人眼视网膜中的视野范围中的内容能够清晰、完整地呈现显得非常重要,在结合虚拟和现实情境的情况下,获取相对更多视野的虚拟信息内容也变成越来越重要的功能需求,更优质的图像和更高的光效同样非常重要,更轻便、小尺寸,兼容各类头戴设备成为亟待解决的问题。本申请实施例提供一种光学模组100’,光学模组100’可以应用到各相关实施例中,以下分别进行详细说明。Since head-mounted devices are often worn for a long time, smaller and lighter head-mounted devices are the goals that major manufacturers are constantly pursuing. Existing modules such as prism technology are often relatively heavy and large in size, while the optical efficiency of optical waveguide technology is low. The above-mentioned existing technologies will greatly change the appearance, structural form, etc. of the original traditional ordinary glasses or helmets such as myopia, hyperopia, eye protection, sunglasses, etc. The existing technology solutions are extremely difficult to combine with existing traditional glasses, helmets and other head-mounted devices. In addition, as a device that needs to be transmitted to the retina of the human eye, taking the head-mounted device as an example, it is very important that the content in the visual field of the retina of the human eye can be presented clearly and completely. In the case of combining virtual and real situations, obtaining relatively more virtual information content in the visual field has become an increasingly important functional requirement. Better quality images and higher light efficiency are also very important. More light, small size, and compatibility with various head-mounted devices have become problems that need to be solved urgently. The embodiment of the present application provides an optical module 100', which can be applied to various related embodiments, and the following are detailed descriptions.

光学模组100’可应用于近眼显示装置200’,例如可以应用在增强现实AR(Augmented Reality)、虚拟现实VR(Virtual Reality)、混合现实MR(Mixed Reality)以及拓展现实XR(Extended Reality)、护目镜、智能眼镜、近视眼镜、远视眼镜、运动眼镜、隐形眼镜、头盔或者其它相关的近眼显示装置中。参阅图60-74,光学模组100’包括基体10’,包括相对的第一端12’和第二端14’,其中基体10’可以是实心,例如采用的材料可以是透明或透光的硬质可切削的材料,例如可为PMMA(polymethyl methacrylate,聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯)、PC(polycarbonate,聚碳酸酯)塑料、树脂、玻璃等;例如可以是圆柱型、棱柱型或者圆台型等等规则形状,当然也可以是非规则形状等。在另一些实施例中,基体10’也可以是具有空心的构造,例如其可以由至少两组薄壁采用光学胶水粘接而成,中心可以是空心,第一反射面20’、第二反射面30、入射面40、出射面50等可以形成在薄壁上。The optical module 100' can be applied to a near-eye display device 200', for example, it can be applied to augmented reality AR (Augmented Reality), virtual reality VR (Virtual Reality), mixed reality MR (Mixed Reality) and extended reality XR (Extended Reality), goggles, smart glasses, myopia glasses, hyperopia glasses, sports glasses, contact lenses, helmets or other related near-eye display devices. Referring to Figures 60-74, the optical module 100' includes a substrate 10', including a first end 12' and a second end 14' opposite to each other, wherein the substrate 10' can be solid, for example, the material used can be a transparent or light-transmitting hard cuttable material, for example, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate), PC (polycarbonate) plastic, resin, glass, etc.; for example, it can be a regular shape such as a cylindrical, prism or truncated cone, and of course, it can also be an irregular shape. In other embodiments, the substrate 10' may also have a hollow structure. For example, it may be formed by at least two groups of thin walls bonded together with optical glue. The center may be hollow, and the first reflection surface 20', the second reflection surface 30, the incident surface 40, the exit surface 50, etc. may be formed on the thin walls.

第一反射面20’,设置在基体10’的第一端12’,被配置成允许反射光线;A first reflective surface 20', disposed at the first end 12' of the base 10', and configured to allow reflection of light;

第二反射面30,设置在基体10’的第二端14’被配置接收来自第一反射面20’反射的光线并将其再次反射;可以理解,第一端12’和第二端14’可以是相对的两端。第一反射面20’和第二反射面30上可以设有反射材料,可以是金属或者金属合金等反射材料,例如铝、银或铝与银的混合物等等。The second reflective surface 30 is disposed at the second end 14' of the substrate 10' and is configured to receive the light reflected from the first reflective surface 20' and reflect it again; it can be understood that the first end 12' and the second end 14' can be opposite ends. The first reflective surface 20' and the second reflective surface 30 can be provided with a reflective material, which can be a reflective material such as a metal or a metal alloy, such as aluminum, silver, or a mixture of aluminum and silver.

入射面40,设置在基体10’的第二端14’被第二反射面30环绕;An incident surface 40 is disposed at the second end 14' of the substrate 10' and is surrounded by the second reflecting surface 30;

出射面50,设置在基体10’的第一端12’且环绕第一反射面20’设置;出射面50的尺寸与第二反射窗1312的尺寸可以相同,在另一些实施例中出射面50的尺寸与第二反射窗1312的尺寸也可不相同;An exit surface 50 is disposed at the first end 12' of the base 10' and surrounds the first reflection surface 20'; the size of the exit surface 50 may be the same as the size of the second reflection window 1312, and in other embodiments, the size of the exit surface 50 may be different from the size of the second reflection window 1312;

环形侧面60,一端连接第二反射面30,另一端连接出射面50。The annular side surface 60 has one end connected to the second reflection surface 30 and the other end connected to the emission surface 50 .

其中,入射面40和出射面50为非球面、球面、自由曲面一种或组合,入射面40被配置成接收来自微显示器80图像的光线L,光线通过非平面(而是非球面、球面、自由曲面一种或组合)的入射面40进入基体10’,被第一反射面20’反射,然后被第二反射面3反射,并通过非平面的出射面50离开基体10’。微显示器80例如可以是上述相关实施例描述的技术或组合,此处不再赘述。在一些实施例中,光学模组能够与现有的例如近视、远视、护目、运动眼镜等普通眼镜结合即可实现增强显示的功能,使 得普通眼镜具备智能眼镜的增强现实的功能。可以理解,本申请相关附图(如1-2、8-11等等)中各反射面(例如第一反射面20’、第二反射面30)的黑色或者阴影区域仅示例其具有反射层,并不代表实际厚度设计。Among them, the incident surface 40 and the exit surface 50 are aspherical surfaces, spherical surfaces, free-form surfaces, or a combination thereof. The incident surface 40 is configured to receive light L from the image of the microdisplay 80. The light enters the substrate 10' through the non-planar (but non-spherical, spherical, free-form surfaces, or a combination thereof) incident surface 40, is reflected by the first reflection surface 20', then reflected by the second reflection surface 3, and leaves the substrate 10' through the non-planar exit surface 50. The microdisplay 80, for example, can be the technology or combination described in the above-mentioned related embodiments, which will not be repeated here. In some embodiments, the optical module can be combined with existing ordinary glasses such as myopia, hyperopia, eye protection, sports glasses, etc. to achieve the function of enhanced display, so that It is understood that the black or shaded areas of the reflective surfaces (such as the first reflective surface 20', the second reflective surface 30) in the relevant drawings (such as 1-2, 8-11, etc.) of the present application only illustrate that they have a reflective layer, and do not represent the actual thickness design.

可以理解,现有技术中,为了更好地使得微显示器80能够与入射面40贴合(例如光学胶水粘合等),入射面40一般为平面,在后续封装时确保整个模组的整体性(例如整体的规则圆柱等等),出射面50也往往是设计成平面,而本申请的研究发现,基于对产品设计中的尺寸要求,例如小型化、轻量化以及和现有眼镜的结合,并不可随意增大例如入射面、第一、二反射面、出射面的等尺寸,此时光学模组被限定为固定范围内的小尺寸,例如小于5mm*5mm*5mm甚至更小尺寸等等,本申请将原本入射面、出射面为平面改为非球面、球面、自由曲面一种或组合,充分对各面的形状构造进行重新设计,使得微显示器80的图像光线L由非平面的入射面40进入,其中入射面40为非球面、球面、自由曲面中的一种或者组合,然后进入基体10’至第一反射面20’,再反射到第二反射面30,最后通过非平面的出射面50离开基体10’,出射面50可以是非球面、球面、自由曲面中的一种或组合,来自微显示器80边缘或者靠近边缘位置的光线L(图67)更容易地往光轴方向靠拢,而现有平面入射面和出射面的来自微显示器80边缘或者靠近边缘位置的光线L无法向靠近光轴的方向靠拢,从而有效提升了来自微显示器80边缘或者靠近边缘位置的光线的利用率,有效降低了光损耗,使得光效得到有效提升,并且现有技术的光线不易朝光轴靠拢使得视场角偏小,而本申请充分利用中心和边缘的光线L使得视场角得到有效提升,另一方面,折叠光路有效地减少了整个光学系统的尺寸,使得整个模组更加便携,更短的反射路径减少了光损耗有效提升了光效,整体成像质量更好。It can be understood that in the prior art, in order to better enable the microdisplay 80 to fit with the incident surface 40 (for example, bonding with optical glue, etc.), the incident surface 40 is generally a plane, and the integrity of the entire module is ensured during subsequent packaging (for example, an overall regular cylinder, etc.), and the exit surface 50 is also often designed to be a plane. However, the research of the present application found that based on the size requirements in product design, such as miniaturization, lightweight, and combination with existing glasses, the sizes of the incident surface, the first and second reflecting surfaces, and the exit surface cannot be increased arbitrarily. At this time, the optical module is limited to a small size within a fixed range, such as less than 5mm*5mm*5mm or even smaller. The present application changes the original incident surface and the exit surface from a plane to a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, a free-form surface, or a combination thereof, and fully redesigns the shape structure of each surface, so that the image light L of the microdisplay 80 enters from the non-planar incident surface 40, wherein the incident surface 40 is a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, a free-form surface, or a combination thereof, and then enters the substrate. 10' to the first reflection surface 20', then reflected to the second reflection surface 30, and finally leave the substrate 10' through the non-planar exit surface 50. The exit surface 50 can be one or a combination of a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, and a free-form surface. The light L (Figure 67) from the edge of the microdisplay 80 or near the edge position is more likely to move toward the optical axis, while the light L from the edge of the microdisplay 80 or near the edge position of the existing planar incident surface and exit surface cannot move toward the direction close to the optical axis, thereby effectively improving the utilization rate of the light from the edge of the microdisplay 80 or near the edge position, effectively reducing light loss, and effectively improving the light effect. In addition, the light in the prior art is not easy to move toward the optical axis, resulting in a small field of view angle, while the present application makes full use of the light L at the center and the edge, so that the field of view angle is effectively improved. On the other hand, the folded optical path effectively reduces the size of the entire optical system, making the entire module more portable, and the shorter reflection path reduces light loss and effectively improves the light effect, and the overall imaging quality is better.

在一些实施例中,环形侧面60的横向尺寸沿第二反射面30至出射面50的连线方向具有减少的趋势,即出射面50的最大外轮廓尺寸可以小于第二反射面30的最大外轮廓尺寸,从而可以确保从微显示器80由入射面40边缘进入的光线L有效地收缩到中心光轴Z的位置,进一步有效提升视场角,且图像成像质量更佳。In some embodiments, the lateral dimension of the annular side surface 60 tends to decrease along the line direction from the second reflective surface 30 to the exit surface 50, that is, the maximum outer contour dimension of the exit surface 50 can be smaller than the maximum outer contour dimension of the second reflective surface 30, thereby ensuring that the light L entering from the edge of the incident surface 40 from the micro display 80 is effectively contracted to the position of the central optical axis Z, further effectively improving the field of view angle and improving the image quality.

在一些实施例中,结合参阅图62,第一反射面20’、第二反射面30为非球面、球面、自由曲面的全内反射表面中一种或组合,可以理解,此种反射能够有效地降低光学损耗,提升光效和成像质量。其中,入射面40从中心到外围包括第一段和第二段,第一段朝光轴Z的第一方向弯曲,第一方向可以是光轴Z的正方向(出光方向),第二段朝光轴Z与第一方向相背的第二方向的弯曲,第二方向可以是光轴Z的负方向(背离出光的方向),第一反射面20’、第二反射面30、出射面50朝光轴Z的第一方向弯曲,即朝光轴Z的正方向弯曲。可以理解,入射面40的第一段对应在微显示器80的区域为微显示器80的中心或靠近中心,第二段对应在微显示器80的区域为微显示器80的边缘或靠近边缘(相对远离中心)的区域,因此可以尽可能地将微显示器80的边缘或靠近边缘的光线反射至第一反射面20’的边缘或靠近边缘,然后由第一反射面20’进一步反射至第二反射面30的边缘或靠近边缘,最终由非平面的出射面50使得光线朝靠近光轴Z的中心靠拢,有效提升了微显示器80边缘或靠近边缘的光线利用率,提升光效和成像质量。第一反射面20’、第二反射面30、出射面50和入射面40可以都采用非平面设计,例如可为非球面、球面、自由曲面一种或组合,但是其弯曲方向可是不一样的,其中第一反射面20’、第二反射面30、出射面50可以是相同,如下表1所描述的第一反射面20’、第二反射面30、出射面50的矢高值为正值,入射面40的矢高值在0-0.6mm范围内都是正值,而0.65-0.85mm范围内则为负值,可见入射面40是先朝光轴正方向弯曲然后朝光轴的负方向弯曲,配合其它面的设计能够有效增大出射光线的视场角,并提升光效,图像质量更佳。 In some embodiments, referring to FIG. 62 , the first reflection surface 20 ′ and the second reflection surface 30 are one or a combination of total internal reflection surfaces of aspherical, spherical, and free-form surfaces. It can be understood that such reflection can effectively reduce optical loss and improve light efficiency and imaging quality. Among them, the incident surface 40 includes a first section and a second section from the center to the periphery, the first section is bent toward the first direction of the optical axis Z, the first direction can be the positive direction of the optical axis Z (light emitting direction), the second section is bent toward the second direction of the optical axis Z opposite to the first direction, the second direction can be the negative direction of the optical axis Z (away from the light emitting direction), the first reflection surface 20 ′, the second reflection surface 30, and the exit surface 50 are bent toward the first direction of the optical axis Z, that is, bent toward the positive direction of the optical axis Z. It can be understood that the first section of the incident surface 40 corresponds to an area of the microdisplay 80 that is the center or close to the center of the microdisplay 80, and the second section corresponds to an area of the microdisplay 80 that is the edge or close to the edge (relatively far from the center) of the microdisplay 80. Therefore, the light at the edge or close to the edge of the microdisplay 80 can be reflected as much as possible to the edge or close to the edge of the first reflecting surface 20', and then further reflected by the first reflecting surface 20' to the edge or close to the edge of the second reflecting surface 30. Finally, the non-planar exit surface 50 makes the light move closer to the center of the optical axis Z, thereby effectively improving the utilization rate of the light at the edge or close to the edge of the microdisplay 80, and improving the lighting effect and imaging quality. The first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30, the exit surface 50 and the incident surface 40 may all adopt a non-planar design, for example, they may be a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, a free-form surface or a combination thereof, but their bending directions may be different, wherein the first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30 and the exit surface 50 may be the same, as described in Table 1 below, the sagittal values of the first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30 and the exit surface 50 are positive values, the sagittal value of the incident surface 40 is positive in the range of 0-0.6mm, and is negative in the range of 0.65-0.85mm, it can be seen that the incident surface 40 is first bent toward the positive direction of the optical axis and then toward the negative direction of the optical axis, and the design of other surfaces can effectively increase the field of view of the exiting light, improve the light effect, and achieve better image quality.

在一些实施例中,第二反射面30、出射面50、入射面40和第一反射面20’在垂直光轴Z所处平面上具有投影轮廓形状,轮廓形状可以是圆、椭圆、多边形、圆角矩形、梯形等等几何图形,垂直光轴Z所处平面例如可以是横截面,还可以是从第一端12’或第二端14’看或者对应的俯视图或仰视图所在的平面,其中,入射面40和第一反射面20’的轮廓形状可以互为相似形状,第二反射面30和出射面50的轮廓形状可以互为相似形状,在另一些实施例中,如图68所示,入射面40的轮廓形状也可以和第二反射面30的轮廓形状相似;出射面50的轮廓形状还可以和第一反射面20’的轮廓形状相似,例如都为正多边形等等。可以理解,可以根据微显示器80的或者整体的外轮廓灵活设计相关面的外轮廓的几何形状,满足不同尺寸形状的装配需求,充分地获取来自微显示器80的光线,另一方面,第二反射面30、出射面50、入射面40和第一反射面20’可以都是相同的,例如都是圆形、椭圆形或者正多边形轮廓中的一种,使得微显示器80的光线能够被充分的反射利用,实现较佳的成像质量和出光效率。In some embodiments, the second reflecting surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflecting surface 20' have a projected contour shape on the plane where the vertical optical axis Z is located. The contour shape can be a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, a rounded rectangle, a trapezoid, or other geometric figures. The plane where the vertical optical axis Z is located can be, for example, a cross section, or it can be a plane viewed from the first end 12' or the second end 14' or a corresponding top view or bottom view. Among them, the contour shapes of the incident surface 40 and the first reflecting surface 20' can be similar to each other, and the contour shapes of the second reflecting surface 30 and the exit surface 50 can be similar to each other. In other embodiments, as shown in Figure 68, the contour shape of the incident surface 40 can also be similar to the contour shape of the second reflecting surface 30; the contour shape of the exit surface 50 can also be similar to the contour shape of the first reflecting surface 20', for example, both are regular polygons, etc. It can be understood that the geometric shape of the outer contour of the relevant surface can be flexibly designed according to the outer contour of the microdisplay 80 or the whole to meet the assembly requirements of different sizes and shapes and fully obtain the light from the microdisplay 80. On the other hand, the second reflection surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflection surface 20' can all be the same, for example, they are all one of the circular, elliptical or regular polygonal contours, so that the light of the microdisplay 80 can be fully reflected and utilized, achieving better imaging quality and light extraction efficiency.

在一些实施例中,结合参阅图60、62-64,第一反射面20’包括第一顶点O2,第二反射面30包括第二顶点O3,入射面40包括第三顶点O4,出射面50包括第四顶点O5;第一顶点O2、第二顶点O3、第三顶点O4和第四顶点O5位于光轴Z上,入射面40、第一反射面20’、第二反射面30和出射面50相对光轴所在横截面呈对称设计以确保光学模组100’不偏心,即不会存在一边的光路区域比另外一边光路区域过大或过小。可以理解,第二顶点Q3可以是第二反射面30的曲面相对入射面40中心延长后最终交汇形成的点,图62(b)中虚线示意其朝中心的延长交汇形成第二顶点Q3,同理,第四顶点Q5可以是出射面50的曲面相对第一反射面20’中心延长后最终交汇形成的点,图62(d)中虚线示意其朝中心的延长交汇形成第四顶点Q5。可以理解,第二反射面30、出射面50、入射面40和第一反射面20’的顶点都位于同一光轴Z上,能够确保整体的光路对称,第二反射面30、出射面50、入射面40和第一反射面20’可以相对光轴Z对称设计,或者上述各面可以相对经过光轴Z所在平面对称设计,第二反射面30、出射面50、入射面40和第一反射面20’为同轴设计,能够确保整个光路不发生偏心(偏离光轴Z等),确保成像更加清晰,成像质量更高。In some embodiments, referring to Figures 60, 62-64, the first reflecting surface 20' includes a first vertex O2, the second reflecting surface 30 includes a second vertex O3, the incident surface 40 includes a third vertex O4, and the exit surface 50 includes a fourth vertex O5; the first vertex O2, the second vertex O3, the third vertex O4 and the fourth vertex O5 are located on the optical axis Z, and the incident surface 40, the first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30 and the exit surface 50 are symmetrically designed relative to the cross-section where the optical axis is located to ensure that the optical module 100' is not eccentric, that is, the optical path area on one side will not be too large or too small than the optical path area on the other side. It can be understood that the second vertex Q3 can be the point formed by the final intersection of the curved surface of the second reflecting surface 30 extended relative to the center of the incident surface 40. The dotted line in Figure 62(b) indicates that the extension toward the center intersects to form the second vertex Q3. Similarly, the fourth vertex Q5 can be the point formed by the final intersection of the curved surface of the exit surface 50 extended relative to the center of the first reflecting surface 20'. The dotted line in Figure 62(d) indicates that the extension toward the center intersects to form the fourth vertex Q5. It can be understood that the vertices of the second reflection surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflection surface 20' are all located on the same optical axis Z, which can ensure the symmetry of the overall light path. The second reflection surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflection surface 20' can be designed symmetrically relative to the optical axis Z, or the above-mentioned surfaces can be designed symmetrically relative to the plane passing through the optical axis Z. The second reflection surface 30, the exit surface 50, the incident surface 40 and the first reflection surface 20' are coaxially designed, which can ensure that the entire light path is not eccentric (deviating from the optical axis Z, etc.), ensuring clearer imaging and higher imaging quality.

在一些实施例中,参阅图60、63和64,入射面40和第二反射面30相交于第一交线122’,出射面50和第一反射面20’相交于第二交线124’,这里的第一交线122’和第二交线124’可以理解成不同面相交处,图中为方便理解用虚线表示,交线形状可以由入射面40、第一反射面20’的外轮廓形状确定,或者交线形状可以由第二反射面30的内轮廓形状或者出射面50的内轮廓形状确定。例如交线122’、124’可以是圆、椭圆或者多边形等等。入射面40、第一反射面20’的形状可以为圆、椭圆或者多边形等等。在一些实施例中,第一顶点O2与第三顶点O4之间的距离不大于2.8mm,即光学模组100’的中心厚度,例如沿光轴Z的中心厚度不大于2.8mm,例如可以为2.8mm、2.5mm、2mm、1.8mm、1.6mm等等,在另一些实施例中,此厚度还可以理解为出射面50和入射面40之间的平均厚度,或者整个基体10’的平均厚度等等;第一交线122’相对于第二顶点O3和第三顶点O4连线的距离不大于1.35mm,即入射面40的半径不大于1.35mm,例如可以为1.35mm、1.2mm、1mm、0.8mm、0.6mm等等,第二交线124’相对于第一顶点O2和第四顶点O5连线的距离不大于1.5mm,即第一反射面20’的半径不大于1.5mm,例如可以为1.5mm、1.3mm、1mm、0.85mm、0.75mm等等。在一些实施例中,环形侧面60、出光面50和第二反射面30各自对应的半径(外轮廓至顶点的垂直距离)可不大于3mm,即环形侧面60的半径不大于3mm,出光面50的半径不大于3mm,第二反射面30的半径不大于3mm,例如可以为3mm、2.8mm、2.5mm、2mm等等;第二交线124’至出射面50的边缘距离的距离可以具有一周向上的相同值,例如出射面50的宽度值沿第一反射面20’的周向上的保持一致;其中,第二交线124’至出射面50的边缘 距离大于0小于等于1.6mm,例如可以为1mm、1.5mm、0.8、0.7mm等等。可以理解,上述参数不应在相互组合时互相矛盾,上述半径可以是各面在某平面上的投影形状为圆形的半径参数等,在另一些实施例中,如果上述各相关面在某平面上的投影形状不是圆形,例如正多边形,椭圆或其它规则图形等等,上述半径也可描述为其具有的最大的半径,例如以椭圆为例,其长边可理解成上述描述的半径,本申请实施例的尺寸设计可使得整个光学模组具有更小体积和重量,且不影响光路传输效率,有利于和现有的近眼显示装置(例如近远视、护目、运动、智能眼镜,头盔)的框体或者镜片相互适配,而且不用大改现有显示装置的结构设计等,可以实现将增强显示和传统显示装置的兼容,提升光学模组的便携性和丰富应用场景。In some embodiments, referring to Figures 60, 63 and 64, the incident surface 40 and the second reflective surface 30 intersect at a first intersection line 122', and the exit surface 50 and the first reflective surface 20' intersect at a second intersection line 124'. The first intersection line 122' and the second intersection line 124' here can be understood as the intersection of different surfaces. For ease of understanding, the figure uses dotted lines to indicate the shape of the intersection line. The shape of the intersection line can be determined by the outer contour shape of the incident surface 40 and the first reflective surface 20', or the shape of the intersection line can be determined by the inner contour shape of the second reflective surface 30 or the inner contour shape of the exit surface 50. For example, the intersection lines 122' and 124' can be circles, ellipses, polygons, etc. The shapes of the incident surface 40 and the first reflective surface 20' can be circles, ellipses, polygons, etc. In some embodiments, the distance between the first vertex O2 and the third vertex O4 is not greater than 2.8 mm, that is, the central thickness of the optical module 100', for example, the central thickness along the optical axis Z is not greater than 2.8 mm, for example, it can be 2.8 mm, 2.5 mm, 2 mm, 1.8 mm, 1.6 mm, etc. In other embodiments, this thickness can also be understood as the average thickness between the exit surface 50 and the incident surface 40, or the average thickness of the entire substrate 10', etc.; the first intersection line 122' is relative to the second vertex The distance between O3 and the line connecting the third vertex O4 is not greater than 1.35 mm, that is, the radius of the incident surface 40 is not greater than 1.35 mm, for example, it can be 1.35 mm, 1.2 mm, 1 mm, 0.8 mm, 0.6 mm, etc. The distance between the second intersection line 124' and the line connecting the first vertex O2 and the fourth vertex O5 is not greater than 1.5 mm, that is, the radius of the first reflecting surface 20' is not greater than 1.5 mm, for example, it can be 1.5 mm, 1.3 mm, 1 mm, 0.85 mm, 0.75 mm, etc. In some embodiments, the radius (vertical distance from the outer contour to the vertex) corresponding to the annular side surface 60, the light emitting surface 50, and the second reflecting surface 30 may be no greater than 3 mm, that is, the radius of the annular side surface 60 is no greater than 3 mm, the radius of the light emitting surface 50 is no greater than 3 mm, and the radius of the second reflecting surface 30 is no greater than 3 mm, for example, it can be 3 mm, 2.8 mm, 2.5 mm, 2 mm, etc.; the distance from the second intersection line 124' to the edge of the emission surface 50 can have the same value in a circumferential direction, for example, the width value of the emission surface 50 is consistent along the circumference of the first reflecting surface 20'; wherein, the distance from the second intersection line 124' to the edge of the emission surface 50 The distance is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1.6mm, for example, it can be 1mm, 1.5mm, 0.8, 0.7mm, etc. It can be understood that the above parameters should not contradict each other when combined with each other. The above radius can be the radius parameter of the projection shape of each face on a plane that is a circle, etc. In other embodiments, if the projection shape of the above-mentioned related faces on a plane is not a circle, such as a regular polygon, an ellipse or other regular figures, etc., the above radius can also be described as the maximum radius it has. For example, taking an ellipse as an example, its long side can be understood as the radius described above. The size design of the embodiment of the present application can make the entire optical module have a smaller volume and weight, and does not affect the light path transmission efficiency, which is conducive to mutual adaptation with the frame or lens of the existing near-eye display device (such as near and far vision, eye protection, sports, smart glasses, helmets), and there is no need to significantly change the structural design of the existing display device, etc., which can achieve the compatibility of enhanced display and traditional display devices, improve the portability of the optical module and enrich the application scenarios.

在一些实施例中,如图73所示,来自微显示器的光线经过光学模组由眼球300的瞳孔至视网膜成像形成的图像310,图73中的相关部件(例如眼球300、图像310等)的位置构造关系仅为方便计算和理解的示例性描述图示,以下计算过程可以是在一维中进行的,并进行了某些例如小角度的近似以说明各种原理,其中,小角度近似:θ≈sinθ≈tanθ,以上计算可以直接扩展到二维,并且可以进行更精确的计算。其中视场角FOV(Field Of View)可以由光学模组最终成像到其中,从视网膜端,根据光学扩展量Eeye计算公式:
In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 73 , light from the microdisplay passes through the optical module from the pupil of the eyeball 300 to the retina to form an image 310. The positional structural relationship of the relevant components (e.g., the eyeball 300, the image 310, etc.) in FIG. 73 is only an exemplary description diagram for convenience of calculation and understanding. The following calculation process can be performed in one dimension, and some approximations such as small angles are performed to illustrate various principles, wherein the small angle approximation is: θ≈sinθ≈tanθ. The above calculation can be directly extended to two dimensions, and more accurate calculations can be performed. The field of view FOV (Field Of View) can be finally imaged by the optical module, from the retinal end, according to the optical extension E eye calculation formula:

在一些实施例中,可以根据上述公式{1}的推导可以得到视场角FOV的下限为:其中, In some embodiments, the lower limit of the field of view FOV can be obtained according to the derivation of the above formula {1}: in,

其中,从光学模组端,根据光学扩展量Eeye计算公式:
Among them, from the optical module side, according to the optical extension E eye calculation formula:

在一些实施例中可以根据上述公式{3}的推导可以得到视场角FOV的上限为:
In some embodiments, the upper limit of the field of view FOV can be obtained according to the derivation of the above formula {3}:

以上公式中,FOV为视场角,neye为眼球的折射率,Dp为瞳孔的孔直径,θeye为视网膜上点接受光线角度,Ieye为视网膜成像图像310大小,Deye为眼球直径,feye为眼球焦距,θm为微显示器有效出射角度,Dm为光学模组的最大外径(即环形侧面60、出光面50和第二反射面30其中一个中的最大外径),S1为入射面40的直径(即第一交线122’相对于第二顶点O3和第三顶点O4连线的距离的 两倍),S2为第一反射面20’的直径(即第二交线124’相对于第一顶点O2和第四顶点O5连线的距离的两倍),Lm为基体10’的厚度,也可为光轴的中心厚度或者基体10’的平均厚度,或者光学由微显示器到第一反射面20’的平均厚度等等。In the above formula, FOV is the field of view, n eye is the refractive index of the eyeball, D p is the diameter of the pupil, θ eye is the angle at which a point on the retina receives light, I eye is the size of the retinal image 310, D eye is the diameter of the eyeball, f eye is the focal length of the eyeball, θ m is the effective emission angle of the micro display, Dm is the maximum outer diameter of the optical module (i.e., the maximum outer diameter of one of the annular side surface 60, the light emitting surface 50, and the second reflecting surface 30), S 1 is the diameter of the incident surface 40 (i.e., the distance between the first intersection line 122' and the line connecting the second vertex O3 and the third vertex O4). twice), S2 is the diameter of the first reflective surface 20' (i.e., twice the distance of the second intersection line 124' relative to the line connecting the first vertex O2 and the fourth vertex O5), Lm is the thickness of the substrate 10', and can also be the center thickness of the optical axis or the average thickness of the substrate 10', or the average thickness from the micro display to the first reflective surface 20', etc.

可以理解,视场角的上限值往往更多地由光学模组参数决定,而实际设计时一般光学模组的尺寸已经被限制的较为严格(或者已经固定),例如具有小尺寸并与传统头戴式适配,因此视场角的能够满足的下限值往往更加重要并且能够根据实际需要被设计。在视场角FOV的下限公式中,第一项为角度在成像图像大小上的二重积分,其在光学模组设计上,整体作为隐性表达存在,而将入射面40和出射面50设计为非平面,其中非平面可以为非球面、球面、自由曲面中的一种或组合,非平面可以使得该二重积分值增大,从而提升光学模组的视场角的下限值(即最小值)。可见在现有尺寸和眼球等相关参数被限定时,视场角在限定尺寸内较难发生改变,因此本申请通过改变入射面40和出射面50的形状,将原先的平面设计改为非平面设计,使得微显示器相对边缘的光线能够进入第一反射面20’并通过出射面50投射到基体10’外部,从效果上看,来自微显示器边缘的光线被更加充分的利用,且可以相对光轴Z形成具有更大夹角的投射光线,从而形成更大的视场角,光效更佳,成像质量更好。It can be understood that the upper limit of the field of view angle is often more determined by the optical module parameters, and in actual design, the size of the optical module is generally restricted more strictly (or fixed), such as having a small size and being compatible with traditional head-mounted devices. Therefore, the lower limit of the field of view angle that can be met is often more important and can be designed according to actual needs. In the formula for the lower limit of the field of view angle FOV, the first term is the double integral of the angle over the image size, which exists as an implicit expression in the design of the optical module as a whole, and the incident surface 40 and the exit surface 50 are designed as non-planar surfaces, wherein the non-planar surface can be one or a combination of a non-spherical surface, a spherical surface, and a free-form surface. The non-planar surface can increase the double integral value, thereby increasing the lower limit (i.e., the minimum value) of the field of view angle of the optical module. It can be seen that when the existing size and related parameters such as the eyeball are limited, the field of view angle is difficult to change within the limited size. Therefore, the present application changes the original planar design to a non-planar design by changing the shapes of the incident surface 40 and the exit surface 50, so that the light from the relative edge of the micro display can enter the first reflection surface 20' and be projected to the outside of the substrate 10' through the exit surface 50. In terms of effect, the light from the edge of the micro display is more fully utilized, and a projection light with a larger angle relative to the optical axis Z can be formed, thereby forming a larger field of view angle, better lighting effect, and better imaging quality.

在一些实施例中,入射面40、第一反射面20’、第二反射面30、出射面50的非球面、球面、自由曲面可由多项式矢高方程所描述,例如采用泽尼克多项式(Zernike polynomials)计算得到,多项式矢高方程可为:In some embodiments, the aspherical surface, spherical surface, and free-form surface of the incident surface 40, the first reflecting surface 20', the second reflecting surface 30, and the exit surface 50 can be described by a polynomial vector height equation, for example, calculated using Zernike polynomials, and the polynomial vector height equation can be:

其中, in,

Z是面矢高,即距顶点的距离(例如图62c中的s2’),h是径向距离(曲面到光轴的距离,例如3c中的h2’),c是曲面的曲率,k是系数,A、B、C、D分别是对应的多阶系数;其中,当k、A、B、C、D为零时,其可以为球面的矢高计算公式;作为自由曲面的话,可以取多个参考点为做解析式求得;图62中分别示例各相关面的轮廓示意图,其中图62(a)为入射面40的轮廓示意图,图62(b)为第二反射面30的轮廓示意图,图62(c)为第一反射面20’轮廓示意图,图62(d)为出射面50的轮廓示意图;以图62(c)的第一反射面20’的轮廓示意图为例,第一反射面20’具有顶点O2,且关于两正交轴弯曲(例如图h-Z轴),第一反射面20’具有至少一个第一位置212’距穿过顶点O2的Z轴(光轴)具有径向距离h1,并且距在顶点O2处相对h轴具有位移s2’,下表1示例性地描述一些表面中各相关的参数(示例性地选取了部分),其中h4-Z4对应为入射面40的参数,h2-Z2对应为第一反射面20’的参数,h3-Z3对应为第二反射面30的参数,h5-Z5对应为出射面50的参数。Z is the surface height, that is, the distance from the vertex (such as s2' in Figure 62c), h is the radial distance (the distance from the curved surface to the optical axis, such as h2' in 3c), c is the curvature of the curved surface, k is the coefficient, and A, B, C, and D are the corresponding multi-order coefficients respectively; among them, when k, A, B, C, and D are zero, it can be the calculation formula of the height of the sphere; as a free-form surface, multiple reference points can be taken as analytical expressions to obtain; Figure 62 shows the contour schematic diagrams of each related surface, among which Figure 62(a) is the contour schematic diagram of the incident surface 40, Figure 62(b) is the contour schematic diagram of the second reflecting surface 30, Figure 62(c) is the contour schematic diagram of the first reflecting surface 20', and Figure 62(d) is the contour schematic diagram of the exit surface 50. Outline schematic diagram; taking the outline schematic diagram of the first reflecting surface 20' in Figure 62 (c) as an example, the first reflecting surface 20' has a vertex O2 and is bent about two orthogonal axes (for example, the h-Z axis in the figure), the first reflecting surface 20' has at least one first position 212' having a radial distance h1 from the Z axis (optical axis) passing through the vertex O2, and having a displacement s2' relative to the h axis at the vertex O2. The following Table 1 exemplarily describes the relevant parameters of some surfaces (part of them are selected for example), where h4-Z4 correspond to the parameters of the incident surface 40, h2-Z2 correspond to the parameters of the first reflecting surface 20', h3-Z3 correspond to the parameters of the second reflecting surface 30, and h5-Z5 correspond to the parameters of the exit surface 50.

表1
Table 1

在一些实施例中,结合参阅图65-66,光学模组还包括外沿70,外沿70设于环形侧面60上,外沿70的高度可高于环形侧面60,其中外沿70周向可以是一整圈、也可以间隔等等,外沿70在光轴Z方向上的延伸可以不超过环形侧面60,即外沿70的厚度可以不超过环形侧面69的高度,因此外沿70可以是做得比较薄的凸起,或者外沿70也可是螺纹或者其它卡接结构等,在一些实施例中,外沿70可以位于靠近出射面50的一端,外沿70配置成与外部机构相互装配,外部机构可以是例如夹具、治具等,从而可以方便夹持或运输光学模组,避免对基体10’或其它表面的损害,或者外部机构还可以是光学模组需要被装配到的相关壳体,例如对应的装配壳体设有固定槽等,可以通过外沿70光学模组整个进行定位或固定。In some embodiments, in combination with reference to Figures 65-66, the optical module also includes an outer edge 70, which is arranged on the annular side surface 60. The height of the outer edge 70 can be higher than the annular side surface 60, wherein the circumference of the outer edge 70 can be a full circle, or can be spaced, etc. The extension of the outer edge 70 in the optical axis Z direction may not exceed the annular side surface 60, that is, the thickness of the outer edge 70 may not exceed the height of the annular side surface 69, so the outer edge 70 can be a relatively thin protrusion, or the outer edge 70 can also be a thread or other clip-on structure, etc. In some embodiments, the outer edge 70 can be located at one end close to the exit surface 50, and the outer edge 70 is configured to be assembled with an external mechanism. The external mechanism can be, for example, a clamp, a jig, etc., so that the optical module can be easily clamped or transported to avoid damage to the substrate 10' or other surfaces, or the external mechanism can also be a related shell to which the optical module needs to be assembled. For example, the corresponding assembly shell is provided with a fixing groove, etc., and the entire optical module can be positioned or fixed by the outer edge 70.

在一些实施例中,参阅图65-66,外沿70还设有至少一直边72,例如外沿70如果是圆形的为例,直边72可以是和外沿70相切,在另一些实施例中,外沿70上也可设有两条相互平行直边72,或者更多条等等,当然如果外沿本身可以为多边形,此时多边形的直边可以为直边72,直边72被配置成与外部机构配合以定位基体10’旋转调节的定位。可以理解,外部机构可以是例如夹具、治具等,相互平行的直边可以更好地使得基体10’被定位或者夹持。在其它实施例中,外部机构可以是例如装配壳体,有时需要对光学模组整体在装配壳体内进行旋转,例如调节光学模组的出光角度等等,此时直边72可以起到防呆、定位等作用。In some embodiments, referring to Figures 65-66, the outer edge 70 is also provided with at least one straight edge 72. For example, if the outer edge 70 is circular, the straight edge 72 may be tangent to the outer edge 70. In other embodiments, the outer edge 70 may also be provided with two straight edges 72 that are parallel to each other, or more straight edges, etc. Of course, if the outer edge itself can be a polygon, the straight edge of the polygon can be a straight edge 72, and the straight edge 72 is configured to cooperate with an external mechanism to position the base 10' for rotation adjustment. It can be understood that the external mechanism can be, for example, a clamp, a jig, etc., and the parallel straight edges can better position or clamp the base 10'. In other embodiments, the external mechanism can be, for example, an assembly shell. Sometimes, it is necessary to rotate the optical module as a whole in the assembly shell, for example, to adjust the light output angle of the optical module, etc. At this time, the straight edge 72 can play a role in foolproofing and positioning.

在一些实施例中,如图61,光学模组还可包括遮蔽层66,遮蔽层66覆盖环形侧面60,且被配置成阻挡微显示器80的光线从环形侧面60传输到基体10’外部。其中,遮蔽层66可以是黑色环氧树脂、黑色硅橡胶、碳黑、镍黑、黑铬或梵塔黑等涂层或材料,当然也可为不透光的密封套筒等等。遮蔽层66可以确保光线由出射面50射出离开基体10’,而不从环形侧面60离开,有效提升光学效率。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG61 , the optical module may further include a shielding layer 66, which covers the annular side surface 60 and is configured to block the light of the micro display 80 from being transmitted from the annular side surface 60 to the outside of the substrate 10 '. The shielding layer 66 may be a coating or material such as black epoxy resin, black silicone rubber, carbon black, nickel black, black chrome or Vanta black, and may also be a light-proof sealing sleeve, etc. The shielding layer 66 can ensure that the light is emitted from the exit surface 50 and leaves the substrate 10 ', but not from the annular side surface 60, thereby effectively improving the optical efficiency.

在一些实施例中,结合参阅图68-71,环形侧面60还包括第一环面62和第二环面64,第一环面62的周向尺寸小于第二环面64,第一环面62第一端与第一反射面20’连接,第一环面62的第二端与出射面50的第一端连接,出射面50的第二端与第二环面64的第一端连接,第二环面64的第二端与第二反射面30连接第一环面62的第一端和第二端为相对的两端,第二环面64的第一端和第二端为相对的两端。可以理解,出射面50位于具有不同尺寸的第一环面62和第二环面64之间,在一些实施例中,第一环面62和第二环面64沿光轴Z的正方向可以具有逐渐缩小的趋势,进而能够有效收光,可以理解,由于第一环面62和第二环面64具有差异较大的横向尺寸,以形成阶梯状构造,从而可以进一步减少整体的尺寸和重量。In some embodiments, referring to FIGS. 68-71 , the annular side surface 60 further includes a first annular surface 62 and a second annular surface 64. The circumferential dimension of the first annular surface 62 is smaller than that of the second annular surface 64. The first end of the first annular surface 62 is connected to the first reflection surface 20 ′, the second end of the first annular surface 62 is connected to the first end of the exit surface 50, the second end of the exit surface 50 is connected to the first end of the second annular surface 64, and the second end of the second annular surface 64 is connected to the second reflection surface 30. The first end and the second end of the first annular surface 62 are opposite ends, and the first end and the second end of the second annular surface 64 are opposite ends. It can be understood that the exit surface 50 is located between the first annular surface 62 and the second annular surface 64 of different sizes. In some embodiments, the first annular surface 62 and the second annular surface 64 may have a tendency to gradually shrink along the positive direction of the optical axis Z, so as to effectively collect light. It can be understood that since the first annular surface 62 and the second annular surface 64 have a large difference in transverse dimensions to form a stepped structure, the overall size and weight can be further reduced.

在一些实施例中,结合图70,位于第二环面64的遮蔽层66从出射面50的边缘沿原理出射面50的方向延伸,且位于第二环面64的遮蔽层66的端面不高于第一反射面20’的端面位于第二环面64的遮蔽层66足够长可阻挡光线从出射面50的边缘过早地进入外部,也可以降低杂散光的形成。In some embodiments, in combination with Figure 70, the shielding layer 66 located on the second annular surface 64 extends from the edge of the exit surface 50 along the direction of the principle exit surface 50, and the end surface of the shielding layer 66 located on the second annular surface 64 is not higher than the end surface of the first reflection surface 20'. The shielding layer 66 located on the second annular surface 64 is long enough to block the light from entering the outside from the edge of the exit surface 50 too early, and can also reduce the formation of stray light.

在一些实施例中,如图72,光学模组还包括消光壁90,其可以是不透光(例如上述的遮蔽层66相同的材料)的材料制成或者能够阻挡特定波长的材料等等。基体10’、第一反射面20’、第二反射面30和出射面50分别包括至少两组,消光壁90连接在相邻两个基体10’之间,例如位于相邻两个光学模组的环形侧面60之间,消光壁90被配置成阻挡其中一基体10’的光线进入相邻的另一基体10’内,可以理解,在两组光学模组中,基体10’与基体10’之间被连接成一个整体,其中每一光学模组对应设置有一个微显示器80,即对应单个入射面设置一个微显示器,在其它实施例中,还可以是一个微显示器对应多个入射面40,其中消光壁90的高度可以大于等于第二反射面30到出射面50的距离,即确保相 邻两个基体10’的光线不会相互串扰,有效降低杂散光的产生。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 72 , the optical module further includes a matte wall 90, which may be made of a light-impermeable material (e.g., the same material as the shielding layer 66 described above) or a material capable of blocking specific wavelengths, etc. The substrate 10', the first reflection surface 20', the second reflection surface 30, and the exit surface 50 each include at least two groups, and the matte wall 90 is connected between two adjacent substrates 10', for example, between the annular side surfaces 60 of two adjacent optical modules, and the matte wall 90 is configured to block the light of one substrate 10' from entering the other adjacent substrate 10'. It can be understood that in the two groups of optical modules, the substrates 10' and the substrates 10' are connected as a whole, wherein each optical module is provided with a corresponding microdisplay 80, that is, a microdisplay is provided for a single incident surface, and in other embodiments, a microdisplay may correspond to multiple incident surfaces 40, wherein the height of the matte wall 90 may be greater than or equal to the distance from the second reflection surface 30 to the exit surface 50, that is, to ensure the relative Light from two adjacent substrates 10 ′ will not interfere with each other, thus effectively reducing the generation of stray light.

本申请还提供一种近眼显示装置200’,结合参阅图67、69,其包括:The present application also provides a near-eye display device 200', referring to Figures 67 and 69, which includes:

微显示器80,以及microdisplay 80, and

如上述实施例所述的光学模组,微显示器80装设于入射面40。In the optical module described in the above embodiment, the micro display 80 is installed on the incident surface 40 .

具体实施时,以上各个单元或结构可以作为独立的实体来实现,也可以进行任意组合,作为同一或若干个实体来实现,以上各个单元或结构的具体实施可参见前面的实施例,在此不再赘述。可以理解,近眼显示装置200’还可以包括例如框体、镜片、电路板、电源、红外传感器、陀螺仪、温度传感器等等,以上这些为安装或者驱动其工作的构成在此不作过多赘述。In specific implementation, the above units or structures can be implemented as independent entities, or can be arbitrarily combined and implemented as the same or several entities. The specific implementation of the above units or structures can refer to the previous embodiments, which will not be repeated here. It can be understood that the near-eye display device 200' can also include, for example, a frame, a lens, a circuit board, a power supply, an infrared sensor, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, etc., and the above components for installing or driving its work will not be described in detail here.

参阅图74,本申请还提供一种光学模组的加工方法,所述光学模组为上述实施例所述的光学模组,加工方法包括以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 74 , the present application further provides a method for processing an optical module, wherein the optical module is the optical module described in the above embodiment, and the processing method comprises the following steps:

S111、形成一基体10’;基体10’的形成可以采用切削、注塑、模压成型。S111, forming a substrate 10'; the substrate 10' can be formed by cutting, injection molding, or compression molding.

S112、对所述基体10’的第一端12’形成出射面50和位于所述出射面50中心的第一反射面20’;其中,出射面50和第一反射面20’为球面、非球面、自由曲面中的一种或者组合;S112, forming an emission surface 50 and a first reflection surface 20' located at the center of the emission surface 50 on the first end 12' of the substrate 10'; wherein the emission surface 50 and the first reflection surface 20' are one or a combination of a spherical surface, an aspherical surface, and a free-form surface;

S113、对所述基体的第二端14’形成入射面40和环绕所述入射面40周向的第二反射面30;入射面40和第二反射膜30为球面、非球面自由曲面中的一种或者组合;第一端和第二端可以是相对的两端;可以理解,对应的球面、非球面、自由曲面的形成也可也采用例如切削或者注塑或模压成型等等。S113. An incident surface 40 and a second reflecting surface 30 surrounding the incident surface 40 are formed on the second end 14' of the substrate; the incident surface 40 and the second reflecting film 30 are one or a combination of spherical surfaces, aspherical surfaces and free-form surfaces; the first end and the second end can be opposite ends; it can be understood that the formation of the corresponding spherical surface, aspherical surface and free-form surface can also be achieved by, for example, cutting, injection molding or compression molding, etc.

S114、对所述第一反射面20’和第二反射面30镀反射膜,镀膜可以采用例如蒸镀、溅射等工艺形成,其中入射面40被配置成接收来自微显示器80图像的光线,所述光线通过非球面的入射面40进入基体10’,被第一反射面20’反射,然后被第二反射面30反射,并通过非球面的出射面50离开基体10’。关于光学模组的其它描述可以参阅上述实施例的描述,在此不再赘述。S114, coating the first reflective surface 20' and the second reflective surface 30 with a reflective film, the coating film can be formed by, for example, evaporation, sputtering, etc., wherein the incident surface 40 is configured to receive light from the image of the micro display 80, the light enters the substrate 10' through the aspherical incident surface 40, is reflected by the first reflective surface 20', then is reflected by the second reflective surface 30, and leaves the substrate 10' through the aspherical exit surface 50. For other descriptions of the optical module, please refer to the description of the above embodiment, which will not be repeated here.

近眼显示设备一般会采用例如光波导或者棱镜等光学方案,此类方案的光源(或者说图像源)或者部分光学大都设置在佩戴者的镜腿上,另外诸如光波导的光学方案对镜片有特殊要求,此类设备的体积和重量相对较大,用户较长时间的使用体验不佳,另一方面此类设备的显示模组的显示区域都是固定位置,若是需要显示设备在显示状态下进行自由或者特定位置的移动的供电往往存在困扰,因为有线的电性连接往往会因为导线的物理存在而与显示模组的移动形成干扰。Near-eye display devices generally adopt optical solutions such as optical waveguides or prisms. The light source (or image source) or part of the optics of such solutions are mostly set on the wearer's temples. In addition, optical solutions such as optical waveguides have special requirements for lenses. The size and weight of such devices are relatively large, and the user experience is not good for a long time. On the other hand, the display area of the display module of such devices is fixed in position. If the display device needs to move freely or to a specific position in the display state, there will often be problems with power supply, because the wired electrical connection will often interfere with the movement of the display module due to the physical existence of the wires.

请参阅图75,图75是本申请近眼显示设备一实施例的整体结构示意图,需要说明的是,本申请中的电子设备(近眼显示设备)可以是包括AR、VR、XR、MR等在内的智能眼镜结构和形态。其中,该近眼显示设备100包括镜框110、镜腿120和镜片130,镜腿120与镜框110连接,镜框110用于固定镜片130。镜片可以用于近视眼镜、远视眼镜、护目眼镜、太阳眼镜、智能眼镜及头盔等等,关于这部分的特征在本领域技术人员的理解范围内,此处不再赘述。Please refer to Figure 75, which is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a near-eye display device of the present application. It should be noted that the electronic device (near-eye display device) in the present application can be a smart glasses structure and form including AR, VR, XR, MR, etc. Among them, the near-eye display device 100 includes a frame 110, temples 120 and lenses 130, the temples 120 are connected to the frame 110, and the frame 110 is used to fix the lenses 130. The lenses can be used for myopia glasses, hyperopia glasses, goggles, sunglasses, smart glasses and helmets, etc. The features of this part are within the understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be repeated here.

可选地,请一并参阅图76~图79,图76是本申请近眼显示设备一实施例不含镜腿的整体结构示意图,图77是图75实施例另一视角的示意图,图78是显示模组及第一线圈皆有多个的整体结构示意图,图79是显示模组设置有线圈支架一实施例的结构剖视示意图;近眼显示设备100包括镜片130和显示模组1400;镜片130包括眼睛侧1320和环境侧1310;显示模组1400被配置成产生光线并投射至眼睛侧1320,第一电池123与显示模组1400间隔设置;镜片130环周设置有第一线圈1500,第一线圈1500环绕镜片130且电性连接第一电池123,第一线圈1500形成至少一回路,此回路用于和下文实施例出现的第二线圈1401’相互电磁感应;显示模组1400可拆卸地安装于镜片130表面的任意位置,显示模组1400被配置成在镜片130的表面任意位置皆可移动,用户可按需将显示模组1400移动至镜片130表面 的任意位置,显示模组1400用于显示信息,显示模组1400上设有第二线圈1401’;第二线圈1401’可与第一线圈1500相互感应,例如第一线圈1500作为发射端将电场转换成磁场,第二线圈1401’作为接收端将磁场转换成电场,其中,第二线圈1401’形成的回路尺寸小于第一线圈1500形成的回路尺寸,可以理解,上述感应被配置成第一线圈1500与第二线圈1401’的无线感应实现对显示模组1400在镜片130移动过程中或显示模组1400在镜片130预设区域的任意固定位置通过第一电池123给显示模组1400供电,可以理解,由于第一线圈1500环绕镜片130设置,显示模组可以在镜片130表面自由移动,当用户移动到合适自己的观看位置时则可以保持在某一个固定位置,不管是在移动过程中还是固定位置都能够实现通过第一线圈1500与第二线圈1401’的无线感应实现对显示模组1400供电。在一些实施例中,预设区域可以是位于镜片130上被第一线圈1500环绕的内圈区域,在另一些实施例中,预设区域还可以是镜片130上被第一线圈1500环绕的外圈区域,用户可以根据需要自由移动选择预设区域的位置,其中,任意固定位置可以是用户移动显示模组后停留的某个或任意固定位置,此位置可以取决于用户的操作需要或者视野观看需要。例如镜片对齐眼睛的视野中心往往是较佳的位置,当然如果用户此时想看真实的环境侧1310物理世界,则可以将显示模组1400往偏离视野中心的位置移动,甚至用户还可以将显示模组1400移动到对应眼睛的视野盲区的镜片130位置,此时显示模组1400可以位于第一线圈1500上或第一线圈1500的外圈等。Optionally, please refer to Figures 76 to 79 together, Figure 76 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of the near-eye display device of the present application without temples, Figure 77 is a schematic diagram of another viewing angle of the embodiment of Figure 75, Figure 78 is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of a display module and a first coil having multiple, and Figure 79 is a schematic diagram of a cross-sectional structure of an embodiment of a display module provided with a coil bracket; the near-eye display device 100 includes a lens 130 and a display module 1400; the lens 130 includes an eye side 1320 and an environment side 1310; the display module 1400 is configured to generate light and project it onto the eye side 1320 , the first battery 123 and the display module 1400 are arranged at intervals; a first coil 1500 is arranged around the lens 130, the first coil 1500 surrounds the lens 130 and is electrically connected to the first battery 123, the first coil 1500 forms at least one loop, and this loop is used for mutual electromagnetic induction with the second coil 1401' in the following embodiment; the display module 1400 can be detachably installed at any position on the surface of the lens 130, and the display module 1400 is configured to be movable at any position on the surface of the lens 130, and the user can move the display module 1400 to the surface of the lens 130 as needed The display module 1400 is used to display information at any position of the display module 1400. The display module 1400 is provided with a second coil 1401'; the second coil 1401' can be mutually induced with the first coil 1500. For example, the first coil 1500 is used as a transmitting end to convert an electric field into a magnetic field, and the second coil 1401' is used as a receiving end to convert a magnetic field into an electric field. The loop size formed by the second coil 1401' is smaller than the loop size formed by the first coil 1500. It can be understood that the above-mentioned induction is configured as wireless induction of the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401' to realize the display module 1 400 supplies power to the display module 1400 through the first battery 123 during the movement of the lens 130 or when the display module 1400 is at any fixed position in the preset area of the lens 130. It can be understood that since the first coil 1500 is arranged around the lens 130, the display module can move freely on the surface of the lens 130, and when the user moves to a viewing position suitable for himself, it can be kept at a fixed position. Whether in the movement process or the fixed position, the display module 1400 can be powered by wireless induction between the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401'. In some embodiments, the preset area can be an inner ring area surrounded by the first coil 1500 on the lens 130. In other embodiments, the preset area can also be an outer ring area surrounded by the first coil 1500 on the lens 130. The user can freely move and select the position of the preset area as needed, wherein the any fixed position can be a certain or any fixed position where the user stays after moving the display module, and this position can depend on the user's operation needs or visual field viewing needs. For example, aligning the lens with the center of the eye's field of view is often the best position. Of course, if the user wants to see the real physical world of the environment side 1310 at this time, the display module 1400 can be moved to a position deviating from the center of the field of view. The user can even move the display module 1400 to the position of the lens 130 corresponding to the blind spot of the eye's field of view. At this time, the display module 1400 can be located on the first coil 1500 or on the outer circle of the first coil 1500, etc.

可选地,在一些实施例中,可以通过夹持、吸附等方式将显示模组1400放置在镜片130上,此时显示模组1400能够相对镜片130移动。在另一些实施例中,可以通过其他方式将显示模组1400固定在镜片130上,只要能实现显示模组1400可以在镜片130任意位置安装固定可拆卸并可移动,都是本申请包含的实施例,此处不作具体限定。Optionally, in some embodiments, the display module 1400 can be placed on the lens 130 by clamping, adsorption, etc., and the display module 1400 can move relative to the lens 130. In other embodiments, the display module 1400 can be fixed on the lens 130 by other methods. As long as the display module 1400 can be installed, fixed, detachable and movable at any position of the lens 130, it is an embodiment included in the present application and is not specifically limited here.

可选地,请继续参阅图75~图77,第一线圈1500环绕镜片130;在一些实施例中,可选地,第一线圈1500可以嵌入镜片130外缘,可选地,第一线圈1500可以缠绕在镜片130外缘,可选地,第一线圈1500可以设于镜框110并环绕镜片130,在另一些实施例中,第一线圈1500可以通过其他方式环绕镜片130;可选地,第一线圈1500可以位于朝向环境侧1310的一侧,例如位于镜框110朝向环境测的凹槽或表面等,可选地,第一线圈1500可以位于朝向眼睛侧1320的一侧,例如位于镜框110朝向眼睛侧1320的凹槽或表面等;附图仅给出了部分示例,在其他实施例中,本领域技术人员可以根据需求调整第一线圈1500位置,只要使第一线圈1500感应电流环绕镜片130形成回路、进而与第二线圈1401’相互感应、确保显示模组1400在镜片130表面的任意位置都能有电进行工作,都是本申请包含的实施例,此处不作具体限定。Optionally, please continue to refer to Figures 75 to 77, the first coil 1500 surrounds the lens 130; in some embodiments, optionally, the first coil 1500 can be embedded in the outer edge of the lens 130, optionally, the first coil 1500 can be wound around the outer edge of the lens 130, optionally, the first coil 1500 can be provided in the frame 110 and surround the lens 130, in other embodiments, the first coil 1500 can surround the lens 130 in other ways; optionally, the first coil 1500 can be located on the side facing the environment side 1310, for example, located in a groove or a groove on the side of the frame 110 facing the environment. Surface, etc., optionally, the first coil 1500 can be located on the side facing the eye side 1320, for example, located in a groove or surface of the frame 110 facing the eye side 1320, etc.; the accompanying drawings only give some examples. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art can adjust the position of the first coil 1500 as needed. As long as the induced current of the first coil 1500 surrounds the lens 130 to form a loop, and then mutually induces the second coil 1401', and ensures that the display module 1400 can be electrically operated at any position on the surface of the lens 130, they are all embodiments included in the present application and are not specifically limited here.

请继续参阅图75,近眼显示设备100还设有第一电性输入接口122,第一线圈1500和第一电池123中的至少一者与第一电性输入接口122电性连接,第一电性输入接口122可直接给第一线圈1500和第一电池123供电,可选地,第一线圈1500与第一电性输入接口122电性连接,可选地,第一电池123与第一电性输入接口122电性连接,可选地,第一线圈1500和第一电池123皆与第一电性输入接口122电性连接;可选地,第一电性输入接口122可以为micro-usb接口,可选地,第一电性输入接口122可以为lightning接口,可选地,第一电性输入接口122可以为type-c接口。Please continue to refer to Figure 75. The near-eye display device 100 is also provided with a first electrical input interface 122. At least one of the first coil 1500 and the first battery 123 is electrically connected to the first electrical input interface 122. The first electrical input interface 122 can directly supply power to the first coil 1500 and the first battery 123. Optionally, the first coil 1500 is electrically connected to the first electrical input interface 122. Optionally, the first battery 123 is electrically connected to the first electrical input interface 122. Optionally, the first coil 1500 and the first battery 123 are both electrically connected to the first electrical input interface 122; optionally, the first electrical input interface 122 can be a micro-USB interface. Optionally, the first electrical input interface 122 can be a lightning interface. Optionally, the first electrical input interface 122 can be a type-c interface.

可选地,请一并参阅图79~图81,图80是图79实施例中显示模组设置有第二电池的示意图,图81是图79实施例中显示模组的结构拆分示意图;可选地,显示模组1400还包括壳体1403、光学组件1406以及显示单元1407,光学组件1406位于显示单元1407的出光端,第二线圈1401’电性连接显示单元1407;壳体1403形成有容置腔1405,光学组件1406、显示单元1407以及第二线圈1401’设置在容置 腔1405内。Optionally, please refer to Figures 79 to 81 together, Figure 80 is a schematic diagram of the display module in the embodiment of Figure 79 provided with a second battery, and Figure 81 is a schematic diagram of the structural disassembly of the display module in the embodiment of Figure 79; Optionally, the display module 1400 also includes a housing 1403, an optical component 1406 and a display unit 1407, the optical component 1406 is located at the light-emitting end of the display unit 1407, and the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the display unit 1407; the housing 1403 is formed with a receiving cavity 1405, and the optical component 1406, the display unit 1407 and the second coil 1401' are arranged in the receiving cavity inside cavity 1405.

可选地,在一些实施例中,显示模组1400的形状可以呈柱状,例如圆柱或棱柱,在另一些实施例中,显示模组1400的形状可以是其他不规则形状,此处不作具体限定,附图仅给出了显示模组为圆柱状的示例,在其他实施例中,本领域技术人员可以根据需求进行选择调整,此处不作具体限定。显示模组1400的横截面尺寸具有远小于镜片130表面的尺寸,可选地,壳体1403横截面最大尺寸不超过12mm,第二线圈1401’围设的横截面最大尺寸不超过11mm;具体地,可以为显示模组1400横截面尺寸最大不超过12mm,可选地,横截面尺寸可以为10mm、9mm,可选地,横截面尺寸可以为8mm,可选地,横截面尺寸可以为6mm,可选地,横截面尺寸可以为5mm,可选地,横截面尺寸可以为3mm,横截面的尺寸的具体含义与横截面的形状有关系,如当横截面呈圆形时,横截面的尺寸指的是横截面的直径,当横截面呈正方形时,横截面的尺寸指的是正方形的边长,当横截面呈长方形时,横截面的尺寸指的是长边的长度。显示模组1400的横截面尺寸远小于镜片130表面的尺寸,使得显示模组1400占据镜片130表面的比例小,不会阻碍用户视线,妨碍用户观看,提升了用户体验。Optionally, in some embodiments, the shape of the display module 1400 may be columnar, such as a cylinder or a prism. In other embodiments, the shape of the display module 1400 may be other irregular shapes, which are not specifically limited here. The accompanying drawings only provide an example of a cylindrical display module. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art may make adjustments as needed, which are not specifically limited here. The cross-sectional dimensions of the display module 1400 are much smaller than the dimensions of the surface of the lens 130. Optionally, the maximum cross-sectional dimensions of the housing 1403 do not exceed 12 mm, and the maximum cross-sectional dimensions of the second coil 1401' do not exceed 11 mm. Specifically, the maximum cross-sectional dimensions of the display module 1400 do not exceed 12 mm. Optionally, the cross-sectional dimensions can be 10 mm, 9 mm, 8 mm, 6 mm, 5 mm, or 3 mm. The specific meaning of the cross-sectional dimensions is related to the shape of the cross-sectional dimensions. For example, when the cross-sectional dimensions are circular, the cross-sectional dimensions refer to the diameter of the cross-sectional dimensions. When the cross-sectional dimensions are square, the cross-sectional dimensions refer to the side length of the square. When the cross-sectional dimensions are rectangular, the cross-sectional dimensions refer to the length of the long side. The cross-sectional dimensions of the display module 1400 are much smaller than the dimensions of the surface of the lens 130, so that the display module 1400 occupies a small proportion of the surface of the lens 130, does not obstruct the user's line of sight, hinders the user's viewing, and improves the user experience.

显示模组1400上设有第二线圈1401’,第二线圈1401’可以是环绕在显示模组1400的周向。可选地,在一些实施例中,第一线圈1500为送电端,第二线圈1401’为受电端,第二线圈1401’可与第一线圈1500相互感应,以通过第一线圈1500与第二线圈1401’的无线感应实现对显示模组1400供电,显示模组1400在镜片130表面的任意位置都有电进行工作。可选地,在一些实施例中,镜腿120上还可设有电性连接到第一电池123的控制电路,控制电路将第一电池123的直流电转换成交流电并传输到第一线圈1500上产生磁感应,第二线圈1401’接收磁感应后产生交流电,可选地,显示模组1400中还可以包括整流电路,整流电路将交流电转换成直流电,显示模组1400中还可以包括转换电路,转换电路将直流电转换成供显示模组1400工作的合适电压或电流,关于这部分的特征在本领域技术人员的理解范围内,此处不再赘述。The display module 1400 is provided with a second coil 1401', and the second coil 1401' may be around the circumference of the display module 1400. Optionally, in some embodiments, the first coil 1500 is a power transmitting end, the second coil 1401' is a power receiving end, and the second coil 1401' may be mutually inductive with the first coil 1500, so as to realize power supply to the display module 1400 through wireless induction between the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401', and the display module 1400 has electricity to work at any position on the surface of the lens 130. Optionally, in some embodiments, the temple 120 may also be provided with a control circuit electrically connected to the first battery 123, the control circuit converts the direct current of the first battery 123 into alternating current and transmits it to the first coil 1500 to generate magnetic induction, and the second coil 1401' generates alternating current after receiving the magnetic induction. Optionally, the display module 1400 may also include a rectifier circuit, which converts alternating current into direct current. The display module 1400 may also include a conversion circuit, which converts direct current into a suitable voltage or current for the display module 1400 to operate. The features of this part are within the understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be elaborated here.

请继续参阅图79~图84,图82是显示模组另一实施例的结构剖视示意图,图83是图82实施例中显示模组设置有第二电池的示意图,图84是图83实施例中显示模组的结构拆分示意图;可选地,显示单元1407包括显示板1473及电路板1474,显示板1473和电路板1474电性连接,在一些实施例中,可选地,显示板1473和电路板1474采用插接方式连接,可选地,显示板1473和电路板1474采用电性导线方式连接,可选地,显示板1473和电路板1474采用触点方式连接,可选地,电路板1474可以是独立的电路板或者集成在显示单元1407周边的外围电路板,例如电路板1474可以包括插接板、驱动板、电源板等等,此处仅列出部分实施例,在其他实施例中,本领域技术人员可以根据需求进行选择调整,此处不作具体限定;第二线圈1401’与电路板1474电性连接;显示板1473设有用于产生光线的显示器14711,可选地,显示器14711可以位于显示板1473中部;光学组件1406包括光学模组1463及支架1462,支架1462用于支撑固定光学模组1463,光学模组1463位于显示器14711的出光端,支架1462、光学模组1463位于显示板1473背离电路板1474的一侧,支架1462确保光学模组1463和显示器14711的出光端对应。Please continue to refer to Figures 79 to 84, Figure 82 is a schematic diagram of a structural cross-section of another embodiment of a display module, Figure 83 is a schematic diagram of a display module provided with a second battery in the embodiment of Figure 82, and Figure 84 is a schematic diagram of a structural disassembly of the display module in the embodiment of Figure 83; Optionally, the display unit 1407 includes a display panel 1473 and a circuit board 1474, and the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474 are electrically connected. In some embodiments, optionally, the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474 are connected in a plug-in manner, optionally, the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474 are connected in an electrical wire manner, optionally, the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474 are connected in a contact manner, and optionally, the circuit board 1474 may be an independent circuit board or a peripheral circuit board integrated around the display unit 1407, such as the circuit board 14 74 may include a plug board, a drive board, a power board, etc. Only some embodiments are listed here. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art may make adjustments as needed, which are not specifically limited here; the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the circuit board 1474; the display board 1473 is provided with a display 14711 for generating light, and optionally, the display 14711 may be located in the middle of the display board 1473; the optical assembly 1406 includes an optical module 1463 and a bracket 1462, the bracket 1462 is used to support and fix the optical module 1463, the optical module 1463 is located at the light emitting end of the display 14711, the bracket 1462 and the optical module 1463 are located on the side of the display board 1473 away from the circuit board 1474, and the bracket 1462 ensures that the light emitting ends of the optical module 1463 and the display 14711 correspond.

可选地,请继续参阅图75~图78,可选地,第一电池123至少有一个;可选地,请继续参阅图75及图78,第一电池123可以有一个并安装于任何一个镜腿120上;可选地,请继续参阅图77,第一电池123可以有两个,两个第一电池123分别安装于两个镜腿120上;可选地,请继续参阅图76,两个第一电池123可以安装于镜框110上;可选地,其中一个第一电池123可以安装在一个镜腿120上,另一个第一电池123可以安装在镜框110上;可选地,一个第一电池123可以安装在镜框110上;附图仅给 出了第一电池123安装位置的部分示例,在其他实施例中,本领域技术人员可以根据需求进行选择调整,此处不作具体限定。Optionally, please continue to refer to Figures 75 to 78. Optionally, there is at least one first battery 123; Optionally, please continue to refer to Figures 75 and 78, there can be one first battery 123 and it can be installed on any one of the temples 120; Optionally, please continue to refer to Figure 77, there can be two first batteries 123, and the two first batteries 123 are respectively installed on the two temples 120; Optionally, please continue to refer to Figure 76, two first batteries 123 can be installed on the frame 110; Optionally, one first battery 123 can be installed on one temple 120, and the other first battery 123 can be installed on the frame 110; Optionally, one first battery 123 can be installed on the frame 110; The accompanying drawings only show Some examples of the installation position of the first battery 123 are shown above. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art can select and adjust according to needs, and no specific limitation is made here.

可选地,在一些实施例中,第一电池123可以采用充电电池,可选地,可以采用接口充电、无线充电等;可选地,在另一些实施例中,第一电池123可以是一次性的可更换电池等;可选地,第一电池123可以采用适应镜框110或镜腿120形状的尺寸,可选地,第一电池123可以包括单芯、多芯、锂电池等;本领域技术人员可以根据需求进行选择调整,此处不作具体限定。Optionally, in some embodiments, the first battery 123 may be a rechargeable battery, optionally, interface charging, wireless charging, etc. may be adopted; optionally, in other embodiments, the first battery 123 may be a disposable replaceable battery, etc.; optionally, the first battery 123 may be of a size adapted to the shape of the frame 110 or the temple 120, optionally, the first battery 123 may include a single-core, multi-core, lithium battery, etc.; those skilled in the art may make selections and adjustments according to needs, and no specific limitations are made here.

可选地,请继续参阅图75~图78,可选地,显示模组1400的数量可以为一个,在显示模组1400的数量为一个的实施例中,显示模组1400可以安装于任何一个镜片130中,可选地,第一线圈1500可以仅环绕显示模组1400所在的镜片130;在显示模组1400的数量为多个的实施例中,多个显示模组1400被配置成在镜片130的第一线圈(150)内移动,多个显示模组1400可拆卸地安装于至少一个镜片130,多个显示模组1400可独立工作,“多个”的含义是至少两个,例如两个、三个、四个等,可选地,多个显示模组1400可以全部安装于任何一个镜片130中,可选地,多个显示模组1400可分别安装于两个镜片130中;附图仅给出了显示模组在镜片表面的部分示例,在其他实施例中,本领域技术人员可以根据需求进行选择调整,此处不作具体限定。可选地,当多个显示模组1400所需功率相同时,多个显示模组1400的第二线圈1401’的匝数可以为相同,可选地,当多个显示模组1400所需功率不同时,多个显示模组1400的第二线圈1401’的匝数可以不同,可以根据不同的显示模组功耗的不同,设定第二线圈1401’的匝数,以适应不同的显示模组。Optionally, please continue to refer to Figures 75 to 78. Optionally, the number of display modules 1400 can be one. In the embodiment where the number of display modules 1400 is one, the display module 1400 can be installed in any one lens 130. Optionally, the first coil 1500 can only surround the lens 130 where the display module 1400 is located. In the embodiment where the number of display modules 1400 is multiple, the multiple display modules 1400 are configured to move within the first coil (150) of the lens 130, and the multiple display modules 1400 are detachably installed on at least one lens 130. The multiple display modules 1400 can work independently. "Multiple" means at least two, such as two, three, four, etc. Optionally, the multiple display modules 1400 can all be installed in any one lens 130. Optionally, the multiple display modules 1400 can be installed in two lenses 130 respectively. The accompanying drawings only give some examples of display modules on the surface of the lens. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art can make selections and adjustments according to needs, and no specific limitations are made here. Optionally, when the power required by multiple display modules 1400 is the same, the number of turns of the second coils 1401' of the multiple display modules 1400 may be the same. Optionally, when the power required by multiple display modules 1400 is different, the number of turns of the second coils 1401' of the multiple display modules 1400 may be different. The number of turns of the second coil 1401' may be set according to the different power consumption of different display modules to adapt to different display modules.

可选地,近眼显示设备100可以包括两个镜片130,每一镜片130对应一个眼睛视野范围,第一线圈1500可以同时环绕两个镜片130,显示模组1400被配置成在第一线圈1500内圈移动;可选地,镜片可以用于近视眼镜、远视眼镜、太阳眼镜及智能眼镜等等,关于这部分的特征在本领域技术人员的理解范围内,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the near-eye display device 100 may include two lenses 130, each lens 130 corresponds to an eye field of view, the first coil 1500 may surround the two lenses 130 at the same time, and the display module 1400 is configured to move in the inner circle of the first coil 1500; optionally, the lenses can be used for myopia glasses, hyperopia glasses, sunglasses, smart glasses, etc. The features of this part are within the understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be repeated here.

可选地,近眼显示设备100可以仅包括一个镜片130,镜片130横跨两个眼睛视野范围,第一线圈1500环绕镜片130且横跨两个眼睛视野范围,显示模组1400被配置成可以在第一线圈1500内圈移动,也可以在第一线圈1500外圈移动;可选地,镜片可以用于护目眼镜及头盔等等,关于这部分的特征在本领域技术人员的理解范围内,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the near-eye display device 100 may include only one lens 130, the lens 130 spans the field of view of two eyes, the first coil 1500 surrounds the lens 130 and spans the field of view of two eyes, and the display module 1400 is configured to be able to move within the inner circle of the first coil 1500 or the outer circle of the first coil 1500; optionally, the lens can be used for goggles and helmets, etc. The features of this part are within the understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be repeated here.

可选地,第一线圈1500环绕至少一个镜片130,可选地,请继续参阅图75,第一线圈1500仅环绕装有显示模组1400的一个镜片130,可选地,请继续参阅图76,第一线圈1500环绕两个镜片130。Optionally, the first coil 1500 surrounds at least one lens 130 . Optionally, please continue to refer to FIG. 75 , the first coil 1500 only surrounds one lens 130 equipped with the display module 1400 . Optionally, please continue to refer to FIG. 76 , the first coil 1500 surrounds two lenses 130 .

可选地,第一线圈1500环绕至少一个镜片130,可选地,请继续参阅图77及图78,第一线圈1500包括第一子线圈1510和第二子线圈1520,第一子线圈1510及第二子线圈1520分别单独环绕其中一个镜片130形成回路,在一些实施例中,第一子线圈1510及第二子线圈1520的匝数可以相同或者不同;在一些实施例中,第一子线圈1510及第二子线圈1520电性隔离避免交叉干扰;在另一些实施例中,第一子线圈1510及第二子线圈1520可以电性连接,第一子线圈1510及第二子线圈1520可以串联或者并联。可选地,第一子线圈1510及第二子线圈1520可以分别与安装于两个镜腿120上的第一电池123电性连接;可选地,第一子线圈1510及第二子线圈1520可以分别与安装于镜框110上的两个第一电池123电性连接;可选地,第一子线圈1510与安装于镜腿120上的第一电池123电性连接,第二子线圈1520与安装于镜框110上的第一电池123电性连接;可选地,第二子线圈1520与安装于镜腿120上的第一电池123电性连接,第一子线圈1510与安装于镜框110上的第一电池123电性连接;可选地,第一子线圈1510及第二子线圈1520还可以电性连接且与安装于一个镜腿120上的同一个第一电池123电性连 接;可选地,第一子线圈1510及第二子线圈1520还可以电性连接且与安装于镜框110上的同一个第一电池123电性连接。Optionally, the first coil 1500 surrounds at least one lens 130. Optionally, please continue to refer to Figures 77 and 78. The first coil 1500 includes a first sub-coil 1510 and a second sub-coil 1520. The first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 respectively surround one of the lenses 130 to form a loop. In some embodiments, the number of turns of the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be the same or different; in some embodiments, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 are electrically isolated to avoid cross interference; in other embodiments, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be electrically connected, and the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be connected in series or in parallel. Optionally, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 can be electrically connected to the first batteries 123 installed on the two temples 120, respectively; optionally, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 can be electrically connected to the two first batteries 123 installed on the frame 110, respectively; optionally, the first sub-coil 1510 is electrically connected to the first battery 123 installed on the temple 120, and the second sub-coil 1520 is electrically connected to the first battery 123 installed on the frame 110; optionally, the second sub-coil 1520 is electrically connected to the first battery 123 installed on the temple 120, and the first sub-coil 1510 is electrically connected to the first battery 123 installed on the frame 110; optionally, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 can also be electrically connected and electrically connected to the same first battery 123 installed on one temple 120 Optionally, the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may also be electrically connected and electrically connected to the same first battery 123 mounted on the frame 110.

可选地,第一线圈1500的匝数可以是一圈也可以是多圈,可选地,第二线圈1401’的匝数可以是一圈也可以是多圈,线圈的匝数可以根据显示模组1400需要的功率进行确定,关于这部分的特征在本领域技术人员的理解范围内,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the number of turns of the first coil 1500 can be one turn or multiple turns. Optionally, the number of turns of the second coil 1401' can be one turn or multiple turns. The number of turns of the coil can be determined according to the power required by the display module 1400. The features of this part are within the scope of understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be elaborated here.

可选地,第一子线圈1510和第二子线圈1520的匝数可以相同,此时第一子线圈1510和第二子线圈1520具有相同的功率输出;可选地,第一子线圈1510和第二子线圈1520的匝数可以不同,此时第一子线圈1510和第二子线圈1520具有不同的功率输出,线圈的匝数可以根据显示模组1400需要的功率及显示模组1400的数量进行选择,关于这部分的特征在本领域技术人员的理解范围内,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the number of turns of the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be the same, in which case the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 have the same power output; optionally, the number of turns of the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 may be different, in which case the first sub-coil 1510 and the second sub-coil 1520 have different power outputs. The number of turns of the coil can be selected according to the power required by the display module 1400 and the number of display modules 1400. The features of this part are within the understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be elaborated here.

可选地,请一并参阅图79~图81,可选地,显示模组1400还包括线圈支架1408;壳体1403形成有容置腔1405,光学组件1406、显示单元1407、线圈支架1408以及第二线圈1401’设置在容置腔1405内;第二线圈1401’与显示单元1407电性连接;第二线圈1401’设于线圈支架1408的外周,第二线圈1401’在显示单元1407至光学组件1406的高度方向上环绕,具体地,第二线圈1401’可以在显示模组1400厚度方向上排布;可选地,线圈支架1408的高度至少部分与支架1462、显示板1473及电路板1474的高度之和重叠,第二线圈1401’的环绕高度大于显示板1473、电路板1474及两者间距之间的距离,使得第二线圈1401’的匝数较多,能提供的功率较大;可选地,可以根据显示模组1400需要的功率确定线圈的匝数,线圈的匝数决定了第二线圈1401’及线圈支架1408在显示模组1400厚度方向上的高度:当显示模组1400所需功率大,即第二线圈1401’的匝数较多时,线圈支架1408可以全部环绕显示单元1407及光学组件1406,当显示模组1400所需功率较小时,即第二线圈1401’的匝数较少时,线圈支架1408全部环绕显示单元1407及部分环绕光学组件1406或仅全部环绕显示单元1407,当显示模组1400所需功率更小时,即第二线圈1401’的匝数更少时,线圈支架1408仅部分环绕显示单元1407,可选地,线圈支架1408也可以部分环绕光学组件1406,或是全部环绕光学组件1406,或是全部环绕光学组件1406及部分环绕显示单元1407,或是全部环绕光学组件1406及显示单元1407,线圈支架1408所环绕的结构及全部环绕还是部分环绕可以根据第二线圈1401’的匝数确定,第二线圈1401’的匝数可以根据显示模组1400需要的功率确定,关于这部分的特征在本领域技术人员的理解范围内,此处不再赘述,此处仅列出来部分实施例,附图仅给出了第二线圈部分环绕显示单元1407及全部环绕光学组件1406的示例,在其他实施例中,本领域技术人员可以根据需求进行选择调整,此处不作具体限定。Optionally, please refer to Figures 79 to 81. Optionally, the display module 1400 further includes a coil support 1408; the housing 1403 is formed with a housing cavity 1405, and the optical component 1406, the display unit 1407, the coil support 1408 and the second coil 1401' are arranged in the housing cavity 1405; the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the display unit 1407; the second coil 1401' is arranged on the periphery of the coil support 1408, and the second coil 1401' surrounds in the height direction from the display unit 1407 to the optical component 1406. Specifically, the second coil 1401' can be arranged in the thickness direction of the display module 1400; Optionally, The height of the coil support 1408 at least partially overlaps with the sum of the heights of the support 1462, the display panel 1473 and the circuit board 1474. The surrounding height of the second coil 1401' is greater than the display panel 1473, the circuit board 1474 and the distance between the two, so that the second coil 1401' has more turns and can provide more power. Optionally, the number of turns of the coil can be determined according to the power required by the display module 1400. The number of turns of the coil determines the height of the second coil 1401' and the coil support 1408 in the thickness direction of the display module 1400: when the power required by the display module 1400 is large, that is, the number of turns of the second coil 1401' is large, the coil support 140 8 can completely surround the display unit 1407 and the optical component 1406. When the power required by the display module 1400 is small, that is, the number of turns of the second coil 1401' is small, the coil bracket 1408 completely surrounds the display unit 1407 and partially surrounds the optical component 1406, or only completely surrounds the display unit 1407. When the power required by the display module 1400 is even smaller, that is, the number of turns of the second coil 1401' is even smaller, the coil bracket 1408 only partially surrounds the display unit 1407. Optionally, the coil bracket 1408 can also partially surround the optical component 1406, or completely surround the optical component 1406, or completely surround the optical component 1406 and partially surround the display unit 1407. The display unit 1407, or completely surrounds the optical component 1406 and the display unit 1407. The structure surrounded by the coil bracket 1408 and whether it completely surrounds or partially surrounds can be determined according to the number of turns of the second coil 1401'. The number of turns of the second coil 1401' can be determined according to the power required by the display module 1400. The features of this part are within the scope of understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be described here. Only some embodiments are listed here. The accompanying drawings only show an example of the second coil partially surrounding the display unit 1407 and completely surrounding the optical component 1406. In other embodiments, those skilled in the art can make selections and adjustments according to needs, and no specific limitations are made here.

线圈支架1408及第二线圈1401’设置在显示单元1407和/或光学组件1406的环周,充分利用了周向的空间,使得显示模组1400厚度方向的高度比较小;同时,环周设置可以使得按照显示模组1400所需功率调整线圈匝数,给显示模组1400的功率提供了多种选择。The coil bracket 1408 and the second coil 1401' are arranged around the display unit 1407 and/or the optical component 1406, making full use of the circumferential space so that the height of the display module 1400 in the thickness direction is relatively small; at the same time, the circumferential setting can adjust the number of coil turns according to the power required by the display module 1400, providing a variety of options for the power of the display module 1400.

请继续参阅图80,可选地,显示模组1400还可以包括第二电池1402’;第二线圈1401’与第二电池1402’电性连接,从而实现给第二电池1402’充电,进而实现给显示模组1400充电,确保显示模组1400能够在没有线圈供电的情况下由第二电池1402’供电。可选地,第二电池1402’设置于容置腔1405内并位于显示单元1407厚度方向靠近壳体1403的一端。Please continue to refer to FIG. 80. Optionally, the display module 1400 may further include a second battery 1402'; the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the second battery 1402', so as to realize charging of the second battery 1402', and then realize charging of the display module 1400, ensuring that the display module 1400 can be powered by the second battery 1402' without the coil power supply. Optionally, the second battery 1402' is disposed in the accommodating cavity 1405 and is located at one end of the display unit 1407 close to the housing 1403 in the thickness direction.

可选地,请继续参阅图82~图84,可选地,显示模组1400还包括壳体1403、光学组件1406、显示单元1407及盖板1409;在一些实施例中,壳体1403及盖板1409共同形成有容置腔1405,在另一些实 施例中,可以理解,盖板1409可以为壳体1403的一体成型的一部分或者两者为分体的两个部件最终连接形成一个整体,可选地,盖板可以位于环境侧1310,可选地,盖板可以位于眼睛侧1320。光学组件1406、显示单元1407以及第二线圈1401’设置在容置腔1405内;第二线圈1401’整体围设成扁平状,第二线圈1401’设于电路板1474背离显示板1473的一侧,第二线圈1401’与电路板1474平行,第二线圈1401’与显示单元1407电性连接。Optionally, please continue to refer to FIGS. 82 to 84 . Optionally, the display module 1400 further includes a housing 1403, an optical component 1406, a display unit 1407, and a cover plate 1409. In some embodiments, the housing 1403 and the cover plate 1409 together form a receiving cavity 1405. In other embodiments, the housing 1403 and the cover plate 1409 together form a receiving cavity 1405. In the embodiment, it can be understood that the cover plate 1409 can be an integrally formed part of the housing 1403 or two separate parts are finally connected to form a whole. Optionally, the cover plate can be located on the environment side 1310, and optionally, the cover plate can be located on the eye side 1320. The optical component 1406, the display unit 1407 and the second coil 1401' are arranged in the accommodating cavity 1405; the second coil 1401' is arranged in a flat shape as a whole, and the second coil 1401' is arranged on the side of the circuit board 1474 away from the display board 1473, the second coil 1401' is parallel to the circuit board 1474, and the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the display unit 1407.

第二线圈1401’呈扁平状设于电路板1474背离显示板1473的一侧,减小了显示模组1400厚度方向的高度,使得显示模组1400可以做得更薄;同时,减小了显示模组1400的横截面尺寸,使得显示模组1400占据镜片130表面的比例小,不会阻碍用户视线,妨碍用户观看,提升了用户体验。The second coil 1401' is flatly arranged on the side of the circuit board 1474 away from the display panel 1473, which reduces the height of the display module 1400 in the thickness direction, so that the display module 1400 can be made thinner; at the same time, the cross-sectional size of the display module 1400 is reduced, so that the proportion of the display module 1400 occupying the surface of the lens 130 is small, which will not block the user's line of sight and hinder the user's viewing, thereby improving the user experience.

请继续参阅图83,可选地,显示模组1400还可以设置有第二电池1402’;第二线圈1401’与第二电池1402’电性连接,从而实现给第二电池1402’充电,进而实现给显示模组1400充电,确保显示模组1400能够在没有线圈供电的情况下由第二电池1402’供电;第二电池1402’设置于容置腔1405内,例如可以位于显示单元1407的一侧面,或位于光学组件1406的一侧面,或同时位于光学组件1406及显示单元1407的一侧面,第二电池1402’在显示模组1400厚度方向上的高度可以和显示模组1400的厚度至少部分重叠,附图83-84仅给出了第二电池1402’部分简单的示例,关于电性连接部分以及其它相关结构等基础部件属于本领域技术人员可以理解的范围,在此暂不做重点描述,在其他实施例中,第二电池的形状和位置可以根据需求进行选择调整。Please continue to refer to Figure 83. Optionally, the display module 1400 may also be provided with a second battery 1402'; the second coil 1401' is electrically connected to the second battery 1402', so as to charge the second battery 1402', and then charge the display module 1400, ensuring that the display module 1400 can be powered by the second battery 1402' without the coil power supply; the second battery 1402' is arranged in the accommodating cavity 1405, for example, it can be located on one side of the display unit 1407, or on one side of the optical component 1406, or on one side of the optical component 1406 and the display unit 1407 at the same time, the height of the second battery 1402' in the thickness direction of the display module 1400 can at least partially overlap with the thickness of the display module 1400, and Figures 83-84 only give a simple example of the second battery 1402' part. The basic components such as the electrical connection part and other related structures are within the scope that can be understood by those skilled in the art, and will not be described in detail here. In other embodiments, the shape and position of the second battery can be selected and adjusted according to needs.

第二电池1402’可以设置在显示单元1407和/或光学组件1406的侧面,或者第二电池1402’设置在显示单元1407厚度方向靠近壳体1403的一端,设置在侧面的时候可以充分利用了周向的空间,使得显示模组1400厚度方向的高度比较小。设置在端面可以减少周向的宽度。The second battery 1402' can be arranged on the side of the display unit 1407 and/or the optical component 1406, or the second battery 1402' can be arranged on one end of the display unit 1407 in the thickness direction close to the housing 1403. When arranged on the side, the circumferential space can be fully utilized, so that the height of the display module 1400 in the thickness direction is relatively small. Arranging on the end surface can reduce the circumferential width.

可选地,电路板1474上还可以设置整流电路,整流电路将交流电转换成直流电,电路板1474上还可以设置转换电路,转换电路将直流电转换成供显示器14711工作的合适电压或电流,关于这部分的特征在本领域技术人员的理解范围内,此处不再赘述。Optionally, a rectifier circuit may be provided on the circuit board 1474 to convert alternating current into direct current. A conversion circuit may also be provided on the circuit board 1474 to convert direct current into a suitable voltage or current for the display 14711 to operate. The features of this part are within the scope of understanding of those skilled in the art and will not be elaborated here.

可选地,显示器14711可以是包括但不限于Micro-LED(Micro Light-Emitting Diode,微发光半导体)、Micro OLED(Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode,微有机发光二极管)、LCOS(Liquid Crystal On Silicon,硅基液晶)、LCD(Liquid Crystal Display,液晶显示)、DMD(Digital Micromirror Device,数字微镜元件)/DLP(Digital Light Processing,数字光处理)或LBS(Laser Beam Scanning,激光束扫描)等、或这些的任意组合。Optionally, the display 14711 can be including but not limited to Micro-LED (Micro Light-Emitting Diode), Micro OLED (Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode), LCOS (Liquid Crystal On Silicon), LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), DMD (Digital Micromirror Device)/DLP (Digital Light Processing) or LBS (Laser Beam Scanning), etc., or any combination of these.

可选地,在一些实施例中,壳体1403的出光端可以为透光材料,在另一些实施例中,壳体1403的出光端可以挖孔进行透光,此处仅列出部分实施例,在其他实施例中,本领域技术人员可以根据需求进行选择调整,此处不作具体限定。Optionally, in some embodiments, the light output end of the shell 1403 can be made of light-transmitting material, and in other embodiments, the light output end of the shell 1403 can be dug with a hole for light transmission. Only some embodiments are listed here. In other embodiments, technical personnel in this field can make adjustments according to needs, and no specific limitations are made here.

可选地,第一线圈1500及第二线圈1401’中至少一者为透明导电材料,可选地,第一线圈1500为透明导电材料,可选地,第二线圈1401’为透明导电材料,可选地,第一线圈1500及第二线圈1401’皆为透明导电材料。可选地,透明导电材料可以为氧化物透明导电材料,具体可以为氧化锌、氧化锡、氧化铟锡等,氧化物透明导电材料是目前最为广泛应用的透明导电材料,具有透明度和电导率均较高的特点;可选地,透明导电材料可以为碳纳米管透明导电材料,具体可以为碳纳米管,碳纳米管透明导电材料是一种新型材料,具有高导电性、高透明度、高强度、优异的柔性等特点;可选地,透明导电材料可以导电高分子材料,导电高分子是由导电聚合物构成的材料,具有良好的导电性和柔韧性。线圈采用透明导电材料,既满足了第一线圈1500及第二线圈1401’无线感应给显示模组1400供电的需求,同时 又使得线圈可以和透明的镜片130融为一体,提升了近眼显示设备100的外观表现力。Optionally, at least one of the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401' is a transparent conductive material, optionally, the first coil 1500 is a transparent conductive material, optionally, the second coil 1401' is a transparent conductive material, optionally, the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401' are both transparent conductive materials. Optionally, the transparent conductive material can be an oxide transparent conductive material, specifically zinc oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide, etc. Oxide transparent conductive material is the most widely used transparent conductive material at present, and has the characteristics of high transparency and conductivity; Optionally, the transparent conductive material can be a carbon nanotube transparent conductive material, specifically carbon nanotube, carbon nanotube transparent conductive material is a new type of material, with the characteristics of high conductivity, high transparency, high strength, excellent flexibility, etc.; Optionally, the transparent conductive material can be a conductive polymer material, and the conductive polymer is a material composed of conductive polymers, which has good conductivity and flexibility. The coil uses a transparent conductive material, which not only meets the needs of the first coil 1500 and the second coil 1401' to wirelessly sense and power the display module 1400, but also The coil can also be integrated with the transparent lens 130 , thereby improving the appearance of the near-eye display device 100 .

本申请实施例提供的近眼显示设备,显示模组能够产生光线并投射至用户眼睛侧,显示模组能够在镜片上自由移动,同时通过在镜片的周向设有第一线圈,在显示模组上设有第二线圈,两者相互电磁感应,第二线圈形成的回路尺寸小于第一线圈形成的回路尺寸,从而有效降低线圈对镜片视野的影响,显示模组在镜片上移动过程中或者镜片预设区域的固定位置通过所述第一电池给所述显示模组提供电源,能够确保显示模组在镜片上不管是动态还是静态都能够被供电实现工作,有效避免了使用有线供电与显示模组自由移动的干扰。In the near-eye display device provided in the embodiment of the present application, the display module can generate light and project it to the user's eye side, the display module can move freely on the lens, and at the same time, a first coil is provided in the circumference of the lens and a second coil is provided on the display module, the two are electromagnetically induced with each other, and the loop size formed by the second coil is smaller than the loop size formed by the first coil, thereby effectively reducing the influence of the coil on the field of view of the lens. The display module is powered by the first battery during the movement of the display module on the lens or at a fixed position in a preset area of the lens, which can ensure that the display module can be powered to work whether it is dynamic or static on the lens, effectively avoiding the interference between the use of wired power supply and the free movement of the display module.

请参阅图85,图85是本申请充电盒一实施例的整体结构示意图,本申请实施例提供的充电盒2000,用于给上述实施例任一项的近眼显示设备100的第一电池123充电;充电盒2000包括盒体200及上述实施例任一项的近眼显示设备100,盒体200包括第三线圈210和第二电性输入接口230,第二电性输入接口230和第三线圈210电性连接,可选地,第一线圈1500还可作为受电端,第三线圈210作为送电端,第一线圈1500与第三线圈210被配置成相互无线感应通过第二电性输入接口230给第一电池123充电;可选地,第二电性输入接口230可以为micro-usb接口,可选地,第二电性输入接口230可以为lightning接口,可选地,第二电性输入接口230可以为type-c接口。Please refer to Figure 85, which is a schematic diagram of the overall structure of an embodiment of a charging box of the present application. The charging box 2000 provided in the embodiment of the present application is used to charge the first battery 123 of the near-eye display device 100 of any of the above-mentioned embodiments; the charging box 2000 includes a box body 200 and the near-eye display device 100 of any of the above-mentioned embodiments, the box body 200 includes a third coil 210 and a second electrical input interface 230, the second electrical input interface 230 and the third coil 210 are electrically connected, optionally, the first coil 1500 can also be used as a power receiving end, and the third coil 210 as a power sending end, the first coil 1500 and the third coil 210 are configured to wirelessly induct each other to charge the first battery 123 through the second electrical input interface 230; optionally, the second electrical input interface 230 can be a micro-USB interface, optionally, the second electrical input interface 230 can be a lightning interface, optionally, the second electrical input interface 230 can be a type-c interface.

本申请实施例提供的充电盒,第一线圈作为受电端与第三线圈无线感应实现给第一电池充电,提升了充电盒的灵活性、便捷性、通用性,进而提升了用户体验;同时避免了频繁插拔充电线导致近眼显示设备充电口的损坏,保护了近眼显示设备的接口,延长了近眼显示设备的使用寿命。In the charging box provided in the embodiment of the present application, the first coil acts as a power receiving end and wirelessly inducts with the third coil to charge the first battery, thereby improving the flexibility, convenience, and versatility of the charging box, thereby improving the user experience; at the same time, it avoids damage to the charging port of the near-eye display device caused by frequent plugging and unplugging of the charging cable, protects the interface of the near-eye display device, and extends the service life of the near-eye display device.

近眼显示装置可以将显示信息转换成图像投射到观看者的眼中,从而实现浸入式的显示体验,其中,显示信息可通过外部终端传输至近眼显示装置。相关技术中,近眼显示装置与外部终端之间通信连接传输显示信息时,由于受到传输带宽的限制,传输数据流小,导致近眼显示装置出现显示不够流畅、显示延时。The near-eye display device can convert display information into images and project them into the eyes of the viewer, thereby achieving an immersive display experience, wherein the display information can be transmitted to the near-eye display device through an external terminal. In the related art, when the near-eye display device communicates with the external terminal to transmit display information, due to the limitation of the transmission bandwidth, the transmission data flow is small, resulting in the near-eye display device not displaying smoothly and displaying delays.

本申请提供一种近眼显示系统。请参阅图97,近眼显示系统1000可包括近眼显示装置10以及终端6,近眼显示装置10与终端6通信连接。终端6用于向近眼显示装置10传输显示信息。显示信息可包括视频、图像或文字等信息。示例性地,终端6可以是手机、手表或电脑等设备。近眼显示装置10用于将显示信息转换成光学输出并投射至用户侧,以供用户观看。其中,光学输出可以是光线。近眼显示装置10与终端6之间的通信连接方式可以是使用数据线的有线连接,也可以是没有数据线的无线连接。相对而言,无线连接由于不需要使用数据线,使得近眼显示系统1000的使用不受数据线的束缚,可以提升近眼显示系统1000的使用便利性。The present application provides a near-eye display system. Referring to FIG. 97 , the near-eye display system 1000 may include a near-eye display device 10 and a terminal 6, and the near-eye display device 10 is communicatively connected to the terminal 6. The terminal 6 is used to transmit display information to the near-eye display device 10. The display information may include information such as video, image or text. Exemplarily, the terminal 6 may be a device such as a mobile phone, a watch or a computer. The near-eye display device 10 is used to convert the display information into an optical output and project it to the user side for the user to watch. Among them, the optical output may be light. The communication connection between the near-eye display device 10 and the terminal 6 may be a wired connection using a data cable, or a wireless connection without a data cable. Relatively speaking, since the wireless connection does not require the use of a data cable, the use of the near-eye display system 1000 is not restricted by the data cable, which can improve the convenience of use of the near-eye display system 1000.

可选地,近眼显示装置10与终端6之间的通信连接方式为WiFi连接。WiFi连接的带宽相对较大,数据传输速度快,可以使得近眼显示装置10的显示较为流畅。WiFi连接虽然能保证数据的传输速度,但近眼显示装置10与终端6之间WiFi连接需要借助于外部无线网络,而近眼显示系统1000的部分使用场景可能没有无线网络覆盖,比如在户外运动时使用近眼显示系统1000。为保证近眼显示系统1000在没有无线网络覆盖的场景仍然可以正常使用,近眼显示装置10与终端6之间的通信连接方式还可设置有除WiFi连接之外的其它近距离无线连接方式,比如蓝牙、ZigBee或2.4g中的一种或多种。在上述近距离无线连接方式中,带宽相对较小,数据传输速度受到限制,可能导致近眼显示装置10出现显示卡顿,显示不够流畅、显示延时等问题。因此,提供一种显示流畅,可以降低显示延时的近眼显示装置成为亟待解决的技术问题。Optionally, the communication connection mode between the near-eye display device 10 and the terminal 6 is a WiFi connection. The bandwidth of the WiFi connection is relatively large, and the data transmission speed is fast, which can make the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother. Although the WiFi connection can ensure the data transmission speed, the WiFi connection between the near-eye display device 10 and the terminal 6 needs to be assisted by an external wireless network, and some usage scenarios of the near-eye display system 1000 may not have wireless network coverage, such as using the near-eye display system 1000 during outdoor sports. In order to ensure that the near-eye display system 1000 can still be used normally in scenes without wireless network coverage, the communication connection mode between the near-eye display device 10 and the terminal 6 can also be provided with other short-range wireless connection modes other than WiFi connection, such as one or more of Bluetooth, ZigBee or 2.4g. In the above-mentioned short-range wireless connection mode, the bandwidth is relatively small, and the data transmission speed is limited, which may cause the near-eye display device 10 to have problems such as display freeze, insufficient display smoothness, and display delay. Therefore, providing a near-eye display device with smooth display and reduced display delay has become a technical problem to be solved.

请参阅图86,近眼显示装置10可包括佩戴组件1以及显示组件20。佩戴组件1可供用户穿戴,比 如穿戴在头部,示例性地,佩戴组件1可以是眼镜或头盔等。佩戴组件1包括框体11,框体11上安装有镜片12。当佩戴组件1为眼镜时,框体11可以是镜框;当佩戴组件1为头盔时,框体11可以是头盔壳体。镜片12可以是近视、远视、护目、太阳或时尚眼镜的镜片,也可是头盔等头戴式设备的镜片。用户眼睛可从眼睛侧透过镜片12观察外部环境侧。Please refer to FIG86 , the near-eye display device 10 may include a wearing component 1 and a display component 20. The wearing component 1 can be worn by a user. If worn on the head, the wearing component 1 can be glasses or a helmet, for example. The wearing component 1 includes a frame 11, on which a lens 12 is mounted. When the wearing component 1 is glasses, the frame 11 can be a frame; when the wearing component 1 is a helmet, the frame 11 can be a helmet shell. The lens 12 can be a lens for myopia, hyperopia, eye protection, sunglasses or fashion glasses, or a lens for a head-mounted device such as a helmet. The user's eyes can observe the external environment from the eye side through the lens 12.

显示组件20被配置成可移动地设置在镜片12上。可选地,显示组件20通过支架(图中未示出)转动连接在框体11,支架可以是镜腿等部件,显示组件20在镜片12上移动的方式可以是用户的手指40直接移动显示组件20;或者,显示组件20磁吸连接在镜片12上,既可方便显示组件20在镜片12上移动,又可防止显示组件20从镜片12上脱落;另一些实施例中,显示组件20可以通过夹持的方式夹持在镜片12上。示例性地,如图17所示,显示组件20可以在镜片12上沿D1-D4所示的任意方向移动。在一些实施例中,在用户的手指触摸到显示组件20时,显示组件20可以展示具有诸如D1-D4的移动方向上的界面提醒,方便用户操作。The display assembly 20 is configured to be movably arranged on the lens 12. Optionally, the display assembly 20 is rotatably connected to the frame 11 through a bracket (not shown in the figure), and the bracket can be a component such as a temple. The display assembly 20 can be moved on the lens 12 by the user's finger 40 directly moving the display assembly 20; or, the display assembly 20 is magnetically connected to the lens 12, which can facilitate the movement of the display assembly 20 on the lens 12 and prevent the display assembly 20 from falling off the lens 12; in other embodiments, the display assembly 20 can be clamped on the lens 12 by clamping. Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 17, the display assembly 20 can move on the lens 12 along any direction shown by D1-D4. In some embodiments, when the user's finger touches the display assembly 20, the display assembly 20 can display an interface reminder with a moving direction such as D1-D4 to facilitate user operation.

在一实施例中,如图87-图89所示,镜片12包括多个移动区域121,每个移动区域121对应外部终端6自身的显示内容。示例性地,如图87所示,多个移动区域121沿镜片12的横向分布;或者,如图88所示,多个移动区域121沿镜片12的纵向分布;又或者,如图89所示,多个移动区域121沿镜片12的横向以及纵向分布;其它实施例中,移动区域121可以呈方形或圆形的阵列或者规律性排布。上述实施例仅为移动区域121的部分可选设置方式,移动区域121的设置数量以及位置排布还可以有其它方式,此处不做具体限定。具体地,如图88所示,镜片12包括第一移动区域121A、第二移动区域121B以及第三移动区域121C,其中,第一移动区域121A、第二移动区域121B以及第三移动区域121C分别对应外部终端6的导航、翻译以及视频应用程序的显示内容。设置每个移动区域121对应外部终端6自身的显示内容,使得移动区域121与外部终端6自身的显示内容相对应,从而可通过移动操作来改变显示组件20在镜片12上的位置,使其移动至目标移动区域121,以将显示组件20的显示内容切换至外部终端6的目标显示内容,不需要用户在外部终端6一端进行操作,使得显示内容的切换操作方便快捷,可以提升近眼显示装置10的使用便利性。In one embodiment, as shown in Figures 87-89, the lens 12 includes a plurality of mobile areas 121, each of which corresponds to the display content of the external terminal 6 itself. Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 87, the plurality of mobile areas 121 are distributed along the lateral direction of the lens 12; or, as shown in Figure 88, the plurality of mobile areas 121 are distributed along the longitudinal direction of the lens 12; or, as shown in Figure 89, the plurality of mobile areas 121 are distributed along the lateral and longitudinal directions of the lens 12; in other embodiments, the mobile areas 121 may be arranged in a square or circular array or in a regular pattern. The above embodiments are only some optional settings of the mobile areas 121, and the number and position arrangement of the mobile areas 121 may also have other ways, which are not specifically limited here. Specifically, as shown in Figure 88, the lens 12 includes a first mobile area 121A, a second mobile area 121B and a third mobile area 121C, wherein the first mobile area 121A, the second mobile area 121B and the third mobile area 121C correspond to the display content of the navigation, translation and video applications of the external terminal 6, respectively. Each moving area 121 is set to correspond to the display content of the external terminal 6 itself, so that the moving area 121 corresponds to the display content of the external terminal 6 itself, so that the position of the display component 20 on the lens 12 can be changed by a moving operation, so that it is moved to the target moving area 121, so as to switch the display content of the display component 20 to the target display content of the external terminal 6, and the user does not need to operate at the external terminal 6 end, so that the switching operation of the display content is convenient and fast, which can improve the ease of use of the near-eye display device 10.

在一些实施例中,请参阅图90,镜片12上具有多个移动区域121,在工作状态下,显示组件20位于移动区域121时可以显示对应的图像内容。其中,显示组件20位于不同移动区域121可以展示不同的功能或应用。示例性地,显示组件20位于镜片12中间位置的移动区域121时,展示的功能或应用可以是主界面1114,上边位置可以是设置1112,设置1112的左右两边位置可以分别为信息1111和导航1113,主界面1114的左右两边位置可以是音乐1119和智能助手1115,主界面1114的下边可以是图片1117,图片1117左右两边分别可以是翻译1118和拨号1116。当然,用户可以根据需要在终端上重新排序自定义上述各功能界面,例如,根据使用频率或兴趣爱好进行自定义排布。可以理解地,显示组件20内部的存储单元204存储有包含上述功能或应用的第一显示信息,该第一显示信息包括上述功能或应用的底层图像内容,例如对应功能应用的底图、背景颜色、字体颜色等等。考虑到显示组件20在全彩中显示容易产生较大功耗,且对光学模组的尺寸和设计要求较高,在一些实施例中,显示组件20可以只显示单一颜色,例如绿色等等,相应地,存储单元204存储有具有单一颜色的字体或底图信息等等。在一些实施例中,用户的眼睛可以从眼睛侧透过镜片12的移动区域121看到环境侧的内容,即镜片12的移动区域121是不存在干扰用户观看的内容的,图90仅为方便展示和理解。当显示组件20移动到镜片12的不同位置时,显示组件20自身上可以显示需要显示的内容,而不是在镜片12的移动区域121上显示内容。例如,当显示组件20移动到中间位置的移动区域121时,显示组件20可以显示主界面1114, 主界面可以包括时间或天气等信息,当然主界面也可也根据用户自定义设置。当显示组件20位于显示主界面对应的移动区域121位置时,在该移动区域121之外的区域,诸如信息1111、设置1112、导航1113、智能助手1115、拨号1116、图片1117以及翻译1118等对应的移动区域121均无显示,用户的眼睛无法在镜片12上看到对应的静态或动态的内容。即显示组件20不移动到对应移动区域121时,其他移动区域121的功能或应用图像不会体现在镜片12上;只有当用户将显示组件20移动到对应的移动区域121位置时,才能在显示组件20上显示相应移动区域121对应的功能或应用的图像内容。In some embodiments, please refer to FIG. 90 , the lens 12 has a plurality of movable areas 121. In the working state, the display component 20 can display the corresponding image content when it is located in the movable area 121. Among them, the display component 20 can display different functions or applications when it is located in different movable areas 121. Exemplarily, when the display component 20 is located in the movable area 121 in the middle of the lens 12, the displayed function or application can be the main interface 1114, the upper position can be the setting 1112, the left and right positions of the setting 1112 can be information 1111 and navigation 1113 respectively, the left and right positions of the main interface 1114 can be music 1119 and smart assistant 1115, the lower part of the main interface 1114 can be a picture 1117, and the left and right sides of the picture 1117 can be translation 1118 and dialing 1116 respectively. Of course, the user can reorder and customize the above-mentioned functional interfaces on the terminal as needed, for example, customize the arrangement according to the frequency of use or interests. It can be understood that the storage unit 204 inside the display component 20 stores the first display information including the above-mentioned functions or applications, and the first display information includes the underlying image content of the above-mentioned functions or applications, such as the base map, background color, font color, etc. of the corresponding functional application. Considering that the display component 20 is prone to generate large power consumption when displayed in full color, and has high requirements on the size and design of the optical module, in some embodiments, the display component 20 can only display a single color, such as green, etc., and accordingly, the storage unit 204 stores font or base map information with a single color, etc. In some embodiments, the user's eyes can see the content on the environment side from the eye side through the moving area 121 of the lens 12, that is, the moving area 121 of the lens 12 does not contain content that interferes with the user's viewing, and Figure 90 is only for the convenience of display and understanding. When the display component 20 moves to different positions of the lens 12, the display component 20 itself can display the content to be displayed, instead of displaying the content on the moving area 121 of the lens 12. For example, when the display component 20 moves to the moving area 121 in the middle position, the display component 20 can display the main interface 1114, The main interface may include information such as time or weather, and of course the main interface may also be customized according to the user's settings. When the display component 20 is located at the position of the mobile area 121 corresponding to the display main interface, the areas outside the mobile area 121, such as information 1111, settings 1112, navigation 1113, smart assistant 1115, dialing 1116, pictures 1117, and translation 1118, corresponding to the mobile area 121 are not displayed, and the user's eyes cannot see the corresponding static or dynamic content on the lens 12. That is, when the display component 20 does not move to the corresponding mobile area 121, the functions or application images of other mobile areas 121 will not be reflected on the lens 12; only when the user moves the display component 20 to the corresponding mobile area 121 position, can the image content of the function or application corresponding to the corresponding mobile area 121 be displayed on the display component 20.

请参阅图87,在一实施例中,显示组件20的尺寸小于镜片12的尺寸。可选地,显示组件20在镜片12上的正投影面积远小于镜片12的面积,例如,显示组件20在镜片12上的最大正投影面积不大于6mm2,在一些实施例中,显示组件20的最大外径可以不超过15mm,即下文描述中壳体211的最大外径不超过15mm,例如可以为15mm、12mm、10mm,8.5mm、5mm等等,从而减小显示组件20的体积,既方便显示组件20与佩戴组件1适配,又可降低显示组件20对镜片12视野的影响。Please refer to FIG. 87 , in one embodiment, the size of the display component 20 is smaller than the size of the lens 12. Optionally, the orthographic projection area of the display component 20 on the lens 12 is much smaller than the area of the lens 12, for example, the maximum orthographic projection area of the display component 20 on the lens 12 is not greater than 6 mm2, in some embodiments, the maximum outer diameter of the display component 20 may not exceed 15 mm, that is, the maximum outer diameter of the housing 211 described below does not exceed 15 mm, for example, it may be 15 mm, 12 mm, 10 mm, 8.5 mm, 5 mm, etc., thereby reducing the volume of the display component 20, which is convenient for the display component 20 to be adapted to the wearing component 1, and can reduce the influence of the display component 20 on the field of view of the lens 12.

在一实施例中,如图86、图91、图94所示,显示组件20包括壳体211,以及设置于壳体211的处理器202、通信单元203、存储单元204、输出单元205以及传感单元206,且通信单元203、存储单元204、输出单元205以及传感单元206分别与处理器202电性连接。其中,处理器202、通信单元203、存储单元204可以设置在电路板模组220上。例如,电路板模组220可以包括第一电路板221和第二电路板222,处理器202和通信单元203可以位于第一电路板221上,存储单元204可以位于第二电路板222上。一些实施例中,第一电路板221和第二电路板222可以相互平行设置。壳体211具有容纳部件的内空间,壳体211的高度不高于20mm,如图94所示,壳体211的顶部和盖体212之间的距离可以不大于20mm,比如为18mm、15mm、12mm、10mm等等,壳体211的最大外径可以不超过15mm。可选地,处理器202、通信单元203、存储单元204、输出单元205以及传感单元206至少部分设置在壳体211内,使得壳体211可为各个部件提供防护,降低部件被损坏的风险。显示组件20还可包括电源单元207,电源单元207用于提供显示组件20的工作电能。电源单元207可包括可充电电池,电源单元207可以多次充电后重复使用,相对于一次性使用的电源而言,电源单元207更加节能环保。In one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 , FIG. 91 , and FIG. 94 , the display assembly 20 includes a housing 211, and a processor 202, a communication unit 203, a storage unit 204, an output unit 205, and a sensor unit 206 disposed in the housing 211, and the communication unit 203, the storage unit 204, the output unit 205, and the sensor unit 206 are electrically connected to the processor 202, respectively. The processor 202, the communication unit 203, and the storage unit 204 can be disposed on a circuit board module 220. For example, the circuit board module 220 can include a first circuit board 221 and a second circuit board 222, the processor 202 and the communication unit 203 can be located on the first circuit board 221, and the storage unit 204 can be located on the second circuit board 222. In some embodiments, the first circuit board 221 and the second circuit board 222 can be disposed in parallel with each other. The housing 211 has an inner space for accommodating components, and the height of the housing 211 is not higher than 20 mm. As shown in FIG. 94 , the distance between the top of the housing 211 and the cover 212 may be no greater than 20 mm, such as 18 mm, 15 mm, 12 mm, 10 mm, etc., and the maximum outer diameter of the housing 211 may not exceed 15 mm. Optionally, the processor 202, the communication unit 203, the storage unit 204, the output unit 205, and the sensor unit 206 are at least partially arranged in the housing 211, so that the housing 211 can provide protection for each component and reduce the risk of damage to the components. The display assembly 20 may also include a power supply unit 207, which is used to provide working power for the display assembly 20. The power supply unit 207 may include a rechargeable battery, and the power supply unit 207 can be reused after being charged multiple times. Compared with a disposable power supply, the power supply unit 207 is more energy-saving and environmentally friendly.

处理器202可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。处理器202可以由多个集成电路芯片共同实现。示例性地,处理器202可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。其中,通用处理器可以是微处理器。Processor 202 may be an integrated circuit chip having signal processing capability. Processor 202 may be implemented by a plurality of integrated circuit chips. Exemplarily, processor 202 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, or discrete hardware components. Among them, the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor.

通信单元203包括蓝牙通信模块、ZigBee通信模块、2.4g通信模块中的一种或多种。上述近距离无线通信模块不需要借助于外部无线网络,使得近眼显示系统1000在没有无线网络覆盖的场景仍然可以正常使用,提升了近眼显示系统1000的适用性。The communication unit 203 includes one or more of a Bluetooth communication module, a ZigBee communication module, and a 2.4g communication module. The short-range wireless communication module does not require the use of an external wireless network, so that the near-eye display system 1000 can still be used normally in a scene without wireless network coverage, thereby improving the applicability of the near-eye display system 1000.

存储单元204包括可读存储介质。可读存储介质具体可以为硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟、光盘、移动硬盘或者U盘等可以存储数据的介质。可选地,可读存储介质内置于壳体211,使得存储单元204与壳体211形成整体,便于随身携带,从而提升近眼显示装置10的使用便利性。或者可读存储介质可拆卸设置于壳体211,使得存储单元204的体积不受壳体211的限制,可以提升存储单元204的存储容量。The storage unit 204 includes a readable storage medium. The readable storage medium can be a medium that can store data, such as a hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, an optical disk, a mobile hard disk, or a USB flash drive. Optionally, the readable storage medium is built into the housing 211, so that the storage unit 204 and the housing 211 form a whole, which is convenient to carry, thereby improving the convenience of use of the near-eye display device 10. Or the readable storage medium can be detachably arranged in the housing 211, so that the volume of the storage unit 204 is not limited by the housing 211, and the storage capacity of the storage unit 204 can be improved.

请参阅图92、图94,在一实施例中,输出单元205包括微显示器251和光学模组252。示例性地,微显示器251和光学模组252通过固定支架208固定,固定支架208可包括第一连接部(图中未示出) 和第二连接部(图中未示出),第一连接部上设有第一安装部,第二连接部上设有第二安装部。第一安装部为孔结构或槽结构,第二安装部为孔结构或槽结构。其中,第一安装部与第二安装部两者相互连通。在本实施例中,第一安装部采用槽结构,第二安装部采用孔结构。微显示器251安装于第一安装部内,光学模组252部分安装于第二安装部内。微显示器251和处理器202电性连接,光学模组252位于微显示器251的出光侧,微显示器251从处理器202接收信息并转换成光学输出,光学模组252接收光学输出并传输至用户侧,以供用户观看。Please refer to FIG. 92 and FIG. 94. In one embodiment, the output unit 205 includes a micro display 251 and an optical module 252. Exemplarily, the micro display 251 and the optical module 252 are fixed by a fixing bracket 208. The fixing bracket 208 may include a first connecting portion (not shown in the figure). and a second connecting portion (not shown in the figure), the first connecting portion is provided with a first mounting portion, and the second connecting portion is provided with a second mounting portion. The first mounting portion is a hole structure or a slot structure, and the second mounting portion is a hole structure or a slot structure. Among them, the first mounting portion and the second mounting portion are interconnected. In this embodiment, the first mounting portion adopts a slot structure, and the second mounting portion adopts a hole structure. The microdisplay 251 is installed in the first mounting portion, and the optical module 252 is partially installed in the second mounting portion. The microdisplay 251 and the processor 202 are electrically connected, and the optical module 252 is located on the light emitting side of the microdisplay 251. The microdisplay 251 receives information from the processor 202 and converts it into optical output. The optical module 252 receives the optical output and transmits it to the user side for the user to watch.

微显示器251可以采用例如Micro-LED(Micro Light-EmittingDiode,微发光半导体)、Micro-oled(Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode,微有机发光二极管)、LCoS(Liquid Crystal On Silicon,硅基液晶)、LCD(Liquid Crystal Display,液晶显示)、DMD(Digital Micromirror Device,数字微镜元件)/DLP(Digital Light Processing,数字光处理)或LBS(Laser Beam Scanning,激光束扫描)等,或者这些技术的任意组合。光学模组252可以采用树脂或玻璃等制成。第一电路板221、第二电路板222以及微显示器251可以相互平行。传感单元206可以和电路板模组220电性连接,并环绕微显示器251和光学模组252的外周设置。显示组件20还可以包括套筒214,微显示器251和光学模组252位于套筒214内部,套筒214可采用不透光的树脂或者金属等材质制成,可以避免外界光线对微显示器251所发出的光信号造成干扰,以及避免微显示器251所发出的光信号出现漏光等情况。The micro display 251 may be, for example, Micro-LED (Micro Light-Emitting Diode), Micro-oled (Micro Organic Light-Emitting Diode), LCoS (Liquid Crystal On Silicon), LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), DMD (Digital Micromirror Device)/DLP (Digital Light Processing) or LBS (Laser Beam Scanning), or any combination of these technologies. The optical module 252 may be made of resin or glass. The first circuit board 221, the second circuit board 222 and the micro display 251 may be parallel to each other. The sensor unit 206 may be electrically connected to the circuit board module 220 and arranged around the periphery of the micro display 251 and the optical module 252. The display component 20 may further include a sleeve 214, wherein the microdisplay 251 and the optical module 252 are located inside the sleeve 214. The sleeve 214 may be made of opaque resin or metal or other materials to prevent external light from interfering with the optical signal emitted by the microdisplay 251, and to prevent light leakage of the optical signal emitted by the microdisplay 251.

在一些实施例中,如图94所示,显示组件20还包括盖体212,盖体212用于封闭壳体211的开口结构。盖体212可通过螺纹连接、卡接、过盈配合等方式安装于开口结构中。盖体212上设置有凹槽2121,凹槽2121内安装有可被磁铁吸引的吸引件213,吸引件213可被磁化或具有磁性。吸引件213可采用可磁化的铁素体不锈钢等制成,或者吸引件213直接采用磁铁制成。吸引件213可以采用片状结构,且吸引件213可通过粘接等方式固定于凹槽2121内。其中,吸引件213被配置成和外部的吸引件相互磁吸,以将显示组件20装配到佩戴组件1上,其中外部的吸引件材料可以和吸引件213相同,两者能够相互磁吸,从而夹持固定在佩戴组件1,例如镜片12或框体11上。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 94 , the display assembly 20 further includes a cover 212, which is used to close the opening structure of the housing 211. The cover 212 can be installed in the opening structure by means of threaded connection, snap-fit, interference fit, etc. A groove 2121 is provided on the cover 212, and an attracting member 213 that can be attracted by a magnet is installed in the groove 2121, and the attracting member 213 can be magnetized or has magnetism. The attracting member 213 can be made of magnetizable ferrite stainless steel, etc., or the attracting member 213 is directly made of a magnet. The attracting member 213 can be a sheet structure, and the attracting member 213 can be fixed in the groove 2121 by means of bonding, etc. Among them, the attracting member 213 is configured to be magnetically attracted to each other with an external attracting member, so as to assemble the display assembly 20 to the wearing assembly 1, wherein the material of the external attracting member can be the same as that of the attracting member 213, and the two can be magnetically attracted to each other, so as to be clamped and fixed on the wearing assembly 1, such as the lens 12 or the frame 11.

在一些实施例中,如图94,电源单元207包括电池,电池可以是弧形或环形,电源单元207可以形成有一中心容置腔271,输出单元205和电路板模组220位于中心容置腔271的中心,电池围绕在微显示器251和电路板模组220的外周,微显示器251和光学模组252的轴线方向与电源单元207的高度方向基本平行,由此可以实现中心对齐,并方便进行组装。其中,中心容置腔271外轮廓的横截面形状包括弧形或环形,电源单元207的横截面为垂直于电源单元207高度方向。输出单元205和电路板模组220沿电源单元207的高度方向依次设置。在另一些实施例中,电源单元207可以是纽扣电池,该电池可以和电路板模组220平行设置,或者和吸引件213平行设置。另一些实施例中,如果采用纽扣电池,吸引件213也可取消,直接利用纽扣电池作为电源单元207和外部磁体等吸附件相互磁吸。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG94 , the power supply unit 207 includes a battery, which may be arc-shaped or annular, and the power supply unit 207 may be formed with a central accommodating cavity 271, the output unit 205 and the circuit board module 220 are located at the center of the central accommodating cavity 271, and the battery surrounds the periphery of the micro display 251 and the circuit board module 220, and the axis direction of the micro display 251 and the optical module 252 is substantially parallel to the height direction of the power supply unit 207, thereby achieving center alignment and facilitating assembly. Among them, the cross-sectional shape of the outer contour of the central accommodating cavity 271 includes an arc or annular shape, and the cross-sectional shape of the power supply unit 207 is perpendicular to the height direction of the power supply unit 207. The output unit 205 and the circuit board module 220 are sequentially arranged along the height direction of the power supply unit 207. In other embodiments, the power supply unit 207 may be a button battery, which may be arranged in parallel with the circuit board module 220, or in parallel with the attraction member 213. In other embodiments, if a button battery is used, the attracting member 213 may be eliminated, and the button battery can be directly used as the power supply unit 207 and an external magnet or other attracting member to attract each other.

在一实施例中,如图93所示,传感单元206包括惯性测量模块261,惯性测量模块261与处理器202电性连接,惯性测量模块261可以位于第一电路板221上。惯性测量模块261被配置成获取显示组件20相对镜片12的移动信息,处理器202从惯性测量模块261获取移动信息,并通过通信单元203将移动信息发送至外部终端6。其中,移动信息可以是显示组件20相对镜片12的移动速度、加速度、位移量、位移量在预设方向上的位移分量或转动角度等移动参数其中之一,又或者为部分上述移动参数之间的组合。外部终端6在获取通信单元203发送的移动信息后,可以通过移动信息确定显示组件20在镜片12上的移动区域121的位置,以便将与移动区域121对应的外部终端6自身的显示内容发送至近眼显示装置10。比如图88中,外部终端6通过移动信息确定显示组件20在镜片12上的第二移动区域 121B,则将第二移动区域121B对应外部终端6的翻译应用程序的显示内容发送至近眼显示装置10。In one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93 , the sensing unit 206 includes an inertial measurement module 261, which is electrically connected to the processor 202, and the inertial measurement module 261 may be located on the first circuit board 221. The inertial measurement module 261 is configured to obtain the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12, and the processor 202 obtains the movement information from the inertial measurement module 261, and sends the movement information to the external terminal 6 through the communication unit 203. The movement information may be one of the movement parameters such as the movement speed, acceleration, displacement, displacement component of the displacement in a preset direction, or rotation angle of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12, or a combination of some of the above movement parameters. After obtaining the movement information sent by the communication unit 203, the external terminal 6 may determine the position of the moving area 121 of the display component 20 on the lens 12 through the movement information, so as to send the display content of the external terminal 6 corresponding to the moving area 121 to the near-eye display device 10. For example, in FIG. 88 , the external terminal 6 determines the second moving area of the display component 20 on the lens 12 through the movement information. 121B, the display content of the translation application of the external terminal 6 corresponding to the second moving area 121B is sent to the near-eye display device 10.

当显示组件20磁吸连接在镜片12上时,可通过手动操作来移动显示组件20在镜片12上的位置,惯性测量模块261获取显示组件20相对镜片12的移动信息,外部终端6通过移动信息确定显示组件20在镜片12上的移动区域121的位置,以实现外部终端6不同内容的显示。在一些使用场景中,比如用户头部晃动可能引起显示组件20相对镜片12的移动,此时用户并不期望切换显示内容,但惯性测量模块261仍可获取到显示组件20相对镜片12的移动信息,进而可能导致外部终端6误判显示组件20在镜片12上的移动区域121的位置,并切换显示内容,给用户的使用造成不便。When the display component 20 is magnetically connected to the lens 12, the position of the display component 20 on the lens 12 can be moved by manual operation, and the inertial measurement module 261 obtains the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12. The external terminal 6 determines the position of the moving area 121 of the display component 20 on the lens 12 through the movement information to realize the display of different contents of the external terminal 6. In some usage scenarios, for example, the shaking of the user's head may cause the movement of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12. At this time, the user does not expect to switch the display content, but the inertial measurement module 261 can still obtain the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12, which may cause the external terminal 6 to misjudge the position of the moving area 121 of the display component 20 on the lens 12 and switch the display content, causing inconvenience to the user.

在一实施例中,如图93所示,传感单元206还包括触摸检测模块262,触摸检测模块262与处理器202电性连接。触摸检测模块262被配置成获取用户对显示组件20的触摸操作信息,并将触摸操作信息发送至处理器202。具体地,当用户握持显示组件20手动操作移动显示组件20时,可以触发触摸检测模块262,进而使得触摸检测模块262检测到用户对显示组件20的触摸操作信息。当满足预设条件时,比如,处理器202通过接收到的触摸操作信息确认用户手动操作移动了显示组件20时,处理器202向惯性测量模块261发送检测指令,惯性测量模块261响应检测指令获取显示组件20相对镜片12的移动信息。如此设置,使得只有在检测到用户手动操作移动了显示组件20时,惯性测量模块261才检测显示组件20相对镜片12的移动信息,可以降低显示组件20位置移动误判的概率,使得显示内容的切换操作与用户的预期一致。In one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93 , the sensing unit 206 further includes a touch detection module 262, and the touch detection module 262 is electrically connected to the processor 202. The touch detection module 262 is configured to obtain the user's touch operation information on the display component 20, and send the touch operation information to the processor 202. Specifically, when the user holds the display component 20 and manually moves the display component 20, the touch detection module 262 can be triggered, so that the touch detection module 262 detects the user's touch operation information on the display component 20. When the preset conditions are met, for example, when the processor 202 confirms that the user manually moves the display component 20 through the received touch operation information, the processor 202 sends a detection instruction to the inertial measurement module 261, and the inertial measurement module 261 obtains the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12 in response to the detection instruction. With such an arrangement, the inertial measurement module 261 detects the movement information of the display component 20 relative to the lens 12 only when it is detected that the user has manually moved the display component 20, thereby reducing the probability of misjudgment of the position movement of the display component 20 and ensuring that the switching operation of the display content is consistent with the user's expectations.

可选地,触摸检测模块262包括触控板以及光传感器中的一种或两种。其中,触控板可以安装在壳体211上,且至少部分区域位于壳体211的外表面,以使用户在握持显示组件20手动操作移动显示组件20时可以触摸到触控板,进而使得触控板检测到用户对显示组件20的触摸操作信息。光传感器可以是基于光电效应的传感器,它将光信号的变化转换成电信号的变化,从而实现触摸操作信息的检测。具体地,光传感器可以是反射型光电传感器,包括光源和光电元件,光源安装在壳体211内,壳体211的部分区域为透光区,透光区设置在用户握持显示组件20手动操作移动显示组件20时可以触摸到的位置,光源发出的光线照射在透光区,当用户握持在透光区时,光源发出的光线因遮挡而反射回光电元件,光电元件通过检测光线强度的变化实现触摸操作信息的检测。相对于其它传感器而言,触控板以及光传感器均具有工艺成熟、可靠性好、成本相对较低等优点。Optionally, the touch detection module 262 includes one or both of a touch panel and a light sensor. The touch panel can be installed on the housing 211, and at least a part of the area is located on the outer surface of the housing 211, so that the user can touch the touch panel when holding the display component 20 and manually operating the mobile display component 20, so that the touch panel detects the user's touch operation information on the display component 20. The light sensor can be a sensor based on the photoelectric effect, which converts the change of the light signal into the change of the electrical signal, thereby realizing the detection of the touch operation information. Specifically, the light sensor can be a reflective photoelectric sensor, including a light source and a photoelectric element, the light source is installed in the housing 211, and a part of the area of the housing 211 is a light-transmitting area, which is set at a position that can be touched by the user when holding the display component 20 and manually operating the mobile display component 20, and the light emitted by the light source is irradiated on the light-transmitting area. When the user holds in the light-transmitting area, the light emitted by the light source is reflected back to the photoelectric element due to shielding, and the photoelectric element detects the change of light intensity to realize the detection of touch operation information. Compared with other sensors, touch panels and optical sensors have the advantages of mature technology, good reliability and relatively low cost.

为解决近眼显示装置10显示不够流畅、显示延时的问题,在一实施例中,存储单元204被配置成存储有第一显示信息,通信单元203被配置成与外部终端6建立第一通信,第一通信包括来自外部终端6的第二显示信息,处理器202被配置成将第一显示信息和第二显示信息合并得到第三显示信息,输出单元205被配置成将第三显示信息转换成光学输出并投射至用户侧。具体地,第一显示信息可存储在可读存储介质中。微显示器251从处理器202接收第三显示信息并转换成光学输出,其中,光学输出可以是光线,光学模组252接收光学输出并传输至用户侧,以供用户观看。In order to solve the problem that the display of the near-eye display device 10 is not smooth enough and the display is delayed, in one embodiment, the storage unit 204 is configured to store the first display information, the communication unit 203 is configured to establish a first communication with the external terminal 6, the first communication includes the second display information from the external terminal 6, the processor 202 is configured to merge the first display information and the second display information to obtain the third display information, and the output unit 205 is configured to convert the third display information into an optical output and project it to the user side. Specifically, the first display information can be stored in a readable storage medium. The micro display 251 receives the third display information from the processor 202 and converts it into an optical output, wherein the optical output can be light, and the optical module 252 receives the optical output and transmits it to the user side for viewing by the user.

本申请所提供的近眼显示装置10,显示组件20包括处理器202、通信单元203、存储单元204和输出单元205,输出单元205将第三显示信息转换成光学输出并投射至用户侧,第三显示信息由处理器202将第一显示信息和第二显示信息合并得到,即将第三显示信息拆分为第一显示信息和第二显示信息,其中,第一显示信息可预先存储在存储单元204,第二显示信息来自外部终端6,使得近眼显示装置10在进行显示时,通信单元203与外部终端6之间只需要传输第二显示信息,减少了通信单元203与外部终端6之间的数据传输量,在相同带宽条件下,通信单元203可以更快地接收到来自外部终端6的数据,从而使得近眼显示装置10的显示更加流畅,可以降低显示延时。 The near-eye display device 10 provided in the present application, the display component 20 includes a processor 202, a communication unit 203, a storage unit 204 and an output unit 205, the output unit 205 converts the third display information into an optical output and projects it to the user side, the third display information is obtained by the processor 202 by merging the first display information and the second display information, that is, the third display information is split into the first display information and the second display information, wherein the first display information can be pre-stored in the storage unit 204, and the second display information comes from the external terminal 6, so that when the near-eye display device 10 is displaying, only the second display information needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, thereby reducing the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6. Under the same bandwidth conditions, the communication unit 203 can receive data from the external terminal 6 faster, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.

在一实施例中,第一显示信息包括在先显示的数据,第二显示信息包括在后显示的数据。具体地,以视频应用程序的显示内容为例,第一显示信息包括播放时间在先的视频数据,第二显示信息包括播放时间在后的视频数据,将播放时间在先的视频数据预先存储在存储单元204,近眼显示装置10在进行显示时,通信单元203与外部终端6之间只需要传输播放时间在后的视频数据,减少了通信单元203与外部终端6之间的数据传输量,从而使得近眼显示装置10的显示更加流畅,可以降低显示延时。In one embodiment, the first display information includes data displayed first, and the second display information includes data displayed later. Specifically, taking the display content of a video application as an example, the first display information includes video data with an earlier playback time, and the second display information includes video data with a later playback time. The video data with an earlier playback time is pre-stored in the storage unit 204. When the near-eye display device 10 is displaying, only the video data with a later playback time needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, which reduces the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.

在一实施例中,第一显示信息包括不随显示时间改变的图像或文字数据,第二显示信息包括显示过程中随显示时间改变的图像或文字数据。比如,当需要进行外部终端6的导航应用程序的信息显示时,第一显示信息可包括不随显示时间改变的导航的图标,第二显示信息包括显示过程中随显示时间改变的导航内容;又如,当需要进行外部终端6的翻译应用程序的信息显示时,第一显示信息可包括不随显示时间改变的翻译应用程序的共用菜单图标,第二显示信息包括显示过程中随显示时间改变的翻译的具体内容。如此设置,将不随显示时间改变的图像或文字数据预先存储在存储单元204,近眼显示装置10在进行显示时,通信单元203与外部终端6之间只需要传输显示过程中随显示时间改变的图像或文字数据,减少了通信单元203与外部终端6之间的数据传输量,从而使得近眼显示装置10的显示更加流畅,可以降低显示延时。In one embodiment, the first display information includes an image or text data that does not change with the display time, and the second display information includes an image or text data that changes with the display time during the display process. For example, when it is necessary to display the information of the navigation application of the external terminal 6, the first display information may include a navigation icon that does not change with the display time, and the second display information includes the navigation content that changes with the display time during the display process; for another example, when it is necessary to display the information of the translation application of the external terminal 6, the first display information may include a common menu icon of the translation application that does not change with the display time, and the second display information includes the specific content of the translation that changes with the display time during the display process. In this way, the image or text data that does not change with the display time is pre-stored in the storage unit 204. When the near-eye display device 10 is displayed, only the image or text data that changes with the display time during the display process needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, which reduces the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.

在一实施例中,第三显示信息包括外部终端6上的应用程序图形界面,第一显示信息包括静态显示信息,第二显示信息包括动态显示信息。设置第三显示信息包括外部终端6上的应用程序图形界面,使得显示组件20在各个移动区域121之间变换时,输出单元205可以显示与移动区域121对应的应用程序图形界面,从而方便用户快速选择需要显示的应用程序,提升近眼显示装置10的易用性。静态显示信息可以是应用程序显示时的底图、底色等数据,相应地,动态显示信息可以是变化的文字或颜色等数据。将静态显示信息预先存储在存储单元204,近眼显示装置10在进行显示时,通信单元203与外部终端6之间只需要传输动态显示信息,减少了通信单元203与外部终端6之间的数据传输量,从而使得近眼显示装置10的显示更加流畅,可以降低显示延时。In one embodiment, the third display information includes an application graphical interface on the external terminal 6, the first display information includes static display information, and the second display information includes dynamic display information. The third display information is set to include an application graphical interface on the external terminal 6, so that when the display component 20 changes between each mobile area 121, the output unit 205 can display the application graphical interface corresponding to the mobile area 121, so as to facilitate the user to quickly select the application to be displayed, thereby improving the usability of the near-eye display device 10. The static display information can be data such as the base map and background color when the application is displayed, and correspondingly, the dynamic display information can be data such as changing text or color. The static display information is pre-stored in the storage unit 204. When the near-eye display device 10 is displayed, only the dynamic display information needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, which reduces the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.

为提升用户体验,应用程序通常会进行迭代升级,应用程序的图形界面或者菜单图标等显示信息可能会在升级时改变,如果存储单元204中存储的第一显示信息与第二显示信息不匹配,则可能导致第一显示信息与第二显示信息难以合并得到第三显示信息,近眼显示装置10出现错误显示。在一实施例中,通信单元203被配置成与外部终端6建立第二通信,第二通信包括来自外部终端6的更新显示信息,更新显示信息用于替换至少部分第一显示信息,存储单元204被配置成存储更新显示信息。利用更新显示信息替换至少部分第一显示信息,可以使得存储单元204中存储的第一显示信息与第二显示信息匹配,即使应用程序迭代升级,第一显示信息仍然可与第二显示信息合并得到第三显示信息,确保近眼显示装置10可以正确显示。In order to improve the user experience, applications are usually upgraded iteratively, and the display information such as the graphical interface or menu icon of the application may change during the upgrade. If the first display information stored in the storage unit 204 does not match the second display information, it may cause the first display information and the second display information to be difficult to merge to obtain the third display information, and the near-eye display device 10 may display an error. In one embodiment, the communication unit 203 is configured to establish a second communication with the external terminal 6, and the second communication includes updated display information from the external terminal 6. The updated display information is used to replace at least part of the first display information, and the storage unit 204 is configured to store the updated display information. By replacing at least part of the first display information with the updated display information, the first display information stored in the storage unit 204 can be matched with the second display information. Even if the application is upgraded iteratively, the first display information can still be merged with the second display information to obtain the third display information, ensuring that the near-eye display device 10 can display correctly.

可选地,在一实施例中,第二显示信息包括基于显示组件20相对移动区域121移动变化产生的外部终端6的显示内容。比如,如图88所示,第一移动区域121A、第二移动区域121B以及第三移动区域121C分别对应外部终端6的导航、翻译以及视频应用程序的显示内容,显示组件20移动变化前,显示组件20位于第一移动区域121A,此时外部终端6将第一移动区域121A对应外部终端6的导航应用程序的显示内容发送至近眼显示装置10;当显示组件20从第一移动区域121A移动变化至第二移动区域121B后,此时外部终端6将第二移动区域121B对应外部终端6的翻译应用程序的显示内容发送至近眼显示装置10,从而将近眼显示装置10的显示内容从导航应用程序切换至翻译应用程序。如此设置,使得显示组件20在各个移动区域121之间变换时,显示组件20可以显示与移动区域121对应的外部终 端6自身的显示内容,用户不需要在外部终端6一端进行操作,在近眼显示装置10一端即可实现外部终端6显示内容的切换,可以提升近眼显示装置10的使用便利性。Optionally, in one embodiment, the second display information includes the display content of the external terminal 6 generated based on the movement of the display component 20 relative to the moving area 121. For example, as shown in FIG88, the first moving area 121A, the second moving area 121B and the third moving area 121C correspond to the display content of the navigation, translation and video applications of the external terminal 6 respectively. Before the display component 20 moves, the display component 20 is located in the first moving area 121A. At this time, the external terminal 6 sends the display content of the navigation application of the external terminal 6 corresponding to the first moving area 121A to the near-eye display device 10; when the display component 20 moves from the first moving area 121A to the second moving area 121B, the external terminal 6 sends the display content of the translation application of the external terminal 6 corresponding to the second moving area 121B to the near-eye display device 10, thereby switching the display content of the near-eye display device 10 from the navigation application to the translation application. In this way, when the display component 20 changes between each moving area 121, the display component 20 can display the external terminal corresponding to the moving area 121. The user does not need to operate the display content of the external terminal 6 at one end, and can switch the display content of the external terminal 6 at one end of the near-eye display device 10, which can improve the convenience of use of the near-eye display device 10.

可选地,在一实施例中,第二显示信息还包括基于移动信息和移动区域121变化产生的显示内容。比如,如图88所示,第一移动区域121A、第二移动区域121B以及第三移动区域121C分别对应外部终端6的导航、翻译以及视频应用程序的显示内容,在显示组件20从第一移动区域121A移动变化至第二移动区域121B过程中,外部终端6可将导航应用程序切换至翻译应用程序的信息发送至近眼显示装置10,示例性地,第二显示信息可包括文字信息“从导航应用程序切换至翻译应用程序”,或者包括导航应用程序以及翻译应用程序的图标,以便于用户及时知晓移动操作将会使得近眼显示装置10的显示内容从导航应用程序切换至翻译应用程序。如此设置,使得显示组件20可以对显示组件20在镜片12上的移动操作过程进行显示,移动操作过程可视化,方便用户及时获得操作的反馈,可以提升用户体验。Optionally, in one embodiment, the second display information also includes display content generated based on the movement information and the change of the movement area 121. For example, as shown in FIG88, the first movement area 121A, the second movement area 121B and the third movement area 121C correspond to the display content of the navigation, translation and video applications of the external terminal 6 respectively. When the display component 20 moves from the first movement area 121A to the second movement area 121B, the external terminal 6 can send information that the navigation application is switched to the translation application to the near-eye display device 10. For example, the second display information may include text information "Switch from the navigation application to the translation application", or include icons of the navigation application and the translation application, so that the user can know in time that the movement operation will cause the display content of the near-eye display device 10 to switch from the navigation application to the translation application. In this way, the display component 20 can display the movement operation process of the display component 20 on the lens 12, and the movement operation process is visualized, which is convenient for the user to obtain feedback on the operation in time, and the user experience can be improved.

为解决近眼显示装置10显示不够流畅、显示延时的问题,如图97、图91所示,本申请提供的近眼显示系统1000包括如上所述的近眼显示装置10以及终端6,近眼显示装置10与终端6通信连接,终端6被配置成与近眼显示装置10的通信单元203建立第一通信,第一通信包括来自终端6的第二显示信息。近眼显示装置10被配置成将自身存储的第一显示信息和第二显示信息合并得到第三显示信息,并将第三显示信息转换成光学输出投射至用户侧。In order to solve the problem that the display of the near-eye display device 10 is not smooth enough and the display is delayed, as shown in Figures 97 and 91, the near-eye display system 1000 provided by the present application includes the near-eye display device 10 and the terminal 6 as described above, and the near-eye display device 10 is connected to the terminal 6 for communication, and the terminal 6 is configured to establish a first communication with the communication unit 203 of the near-eye display device 10, and the first communication includes the second display information from the terminal 6. The near-eye display device 10 is configured to merge the first display information and the second display information stored in itself to obtain the third display information, and convert the third display information into an optical output and project it to the user side.

本申请所提供的近眼显示系统1000,近眼显示系统1000包括近眼显示装置10以及终端6,近眼显示装置10与终端6通信连接,将第三显示信息拆分为第一显示信息和第二显示信息,其中,第一显示信息可预先存储在近眼显示装置10一端,第二显示信息来自终端6,使得近眼显示装置10在进行显示时,通信单元203与终端6之间只需要传输第二显示信息,减少了通信单元203与终端6之间的数据传输量,在相同带宽条件下,通信单元203可以更快地接收到来自终端6的数据,从而使得近眼显示装置10的显示更加流畅,可以降低显示延时。The near-eye display system 1000 provided in the present application includes a near-eye display device 10 and a terminal 6. The near-eye display device 10 is communicatively connected to the terminal 6 to split the third display information into first display information and second display information, wherein the first display information can be pre-stored at one end of the near-eye display device 10, and the second display information comes from the terminal 6, so that when the near-eye display device 10 is displaying, only the second display information needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the terminal 6, thereby reducing the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the terminal 6. Under the same bandwidth conditions, the communication unit 203 can receive data from the terminal 6 faster, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.

请参阅图15,在一实施例中,终端6可以包括RF电路91、存储器92、输入单元93、显示单元94、传感器95、音频电路96、无线通信模块97、处理器98以及电源99等。其中,RF电路91、存储器92、输入单元93、显示单元94、传感器95、音频电路96以及无线通信模块97分别与处理器98连接;电源99用于为终端6提供电能。Please refer to FIG. 15 . In one embodiment, the terminal 6 may include an RF circuit 91, a memory 92, an input unit 93, a display unit 94, a sensor 95, an audio circuit 96, a wireless communication module 97, a processor 98, and a power supply 99. The RF circuit 91, the memory 92, the input unit 93, the display unit 94, the sensor 95, the audio circuit 96, and the wireless communication module 97 are respectively connected to the processor 98; the power supply 99 is used to provide power to the terminal 6.

具体而言,RF电路91用于接发信号;存储器92用于存储数据指令信息;输入单元93用于输入信息,具体可以包括触控面板931以及操作按键等其他输入设备932;显示单元94则可以包括显示面板941等;传感器95包括红外传感器、激光传感器等,用于检测用户接近信号、距离信号等;扬声器961以及传声器(或者麦克风)962通过音频电路96与处理器98连接,用于接发声音信号;无线通信模块97则用于接收和发射无线通信信号,使得终端6可与近眼显示装置10通信连接;处理器98用于处理终端的数据信息。上述终端仅为本申请的一种实施例,其他具有无线通信信号传输的终端也在本申请的保护范围内,终端内部具体结构不再赘述。Specifically, the RF circuit 91 is used to receive and send signals; the memory 92 is used to store data instruction information; the input unit 93 is used to input information, which may specifically include a touch panel 931 and other input devices 932 such as operation buttons; the display unit 94 may include a display panel 941, etc.; the sensor 95 includes an infrared sensor, a laser sensor, etc., for detecting user proximity signals, distance signals, etc.; the speaker 961 and the microphone (or microphone) 962 are connected to the processor 98 through the audio circuit 96 for receiving and sending sound signals; the wireless communication module 97 is used to receive and transmit wireless communication signals, so that the terminal 6 can communicate with the near-eye display device 10; the processor 98 is used to process the data information of the terminal. The above terminal is only one embodiment of the present application, and other terminals with wireless communication signal transmission are also within the protection scope of the present application, and the specific internal structure of the terminal is not repeated.

本申请提供一种近眼显示装置的控制方法。控制方法300用于控制近眼显示装置10,近眼显示装置10包括镜片12以及显示组件20,显示组件20被配置成可移动地设置在镜片12上,显示组件20包括壳体211,以及设置于壳体211的处理器202、通信单元203、存储单元204和输出单元205,且通信单元203、存储单元204和输出单元205分别与处理器202电性连接。通信单元203与外部终端6通信连接,其中,通信单元203与外部终端6之间的通信连接方式可以是蓝牙、ZigBee或2.4g中的一种或多种。控制方法300由处理器202执行。请参阅图96,控制方法300可包括步骤S310-S340: The present application provides a control method for a near-eye display device. The control method 300 is used to control a near-eye display device 10, which includes a lens 12 and a display component 20, wherein the display component 20 is configured to be movably disposed on the lens 12, and the display component 20 includes a housing 211, and a processor 202, a communication unit 203, a storage unit 204, and an output unit 205 disposed in the housing 211, and the communication unit 203, the storage unit 204, and the output unit 205 are electrically connected to the processor 202, respectively. The communication unit 203 is communicatively connected to an external terminal 6, wherein the communication connection mode between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6 may be one or more of Bluetooth, ZigBee, or 2.4g. The control method 300 is executed by the processor 202. Referring to FIG. 96, the control method 300 may include steps S310-S340:

S310,通过通信单元203接收来自外部终端6的第二显示信息。S310 , receiving second display information from the external terminal 6 through the communication unit 203 .

可选地,第二显示信息可包括显示过程中随显示时间改变的图像或文字数据。Optionally, the second display information may include image or text data that changes with display time during the display process.

S320,从存储单元204获取第一显示信息。S320 , obtaining first display information from the storage unit 204 .

可选地,第一显示信息包括不随显示时间改变的图像或文字数据,或者,第一显示信息包括静态显示信息。Optionally, the first display information includes image or text data that does not change with display time, or the first display information includes static display information.

S330,将第一显示信息和第二显示信息合并得到第三显示信息;S330, combining the first display information and the second display information to obtain third display information;

S340,将第三显示信息发送至输出单元205,输出单元205用于将第三显示信息转换成光学输出并投射至用户侧。S340, sending the third display information to the output unit 205, the output unit 205 is used to convert the third display information into an optical output and project it to the user side.

本申请所提供的控制方法300,将第三显示信息拆分为第一显示信息和第二显示信息,其中,第一显示信息可预先存储在存储单元204,第二显示信息通过通信单元203接收,使得近眼显示装置10在进行显示时,通信单元203与外部终端6之间只需要传输第二显示信息,减少了通信单元203与外部终端6之间的数据传输量,在相同带宽条件下,通信单元203可以更快地接收到来自终端6的数据,从而使得近眼显示装置10的显示更加流畅,可以降低显示延时。The control method 300 provided in the present application splits the third display information into the first display information and the second display information, wherein the first display information can be pre-stored in the storage unit 204, and the second display information is received through the communication unit 203, so that when the near-eye display device 10 is displaying, only the second display information needs to be transmitted between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6, thereby reducing the amount of data transmission between the communication unit 203 and the external terminal 6. Under the same bandwidth conditions, the communication unit 203 can receive data from the terminal 6 faster, thereby making the display of the near-eye display device 10 smoother and reducing the display delay.

以上所述仅为本申请实施例的实施方式,并非因此限制本申请实施例的专利范围,上述的具体实施方式仅仅是示意性的,而不是限制性的,本领域的普通技术人员在本申请的启示下,凡是利用本申请实施例说明书及附图内容所作的等效结构或等效流程变换,或直接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领域,在不脱离本申请宗旨和权利要求所保护的范围情况下,还可做出很多形式,均同理包括在本申请实施例的专利保护范围内。 The above description is only an implementation method of the embodiment of the present application, and does not limit the patent scope of the embodiment of the present application. The above specific implementation methods are merely illustrative and not restrictive. Under the guidance of the present application, ordinary technicians in this field can make many forms of equivalent structures or equivalent process changes made by using the description and drawings of the embodiment of the present application, or directly or indirectly apply them in other related technical fields without departing from the scope of protection of the purpose of the present application and the claims, which are also included in the patent protection scope of the embodiment of the present application.

Claims (20)

一种显示模组的控制方法,其中,所述显示模组被配置成放置在光学镜片上,以及显示模组被配置成输出图像内容,所述方法包括:A method for controlling a display module, wherein the display module is configured to be placed on an optical lens, and the display module is configured to output image content, the method comprising: 监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;Monitoring the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected; 在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面;所述目标运动状态被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件。When the target motion state is detected, the display module is controlled to form a graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第一逻辑功能;所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件被预置为触发所述第一逻辑功能的触发条件;所述在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the target motion state includes: the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition; the target logical function includes: a first logical function; the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies the first preset condition and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the first logical function; and when the target motion state is detected, controlling the display module to image a graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens comprises: 在监测到所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。When it is detected that the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition, the display module is controlled to image a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述第一预设条件包括以下之一或组合:The method according to claim 2, wherein the first preset condition includes one or a combination of the following: 所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length; 所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度,且所述移动的位移方向是预设的第一方向;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, and the displacement direction of the movement is a preset first direction; 所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度,且所述移动的起点是预设的第一位置,所述第一位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, and the starting point of the movement is a preset first position, which is a fixed position selected on the lens; 所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度,且所述移动的位移方向是预设的第一方向,且所述移动的起点是所述第一位置;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, the displacement direction of the movement is a preset first direction, and the starting point of the movement is the first position; 所述移动的终点是预设的第二位置,所述第二位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;The end point of the movement is a preset second position, and the second position is a fixed position selected on the lens; 所述移动的轨迹与预设轨迹的形状相似度不小于预设的第一阈值。The shape similarity between the moving trajectory and the preset trajectory is not less than a preset first threshold. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处,所述第三位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第二逻辑功能;所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处被预置为触发所述第二逻辑功能的触发条件;所述在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the target motion state comprises: the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens, the third position is a fixed position selected on the lens; the target logic function comprises: a second logic function; the display module is stationary at the third position on the lens and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the second logic function; and when the target motion state is detected, controlling the display module to image a graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens comprises: 在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述第二逻辑功能的第二图形界面。In a case where it is detected that the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens, the display module is controlled to image a second graphic interface of the second logical function on the lens. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组进行轴旋转;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第三逻辑功能,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能;所述在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the target motion state includes: the display module performs axial rotation; the target logical function includes: a third logical function, and the third logical function is a logical function currently running in the foreground; when the target motion state is detected, controlling the display module to image a graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens comprises: 在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的情况下,控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是所述第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述显示模组进行轴旋转被预置为触发所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能的触发条件。When the axial rotation of the display module is detected, the display module is controlled to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens; the third graphic interface is the graphic interface of the third logical function, and the target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the third logical function; the axial rotation of the display module is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the sub-function in the third logical function. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其中,所述在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的情况下,控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新,包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein, when the display module is detected to be rotating about an axis, controlling the display module to update a target area in a third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens comprises: 在监测到所述显示模组进行轴旋转的转动角度不小于预设的第一阈值角度的情况下,控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新。 When it is detected that the rotation angle of the display module during the axial rotation is not less than a preset first threshold angle, the display module is controlled to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises: 检测所述显示模组的触摸部的接触;detecting contact of a touch portion of the display module; 所述在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面,包括:The graphical interface of controlling the display module to image the target logic function on the lens when the target motion state is detected includes: 在检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于预设的第一阈值时长且监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面。When it is detected that the duration of the touch portion being touched is not less than a preset first threshold duration and the target motion state is monitored, the display module is controlled to image a graphic interface of the target logical function on the lens. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the method further comprises: 在检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于预设的第二阈值时长且监测到所述显示模组始终静止于所述镜片上的情况下,或,在未检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于第三阈值时长的情况下,启动防误触模式;所述防误触模式是指在该模式下控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上保持成像当前在前台运行的逻辑功能的图形界面;When it is detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a preset second threshold duration and it is monitored that the display module is always stationary on the lens, or when it is not detected that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a third threshold duration, the anti-false touch mode is started; the anti-false touch mode refers to a mode in which the display module is controlled to keep imaging a graphical interface of a logic function currently running in the foreground on the lens; 所述第一阈值时长小于所述第二阈值时长。The first threshold duration is shorter than the second threshold duration. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the method further comprises: 在所述防误触模式下再次检测到所述触摸部被触摸的持续时长不小于第四阈值时长的情况下,解除所述防误触模;所述第四阈值时长小于或等于所述第一阈值时长。When it is detected again in the false touch prevention mode that the touch portion is touched for a duration not less than a fourth threshold duration, the false touch prevention mode is released; and the fourth threshold duration is less than or equal to the first threshold duration. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the method further comprises: 在启动防误触模式的同时输出用于提示用户所述防误触模式已启动的提示;When the accidental touch prevention mode is activated, a prompt is outputted to prompt the user that the accidental touch prevention mode has been activated; 在解除防误触模式的同时输出用于提示用户所述防误触模式已解除的提示。When the accidental touch prevention mode is canceled, a prompt is outputted to prompt the user that the accidental touch prevention mode has been canceled. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the method further comprises: 在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又检测到所述触摸部被触摸的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上于所述显示模组的周围成像移动提示内容。When it is detected that the display module is stationary on the lens and the touch portion is touched, the display module is controlled to form an image of moving prompt content around the display module on the lens. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the method further comprises: 在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又检测到所述触摸部被按照目标触摸模式触摸的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,或控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述目标触摸模式被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件或被预置为所述第三逻辑功能的子功能的触发条件。When it is monitored that the display module is stationary on the lens and the touch portion is detected to be touched according to the target touch mode, the display module is controlled to image the graphic interface of the target logical function on the lens, or the display module is controlled to update the target area in the third graphic interface currently imaged on the lens; the third graphic interface is the graphic interface of the third logical function, the third logical function is the logical function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is the graphic area corresponding to the sub-function in the third logical function; the target touch mode is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logical function or is preset as a trigger condition for a sub-function of the third logical function. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises: 获取多媒体数据;Acquiring multimedia data; 在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又从所述多媒体数据中识别到目标指令的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,或控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述目标指令被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件或被预置为第三逻辑功能的子功能的触发条件。When it is monitored that the display module is stationary on the lens and a target instruction is identified from the multimedia data, the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens, or the display module is controlled to update a target area in a third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens; the third graphical interface is a graphical interface of a third logical function, the third logical function is a logical function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is a graphical area corresponding to a sub-function in the third logical function; the target instruction is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logical function or is preset as a trigger condition for a sub-function of the third logical function. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises: 获取眼球追踪数据; Obtain eye tracking data; 在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的情况下又从所述眼球追踪数据中识别到目标眼动模式的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,或控制所述显示模组对当前在所述镜片上成像出的第三图形界面中目标区域进行更新;所述第三图形界面是第三逻辑功能的图形界面,所述第三逻辑功能是当前在前台运行的逻辑功能,所述目标区域是所述第三逻辑功能中的子功能对应的图形区域;所述目标眼动模式被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件或被预置为第三逻辑功能的子功能的触发条件。When it is monitored that the display module is stationary on the lens and a target eye movement pattern is identified from the eye tracking data, the display module is controlled to image a graphical interface of the target logical function on the lens, or the display module is controlled to update a target area in a third graphical interface currently imaged on the lens; the third graphical interface is a graphical interface of a third logical function, the third logical function is a logical function currently running in the foreground, and the target area is a graphical area corresponding to a sub-function in the third logical function; the target eye movement pattern is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logical function or is preset as a trigger condition for a sub-function of the third logical function. 根据权利要求1所述在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面,包括:According to claim 1, when the target motion state is detected, controlling the display module to image the graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens comprises: 在所述镜片上的预设成像区内监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述目标逻辑功能的图形界面;When a target motion state is detected in a preset imaging area on the lens, controlling the display module to image a graphical interface of the target logic function on the lens; 所述方法还包括:The method further comprises: 在监测到所述显示模组移动至所述预设成像区外的情况下,启动低功耗模式。When it is detected that the display module moves out of the preset imaging area, a low power consumption mode is started. 一种显示模组控制装置,其中,所述显示模组用于连接在眼镜的镜片上,以及用于在所连接的镜片上成像,所述控制装置包括:A display module control device, wherein the display module is used to be connected to the lens of glasses and used to form an image on the connected lens, and the control device comprises: 第一监测模块,用于监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;A first monitoring module, used for monitoring the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected; 第一控制模块,用于在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面;所述目标运动状态被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件。The first control module is used to control the display module to image a graphical interface of a target logic function on the lens when a target motion state is detected; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function. 根据权利要求16所述的控制装置,其中,所述目标运动状态包括:所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第一逻辑功能;所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件被预置为触发所述第一逻辑功能的触发条件;所述第一控制模块,包括:The control device according to claim 16, wherein the target motion state comprises: the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition; the target logical function comprises: a first logical function; the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies the first preset condition and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the first logical function; the first control module comprises: 第一控制子模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组在所述镜片上的移动满足第一预设条件的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述第一逻辑功能的第一图形界面。The first control submodule is configured to control the display module to image a first graphic interface of the first logical function on the lens when it is detected that the movement of the display module on the lens satisfies a first preset condition. 根据权利要求17所述的控制装置,其中,所述第一预设条件是以下之一:The control device according to claim 17, wherein the first preset condition is one of the following: 所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length; 所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度,且所述移动的位移方向是预设的第一方向;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, and the displacement direction of the movement is a preset first direction; 所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度,且所述移动的起点是预设的第一位置,所述第一位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, and the starting point of the movement is a preset first position, which is a fixed position selected on the lens; 所述移动的位移距离不小于预设的第一阈值长度,且所述移动的位移方向是预设的第一方向,且所述移动的起点是所述第一位置;The displacement distance of the movement is not less than a preset first threshold length, the displacement direction of the movement is a preset first direction, and the starting point of the movement is the first position; 所述移动的终点是预设的第二位置,所述第二位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;The end point of the movement is a preset second position, and the second position is a fixed position selected on the lens; 所述移动的轨迹与预设轨迹的形状相似度不小于预设的第一阈值。The shape similarity between the moving trajectory and the preset trajectory is not less than a preset first threshold. 根据权利要求16所述的控制装置,其中,所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处,所述第三位置是在所述镜片上选定的固定位置;所述目标逻辑功能包括:第二逻辑功能;所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处被预置为触发所述第二逻辑功能的触发条件;所述第一控制模块52,包括:The control device according to claim 16, wherein the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens, and the third position is a fixed position selected on the lens; the target logical function includes: a second logical function; the display module is stationary at the third position on the lens and is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the second logical function; the first control module 52 includes: 第二控制子模块,用于在监测到所述显示模组静止于所述镜片上的第三位置处的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像所述第二逻辑功能的第二图形界面。The second control submodule is used for controlling the display module to image a second graphic interface of the second logic function on the lens when it is detected that the display module is stationary at a third position on the lens. 一种近眼显示装置,其中,所述近眼显示装置包括:处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现一种显示模组的控制方法,所 述方法包括:A near-eye display device, wherein the near-eye display device comprises: a processor and a memory, wherein the memory stores a program or instruction that can be run on the processor, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, a control method of a display module is implemented. The methods include: 监测所述显示模组在当前所连接的镜片上的运动状态;Monitoring the motion state of the display module on the lens currently connected; 在监测到目标运动状态的情况下,控制所述显示模组在所述镜片上成像目标逻辑功能的图形界面;所述目标运动状态被预置为触发所述目标逻辑功能的触发条件。 When the target motion state is detected, the display module is controlled to form a graphic interface of the target logic function on the lens; the target motion state is preset as a trigger condition for triggering the target logic function.
PCT/CN2024/131310 2023-11-17 2024-11-11 Display module control method, display module control device and near-eye display device Pending WO2025103267A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (14)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202311548069.3 2023-11-17
CN202311548069.3A CN120294978A (en) 2023-11-17 2023-11-17 Near-eye display components and devices
CN202311580966.2A CN120065519A (en) 2023-11-22 2023-11-22 Optical module, near-eye display device and optical module processing method
CN202311580966.2 2023-11-22
CN202311733535.5 2023-12-15
CN202311733535.5A CN120196200A (en) 2023-12-15 2023-12-15 Display module control method, near-eye display device, electronic device and medium
CN202311868066.8 2023-12-29
CN202311867956.7A CN120276154A (en) 2023-12-29 2023-12-29 Control method of display module and near-to-eye display device
CN202311867956.7 2023-12-29
CN202311868066.8A CN120276155A (en) 2023-12-29 2023-12-29 Control method of display module and near-to-eye display device
CN202420119731.7U CN222232785U (en) 2024-01-17 2024-01-17 Near-eye display device and charging box
CN202420119731.7 2024-01-17
CN202410544067.5A CN120908999A (en) 2024-04-30 2024-04-30 Near-eye display device, control method and near-eye display system
CN202410544067.5 2024-04-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025103267A1 true WO2025103267A1 (en) 2025-05-22

Family

ID=95742012

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2024/131310 Pending WO2025103267A1 (en) 2023-11-17 2024-11-11 Display module control method, display module control device and near-eye display device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025103267A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104615237A (en) * 2013-11-05 2015-05-13 精工爱普生株式会社 Image display system, method of controlling image display system, and head-mount type display device
US20160216792A1 (en) * 2015-01-26 2016-07-28 Seiko Epson Corporation Head mounted display, and control method and control program for head mounted display
US20170212669A1 (en) * 2016-01-26 2017-07-27 Adobe Systems Incorporated Input techniques for virtual reality headset devices with front touch screens
US10962809B1 (en) * 2018-01-10 2021-03-30 Snap Inc. Eyewear device with finger activated touch sensor
CN116724285A (en) * 2020-12-29 2023-09-08 美国斯耐普公司 Micro-gestures for controlling virtual and graphical elements
CN118974688A (en) * 2022-04-08 2024-11-15 元平台技术有限公司 Triggering field transitions for artificial reality objects

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104615237A (en) * 2013-11-05 2015-05-13 精工爱普生株式会社 Image display system, method of controlling image display system, and head-mount type display device
US20160216792A1 (en) * 2015-01-26 2016-07-28 Seiko Epson Corporation Head mounted display, and control method and control program for head mounted display
US20170212669A1 (en) * 2016-01-26 2017-07-27 Adobe Systems Incorporated Input techniques for virtual reality headset devices with front touch screens
US10962809B1 (en) * 2018-01-10 2021-03-30 Snap Inc. Eyewear device with finger activated touch sensor
CN116724285A (en) * 2020-12-29 2023-09-08 美国斯耐普公司 Micro-gestures for controlling virtual and graphical elements
CN118974688A (en) * 2022-04-08 2024-11-15 元平台技术有限公司 Triggering field transitions for artificial reality objects

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10983593B2 (en) Wearable glasses and method of displaying image via the wearable glasses
US20240103678A1 (en) Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with extended reality experiences
CN112114429B (en) User-based context sensitive hologram response
JP6277673B2 (en) Head-mounted display device and method for controlling head-mounted display device
KR20150093054A (en) Electronic device including flexible display and operation method thereof
KR102218207B1 (en) Smart glasses capable of processing virtual objects
CN106919262A (en) Augmented reality equipment
KR102218210B1 (en) Smart glasses capable of processing virtual objects
JP6303274B2 (en) Head-mounted display device and method for controlling head-mounted display device
CN110398840A (en) Method, head mounted device and storage medium for adjusting optical center distance
WO2020238462A1 (en) Control method, wearable device, and storage medium
KR20180029772A (en) Electronic apparatus comprising flexible display
CN110275620B (en) Interaction method, interaction device, head-mounted equipment and storage medium
KR20240028262A (en) Wearable electronic device for controlling camera module and method for operating thereof
WO2025103267A1 (en) Display module control method, display module control device and near-eye display device
KR20240112752A (en) Wearable device for changing user interface for interaction based on external object and method thereof
US9680976B2 (en) Electronic device
EP4636544A1 (en) Wearable device for changing ui for interaction on basis of external object, and method therefor
KR20220163740A (en) Wearable electronic device
KR20220162956A (en) Electronic device for supporting various communication during video call and operating method thereof
JP7080448B1 (en) Terminal device
US20250173977A1 (en) Wearable device for providing virtual object guiding shooting of image or video and method thereof
TW201445366A (en) Gesture recognition system and glasses with gesture recognition function
KR20240114658A (en) Wearable device for scrolling media content based on at least one of direction of gaze or gesture and method thereof
KR20240140731A (en) Wearable electronic device for supporting low power touch and operating method thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24890623

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1